2-67 ARMOR

IRON DUKES

B R A V O C O M P A N Y
2 -6 7 A R M O R B A T T A L I O N

B A T T L E C A T
T A C S O P

22

JUNE, 1996
1
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ANNEX A -- OPERATIONS AND MANEUVER........................................8
APPENDIX 1. MOVEMENT FORMATIONS.....................................12
A. Platoon formations: .......................................................................12
B. Company formations.....................................................................15
C. Change of Formation Battle Drills:...............................................22
APPENDIX 2. COMPANY BATTLE DRILLS......................................32
A. Contact Drill..................................................................................33
B. Action Left or Right.......................................................................34
C. Hasty Attack (Punch Drill).............................................................36
D. Defile Drills (Platoon)....................................................................39
E. Flying Defile Drill..........................................................................40
F. Short Defile Drill............................................................................40
G. Defile Drill (Long).........................................................................43
H. Air Attack Drill..............................................................................46
I. Indirect Fires Drill...........................................................................47
J. Blind Turn Drill..............................................................................49
K. Hasty Obstacle Breach Drill..........................................................49
L. Defile Breaching Drill....................................................................51
M. ATGM Drill..................................................................................54
N. Movement in Built Up Areas.........................................................56
O. Company Trap Drill.......................................................................58
APPENDIX 3. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS.........................................60
A. Conduct of the Assault...................................................................74
B. Breaching Drill...............................................................................78
APPENDIX 4. DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS.........................................89
A. The Defensive Sequence................................................................96
B. Engagement Area Development....................................................99
C. Occupation of a Battle Position....................................................104
D. Company Fire Plans.....................................................................108
E. Security of the Company Area......................................................113
F. Counterreconnaissance.................................................................119
G. Company Trap Operation............................................................133
APPENDIX 5. RECONNAISSANCE..................................................136
A. Dismounted Reconnaissance Patrol.............................................136
B. Leaders Reconnaissance...............................................................137
C. Forward Recon Detachment.........................................................139
D. Route Reconnaissance..................................................................141
APPENDIX 6. TACTICAL ROAD MARCH......................................142
APPENDIX 7. QUARTERING PARTY...............................................148
APPENDIX 8. ASSEMBLY AREA ACTIVITIES...............................155

2
 A. Movement to the TAA.................................................................155
B. Occupation....................................................................................155
C. Mounted Occupation....................................................................155
D. Position Markings........................................................................157
E. Priorities of Work.........................................................................157
F. Site Check.....................................................................................157
G. Company CP................................................................................158
H. TAA Security................................................................................159
I. Observation Post Activities...........................................................160
J. Standards in the TAA....................................................................161
K. Stand-To Procedures....................................................................161
L. OPSEC in the TAA.......................................................................162
M. Occupation of Assembly Area Checklist....................................163
APPENDIX 9. OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS...........................164
A. Relief in Place..............................................................................164
B. River Crossings............................................................................167
C. Passage of Lines...........................................................................169
D. Consolidation and Reorganization..............................................175
E. Battalion/Company Reserve.........................................................177
APPENDIX 10. DIRECT FIRE PLANNING......................................180
ANNEX B -- COMBAT SUPPORT...........................................................207
APPENDIX 1. FIRE SUPPORT OPERATIONS..................................207
APPENDIX 2. ARTILLERY TRIGGERS FOR MOVING TARGETS
................................................................................................................210
APPENDIX 3. COMBAT AIR SUPPORT..........................................212
APPENDIX 4. ENGINEER .................................................................213
APPENDIX 5. AIR DEFENSE.............................................................220
APPENDIX 6. TANK/INFANTRY OPERATIONS.............................223
ANNEX C -- COMBAT SERVICE AND SUPPORT................................225
APPENDIX 1. SUPPLY........................................................................225
APPENDIX 2. TACTICAL HOT REFUEL.........................................230
APPENDIX 3. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND RECOVERY......231
APPENDIX 4. PERSONNEL...............................................................233
A. General.........................................................................................233
B. Medical Evacuation and Reporting..............................................233
C. KIA Evacuation/Reporting...........................................................235
APPENDIX 5. RAILHEAD OPERATIONS........................................238
ANNEX D -- COMMAND AND CONTROL..........................................245
APPENDIX 1. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURES...........................253
APPENDIX 2. THE ORDERS PROCESS...........................................254
A. OPORD Reproduction..................................................................255
B. Orders Issue..................................................................................256

3
 C. Order Formats..............................................................................262
APPENDIX 3. REHEARSALS............................................................305
APPENDIX 4. ACTIONS AT CONTACT POINT -COORDINATION
WITH ADJACENT UNITS...................................................................309
APPENDIX 5. ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENTS/CROSS
ATTACHMENT.....................................................................................310
APPENDIX 6. AFTER ACTION REVIEWS.......................................311
ANNEX E -- TACTICAL CHECKLISTS.................................................312
APPENDIX 1. PACKING LIST (FOR DEPLOYMENT)...................312
APPENDIX 2. PRE-COMBAT INSPECTIONS..................................316
APPENDIX 3. LEADER CHECKS.....................................................321
APPENDIX 4. BREAK IN ACTION CHECKLIST............................323
APPENDIX 5. COMBAT AMMO RESUPPLY...................................324
APPENDIX 6. ABANDONING/DESTRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT 325
APPENDIX 7. ACTIONS ON BEING HIT.........................................327
APPENDIX 8. RECOVERY ................................................................330
APPENDIX 9. M1A1 MILES BORESIGHT.......................................334
APPENDIX 10. SAFETY/RISK ANALYSIS......................................337
APPENDIX 11. LAW OF WAR............................................................340
ANNEX F -- OPERATIONAL SECURITY..............................................342
APPENDIX 1. OPERATIONAL SECURITY......................................342
APPENDIX 2. PRIORITY INTELLIGENCE REQUIREMENTS......342
APPENDIX 3. READINESS CONDITION (REDCON)....................343
APPENDIX 4. ALERT /ROLLOUT PROCEDURES..........................344
APPENDIX 5. OBSERVATION POST ACTIVITIES.........................346
ANNEX G -- STABILITY OPERATIONS................................................348
APPENDIX 1. LODGMENT AREAS..................................................349
APPENDIX 2. PATROLS.....................................................................350
APPENDIX 3. CONVOY ESCORT.....................................................355
APPENDIX 4. CHECKPOINT OPERATIONS...................................368
APPENDIX 5. OBSERVATION POST OPERATIONS.......................381
APPENDIX 6. SECURE A BUILT-UP AREA - PERSONNEL
SEARCHES............................................................................................386
A. Rules of Engagement (ROE) (sample).......................................392
B. Crater Analysis and Shell Reports...............................................395
C. Actions in a Mine Field................................................................397
D. React to Media.............................................................................398
ANNEX H -- NBC OPERATIONS............................................................400
ANNEX I -- OPERATIONS UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS..........409
APPENDIX 1. URBAN OPERATIONS...............................................409
APPENDIX 2. COMBAT IN FORESTS..............................................422
APPENDIX 3. COMBAT IN MOUNTAINS.......................................429

4
ANNEX J -- LIMITED VISIBILITY/NIGHT OPERATIONS.................430
APPENDIX 1. GENERAL NIGHT OPERATIONS TECHNIQUES...430
APPENDIX 2. NIGHT ATTACKS.......................................................434
APPENDIX 3. NIGHT DEFENSE.......................................................440
APPENDIX 4. NIGHT ROADMARCH...............................................444
APPENDIX 5. NIGHT OCCUPATION OF A TAA.............................447
ANNEX K -- SIGNAL ..............................................................................450
APPENDIX 1. REPORTS ....................................................................450
APPENDIX 2. FIXED CALLSIGNS ..................................................456
APPENDIX 3. BREVITY CODES....................................................458
APPENDIX 4. FLAGS AND OTHER VISUAL SIGNALS................460

5
 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
BRAVO COMPANY, 2ND BATTALION, 67TH ARMOR
UNIT 21103 APO AE 09074

AETV-THN-B-B JUNE, 1996

MEMORANDUM FOR ALL ASSIGNED AND ATTACHED PERSONNEL

SUBJECT: Battlecat Tactical Standard Operating Procedures (TACSOP)

PURPOSE: This SOP standardizes routine, recurring Operational, Combat

Support, and Combat Service Support procedures within Bravo Company, 2-67
Armor. The provisions of this SOP provide a standardized means of conducting
tactical operations for all personnel, assigned or attached, unless modified by
verbal and/or written order. This SOP is based on current U.S. Army doctrine,
along with current tactical procedures as used habitually by B/2-67.

CONFORMITY: All assigned, attached, and operational controlled (OPCON)

personnel will be familiar with and comply with the provisions of this SOP.

CHANGES: Recommended changes to this SOP will be addressed to the

commander. Approved changes will be published and distributed to all personnel.
This document is prepared using MS WORD.

ADDITIONAL REFERENCES: This SOP is intended to be used with the TF SOP,

not instead of it. Certain Graphic Training Aids are to be used with this SOP. A list
is provided in ANNEX E.

DISTRIBUTION: This SOP will be issued to and maintained by all assigned and
attached personnel of the Bravo Company Team.

J.S. CUNNINGHAM
CPT, AR
COMMANDING

6
 Mission
The mission of this company is to meet this
country’s enemies on the field of battle and defeat
them, as violently as necessary, and as quickly as
possible.
If you have any questions report immediately to
your NCO

7
 ANNEX A --OPERATIONS AND
MANEUVER
The company will generally move as a unified formation during combat, as
a part of the Battalion-Task Force. The missions given to the company reflect the
capabilities inherent in the organization. The key to wartime survival is efficient
peacetime training. This training will focus on proficiency at gunnery skills, and
battle drills. The Company must be proficient at actions on contact, basic combat
formation drills, change of formation drills, and rapid deploying and returning fire
upon making contact . Company maneuver requires the mastery of formations,
movement techniques, and battle drills. The company must be able to transition
rapidly and smoothly between formations and battle drills to allow the security of
movement, and the massing of fires. Battle drills are semi-automatic responses to
tactical situations that build speed and coordination into maneuver. Battle drills at
the Company level include: Actions on Contact, Hasty Attack, Hasty Breach,
Movement Drills, Hasty Defense, React to Artillery, and React to Air Attack. These
drills are contained in the various Appendices of this Annex. The company must be
also proficient in the use of its weapons and combat support elements such as
artillery, engineers, and air defense.
The goal of maneuver is to destroy the enemies ability to resist by
destruction, fear, and mainly creating the perception that fighting on would mean a
futile death in an overwhelming and hopeless situation. Victory can usually be
attained prior to the complete destruction of the enemy. The motto of “Close with
and destroy the enemy” is a poor guide to Armored operations as it implies
focusing the main effort on the enemy’s main force. To be effective the tanks must
search out and strike at the weak points, bypass the strength, and move deeply into
the enemy’s rear areas to destroy the logistic, and support elements that are not
expecting or are unprepared for a tank attack. By creating chaos in the enemy rear
the main forces and defense at the front will collapse by itself.

The following are the basic maneuver principles used during mounted armored
combat operations :

- Recon, Recon, and Rehearse

- Fight to move, don’t move to fight. Keep freedom of maneuver
- Mass your firepower. Hit with a fist, don’t poke with the fingers
- Push through the weak spots, avoid strength

8
 - Fight the terrain, not the enemy
- No movement conducted without some type of overwatch in open areas
- Always create a reserve (out of contact) while in combat

- Create a main effort through:

Maneuver of forces
Concentration of fires
Formations of movement
Committing reserve
- Focus the main effort at the point most likely to bring success, not at the
point most likely to prevent failure.
- Company secures itself from every location, and during all movement, at
all times.
- Plan for and expect casualties
- Use a simple plan and be flexible. Plan the fight, don’t fight the plan.
Change the plan if necessary
- Expect confusion, and create it for the enemy.
- Strike at a portion of his force with all of yours. Divide and Conquer
- In the absence of orders, Act. Follow the commanders intent

- Cautious and deliberate movement usually helps avoid unpleasant

surprises, but results in a slow, predictable advance, and as such is not suited to
armor operations. Speed is usually better than armor. The Company must arrive
earlier at the decisive point than the enemy expects or fears. Only the bold have
luck. Never halt because an adjacent unit is stuck. If you push on you will release
the pressure on the adjacent unit by turning the enemy’s flank, and he will be
forced to retreat. Mass forces quickly and exploit. Never let the enemy relax.
Sacrifice perfect synchronization for tempo and speed of execution.

- Be flexible, never stick to a plan in spite of the situation. Flow like a

river along the path of least resistance. Focus your strength against enemy
weakness, and ruthlessly exploit any advantage you attain.

- When presented with a highly advantageous

situation, exploit it immediately, then notify
higher what you have done. Don’t call and ask for
permission. Always follow the Commanders Intent,
even if it means deviating from the Concept of the

9
Operation or Scheme of Maneuver. Notify higher
headquarters what you have done to keep them
informed, but don’t sit around and wait for
permission. The goal is to achieve the desired effect
on the enemy, not to precisely execute the plan.
-Maintain Situational Awareness (Turret SA and Tactical SA). Always be
aware of what is happening a) in your 360 degree proximity (through use of your
eyes), and b) with adjacent units, minefields, enemy situation, etc…

- Don’t use the expected terrain. Approach from an unexpected direction.

Fight the terrain, not the enemy. Use your mobility to concentrate forces at the
decisive place and time. Do Not attack with tanks and infantry at separate places
and times.

- Ruthlessly recon the terrain and enemy positions, even while in contact.
You can never know enough about the enemy situation

- In a movement to contact commit all forces as soon as they arrive. Don’t

hold units out of action as a reserve. Pull units out of contact to form the reserve,
then shift them to the point where success is most likely. Form a main effort, then
strike like a sledgehammer, not a series of small hits.

- Counterattack immediately against a moving enemy or one consolidating

on his objective. Never use the reserve head on as in an infantry charge. Use your
maneuverability to hit him from the flanks or rear, then strike to destroy, not repel.
Use the reserve to counterattack at the point of most likely success, not at the point
of impending failure. When the reserve is committed begin constituting a new one
immediately

. - Once you gain an advantage over the enemy never relax pressure.
Ruthlessly pursue him once you have your sword in his back. Do not stop to
reorganize, keep advancing. The critical advantage in maintaining the tempo of the
attack is that the harder the enemy is pressed, the greater becomes our advantage.
This effect increases completely out of proportion to the forces involved, and gets
to the point where numbers don’t count. This effect, once in motion, only ends
when the attacker outruns his logistical resources. Once the advantage is gained the
attacking force must be driven to and beyond the limits of endurance, as the enemy
is not only disorganized, he is frightened, confused, and it is only a matter of time

10
before he retreats in panic. This results in not just a defeat for the enemy, but a
rout, and complete collapse.

- Don’t bring a knife to a gunfight. Never fight fair, fight to win and finish
quickly. Don’t fight just to win, fight to beat him so badly that he doesn’t know
what the hell just happened to him. Beat him so bad that you embarrass him.

-Use combined arms. This is not all arms

employed to the same purpose, it is separate arms
exploiting their strength to compensate for other
arms weaknesses ie. Obstacles to drive the enemy
into the open where tanks can shoot them, while
artillery targets the low ground that they could
otherwise move through to outflank you. Create a
dilem for the enemy so that when he does
something to escape the effect of one weapon, he
exposes himself to another. He will have no way
out.

11
 APPENDIX 1. MOVEMENT FORMATIONS

The company maneuvers as part of the battalion using numerous formations and
techniques. The formations used are chosen based on speed of movement, security,
firepower to chosen directions, and the flexibility the allow in uncertain situations.
Formations are never a substitute for good use of terrain. All formations are
variations of the column or line. The company transitions between formations by
shifting platoon positions and orientations. The platoon positions in company
formations are standardized, although the platoon that holds these positions will
change due to the situation, combat losses, or cross attachment. Platoons need to be
familiar with the basic movement of all the platoon elements in each formation so
that they can take up other positions in the formation rapidly without confusion or
delay. Individual vehicle commanders must also be familiar with their positions in
the formations, as well as the orientation of weapons to ensure the company
maintains 360 degree security.

The most commonly used formations are the march column, wedge, “V”,
and line. The wedge and “V” formations are variations of the line. Platoon columns
in these formations may sometimes be used to speed movement, while at the same
time having the company 90% deployed in the desired battle formation, the only
movement needed being platoons shifting into platoon lines, wedges or “V’s” as
necessary. Company and platoon columns are often used at night to make
navigation and orientation easier.

A. Platoon formations:
The following are the standard platoon formations that will be used also
when moving as part of a company formation

1. Column: This is a standard formation that allows rapid

movement and a degree of flexibility. It is normally used when enemy contact is
not expected and speed is important. This formation may be used as part of the
Company formations to increase the speed of movement, for example Platoon
Columns in a Company Wedge. This formation provides little concentration of
firepower, but at the platoon level provides adequate security as each tank orients
to one of the sides. A standard variation of this formation is the staggered column,
which provides better firepower to the front, as well as better dispersion.

12
 2.
Line:

TANK PLATOON LINE

- USED DURING ASSAULTS
- MAXIMUM FIREPOWER TO FRONT
- DIFFICULT TO CONTROL, INFLEXIBLE

TANK PLATOON COLUMN

PLATOON “L”
- VARIATIONOF PLT LINE, GIVES
SOME SECURITY TO ONE SIDE

3. Wedge:

TA
TANK PLATOON WEDGE

- USED WHEN ENEMY CONTACT IS LIKELY

- USED TO INITIATE PENETRATION
- FAST MOVEMENT
- GOOD FIREPOWER TO FRONT, FLANKS
13
- ALL TANKS KEY MOVEMENT TO LEAD VEHICLE
- GOOD FOR THREE VEHICLE PLATOONS
 4. “V”:

PLATOON “V”
- USED WHEN SITUATION UNCERTAIN
- EXCELLENT GENERAL PURPOSE FORMATION
- VERY FLEXIBLE AND RESPONSIVE
- GOOD C2, LEADERS IN OVERWATCH
- GOOD ALL ROUND FIREPOWER
- GOOD FORMATION FOR THREE TANK PLATOONS

5. Echelon:

ECHELON
- FIRES WEIGHTED TO FRONT AND FLANK
- CAN BE USED WHEN ONE FLANK COVERED BY
OTHER UNIT OR TERRAIN
- EASY TO CONTROL
- USED BY SIDE PLATOONS OF COMPANY WEDGE

14
 B. Company formations

1. Column: This formation utilizes a "ducks in a row" manner

of moving. It will be usually used during tactical road marches, or when the
company is an uncommitted part of the battalion formation. This is not a fighting
formation, and is used mainly for the speed and control it allows. The column
provides little security to the flanks or front, and its length can make it unwieldy.
It takes approximately six minutes for the trail platoon to move to the head of the
column. In some instances the company may move in a column, but the platoons
would move in wedges or “V”s. The company may also move in one of the line
variations such as “V”, or wedge, with platoons in column to allow the company
to be 90% deployed, but still maintain forward speed The habitual company
slice is not included in this diagram, as they would normally be traveling one
terrain feature behind. Additional attachments will be inserted into positions
within the column depending on the tactical situation.

COMPANY COLUMN

For location of slice elements in column when Company conducts tactical

roadmarch see diagrams in APPENDIX 6 (Tactical Roadmarch), Annex A.
Gun tube orientation will be as follows: the lead vehicle orients from fender to
fender; following vehicles orient from vehicle in front's flank to the direct side,
alternating Left and Right along the line; the last combat vehicle orient over its
back deck, to protect the combat trains. 50 caliber machine guns will not be
elevated, loaders will be oriented to the rear with the 240 machine gun.

This formation will be used with modification in mountainous terrain and defiles.
The main consideration is to ensure that vehicles move under mutual support and
cover, and that all sectors of possible enemy positions are covered. This will often
involve the use of 50 cal as the main weapon oriented on targets above the main
gun max elevation.

15
b. Staggered Column (or Combat Column). Normally used in movement to
contact type missions. Support elements will normally follow one terrain feature
behind the company. Gun tube orientation will remain the same with the following
exceptions: the two lead tanks will orient across the front, and the two rear tanks
will orient to the rear.
COMPANY COMBAT COLUMN

B-66

B-65

FISTV

CO
TRAINS

16
 c. Company Line: The Company comes on line to block (defend),
overwatch or support by fire another company, or to assault an enemy position.
Firepower is maximized to the front to destroy the enemy. The Commander and
XO move behind the line to control the movement of the Company. The FIST-V
moves behind the line as necessary to remain survivable, and provide responsive
fires. Other attachments would also move behind the line. The trains will be
located one terrain feature back to provide rapid medical and maintenance
evacuation during the consolidation and reorganization phase. Gun tube orientation
will be directed forward or slightly to the flanks. Trains halt and prepare to bound
forward on order.

B-66 B-65

COMPANY LINE FORMATION

d. Wedge: The wedge formation allows the company to move forward

quickly, or to advance when the situation is vague. It also provides freedom of
action for the company to easily change into another formation or execute a battle
drill based on enemy contact. This formation will also be used to cross danger
areas. It gives good firepower to the front, and fair security to the flanks. The lead
platoon will be in a platoon wedge, the flank platoons will be in echelon right and
left respectively. The commander moves with the main effort, the XO where he
can most effectively contribute to the company movement. The FIST-V will move
in a position from which he can control fires and remain alive. The support

17
elements will trail, at least one terrain feature behind the rear-most tank. Gun tube
orientation will be adjusted to cover the front and flanks, the two most outside
vehicles have the responsibility for rear security.

COMPANY WEDGE
- STANDARD TACTICAL FORMATION, FLEXIBLE, GOOD SECURITY
- USED WHEN FLANKS MAY BE THREATENED OR SITUATION IS
UNCERTAIN
- PLATOONS MAY BE IN COLUMN, WEDGE OR ECHELON
FORMATIONS
- ENGINEERS TRAVEL BEHIND LEAD PLATOON, ACES, CEV, AVLB
MAY MOVE FARTHER BACK
- COMMANDER WITH MAIN EFFORT, XO WITH SECONDARY EFFORT
- TRAINS MOVE 1 MAJOR TERRAIN
COMPANY FEATURE BEHIND (OR 2-4 KM)
ARROWHEAD
- FISTV, ADA, OTHER SLICE ELEMENTS MOVE AS NECESSARY TO
SURVIVE AND ACCOMPLISH MISSIION
* COMBAT PATROL MAY PRECEEDE THE COMPANY FORMATION
(APPROX 2KM FORWARD)

e. Company
Arrowhead: The
B-66 Company
Arrowhead is
similar to a wedge,
and is often used in
FIST-V
semi open terrain,
especially when a
Forward Recon
Detachment (FRD)
SLICE
PLATOON
B-65

18

COMPANY TRAINS FOLLOW

TO THE REAR 2-4 KM BACK
is not being used. It will often be used during movement to contact type missions,
or in other situations where the enemy situation is not definite. This formation
gives good flexibility, and rapid reaction time, and works well for executing rapid
changes of formation, direction of advance, or the Company Punch drill. In the
Company Arrowhead the lead platoon forms a wedge, and provides firepower to
the front. The wing platoons remain in column on the flanks to give the formation
speed and flexibility. The Commander travels with, or immediately behind the lead
platoon, the XO travels with one of the wing platoons, or the trains. Slice platoons
(engineers) usually stay in column in the center, and a little to the rear of the
formation to allow them to flex to any necessary direction. The trains travel in the
center, and well to the rear. In a desert environment the trains would probably tuck
in closer into the Arrowhead for protection, and the formation would then translate
to a diamond shape. On contact the Company deploys rapidly based on the tactical
situation.

f. Company “V”: The “V” formation is often used during offensive movements
because it is easy to control, and is flexible by keeping one platoon to the rear
uncommitted. It’s general shape gives good firepower to the front, as well as some
security to the sides. This formation lends itself well to a company traveling
overwatch, and is also good for bounding as part of a battalion formation.
Bounding overwatch is also possible within the company from the “V”.

19
 COMPANY “V”
- FLEXIBLE FORMATION USED WHEN ENEMY SITUATION IS UNCERTAIN,
USUALLY IN OPEN TERRAIN
- STANDARD NIGHT MOVEMENT TECHNIQUE
- PLATOONS NORMALLY MOVE IN PLATOON WEDGES, OR ‘V’S
- FORMATION CAN EASILY BYPASS OBSTACLES ,CHANGE DIRECTION, OR
REACT TO FLANK THREATS
- ALLOWS ATTACKS FROM THE MARCH IN ANY DIRECTION
(SEE COMPANY PUNCH DRILL)
- TRAINS MOVE 1 MAJOR TERRAIN FEATURE BEHIND (OR 2-4 KM)
-GOOD FORMATION FOR PENETRATIONS. LEAD PLATOONS OPEN UP
BREACH, FOLLOW ON PLATOON MOVES THROUGH AND EXPLOITS

* COMBAT PATROL MAY PRECEEDE THE COMPANY FORMATION

(APPROX 2KM FORWARD)

g. Company Coil: This formation will be utilized in the Assembly Area

and Attack positions. The support elements will establish positions in the center of
the coil. The geometry of the coil is not as important as finding good terrain that
will still provide 360 degree security. Actual coils are usually far from circular. The
Company position in heavily wooded areas will often be cigar shaped

20
 MAINTENANCE
AND MEDICS

B-66

B-77 CP FIST-V

B-65

BATTLECAT STANDARD COIL

- PLATOONS TAKE UP POSITIONS ON PERIMETER
- HQ ELEMENT ESTABLISHES COMPANY CP IN CENTER
- TANK PLATOONS ORIENT ON MOST LIKELY MOUNTED
AVENUES OF APPROACH
- MECH PLT COVERS MOST LIKELY DISMOUNTED
AVENUE OF APPROACH
- ATTACHED ENGINEER PLATOON WOULD TAKE
PORTION OF PERIMETER ORIENTING ON DISMOUNTED
AVENUES OF APPROACH, WITH ACES AND AVLBS IN
CENTER OF COIL

21
 C. Change of Formation Battle Drills:
Rapid change of formation drills are critical to the Company deploying quickly
during combat, and must be understood to avoid chaos and confusion. For all
formation drills the clock method is used, where 12 o’clock is the direction of
travel, 9 o’clock to the left, 3 o’clock to the right, and 6 o’clock to the rear.

1. Company Column to Company coil: The Company will coil

when it transitions from a march column to a secure halt. This drill is often used in
occupying assembly areas, or if the Company goes into a halt in open areas. The
actual coil shape may be altered in detail based on the decisions of the Quartering
Party or the Commander. To initiate a company coil the Commander radios
“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE COIL, OUT”. Upon receiving this call
the lead platoon passes the 6 o-clock position, and takes up the best available
terrain in the 10-2 o-clock sector. The trailing platoons follow the lead platoon and
occupy their positions in the coil, with the middle platoon setting to orient
between 2-6
o’clock, and the 12
trail platoon
from 6-10 LEAD
PLT
o’clock. The
Company HQ CP
9 3
elements, and
MIDDLE
trains move to TRAIL PLT
the center of the PLT
coil and
establish the 6 COMPANY COLUMN
Company CP.
TO COMPANY COIL
2. LEAD PLT
Company Coil
B-66
to Company
Column: Before MIDDLE PLT
moving out of a
Company coil B-65
the Commander FISTV

designates a TRAIL PLT

22
direction of movement out of the coil (exit point), and an order of march. When the
Company moves from the coil to the march column the Commander orders:
”BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, UNCOIL, EXECUTE COLUMN, OUT”. Upon
receiving this order Platoons begin moving mounted to the designated exit point,
and take up their positions in the column as necessary. The lead platoon
automatically begins moving on the designated route, moving slowly at first to
allow the remainder of the Company to uncoil.
3. Company Column to Company Wedge: The Company
transitions from a column to a wedge or “V” when enemy contact is likely. The
Commander orders “BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE WEDGE, OUT”.
Upon receiving this command the lead platoon slows slightly, continuing on the
same axis, while transitioning to platoon wedge. The follow on platoons branch off
to the right (center platoon), and left (trail platoon), transition to platoon wedges,
echelon, or column formations, and take up their positions in the company wedge,
keying their movement off of the base platoon in the center. This basic order for
moving to the left or right for the center and trail platoons may be reversed based
on terrain or situation. The attached Bradley platoon would generally break to the
side that will provide the most cover, and possibility for use of dismounts. The
commander remains behind the lead platoon. The XO will generally travel with the
Bradley platoon to balance the formation. The FIST-V travels where it needs to in
order to provide responsive fires, while at the same time survive. Attachments
would generally take
up positions in the
wedge behind the
center platoon, so that
the final formation
may take on a
diamond shaped
appearance. The
company trains would
remain one major
terrain feature to the
rear. As soon as the
Company has gotten
into the wedge
PLATOON COLUMN TO WEDGE (OR “V” )DRILL
- EXECUTED REVERSE OF LINE TO COLUMN DRILL formation the base
- DONE WHEN MOVING OUT OF DEFILE OR BREACH
platoon picks up the
- DONE WHEN CONTACT BECOMES IMMINENT
- EXECUTED FOR “ACTION FRONT” DRILL original rate of
- CAN ALSO BE USED TO GO TO LINE FORMATION
movement.
- VEHICLE POSITIONS ARE STANDARDIZED

23
 COMPANY COLUMN TO COMPANY WEDGE

LEAD PLT

TRAIL PLT
MIDDLE PLT
B-66

FISTV

B-65

LEAD
PLT
B-66

MIDDLE PLT

B-65
FISTV

TRAIL PLT

24
4. Company Wedge to Company Column: This is done to pass through narrow
areas, obstacles, and secured defiles. It is done opposite the drill for column to
wedge, with the base (lead platoon) continuing to move, and the other platoons
falling back into the column as necessary. The command for this drill is:
:”BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE COLUMN, OUT”. The drill for
platoons is similar.

PLATOON LINE (OR WEDGE, “V”)

TO COLUMN DRILL
- EXECUTED WHEN CONTACT BECOMES
LESS LIKELY
- USED TO MOVE THROUGH DEFILE
- USED TO MOVE THROUGH A BREACH
- VEHICLE POSITIONS STANDARD IN LINE
- SAME DRILL USED FOR WEDGE TO LINE

25
 5. Company Column to Company “V”: The Commander orders
“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE “V”, OUT”. Upon receiving this order
the lead platoon slows its rate of march slightly, veers left, moves to platoon wedge
formation, takes its place as the left flank platoon of the “V”, and orients weapons
from 8-1 o-clock. The middle platoon will move to the right, assume a wedge
LEAD
formation, take up position as the right flank platoon, and orient weapons from 11-
4 o’clock. The trail platoon continues moving on the PLToriginal axis, transitions to
platoon wedge, and becomes the center platoon, orienting weapons from 9-3
B-66
o’clock. This basic order for moving to the left or right for the center and trail
platoons may be reversed based on terrain or situation. The attached Bradley
platoon would generally break to the side that will provide the most cover, and
possibility for use of dismounts. The commander remains
MIDDLEbehind
PLT the lead platoon.
The XO will generally travel with the Bradley platoon to balance the formation.
The FIST-V travels where it needs to in order to provide responsive fires, while at
B-65
the same time survive. Attachments will normally follow the center (trail) platoon.
FISTV
Trains remain 2-4 km or 1 terrain feature behind.

TRAIL PLT

LEAD PLT

MIDDLE PLT
B-66

TRAIL PLT
FISTV

COMPANY WEDGE TO COLUMN B-65

26
27
COMPANY COLUMN TO COMPANY “V”

LEAD PLT
MIDDLE PLT

B-66

FISTV
TRAIL PLT

B-65
LEAD PLT

MIDDLE PLT

LEAD PLT

B-66

MIDDLE PLT

B-65
FISTV

TRAIL PLT

28
 6. Company “V” to Company Column: This is done to pass through
narrow areas, obstacles, and secured defiles. It is done opposite the drill for column
to “V” with the center platoon slowing, but continuing to move, and the other
platoons falling into the column as necessary. The command for this drill is:

LEAD
PLT
B-66

MIDDLE PLT

B-65
FISTV

TRAIL PLT

LEAD PLT
MIDDLE PLT

B-66

B-65
TRAIL PLT

FISTV
COMPANY WEDGE TO COLUMN

”BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE COLUMN, OUT”.

29
 7. Company Wedge or “V” to Company Line: The Company
comes on line to block (defend), overwatch or support by fire another company, or
to assault an enemy position. Firepower is maximized to the front to destroy the
enemy. The Company moves to this formation with the following command:
“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE LINE, OUT”. Upon this command all
platoons move on line. In a “V” the trail platoon speeds up to come abreast of the
two flank platoons, while with a wedge the flank platoons speed up to come
abreast of the center platoon. The CO, XO, FIST-V move behind the line where
they can best control the tactical situation. Other attachments move behind the line
or stay back far enough so as not to interfere with the formation.

COMPANY WEDGE (OR “V”) TO COMPANY LINE

8. Bounding overwatch (from Company “V”) This is the basic movement

formation when enemy contact is likely. It allows the platoons to move as units, as
opposed to internal platoon bounding. B-66
It is critical for the overwatch
B-65 force to be
able to overwatch and bring fires on the5 areas where the enemy could engage the
FIST-V
moving unit, not just watch the actual movement of the moving element. The
overwatch force may have to shift it’s position in order to provide effective
overwatch. The overwatch element must notify the moving element when he can
no longer effectively overwatch his move.

WHITE
2 4
RED
6
B-66

3
FISTV
BLUE
1
B-65
BOUNDING OVERWATCH (FROM COMPANY “V”)
- USED WHEN ENEMY CONTACT IMMINENT
- LEAD PLATOON SETS BEFORE FOLLOW ON PLATONS MOVE
1. “WHITE THIS IS BATTLE 6, MOVE CHECK POINT 9, RED SET AND
COVER HIS MOVE”
2. ‘THIS IS RED 1, SET, OVER”
3. “THIS IS WHITE 1, MOVING”
4. “THIS IS WHITE 1, SET” 30
5. “THIS IS RED 1, MOVING”
6. “THIS IS BLUE 1, MOVING”
 APPENDIX 2. COMPANY BATTLE DRILLS
These are rehearsed drills designed to reduce the reaction time in critical
situations. They need to be rapid to allow the company to survive long enough to
maneuver. They are initiated with simple commands, although the actions
involved may be rather complex. Due to this these drills need to be practiced to
prevent confusion, chaos, and delay when they are executed. Battle drills will
always require adaptation of maneuver to terrain. The clock method is used for
orientation. The company direction of movement is always 12 o’clock. Battle drills
are applicable to all levels of units. The following battle drills must be understood
by all members of the company, and serve as a guide for tasks to practice during
rehearsals.
Platoons
Change formation while moving (APPENDIX 1)
Contact Drills
Action left/right
Coil/uncoil
Clear a Defile
Occupy A Battle Position (Deliberate or Hasty) (APPENDIX 4)
React to Air attack
Hasty Breach of Point Obstacle
React to NBC attack (ANNEX H)
React to artillery while mounted (while stationary and moving)
Move in a built up area
Blind corner drill
Evacuate wounded
Company
Change Formations (APPENDIX 1)
Execute Action Left/Right
Conduct Hasty Attack
Actions on the Objective
Disengage/Break Contact
Deliberate and Hasty Breach
Defile Drill , Defile Breach
Company Trap
React to ATGM, direct fire
React to Air Attack

31
 React to NBC Attack
React to Artillery while stationary and moving

A. Contact Drill
This drill is executed when the platoon comes in contact with an enemy force that
does not need to be immediately assaulted as in an action drill. Upon the command

ENEMY

PLATOON CONTACT DRILL

- IMMEDIATE RESPONSE TO THREAT FROM
FLANK
- ALL VEHICLES ORIENT ON TARGET
- MOVEMENT CONTINUES IN DIRECTION OF
TRAVEL
- USED AGAINST LOW LEVEL THREATS OR
WHEN VEHICLES NEED TO MOVE OUT OF
AREA QUICKLY
“RED THIS IS RED 1, CONTACT RIGHT”

32
“CONTACT RIGHT” (or left, front, rear) the entire unit orients its weapons in the
direction of the contact, and continues to move in the original direction. The
Contact Drill can be executed in any direction.

B. Action Left or Right

This drill is activated by enemy contact on the left or right of the Company or
platoon. A platoon or tank commander makes contact and reports to the
Commander / Platoon Leader using the clock method or cardinal compass
direction. The Platoon drill is normally initiated when the platoon has been
surprised from a flank, and must turn to face the threat with its heaviest armor, and
destroy it by assault. The company drill is done when the company has made
contact and there is little time to develop the situation, such as when in contact
with the FSE during a movement to contact. The action drill is called by the leader:
“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, ACTION RIGHT, OUT”. The key to this drill is
immediate suppressive fires by the base of fire platoons, and violent shock action
by the maneuvering platoon. In the platoon action drill the entire element turns and
assaults. For the company action drill the company will orient towards the contact,
but will not generally assault altogether. Thus, in action left, the two platoons not
in contact maneuver around the left flank of the platoon in contact. The platoon in
contact opens fire, deploys, and reports: “BATTLE, THIS IS BLUE, CONTACT
FRONT, ENGAGING, OUT”. The commander would then initiate the action drill:
“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, BLUE IN CONTACT AT 12 O’CLOCK, ACTION
RIGHT, OUT”. Attacking platoons should maneuver by covered and concealed
routes to the enemy’s flank. The FIST normally sets and calls for fires to support
the platoon in contact. The commander would normally move with the attacking
element, the XO to the base of fire element. In this example the platoons moves to
the side of the platoon in contact, come abreast, then assault into the flank of the
enemy that has been fixed by the suppressive fires of the lead platoon. Variations to
this basic drill include all elements maneuvering to a side, or just one of the
platoons, for example when the drill is called from a “V” formation. See also
Company and Platoon Punch Drill.
- Action front: This is normally a platoon level action drill, as it
takes the company a long time to come on line to execute this. During the action
front drill the platoon orients on the threat and assaults directly until the threat is
destroyed.
- Action Rear: This is similar to the action front drill except that
the threat is from the rear. During this drill all vehicles of the platoon turn around
immediately and assault the target to the rear.

33
 ENEMY

PLATOON ACTION DRILL

- IMMEDIATE RESONSE TO FLANK AMBUSH WHEN
MOVING IN COLUMN
- CAN BE EXECUTED LEFT, RIGHT, FRONT, BACK
- PUTS MAXIMUM FIRE ON ENEMY
- FACES FORWARD ARMOR TOWARDS ENEMY
-PLATOON CONDUCTS IMMEDIATE ASSAULT,
OVERRUNS ENEMY POSITION
“WHITE, THIS IS WHITE ONE, ACTION RIGHT”

34
 C. Hasty Attack (Punch Drill)
This drill is executed when the Company comes in contact with an enemy force and
decides to attack. The lead PLT sets a base of fire, the other PLTs and dismounts
conduct a movement to and attack from the flank. Artillery targets are shifted off of
the fixed force and on to suspected enemy locations during the assault. The flank
attack will normally be an assault by fire, but can be a mounted assault. The
assaulting tanks move firing coax at all suspected targets, and main gun at all
positively identified targets. Tanks will maximize use of HEAT ammo during the
assault to add to the shock effect. The Commander actively designates control
measures to reduce the risk of friendly fire casualties. This drill can be executed on
a smaller scale at platoon level.

35
PLATOON PUNCH DRILL

- USED TO FIX AND PUNCH LEFT OR RIGHT

- THE MOST BASIC ELEMENT OF FIRE AND MANEUVER
- ONE SECTION SUPRESSES WITH DIRECT FIRE
- OTHER SECTION BOUNDS TO ENEMY FLANK
- BOUNDING ELEMENT USES TERRAIN TO COVER MOVE

BASIC FRAGO

“RED, THIS IS RED 1. CONTACT FRONT, A SECTION SET,

B SECTION PUNCH RIGHT, OUT”

36
 6

ENEMY

COMPANY PUNCH

- LEAD ELEMENT OF COMPANY SETS, REMAINDER MOVES TO

FLANK TO BYPASS, ASSAULT OR ATTACK BY FIRE
- IF OBSTACLE IS TO BE BYPASSED, LEAD ELEMENT SETS AND
COVERS, THEN TAKES UP TRAIL, FORMATION IS RE-FORMED
WITH NEW LEAD PLATOON, MOVEMENT CONTINUES
- ENGINEERS MAY LAY IN HASTY VOLCANO MINEFIELDS
- TRAINS AUTOMATICALLY MOVE TO HIDE POSITIONS
FRAGO: “BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, ENEMY COLUMN IS
MOVING SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 59, VICINITY 3487. WE WILL SET
AND PUNCH RIGHT. RED, SET AND ESTABLISH BASE OF FIRE
VICINITY CHECKPOINT 9. WHITE, BLUE, BLITZ TO HIGH GROUND
FROM CHECKPOINT 9 EAST 1.6, NORTH 1.8. ATTACK BY FIRE,
WHITE ON THE RIGHT, BLUE ON THE LEFT. I’M MOVING WITH
BLUE. ACKNOWLEDGE, OVER”

37
 D. Defile Drills (Platoon)
The fundamental principle to this drill is bounding overwatch, and not becoming
packed into the defile with no room to maneuver. The Company Commander may
order a platoon to clear a defile for the Company, normally for short or very narrow
defiles. In this case the Commander holds the Company back, and the designated
platoon moves forward and clears the defile. Once the defile is clear the remainder
of the Company moves through. The platoon defile drill is similar to the Company
drill except that it is executed with individual vehicles. The platoon must be
capable of executing defile drills on its own. It will do this when operating
independently, or when moving as the lead platoon of the Company. In this case the
remainder of the Company remains dispersed outside of the defile and waits until
the lead platoon has cleared it.

PLATOON DEFILE DRILL

- USED TO MOVE THROUGH DEFILES OR NARROW AREAS
- LEAD ELEMENTS SET ENTRANCE OF DEFILE AS OVERWATCH
- OVERWATCH ORIENTS OPPOSITE SIDESOF DEFILE
- TRAIL ELEMENT MOVES THROUGH ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF
DEFILE, COVER EACH OTHERS MOVEMENT
- MOVING ELEMENT STOPS WHEN OVERWATCH CAN NO
LONGER COVER, TAKES UP OVERWATCH
-TRAIL ELEMENT BOUNDS FORWARD AND BECOMES MOVING
ELEMENT, OR TAKES UP OVERWATCH FARTHER FORWARD,
MOVEMENT CONTINUES
- LEAD TANKS SET AT FAR SIDE OF DEFILE, ESTABLISHES
OVERWATCH. TRAILTANKS MOVE, BOUNDS THROUGH
OVERWATCH, CONTINUES MOVEMENT OUT INTO OPEN
GROUND.

38
 E. Flying Defile Drill
If the company (or a platoon) is moving fast and does not have the chance to
conduct a deliberate defile drill the ‘Flying Defile Drill” is an option. This method
is used on the move and allows constant movement without stopping for clearing
operations. In this drill the unit calculates the time/distance factors necessary, and
calls in a Time on Target arty/mortar strike linearly along the defile as the tanks are
approaching it. As the fires impact movement continues up to the defile, with the
FSO (or OIC) ensuring that fires are checked just as the vehicles enter the danger
zone. The Tanks and vehicles move through and recon by fire as necessary. The
intent is not to clear the defile 100%, just suppress it long enough to move through
and onto the far side. This method requires prior planning and calculation of the
time distance factors, along with prior coordination with the Mortar Platoon /FSO
to ensure that indirect fires are available, the plan is understood, and the targets are
ready to be fired.

F. Short Defile Drill

This drill is used when the Company or platoon is moving and encounters a short
defile, one in which the overwatching fires from the entrance can cover the
movement of a bounding element along the entire length. The defile has to be wide
enough for the company to deploy to a limited extent. If the defile is very narrow it
will normally be cleared by a single platoon, with the remainder of the company
dispersed outside of the entrance waiting for it to be cleared. Upon arriving at the
defile the commander orders: “BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE SHORT
DEFILE, BLUE(lead platoon) SET BASE OF FIRE, RED LEAD THROUGH,
OUT”. Upon this command, the lead platoon becomes the base of fire. It positions
near the side of the defile, and sets overwatch. The platoon that bounds through the
defile orients to the front and sides as it moves, and reports set once it reaches the
far side, where it takes up overwatch. The following platoons negotiate the defile
one at a time. The Company resumes normal movement once the entire element is
through. NOTE: If time allows loaders will dismount to recon / clear the defile
first.

39
 COMPANY DEFILE DRILL
SHORT DEFILE (STEP 1)

4
1
LEAD PLT
2
LEFT PLT
RIGHT PLT
B-66

FISTV
B-65

“BATTLE THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE SHORT DEFILE DRILL, RED SET AND
PROVIDE BASE OF FIRE ON RIGHT OF DEFILE, WHITE BOUNDTHROUGH”
1 - LEAD PLT (RED) MOVES TO ENTRANCE OF DEFILE, SETS OVERWATCH
2 -BOUNDING PLT (WHITE) MOVES TO FAR SIDE OF DEFILE ONCE
OVERWATCH HAS SET. XO MOVES WITH BOUNDING ELEMENT
3 - BOUNDING PLT ESTABLISHES OVERWATCH ON FAR SIDE
4 - FOLLOW ON PLT MOVES TO ENTRANCE OF DEFILE OPPOSITE INITIAL
OVERWATCH ELEMENT

40
 COMPANY DEFILE DRILL
SHORT DEFILE (STEP 2)

1
2

1 - BOUNDING PLATOON SETS FAR SIDE OF DEFILE, TAKES UP

OVERWATCH
2 - LEAD PLATOON BEGINS MOVEMENT THROUGH DEFILE, TRAIL
PLATOON PROVIDES OVERWATCH IN DEFILE, TAKES UP ORIGINAL
POSITION IN COMPANY WEDGE
3 - ONCE LEAD PLATOON MOVES THROUGH, TRAIL PLATOON BOUNDS
THROUGH DEFILE, TAKES UP ORIGINAL POSITION IN COMPANY WEDGE
4 - MOVEMENT CONTINUES, XO SHIFTS BACK TO ORIGINAL POSITION IF
NECESSARY

41
 G. Defile Drill (Long)
This drill is performed when the defile is longer than the effective range of
overwatching weapons. This executed simply as a bounding overwatch at company
level. Upon arriving at the defile the commander orders: “BATTLE, THIS IS
BATTLE 6, EXECUTE LONG DEFILE, RED (forward platoon) SET BASE OF
FIRE, BLUE (trail platoon) PREPARE TO BOUND, OUT”. Upon receiving this
command, the lead platoon positions itself at the entrance to the defile, and
establishes a base of fire. The platoon calls when set, and the bounding platoon
begins movement. The third platoon (that is not overwatching or bounding)
automatically moves into an overwatch position also, opposite the base of fire
element. Once the bounding platoon nears the limit of effective overwatch it sets
and the base of fire platoon (or the third platoon ) bounds forward. The company
continues this bounding overwatch until the first platoon comes out of the defile. At
this point this platoon sets overwatch, and the remainder of the company bounds
forward, taking up their initial positions in the formation. Once all elements have
exited the defile movement will continue in one of the standard formations.
Platoons can also execute this long defile drill in a similar manner. If time allows
dismounts will normally clear the flanks of the defile. These will normally come
from the attached MECH Platoon, but may be constituted from tankers or
engineers if necessary. The following drill is for a mounted clearing of a defile.
The dismounted drill is similar except that the dismounts move down the sides of
the defiles to check for any ambushes, obstacles, of other enemy presence, and the
tanks remain to the rear, called forward when all is clear, or to support the forward
movement of the infantry as they clear the defile.

42
 LONG DEFILE DRILL (STEP 1)

1 LEAD PLT
RIGHT PLT
2
LEFT PLT
B-66

FISTV

B-65 3
“BATTLE THIS IS BATTLE 6, EXECUTE DEFILE DRILL, RED SET LEFT,
WHITE SET RIGHT TO OVERWATCH. BLUE PREPARE TO BOUND
THROUGH, I WILL MOVE WITH RED”
1- LEAD PLATOON TAKES UP OVERWATCH, REPORTS WHEN SET
2 - FLANK PLATOON TAKES UP OVERWATCH ON OPPOSITE SIDE
3 - XO MOVES AND LINKS UP WITH BOUNDING PLATOON

43
 COMPANY DEFILE DRILL, LONG DEFILE
(STEP 2)

B-66

LIMIT OF
1
OVERWATCH

4
2
B-65

2 3
4

B-66 FIST-V

“BLUE 1 THIS IS WHITE 1(OR RED 1), I CAN NO LONGER COVER

YOUR MOVE” “BATTLE 6 THIS IS BLUE 1 SET” “RED ONE
THIS IS BATTLE 6, BOUND FORWARD”
1- BOUNDING PLATOON STOPS WHEN IT CANNOT BE
OVERWATCHED ANY LONGER, TAKES UP ITS OWN OVERWATCH
2 - ORIGINAL OVERWATCH PLATOON BOUNDS FOREWARD, SETS
UP OVERWATCH AGAIN OR CONTINUES TO BOUND UNDER
OVERWATCH OF SET PLATOONS
3 - FIST-V MOVES TO LOCATION OF OVERWATCHING ELEMENT
4- OTHER PLATOON PROVIDES ADDITIONAL OVERWATCH, OR
REMAINS IN HIDE POSITION TO BOUND THROUGH ON ORDER

44
 H.COMPANY
Air Attack DEFILE
Drill DRILL, LONG DEFILE
(STEP 3) LEAD PLT

4
B-66

RIGHT PLT
FISTV
LEFT PLT
B-65

B-66
1

4
B-65
FIST-V
2
2

PHASE II BOUNDING CONTINUES UNTIL ONE PLATOON EXITS

DEFILE
1 - FIRST BOUNDING PLATOON TO REACH FAR SIDE OF DEFILE
SETS OVERWATCH
2 - FOLLOW ON PLATOONS MOVE THROUGH DEFILE, TAKE UP
ORIGINAL POSITIONS IN COMPANY FORMATION
3 - ONCE LAST PLATOON MOVES THROUGH, COMPANY
CONTINUES MOVEMENT FORWARD

45
This drill is used as an immediate action to air attack by high performance aircraft
when the company is in column formation. It minimizes the vulnerability to the
company by rapid dispersion. The clock method is used to alert the company to the
direction of attack. The first TC spotting the incoming aircraft alerts the company
over the radio: “FAST MOVERS, THREE O’CLOCK”. The Commander will
initiate the air attack drill by announcing “THIS IS BATTLE 6, DISPERSE, OUT”.
The lead platoon rapidly move off to one side of the route of march, the middle and
trail platoons to alternating sides in sequence. All platoons take cover, and fire
back if possible. Vehicles will not use smoke as it will make the pilot’s job of
spotting ground targets much easier. Once the air attack ends (unless consolidation
and reorganization must take place) the commander will announce “ THIS IS
BATTLE 6, REFORM, CONTINUE MISSION, OUT”. The elements will then
reform as soon as possible and continue to move. If there are numerous platoons in
the column the lead platoon will always attempt to move to the left, the next
platoon to the right, and so on until the element is dispersed. The main goal is to
rapidly disperse the Company. If two units bound to the same side do not attempt
to switch sides, disperse as best as the terrain allows.
COMPANY AIR ATTACK DRILL

I. I
ndirect
Fires
Drill
LEAD
If the Company
PLT
is hit with
indirect fires B-66

the following
drills will be
used: If the unit
MIDDLE
is stationary, in
PLT
relatively open
terrain B-65
(example: FISTV
overwatching
an obstacle) the TRAIL
square shift PLT
method will be
used. Upon

46
receiving incoming, the commander of the element under fire will announce:
“ARTILLERY DRILL, BOUND LEFT (or right, front, or rear depending on the
tactical situation)”. Upon receiving this command, the element automatically shifts
approximately 300 meters to the direction designated. For the next artillery drill
bound the unit will bound 300 meters in another direction 90 degrees from the
original so that after four bounds the element has completed a square. If the
company has been forced to stop in the open it will automatically execute the
artillery drill after several minutes, even if it is not receiving incoming fires. If the
company is moving in column formation, the portion of the column under fire will
continue to move, the portion of the column moving towards the fire will attempt to
shift to the left or right, continue movement on the same axis, then rejoin the
column at the first opportunity. If the situation or terrain does not permit it the
portion of the column moving towards the fire will either stop, or button up and
race through based on FRAGO issued by senior leader at the critical point. Trains
will not attempt to race through unless there is no other option.

BLIND CURVE DRILL

5
4
1
3

6
1 - LEAD TANK REPORTS “BLIND CORNER”
2 - PLATOON LEADER ORDERS ”BLIND CORNER DRILL”
3 - LEAD TANK MOVES TO EDGE OF CORNER WITHOUT EXPOSING TANK,
WINGMAN PULLS UP ALONGSIDE.
3 - TC OF LEAD TANK DISMOUNTS, RECONS ON FOOT AROUND CORNER
5 - IF GROUND APPEARS CLEAR BOTH TANKS ROUND CORNER AT SAME
TIME. INSIDE TANK GOES JUST FAR ENOUGH TO FIRE AROND CORNER AND
COVER OUTSIDE TANK AS IT MOVES TO FIRST SUITABLE FIRING POSITION.
6 - REAR TANKS MOVE INTO POSITIONS VACATED BY FRONT TANKS

47
 J. Blind Turn Drill
This drill is critical for movement in built up and restricted areas such as in forests
or in urban environments. As this is one of the basic movement drills it must be
understood by all, and executed with a minimum of radio talk or signaling.

K. Hasty Obstacle Breach Drill

This drill is performed when the company encounters an obstacle, and no bypass
can be found. If the lead platoon encounters a small or point obstacle, it will call
the Commander and advise him to halt the Company while the Platoon executes a
hasty breach. The Company will disperse, and the platoon clears the obstacle on its
own. The Platoon Leader reports when the route is clear, and the Company resumes
movement. In the event of a major obstacle once the lead platoon locates the
obstacle, it submits an obstacle report, and moves to a covered position to allow
observation of the obstacle. The Commander orders “BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE
6, EXECUTE HASTY BREACH, WHITE SUPPORT FORCE, BLUE ASSAULT
FORCE, RED BREACH FORCE. The Commander and FIST move to the support
force location, the FIST begins working obscuration for the breach, and fires on
suspected enemy locations. On order (when the support force is set and the smoke
has obscured the site from enemy observation) the breach force moves forward.
The Assault force remains hidden from view, and prepares to assault through the
breach. The breach force leads with a plow tank, followed by the roller. The breach
force clears and marks a lane, then sets on the far side. Once the lane is clear the
assault force (with the XO) rapidly moves through the breach, and on towards the
next terrain feature. The support force follows as quickly as possible, followed by
the breach force. Once the Company is through movement resumes as normal. For
more detailed coverage of breaching operation see ANNEX A, APPENDIX 3, TAB
B (OBSTACLE BREACHING).

Note: When Company is waiting on other unit to open a breach (an then to pass
through as an assault force) it will maintain wide dispersion. If it is in the open it
will do an “artillery dance” displacing in 500meter bounds in random directions
every 5-8 minutes to prevent artillery from being accurately called in on the
position

48
 COMPANY BREACH DRILL

5
2

3
4

LEAD PLT

LEFT PLT
B-66 RIGHT PLT

B-65 FISTV
1 - CDR DESIGNATES PLATOON TO OVERWATCH
2 - FIST CALLS IN SMOKE TO OBSCURE BREACHING SITE
3 - ASSAULT FORCE MOVES TO COVERED LOCATION
4 - BREACH FORCE MOVE FORWARD ONCE OVERWATCH IS
SET, BREACH SITE OBSCURRED. BREACHES AND MARKS
OBSTACLE, SETS SECURITY ON FAR SIDE.
5 - ASSAULT FORCE ASSAULTS THROUGH FOLLOWED BY
OVERWATCH ELEMENT

49
 L. Defile Breaching Drill
The defile breach is one of the most common, as well as difficult Battle Drills that
the Company may have to accomplish. The fundamental to success is rapid
breaching, effective suppressive fires, and not jamming too much equipment and
troops into the defile and obstacle site. Mass weapons effects, not weapons. When
an obstacle is encountered during the clearing of a defile the Company will stop
and disperse as far to the rear as possible. The leader on the scene will recommend
a course of action, and the Commander will give guidance. Normally 1-2 tanks
will move forward, along with dismounted infantry on the flanks, and an engineer
element. The tanks will establish overwatch, and provide direct fire suppression,
the infantry will secure the flanks and the far side, and the engineers will breach
the obstacle and clear the lane. The assault force remains hidden on the near side
of the breach, and preps to move through and continue the mission on the far side.
Once the obstacle is cleared the support force tanks will move through to secure
the far side, and the assault tanks, followed by the remainder of the Company will
move through. The assault force should be prepared to act on further obstacles in
the defile once it assaults. The Commander, or, on order, the leader of the tank at
the breach site acts as the breach traffic cop. The purpose of the traffic cop is to
bring the Company through in a rapid manner, without creating a traffic jam in the
defile. If follow on units of the battalion are to use the breach, the XO will stay
behind as the traffic cop, and will rejoin the Company as soon as possible. It is
critical to have a vehicle recovery plan, and be prepared to tow out vehicles that
become destroyed or damaged in the defile. See also ANNEX C, APPENDIX 2,
TAB B: BREACHING OPERATIONS for more detailed coverage of breaching
tasks.

50
 COMPANY DEFILE BREACH

2 2
B-66 B-65

FIST-V COMPANY DEFILE BREACH

1. COMPANY ENCOUNTERS DEFILE

2 2. COMPANY GOES TO SHORT HALT,

PLATOON SENT FORWARD TO CLEAR
ENGINEER PLATOON
DEFILE
3. PLATOON ENCOUNTERS OBSTACLE

51
 COMPANY DEFILE BREACH
(CONTINUED)

DEFILE BREACH (CONTINUED)

8 4. COMPANY DISPERSES
4
5. FORWARD TANKS TAKE UP OVERWATCH,
B-66 SUPPRESSES ENEMY NEAR OBSTACLE SITE
4 6. LIMITED BREACHING ASSETS SENT FORWARD
7. INFANTRY CLEARS FLANKS AND FAR SIDE
8. ASSAULT PLATOON PREPARES TO ASSAULT
FIST-V 9. RECOVERY ASSETS PREPARE TO CLEAR
9
DAMAGED / DESTROYED VEHICLES FROM
DEFILE

52
M. COMPANY DEFILE BREACH
ATGM Drill
(CONTINUED)
10
10 12

11

12

B-66 14
FIST-V B-65
DEFILE BREACH (CONTINUED)
4
10. INFANTRY RECONS AND SECURES FAR
SIDE, PICKED UP BY BRADLEYS ON FAR SIDE 13
OF BREACH
11. ENGINEERS OPEN AND MARK LANE
12. ASSAULT PLATOON MOVES THROUGH
13. FOLLOW ON PLATOONS READY TO MOVE
14. XO ACTS AS TRAFFIC COP TO KEEP FLOW
THROUGH LANE STEADY

53
Anti tank guided missiles may be encountered in almost any location. these are
small, man portable, and can be operated by a crew of one. Possible locations
include depressions, ruins, tree lines, buildings, helicopters, and reverse slope from
vehicle mounts. Due to their use of HEAT warheads they will normally attempt to
get flank shots. These weapons will normally be encountered in the following
circumstances: when moving through a defile, when the tank moves out of cover, at
corners, in urban or built up areas. General methods for countering ATGMs are
basic fire and maneuver. Remember that once one anti tank weapon fires, it is
highly likely that there are others in the vicinity. To counter the ATGM crews need
to be familiar with the following techniques:
1. Maximize cover given by the ground, or foliage. Moving to cover
places an object between you and the missile, even sparse trees and
bushes between you and the launcher may be enough to throw the
missile off course.
2. Destroy the ATGM. Destroy the launcher with direct fire. You will have
approximately 5 seconds to accomplish this. In rare instances when the
gunner identifies the incoming missile he may be able to shoot it down
with the coax.
3. Keep frontal armor oriented on the launching location. It is highly
improbable that a frontal impact would disable or destroy the tank.
4. Suppress the launcher. By firing at the individual controlling the missile
you may be able to distract him long enough for him to miss.
5. Obscure your tank using onboard smoke grenades
6. Use fire and maneuver to destroy the launcher
7. Move your vehicle in a weaving course and employ sharp turns to try
to throw the missile guidance system off.

ATGM DRILLS

EMPLOY ON-BOARD SMOKE

MOVE TO COVER BEHIND TERRAIN

EXECUTE EVASIVE MANEUVERS MAKE VIOLENT TURNS

ATTEMPT TO SUPPRESS LAUNCHER

54
 N. Movement in Built Up Areas
Tanks are normally supported by infantry as they move through built up areas, and
will attempt to bypass them if at all possible. See ANNEX I (OPERATIONS
UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS)

MOVEMENT THROUGH A BUILT UP AREA

1 - BYPASS IF POSSIBLE, IF AREA MUST BE TRAVELLED EXECUTE LIKE
DEFILE DRILL. ATTEMPT TO MOVE THROUGH WITH INFANTRY.
2 - OBSERVE FROM DISTANCE, RECON IF POSSIBLE
3 - CLOSE HATCHES, TC TO OPEN PROTECTIVE
4 - MOVE TANKS DOWN ROAD IN STAGERRED COLUMN, GUNNERS SCAN
OPPOSITE SIDE OF STREET, TC SCANS ABOVE GROUND FLOOR
4 - AT CROSSROAD ENSURE DISMOUNTED INFANTRYMAN OR TC
CHECKS AROUND CORNER, MOVE TANK ACROSS QUICKLY
5 - IMMEDIATELY BYPASS KNOCKED OUT TANKS
7 - CRASH THROUGH HOUSES IF NECESSARY, REMEMBER ABOUT
BASEMENTS
8 - USE BLIND CORNER, DEFILE, AND RECON BY FIRE DRILLS

55
SUPPORT INFANTRY
ATTACK IN BUILT UP AREA

1. INFANTRY SQUADS MOVE FORWARD OF TANKS

AND CLEAR BUILDINGS (ALL FLOORS)

2. TANK SECTION MOVES FORWARD UNDER

GUIDANCE FROM DISMOUNTS

3. SECOND SECTION OVERWATCHES FROM

FARTHER BACK

4. DISMOUNT SQUAD SECURES FLANKS, REAR OF

OVERWATCHING TANKS

56
O. Company Trap Drill

a. The Company may execute a Company trap during retrograde,

delay, and withdrawal type of operations. This operation is a
defensive equivalent of the ‘Company Punch’, with a basic
concept is holding by the nose and kicking in the ass. Key to
the success of this operation is rapid execution, an effective
fixing force, and decisive attack by fire from a flank to rapidly
destroy the enemy, followed by a rapid withdrawal.
b. Choose the most likely avenue of approach and establish a
blocking position, supported an obstacle (first priority).
Blocking force positions should be able to hold the enemy at
long range as long as possible. Locate counterattack routes
deep into his flank and rear for the trap force (second
priority).
c. Stop the enemy advance. Use obstacles and barriers to
channelize and slow him. Confuse and disorient him with
smoke and artillery fire once he hits the obstacle. Open fire
from the fixing/blocking force.
d. While he is focused on the obstacle spring the trap. Mass
fires on him. Counterattack with the trap force into his flank.
Never give him a chance to defend himself. Hit him with
numerous threats at once: obstacle, artillery, long range fixing
fires, counterattack on flank, etc.. Synchronize all efforts
e. Use all available assets to destroy him quickly. Fire FASCAM
to separate him from reinforcements, and prevent retreat. If
CAS is available direct it against follow on echelons.
Reposition elements to complete his destruction.
f. Rapidly ‘recock’ the trap, or withdraw rapidly before his
second echelon can act to prevent the destruction of the first
echelon, or decisively engage the trap force. Maintain
freedom of maneuver.
g. Be aggressive in execution. What you lack in numbers, you
make up for in audacity. Timidness will never succeed.

SEE BELOW

57
 FASCAM
ENEMY
TRP 8

WITHDRAWING FORCE
- TRY TO GET ENEMY TO CHASE
THEM, LOSE CAUTION

COMPANY TRAP OPERATION

- PURPOSE IS TO DESTROY SUPERIOR ENEMY, GO OVER TO OFFENSIVE, GAIN TIME
FOR REINFORCEMENTS TO ARRIVE, OR MAIN BODY WITHDRAWAL
- HOLD HIM BY THE NOSE WITH OBSTACLES AND FIRE, KICK HIM IN THE ASS WITH
MANEUVER FORCE
- PERFORMED SIMILAR TO COMPANY PUNCH, BUT DONE WHILE WITHDRAWING
AND NOT ADVANCING
-FRIENDLY FORCE REMAINS HIDDEN UNTIL ENEMY HITS TRIGGER (USUALLY
OBSTACLE BELT
- ENEMY MUST BE OVERWHELMED RAPIDLY ONCE HE HITS TRIGGER.
-USE SMOKE AND ARTY TO MISORIENT AND CONFUSE HIM ONCE HE HITS
OBSTACLE
- ISOLATE HIM FROM FOLLOW ON FORCES WITH FASCAM, CAS
- MUST CHOOSE FAVORABLE GROUND AND PLAN TRAP BEFOREHAND
- OBSTACLES MUST BE PLACED OR PREPARED BEFOREHAND, FASCAM PREPARED
- ENGAGE TRAPPED FORCES OR FOLLOW ON FORCES FROM FLANK

58
 APPENDIX 3. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS
See also ANNEX J NIGHT OPERATIONS for coverage of night offensive
operations. See basics Pg 7-9
1. General: Offensive operations are designed to take the initiative away
from the enemy using fire and maneuver, shock effect and the massive fire power
of tanks bearing down on a position. Offensive operations include Deliberate
Attacks, Hasty Attacks, Attacks by Fire, and Meeting Engagements. These different
forms of the offensive vary mainly in the amount of preparation and the knowledge
on the enemy.
In the offense armor crashes through the defense, bypasses strongpoints,
disrupts and destroys the enemy’s CSS assets, isolates the defender from his
support base, and prevents the enemy counterattack. Follow up infantry and
artillery forces destroy the isolated enemy forces that the lead tanks have bypassed.
Speed, operational tempo, and inertia are the keys to the penetration, breakthrough,
and exploitation.
Critical to any offensive operation is an effective reconnaissance. The goal
is to locate the enemy, pinpoint his positions, firesacks, and weapons orientations,
locate his obstacles, determine his flanks, and find a covered approach around him.
The reconnaissance effort pulls the main effort along into the enemy weak spots, it
is not pushed out merely to locate his forces.
Penetration, breakthrough, and exploitation are the mission of armor.
Destruction of the enemy through isolation, fear, and consequent demoralization is
the ideal goal. To close with and destroy the enemy by close combat should only be
a last resort after he is fixed in place and cut off from all supply and support. The
Company maneuvers to pass through the weak points, rather than focusing on
destroying the strongpoints.
Firepower is essentially our ability to punish and kill the enemy, and more
than anything else is a fear producer. In the attack the Company must force the
enemy to react to us. Our goal is to create chaos and confusion faster than he can
react. Defeat occurs when he is out of combat power, or when he can no longer
react to the rapidly changing situation, and gives up.
Surprise is possibly the greatest combat multiplier. Strike the enemy when
and where he is unsuspecting, and unprepared. When surprise is achieved, and an
advantage gained, it must be quickly and ruthlessly exploited. Every piece of
equipment and all energy must then be focused at the critical point of the attack.
Once you have the upper hand never release the pressure or let him get a chance to
regroup. Maintain Tempo

59
 Offensive operations require a great deal of planning and rehearsals to go
smoothly. The foundation of these operations is Platoon and Company Battle Drill,
which are the basis for all armor operations. Company maneuver is mainly a series
of connected platoon battle drills. These drills are covered in greater detail in
APPENDIX 2 (BATTLE DRILLS) to ANNEX A.

2. Planning. Attacks will be backwards planned, beginning with actions

on the objective, then through assault, movement to the objective area, movement
to the LD, and preparations prior to the attack. The order of march will generally
be briefed beforehand, the formations will be by SOP. Depending on the mission
the company may have attached to it engineers, scouts, mortars, air defense, or
other combat support elements. These units will be attached and released based on
ANNEX D, APPENDIX 6: ATTACHMENT / DETACHMENT DRILL. Preparatory
fires will be planned, along with smoke and illumination. Observers for targets,
and who calls fires will also be designated. Company level control measures will
be added to the battalion control measures as necessary, and may include TIRS
points, TRPs, checkpoints, and other aids to help the company accomplish the
mission.

3. Reconnaissance. Preparatory reconnaissance will be conducted IAW

APPENDIX 5: RECONNAISSANCE. It will include both mounted and dismounted
tactical reconnaissance, possible employment of the FRD, as well as leaders
reconnaissance. Reconnaissance effort is directed at “pulling” the main effort along
the best avenue of approach. Recon is not effective when “pushed” along the route
we want to go on, just to find out how many enemy forces are present. The recon
effort focuses on finding the enemy weak spot, and determining a way the
Company can exploit it.

4. Formations: (See APPENDIX 1: MOVEMENT FORMATIONS).The

company uses the line and column formation as the basis for all maneuver. All
other formations such as wedge, and “V” are variations on these two basic
formations. Their application and usage will depend on several factors, as applied
by METT-T. Good movement formations are never a substitute for good use of
terrain. The company must be able to transition rapidly from one formation to
another with minimum radio traffic, and without halting. Generally a base platoon
will be designated. This is the lead platoon in a wedge or column, or the trail
platoon in a “V”. Standard change of formation drills that will be used during an
attack are as follows:
- Transition from column to coil, back into column

60
 - Transition from column to wedge, “V”, or line
- Transition from Wedge or “V” into line
During an attack or movement to contact the Company will habitually employ a
Forward Recon Detachment (FRD). This element precedes the Company main
body by 1-2 km, and gives the Company time to react to uncertain situations. The
purpose of this element is to clarify the actual situation, locate enemy forces and
obstacles prior to the Company main body encountering them, and recommending
courses of action to the Commander. See APPENDIX 5: RECONNAISSANCE for
more information on the FRD.

5. Movement during the attack: There are times to go fast during the
attack (over open areas, assaulting objectives, when in contact), but movement
should not be foolhardy. The attack should move as quickly as possible to maintain
its momentum and inertia, but must remain deliberate to ensure security and
control. Do not be in such a hurry as to lose your synchronization, or put your head
in a noose. During an attack it is normally best to move cautiously, using the tanks
as if you are hunting. This is not to be confused with maintaining a slow tempo of
attack, only that security should be maintained. A danger is that sometimes
momentum becomes lost, or the company becomes stalled. This often happens
when a key leader has been killed, or when something unexpected has occurred. If
this happens the surviving leaders must rapidly rally the remaining forces and
continue executing based on the commander’s intent. Crosstalk on the radio is
essential during movement, both between platoons and companies (on the
Battalion net). Generally a company net will be used during an attack because of
the simplicity and resiliency that it brings to operations.

6. The Company assault. The assault is the critical phase of the attack. If
the enemy cannot be forced out of his positions by other means an assault is the
technique used to destroy him. An assault will not be conducted unless there is no
other way of defeating the enemy. Search for the weak point then attack it. Don’t
waste effort with supporting attacks against strong points. The assault is normally
supported by an extensive artillery prep, and should be overwatched from elements
in a support by fire position. Prior to an assault the company will normally make a
short halt to ensure that everyone and everything is ready, and that all necessary
coordination has been done. Close coordination between the assaulting unit and the
supporting unit is critical and is covered in greater depth in TAB A: CONDUCT
OF THE ASSAULT.

7. Actions on the Objective: This is the key phase of the assault/attack,

61
and each operation will usually have a detailed specific plan. In spite of this some
generalities do apply to almost all actions on the objective. Once on the objective
the first priority is to secure it. This is accomplished by destroying or driving off
the enemy, checking for stragglers, and either establishing a hasty defense to
defeat local counterattacks, or continuing the attack to seize subsequent objectives.
Once this has been done (and the Company is not continuing the attack on to
subsequent objectives) the effort shifts to consolidation and reorganization. This is
a critical phase for any operation as the Company is most vulnerable at this point.
Therefore the focus is initially on the security of the objective, then to the
reorganization of the attacking force. See ANNEX A, APPENDIX 9, TAB D
(CONSOLIDATION AND REORGANIZATION) for specific guidance concerning
Consolidation and Reorganization.
8. Company as the Reserve: When the Company is assigned the mission
as the Task Force reserve it will usually not be assigned a specific task, but will be
given a series of Be-Prepared tasks that may be assigned based on the situation.
These will normally be a number of possible employment options that support the
Task Force Scheme of maneuver. As a reserve the Company would follow the Task
Force formation. The formation normally used will be the Company Arrowhead, or
march column to permit rapid movement and flexibility. During short halts the
company will disperse to maintain cover and concealment. The company would be
committed to counterattack, exploit a gap, to reinforce success, or to assume the
mission of another company. Because much of the execution will be accomplished
on the fly, and with little preparation, a thorough reconnaissance and well
rehearsed battle drills are essential to success. See Appendix 9, TAB E - Battalion
- Company Reserve.
9. Attack work priorities
-Begin recon: Battalion Scouts will recon deep towards objective,
Company will launch local reconnaissance, usually dismounted, to recon up to the
objective. It is critical that this recon force dispatched immediately so that it has
time to get the mission accomplished. Recon patrols may stay forward of LD and
be picked up by company as it moves forward. Leaders will also perform leaders
recon, focusing mainly on the movement to LD and beyond.
- Perform rehearsals
Actions on the objective
Combined arms breach of complex obstacle
Battle drills the Company expects to use.
MEDEVAC plan
- Perform PCIs
Ensure graphics (maneuver, fire support) are posted

62
 Ensure all soldiers know mission and commanders intent
Review use of Key signals,
- Establish local security
Monitor key nets
STAY QUIET
- Stand to, uncoil, execute

Basic Offensive Operations

The Movement to Contact: The normal mission in a movement is to locate and

fix or destroy the enemy. Often this will be the FSE, with a company mission to
fix/destroy and prevent it from interfereing with the TF main body. Alternately the
company mission could be to fix the enemy main body to allow the TF main body
to maneiuver and defeat it. The Company conducts a movement to contact normally
with one platoon forward as the FRD, and the remainder of the company as a main
body moving from one location to another once it is reported clear by the FRD. The
FRD is intended to spring traps, locate obstacles, clear the route of advance, and
generally give the Company the time and space to deploy and react. When time is a
factor the Company will use a rolling FRD, in which security is sacrificed for
speed.
-Company moves in wedge or arrowhead formation with Forward Recon
Patrol
- FRD moves forward, “pulling” Company main body along when avenue
of approach is clear.
-Upon contact FRP reports and recommends course of action.
-Main body maneuvers to fix, flank, or attack enemy.
-Basic maneuver covered in “Company Punch” drill.
-All contacts reported higher.

If the company is tasked to clear two route simultaneously it will usually travel in a
‘Flying V” with a platoon clearing each route, with the third platoon following
behind as a reserve.

63
Movemet to contact places great stress on speed and reaction time, and will rely
heavily on company and platoon battle drills, lower level initiative, and a thorough
understanding of the commander’s intent.

The Deliberate Attack: The Company normally participates in a deliberate attack

as part of a Task Force attack. As such, the Company will have one of the various
missions associated with the deliberate attack: Support by Fire force, Assault force,
Breaching force, or Reserve/Exploitation force. The Company may also be tasked
to conduct a deliberate attack on its own, using internal assets and support
elements. The deliberate attack is planned with detailed intelligence, and is
launched after extensive preparation and reconnaissance. It allows the Company to
focus and synchronize the numerous combat elements and combat multipliers to
maximize their effect on the enemy, while at the same time minimizing his
effectiveness on us. The key to success in a deliberate attack is a thorough recon,
effective suppression, well rehearsed actions on the objective, and a rapid and
thorough consolidation and reorganization. It is also very important to attempt to
get forces attacking simultaneously from two or more directions at once to force
the enemy to react to multiple threats all at once. The recon focus of the operation
at the Company level is to getting the Company safely, and if possible undetected,
into the SBF and ASSLT positions. Time is usually less of a factor than the
synchronization of the various elements, and the actual execution may be rather
slow. Each deliberate attack will have it’s own specific plan, but the basic
sequence of execution remains the same:
-Company receives mission.
-Leaders conduct recon of area (as much as possible) .
-Company conducts rehearsal of the conduct of the assault, planned actions
on the objective, and anticipated actions on contact.
-Company sends out dismounted recon team to recon/secure Assault
Position and Support by fire Position, find route up onto or behind
objective.
-Company LDs and executes movement to the objective. Picks up
dismounted recon element at pre-designated linkup point.
-Company occupies Support By Fire and Assault Positions. See TAB A
(CONDUCT OF THE ASSAULT).
-Fire Control/Distribution Measures confirmed.
-Objective is prepped with artillery and direct fire.
-Conducts attack according to OPORD plan.
-SBF force shifts and adjusts fire as necessary .
-Assault force clears and secures objective.

64
 -Rapid consolidation on the objective.
-Company continues on to subsequent objective, reorganizes on primary
objective, or exploits gap in enemy line by moving reserves through.

The Hasty Attack: The hasty attack is usually one of the potential outcomes of a
movement to contact. It occurs when the Company encounters an inferior or
unprepared enemy, or is presented with the opportunity to inflict a disproportionate
amount of damage on the enemy. It is normally launched based on variations of the
Company battle drills, and is less planned or reconned, but more violently and
rapidly executed than a deliberate attack. The main emphasis is normally on speed,
and defeating the enemy before he can react, rather than waiting for all the various
elements and combat multipliers to be synchronized as in a deliberate attack.
Because of this the Company may have to execute the attack over unfamiliar
terrain, without artillery support, and before all the attacking elements are ready.
Thorough understanding of Company battle drills, and a rapid, violent execution
are the keys to a successful hasty attack.
-Company locates enemy force
-Recon focuses on finding enemy weak point, and covered route into it
-Enemy is defeated as quickly as possible. Move too fast for him to react
-Base of fire element sets (usually Tank Platoon)
-Attack element (Tanks and Bradleys) maneuver to position of advantage
-Base of fire element suppresses enemy to allow attack element to move
-Indirect fires used to suppress enemy, mask maneuver
-Base of Fire element isolates objective by suppressing adjacent enemy
units.
-Enemy destroyed by fire, or fire and maneuver, by attack element
-Attack element assaults completely through enemy
-Dismounts follow up if necessary to gather prisoners, Intel. Any remaining
enemy resistance is eliminated.
-Once enemy is destroyed establish hasty defense immediately
Occupy firing positions
Orient on likely enemy avenues of approach
Establish sectors of fire/responsibility
Tie in with adjacent units
Continue consolidation and reorganization

The Attack by Fire: The Attack by Fire (ABF) is frequently used to exploit the
standoff capability of the Company’s weapons. It is normally launched from a flank
or from dominant terrain. The Company does not actually close with the enemy.

65
This mission occurs often in delays, Company Trap operations, or in
counterattacks. The following sequence is typical for an attack by fire.
-Commander designates platoon missions
-Fire distribution and control is coordinated
-Recon checks for best SBF position
-Company moves to and occupies designated SBF position (similar to hasty
POSITION) occupation of a BP. See APPENDIX 4, TAB B:
OCCUPATION OF A DEFENSIVE POSITION).
-Local security established
-PLs, TCs check sectors, ID TRPs, targets
-Company initiates fires by fire command
-Platoons manage ammo expenditure to maintain 50 % vehicles firing
-Firing vehicles displace/shift as necessary

The Raid: Conducting a raid is a possible offensive mission for the Company. The
purpose of a raid is to gain information, disrupt enemy tactical preparations
( spoiling attack), to cause chaos and confusion, or to destroy a specific target
(artillery or CSS concentration, headquarters, bridge). The fundamental concept of
a raid is to move swiftly and unexpectedly into the enemy’s area, attack a specified
target, and return safely to friendly lines without becoming decisively engaged. The
attacking force normally pays no attention to it’s flanks, and achieves it’s success
by surprise, speed, and firepower. The raid is normally launched with a great deal
of combat support (Artillery, Engineer, ADA, CAS), but with little to no CSS
support aside from MEDEVAC. The following are some of the fundamentals of
conducting a raid at company level:
-Commander coordinates for RFA (Restricted Fires Area) around raid area
-Route of raid reconned from LD to objective
-Recon gets eyes on the enemy
-Determines best place to initiate attack
-Establish security around objective. Isolate from reinforcements
-Base of fire element (Bradleys) moves into position
-Base of fire element suppresses enemy, covers Attack force
-Attack element (Tanks) maneuvers into position
-Attack element destroys enemy by fire, or fire and maneuver
-Attack force finishes quickly. Destroys as much as possible
-Raiding force withdraws quickly covered by rearguard
-Return to friendly lines at designated passage point

The Support by Fire Force (Base of Fire Force) See support by fire pg70

66
 -Fire control coordination done with supported unit
-Open fire conditions
-Lifting, shifting, ceasing fire conditions
-Engagement criteria
-Vehicle marking, signals
-Company occupies support by fire position at necessary time
-Company establishes security
-PLs position vehicles, establish fields of fire. TCs identify TRPs
-Company initiates fires on command
-Fires used to suppress enemy to allow movement of assault element
-Fires isolate objective by suppressing supporting enemy positions
-Ammo expenditure moderated to keep at least 50% of vehicles firing
-Company lifts, shifts, ceases fire as necessary

Actions in the attack position:

While in an Attack Position the primary focus is maintaining combat
power, and staying ready to move quickly when called. The company will occupy
dispersed hide positions or will stand by in open areas ready to move (executing
survivability displacements regularly to avoid artillery) . During the wait in the
Attack position the CO and XO will keep the company posted on the tactical
situation with periodic updates.

67
TAB A: CONDUCT OF THE DELIBERATE ASSAULT:

1. Planning the Assault: When planning an attack the assault is planed

first, as it is both the most critical, and most complex task in the operation. The
preceding phases of the attack exist merely to give the assault force the greatest
chance of success possible. They usually focus on maneuvering forces towards the
objective and attaining both a tactical and psychological advantage over the enemy.
The focus of the plan is to find or create a weak point in the objective, then isolate,
attack, and destroy it peice by piece. The planned course of action must be based
on the recon information, and commanders estimate of the situation. It must take
into account the layout of the objective, the nature of the terrain leading to the
objective, the decisive point for the mission, the designated entry points, and
whether a dismounted assault is necessary. These information requirements will
form the basis of the recon plan. The plan should always attempt to get armored
vehicles behind the objective. Whether they go over the actual objective is
secondary to getting them on the enemy’s route of withdrawal and reinforcement.
This also forces the enemy to fight in two directions at once. Positions are seldom
taken because the enemy is destroyed, it is because the enemy leader has decided
that the position can’t be held. The ideal result is that the enemy commander
concludes that his position is undefendable because of our maneuver and
withdraws voluntarily, transitioning the assault into a pursuit.
2. Recon of the Objective: Critical to the assault forces success is a
thorough understanding of the enemy disposition. This is a function of pre- and
during battle recon. The recon must focus on the enemy battle positions,
entrenchment’s, the terrain leading to the objective, enemy obstacles, potential
support by fire and assault positions, and unsuppressed Anti Tank weapons, and
most importantly a way into or past the objective. The key consideration is to
determine the exact point that the infantry will enter the enemy position. The recon
must find a weak point to allow the infantry assault force to enter through stealth,
or a point where we can create one for a mounted assault by firepower. The goal
will be to isolate small portions of the enemy defense and eliminate them one by
one. This information will be critical in determining if a mounted assault is
possible, or a dismounted assault is necessary. The assault force must be prepared
for a less than ideal situation, and may only get a visual recon of the enemy
position from the support by fire position immediately prior to the assault.
3. Task Organization: The basic task organization for an assault involves
a Support by Fire Force, and an Assault Force. The Support by Fire force will
normally be a tank platoon, with the XO, and FISTV. The Assault Force will be a

68
tank platoon, followed by the mech platoon mounted, and the CO. The support by
fire force also costitutes the ‘on order’ reserve.

TYPICAL ASSAULT TASK ORGANIZATION

OVERWATCH FORCE ASSAULT FORCE

B-65

FISTV B-66
ON ORDER BECOMES
EXPLOITATION FORCE

4. Movement to the Objective: The unit moves by standard techniques

into the vicinity of the objective. Prior to the assault the overwatch and assault
elements move into position. In general the angle between the overwatching
element in the support by fire position, and the assaulting element should be as
close to 90 degrees as possible. This will allow the assaulting forces to be
supported during the entire time they are moving, and prevents friendly forces from
masking the overwatching unit’s fire. The leader of the assault element quickly
makes his final recon, usually getting to a point where he can observe the
objective. The assault element remains in a hide position until the leader issues the
final FRAGO, then moves to the Assault Position. Artillery and direct fire
suppression do not begin until the assault force is in the assault position, unless
this fire is necessary to allow them to reach the assault position.
5. Support by Fire: The purpose of this force is to pin down enemy
elements on the actual objective, as well as suppress enemy positions that support
the objective area with fires. A Support By Fire fgorce (usually PLT sized) will
normally be used, even when another company is providing SBF from another
location. Enemy attention will be drawn by the overwatch element, and not on the
vulnerable assault force. Artillery is also used on the objective and is controlled by
the overwatch force. Smoke may be called in to mask the movement of the assault
force. Care must be taken to ensure that the overwatch force vehicles have enough

69
ammo in the ready racks to support the actual assault. This portion of the fight is
the “fire” of “fire and maneuver”, and as such its chief aim is suppression. The
mission hinges on properly planned, effectively executed supporting fire, as the
terrain rarely allows a covered crossing of terrain from the assault position to the
objective. The element that crosses this open area will be exposed to close range
enemy fire. Success or failure of the entire operation depends on getting the
Assault Force across this last 300 meters and onto the objective. Often this will be
done with dismounted infantry, and in this case the dismounts need to be covered
as they move across the open ground. Once the dismounts have entered and begun
to clear the trench system they are in a much more survivable position. Accuracy of
fires is less important than volume. Rounds don’t have to hit the enemy, they have
to make him believe he will be hit if he exposes himself. Fear is the major effect of
suppressive fires. Fire directed at the enemy achieves suppression because the
enemy doesn’t know that you don’t know where he is, he is only sure that he is
being shot at. Soldiers, both mounted and dismounted, will not expose themselves
to what they think is deadly fire. HEAT and machine gun fire will be the primary
ammunition used by the overwatch force. On order the overwatch element occupies
the support by fire position and isolates the objective by suppressing enemy
weapons on, or able to fire into the objective area. When the Overwatch force
leader feels that he has achieved supression and isolation of the objective he
notifies the commander and the assault begins.
6. Artillery Support of the Assault: The artillery prep should begin
simultaneously with the occupation of the support by fire position and the
beginning of direct fire suppression. Indirect fires greatest value is not the
destructive effect, but in its ability to suppress. The explosions of the artillery and
mortar rounds will suppress enemy soldiers even in armored vehicles. Fires should
be concentrated at the infantry entrance point, then shift to adjacent and supporting
enemy positions as the assault force closes on the entry point. If the situation
requires the lifting and shifting of fires the overwatch force and assault force
vehicles will provide suppressive fires. Fires may be used inside of danger close
(600m) during mounted assaults, or once the infantry gets into the trench system,
as being below ground level provides substantial protection. The FIST will
normally be responsible for calling and adjusting fires based on the commanders
intent. If he cannot see a portion of the battlefield another overwatch element will
be given the responsibility for calling and adjusting fires in this sector. The assault
force leader will always have the option of ordering the supporting fires lifted and
shifted as he sees fit.
7. Engineer Support: Often the Company will have engineers task
organized to assist in the assault on the objective. If engineers are present they will

70
assist in both the suppression and the assault of the objective. CEVs will be
positioned with the overwatch force to fire onto the objective if they can move
within range(1000m), otherwise they will be held in reserve. Engineer squads will
move with the assault element to breach any local protective minefields in the
objective area. MICLICs may also move with the assault force (AVLMs if possible,
but also on M-113 trailers) to assist in breaching local obstacles, or firing over
enemy trench and bunker systems to assist in the clearing process. ACEs will
initially be held in reserve, if possible in the assault position (only 1-2) to bulldoze
trenches if necessary. If the situation requires bulldozing the enemy in then the
ACE will team up with one of the assault force BFVs, which will straddle the
trench and drive down it lengthwise while firing the coax and 25mm down into the
trench. The ACE will follow immediately behind (5-10m) filling in the trench as it
goes. If this is not possible, or the situation is too dangerous for the ACE, the CEV
may get this mission.

8. Conduct of the Assault (Mounted). A tank assault is not a refined

event, it is a violent crushing of the enemy resistance. On order the assault element
assaults the objective, leading with tanks, and following with infantry. Artillery is
used on the objective until the assaulting vehicles reach danger close, at which
point fires shift to alternate targets that will help isolate the objective. The
overwatch force continues to fire onto the objective and on supporting enemy
positions to prevent the enemy from engaging the Assault force as it closes on the
objective. As the assault force moves onto the objective the overwatch force shifts
fires to adjacent and supporting enemy positions. The lead tank platoon assaults
with all weapons firing. The necessity for using all weapons to their maximum
capability cannot be overstressed. Tanks need to be firing machine guns and HEAT,
unless a tank is detected, which will be engaged with SABOT. During the assault
you seldom see your opponent until it is too late. By attacking with all weapons
firing at suspected and known enemy positions the enemy is prevented from
exposing himself. The assaulting tanks and BFVs stop the attack on the far side of
the objective if possible, then clear back onto the objective with the infantry. The
infantry platoon moves mounted behind the tanks until the tanks have overrun the
objective, reach a position that they cannot traverse, or encounter a position that
they cannot destroy. The infantry then dismounts, storms, and clears the objective.
When overrunning an MRP position always be prepared to continue the assault
onto the next PSN. Never lose momentum. Find a wingman and keep your sword
in his back. At some point the assault force may become disorganized and
scattered (chasing fleeing enemy in different directions) so at some point the

71
commander may commit the reserve (the SBF force overwatching from the jump
off point) to add new force to the assault and maintain momentum. At this point the
reserve becomes the main effort (assault force) while the CO or ranking leader
reorganizes the original assault force and reconstitutes it as the reserve.
9. Conduct of the Assault (Dismounted): During the dismounted assault
the Assault Force, under the command of the senior infantryman, signals that it is
ready to assault. At this point the artillery fires are lifted and shifted off of the
objective, and direct fire support switches to weapons tight. SABOT also becomes
the round of choice over HEAT as it is less deadly to exposed personnel. The
infantry will use the confusion to storm onto the objective, and begin clearing the
enemy still resisting. The Support by fire force will restrain from firing onto the
objective, and will focus on isolating it by firing into adjacent positions. The SBF
force will fire onto the objective if an enemy vehicle exposes itself (i.e. an enemy
tank backing out). For the clearing of trenches tanks will provide supressive MG
fires once the dismounts enter the trenchline. Infantry clearing trenchlines will
carry flagpoles with the 2nd/3rd man in the team that rise above the trench. This flag
marker will delineate their progress along the trench. Tanks firing in support will
keep supressive MG fire on the trench about 10 feet in front of the flag marker so
that the defending infantry is supressed until the last instant.

ASSAULT
FORCE

ENEMY
MRP
POSITIONS

KILL
SACK

SBF
POSITION

TF SBF
FORCE

72
 A. Conduct of the Assault
10. Actions on the objective: The infantry assault of the objective is led by
the senior infantry leader on the ground. Its purpose is to destroy the enemy in the
position, or force them to attempt to withdraw, at which point they are engaged by
the overwatching force. The infantry must clear the trenches in one direction,
leapfrogging forward, securing bypassed intersections to provide security to the
rear and prevent fratricide by converging elements. The clearing of the objective is
time consuming and requires much ammunition, but is not usually manpower
intensive, as it usually best to have a small assault group of dismounts, supported
by a lot of suppressive fires. The trench can only accommodate one soldier
advancing at a time. The rest of the assault element supports this point man as
necessary by providing rear security, demo teams, additional ammo, grenade
throwers, and evacuation. The assault force marks its forward progress by means of
a flag carried by the third man that is visible above the trench line. This will ensure
that suppressive fires from the assault elements tanks remain 5-10 m ahead of the
trench clearing team and that the enemy is suppressed and cannot react until the
assault team is firing into his position with grenades and small arms. The primary
fire support for dismounts on the objective is the assault force tanks. The assault
force tanks follow the progress of the lead assault parties, and maintain
suppressive fire with machine gun fire approximately 5 meters in front of the
assault party. This will ensure that the enemy will remain suppressed until the last
possible moment. Care and judgment must be exercised when firing the main gun
onto the objective when dismounted infantry are clearing trenches, and the danger
of SABOT petals or that of exploding HEAT rounds must be considered. The
overwatch force continues to isolate the objective, but generally does not fire onto
it due to the fratricide risk. The only exception to this is an enemy vehicle is
detected attempting to displace. these vehicles will be engaged if it does not pose a
threat to friendly infantry. If possible the vehicles will be engaged with SABOT to
prevent injuries to friendlies from exploding HEAT rounds. Once the objective is
secured the assault force must consolidate and reorganize. This will entail
continuing the attack to a subsequent objective, or establishing a hasty defense in
the vicinity of the objective and preparing for a counterattack.

11. Fire control during the assault: Fire control is critical during the
conduct of the assault both to achieve its primary mission (suppression), and to
avoid fratricide. TRPs must be placed on known or suspected enemy positions, or

73
on nearby identifiable terrain. This should be supplemented with some quadrants
to add flexibility to the fire control. A small number of TRPs with Quadrants is
preferable to many TRPs and some vague sectors of fire. The purpose of these
control measures is to ensure that there is a clear assignment of responsibility for
all known or suspected enemy positions, and to allow for a rapid shifting and
focusing of fires. To distinguish between enemy and friendly infantry at several
hundred meters is difficult. Fire control measures will be used to shift fires away
from friendly forces as they attack. The assault force leader will always have the
option of lifting some or all of the overwatching fires from the target, for example
prohibiting firing on dismounted infantry targets, or shifting artillery fires to an
adjacent position. If supporting fires are to be used while friendly dismounts are on
the objective the infantry must mark their progress and location with green smoke
or a colored flag. The Commander must determine what the critical point of the
assault is, and ensure that the highest rate of fire is available at that time. The
critical time is usually the point in which the infantry is moving over the last 300
meters towards the objective. During lulls of direct fire the overwatch element
must increase the use of indirect fires. Once fires are lifted and shifted direct fires
must provide all suppressive fires on the objective.

12. Use of the Reserve: The purpose of the reserve is for the commander to
influence the battle at critical times. Two reserves will normally be held at the
Company level: an Exploitation Reserve, and an Assault Reserve. The Exploitation
Reserve is normally held to exploit the situation if we achieve any significant
success, for example the enemy withdraws. This force may not necessarily be held
out of contact, but may be an element with a “be prepared” mission as the
exploitation reserve. It will normally be a tank section, and often will form part of
the overwatch force until committed as the reserve. Upon being committed the
Commander and other tanks may attach on to add firepower to the exploitation.
The most critical point of the assault is the movement of the assault force over the
terrain from the assault position to the objective. The assault force reserve is
normally held in the assault position and is committed if the initial assault fails.
This will normally be half of the assault force BFVs, and the XO’s tank. Once the
assault force dismounts have entered the enemy trench system the time of crisis is
over and the need for an infantry reserve no longer exists. This force is then rapidly
returned to the control of the infantry platoon leader for the clearing of the trench.

13. Command and Control: The primary goal of C2 is to achieve

overwhelming concentration at the critical point. Normally the Assault force and
SBF/Reserve force will all operate on a single company net to ensure critical info

74
is heard as rapidly as possible. To ensure unity of command one Platoon Leader
will be designated as SBF leader, while another PL will be the Assault Force
leader. The third PL will be subordinated to either of the two depending on where
his unit is assigned. The Commander will normally position himself with the
assault force where he can control all of the various moving parts. Once the assault
has happened and the exploitation reserve is committed he will generally move
with this force or control the reorganization/reconstitution of the reserve. The FIST
stays with the overwatch force unless the Commander chooses to send him
elsewhere. The FIST positions himself where he can best control fires on the
objective, and onto supporting enemy positions. The XO will normally remain with
the SBF forcein the assault position unless this reserve is committed. His purpose
is to get another set of eyes looking onto the objective from a different perspective
than the commander, and to make necessary recommendations based on the
situation as he sees it. He also keeps TF Commander informed about the progress
of the assault once it has been launched. He will move with the SBF/Reserve when
it is comitted as the reserve. The Infantry platoon leader is responsible for leading
the assault of the objective, specifically the dismounted clearing of the enemy
positions. He will normally have a section of tanks from the exploitation reserve
attached to him to provide firepower and shock effect. One tank platoon leader will
be in charge of the overwatch force, while the other tank platoon leader will be in
charge of the exploitation reserve, and will be subordinated to the overwatch
platoon leader during the suppression of the objective. The 1SG remains forward in
the vicinity of the support by fire positions with the Company trains, and an
emergency ammo resupply on a HEMMET. His role is to monitor the ammo
expenditure, and prevent a pause in suppression of the objective due to an
ammunition shortage, and handle the evacuation of casualties.

14. Consolidation and Reorganization: Following the seizure of the

objective the company must rapidly consolidate and reorganize. . The objective
must be completely cleared of enemy forces. This must be ruthless and fast. Enemy
prisoners are rounded up, and the area is secured for counterattack. Consolidation
means quickly getting the company set for follow on (immediate) combat
operations, is tactical in focus, and is the responsibility of the senior officer present
(Co CDR, PLT LDR). Reorganization is the logistical aspect of preparing for
follow on operations, and includes cross leveling of personnel, ammo, and
equipment, KIA, WIA, POW evacuation, maintenance and recovery, ammo

75
resupply etc…This is the responsibility of the senior NCO present.

76
 B. Breaching Drill
See also APPENDIX 2: COMPANY BATTLE DRILLS - Hasty Obstacle Breaching
Drill, Defile Breaching Drill, and ANNEX B, APPENDIX 3 - ENGINEER
SUPPORT.

1. General. The mounted breach is the most difficult tactical event that the
company can undertake. This drill will be either hasty (little preparation) or
deliberate (planned and rehearsed). The only major difference is the amount of
planning, preparation, and rehearsal that goes into each operation. The Company
may have engineers attached for help with breaching complex obstacles, but must
be capable of clearing a simple point obstacle without external aid. The basic
breaching doctrine used by the Company is SOSR:
Suppress enemy overwatch positions
Obscure the breach site with smoke
Secure the obstacle and far side
Reduce: Breach, Mark, and Proof lane
The following steps are not part of the actual breaching, but are critical to success
Exploit: Rapidly get operation moving again, press any advantage you gain
Reconsolidate, Reorganize: Rapidly regroup on the move and continue
mission

2. Organization for Breaching. The task organization necessary for a breach

breaks the Company down into three major groups: an overwatch/support force, a
breaching force, and an assault force.
Overwatch/Support. The overwatch force usually consists of Tanks, along
with the commander and FIST. Its mission is to suppress enemy weapons
systems firing into the breaching area, as well as control indirect fires for
suppression and obscuration. Overwatch does not mean that the force can
merely see the breaching site; it means that it moves to a point where it
can deliver fires into enemy positions firing onto the breaching site itself.
Often this will be from a defiladed position, but sometimes it will be from
the open near the breach site itself.
Breaching Force. This force will normally consist of Engineers, or if they
are not available, Infantry. The Company mine plows and rollers will
usually be attached to this element. The mission of this force is to clear,
proof, and mark a lane for the Company to move through. This force must
be able to secure itself in the immediate breach site, and must also be able

77
 to obscure itself if the smoke called in by the overwatch force is
ineffective. This force is also responsible for establishing local security,
and conducting far side reconnaissance. Once the lane is proofed and
marked it will also be responsible for side security.
Assault Force. This force is usually made up of tanks, including the XO,
but will have all other combat elements that are not actively involved in
breaching or overwatching. The mission of this force is to assault through
the objective to seize and secure the next major terrain feature, and allow
the Company to continue moving forward. This force waits out of sight of
the breach area, and moves forward only after the breaching team calls to
report that the breach is open. It is critical that this force concentrates on
preparing for actions on the far side of the obstacle, not on just getting
through the breach lane.

3. Breach Planning Tips

- Find a bypass. Don’t become focused on forcing a breach. There is
probably a way around somewhere if you look hard enough for one.
- Small, lightly defended obstacles need to be breached rapidly. Do not
waste time with a meticulous deliberate breach upon encountering a
single row of triple strand concertina, blow through it.
- Plan for Casualties. This requires that the Company execute a simple
plan, with much resiliency in task organization. Casualty rates of up to
33% are to be expected when breaching an obstacle under fire, with up to
50% of the breaching force.
- Have multiple breaching options available. This means that if one system
fails another, that has been held in reserve, can be used. A case in point
of this is ditch breaching. The primary tool to cross the ditch is the ACE,
however the AVLB or CEV may also be used.
- Be prepared for multiple breaches, reorganize immediately after passing
through the breach to prepare for the next obstacle. Platoons must realize
that they may be given either of the three primary platoon breaching
missions based on the situation.
- Recon the far side as soon as possible. Try to get at least one terrain
feature forward of the obstacle being crossed. The worst thing that can
happen to the company is to become bottled up between two obstacle
belts.
- Rapidly force combat power through the breach. Once on the far side
continue with the mission. The Company will do a rapid reconsolidation
over the radio, but will not stop for a long time to reorganize. Don’t

78
 bunch up trying to get through the breach. Those forces not involved in
breaching or assaulting through must stand well to the rear of the
operation so as to not interfere. Traffic control at the breach site is
critical. Ensure that there is a “Traffic Cop” designated (usually the
Commander) who handles traffic flow through the lane, and in the
staging area leading up to the obstacle so that traffic doesn’t become
bunched up. When the Company opens a lane that other Task Force
elements will use the XO normally stays behind as the Traffic Cop to
work flow through the lane of the various units until relieved by the
Battalion S-3 or other Battalion Designated individual.
- Have a means of rapidly clearing the lane available if a vehicle becomes
immobilized in the lane due to damage or breakdown.
- Ensure that vehicles do not start maneuvering prior to the end of the lane.
Ensure that the end of lane (point where vehicles are free to maneuver)
marking is understood by all.
- Speed: it is usually better to put in a breach fast and rough instead of
slow and deliberate
- Put a CFZ on the breach site, you will probably be targeted by arty

Mechanical Breaching Sequence:

-Roller determines limit of minefield
-plow or MCLIC pulls up behind and clears lane
-roller moves through and proofs lane
-assault force attacks through

4. Obstacle Breaching Sequence

-The lead platoon recognizes an obstacle and reports its location,
composition, and other critical information to the company commander.
-The remainder of the company disperses into a short halt and establishes
local security to avoid becoming jammed up in the obstacle area.
-Placing a section into overwatch, the lead platoon recons for a bypass. If
one is found, the lead platoon reports the location to the company and
passes through, continuing with the mission. If no bypass is found the lead
platoon leader recommends a spot to breach.
- The commander designates support, assault, and breach platoons
-The breach platoon prepares to breach the obstacle. If engineers are
available, they will move forward with the breaching platoon. If an
infantry platoon is available they prepare to breach the obstacle.

79
-The assault platoon moves into a covered and concealed position and
prepares to assault. Platoon leader conducts rapid recon to get eyes on
breach site if possible. Formulates plan and issues FRAGO for assault
through, and actions on far side of obstacle. Briefs tank commanders.
-The overwatch platoon (now in position) calls for suppressive fire on the
far side of the obstacle and smoke to obscure the breach site. Places
suppressive fires on enemy positions able to fire into the breaching site.
-The commander designates a tentative breach site.
-Once sufficient obscuration exists, the breach element moves forward,
breaches the obstacle, proofs the lane, and marks the lane through it. This
force also is responsible for conducting recon on the far side of the
obstacle to determine if a second row of obstacles exists and establishing
local and far side security. The breach force remains on site to provide
traffic control at the lane.
- Once the lane has been cleared the assault platoon moves through the
breach. The assault will seize terrain 1,000 - 2,000 meters beyond the
obstacle to overwatch the rest of the company as it passes through the
lane.
-The overwatch force is the next force through, followed by the breaching
force, and then the Company trains. The breaching force may remain
behind to improve, mark or open multiple lanes through the obstacle.
-The XO reports the status of the breach to the TF on a continual basis.
The 1SG is the last vehicle through the breach, policing the breach
elements as he passes through.
-Following the breach the Company conduct a hasty reconsolidation, then
continues with the mission.

SEE FOLLOWING DIAGRAM FOR BREACHING FUNDAMENTALS

80
5. Actions of the Breaching Force. The
COMPANY compositionDRILL
BREACH and order of march to the
obstacle of the breaching force is dependent on the setup of the obstacle and the
assets available. The following sequence is typical for the breaching of a mine-wire
obstacle.

5
2

3
4

LEAD PLT

LEFT PLT
B-66 RIGHT PLT

B-65 FISTV
1 - CDR DESIGNATES PLATOON TO OVERWATCH
2 - FIST CALLS IN SMOKE TO OBSCURE BREACHING SITE
3 - ASSAULT FORCE MOVES TO COVERED LOCATION
4 - BREACH FORCE MOVE FORWARD ONCE OVERWATCH IS
SET, BREACH SITE OBSCURRED. BREACHES AND MARKS
OBSTACLE, SETS SECURITY ON FAR SIDE.
5 - ASSAULT FORCE ASSAULTS THROUGH FOLLOWED BY
OVERWATCH ELEMENT

81
 - While the overwatch force is setting up, seeking bypasses, and calling in
smoke the Breaching force prepares to move forward.
-The leader of the breaching force (normally a platoon leader) moves to a
point where he can
observe the tentative breaching site.
- The Platoon Sergeant lines up the breaching assets in the necessary
order based on METT-T.
- Once the obscuration has built up the breach force moves forward.
- The breach force is responsible for providing it’s own local security
- If a mine roller is available it will move forward, followed by the plow.
Once it detects the edge of the minefield it backs up 50 meters, makes room
for the plow, and provides local security.
- The plow clears the lane to the far limit of the minefield, then plows off
to the side and goes into a firing position to support the movement of forces
through the lane.
- The roller moves through and proofs the lane after the plow has created a
lane. Once on the far side the roller pulls off and provides security and
overwatch from the far side of the obstacle.
-The Engineer platoon moves through and marks the lane, leaves personnel
if possible to act as traffic control. On the far side the engineer vehicle
moves to a covered position.
- If a MICLIC is used it will advance 100m behind the roller tank. Once the
roller hits a mine it backs off 50 meters. The MICLIC then pulls in
behind it and fires the rocket over the roller tank. The MICLIC will
clear a 100m lane, but must be fired from at least 65m from the edge of
the minefield due to its stand off requirement.
- Once the MICLIC has been fired the roller proofs the lane.
- AVLB or ACE breaches AT ditches as necessary.

6. Breaching Assets:
- Mine Plow: Plows are the primary means of breaching wire and mine
obstacles in open areas ( not on roads). They cannot be used to clear tilt-
rod mines, or fill ditches. When plowing the tank must drop the plow 100
meters prior to the obstacle, and traverse the gun to the side. The tank
must also plow 100 meters past the far side of the obstacle, but may
traverse the gun center once clear of the minefield.
- Mine Roller: Rollers are the primary means of locating minefields and
proofing lanes. They are not suitable for breaching as the mine

82
 explosions may damage the roller over time, but may be used when the
plow or other breaching tools are unavailable or ineffective. Once the
roller locates the forward edge of the minefield (usually from hitting a
mine) it will back off 50 meters to let other breaching assets forward
(plow, MICLIC). Once these have created a lane the roller moves through
to proof it. When operating the roller the gun tube should be over the side
to avoid damage from explosions. Rollers may be dropped on the far side
of a obstacle, but this will occur only in an emergency, or upon orders
from the Commander.
- Engineer Squad: Engineer squads are capable of breaching wire, AT mine,
and other complex obstacles, but are vulnerable and require good
overwatch. The engineer squads are also responsible for getting far side
reconnaissance across the obstacle to check the other side. The Engineer
squads normally move in M-113s. The engineer platoon leader is the OIC
in charge of actually establishing and marking the breach lane.
- MICLIC: The MICLIC is a rocket propelled line charge that is fired into
minefields and detonates mines by overpressure. This is one of the
primary breaching tools, and it creates a vehicle width lane 100 meters
long. This lane should be proofed by the roller before being declared
open. AVLMs are often used ( instead on M-113 MICLIC) as they allow
a second shot. These charges need to be rapidly reloaded once fired. The
line charge may also be used against enemy positions if the launcher can
get close enough.
- ACE: The ACE is the primary digging asset the Company has access to. It
is suitable for breaching AT ditches, but must be provided sufficient
overwatch due to its light armor. The ACE is also good for sweeping
surface laid mines from road surfaces.
- CEV: The CEV is used for specialty breaching tasks, especially in defiles.
It can sometimes destroy AT ditches with its cannon, and is also good for
close range (1km) demolition of other obstacles.
- AVLB: The AVLB is normally used as a backup breaching asset for
crossing AT ditches, but may also be used to lay over minefields or wire
obstacles in an emergency. Due to its operational limitations it must be
employed with good obscuration and overwatch. Tanks need to be very
careful crossing the bridge as it is easily damaged.

83
7. Lane Marking:
-Initial breach lane markings may be non-standard as they are emplaced
during the breech itself. Markings for the breach will be set forth in the
operations order. At a minimum the entrance, left hand limit of the lane
(left handrail) and exit will be marked. Usually a VS-17 panel will be at
the left side of the entrance and exit (or at both sides), with picket or
HEMs poles as a left handrail. Green smoke will signify that the breach is
open at the location of the smoke. Another green smoke grenade may
signify the end of the lane, where the unit can start maneuvering again.
-After the Initial breach, lanes will be improved for the follow on forces.
The first markers set a driver will see is VS-17 aircraft panels in a V
shape pointing to the breach. The first set is 500m from the obstacle set
250 m apart. The next set, closer together than the first, will be 250m
from the obstacle. The third, and most important set, will be at the
entrance to the actual lane. If only one set of panels is placed initially, it
will be the set at the entrance to the breach. During limited visibility,
green chemlights in a V- shape will be added to the panels. In the breach
lane, engineers will erect lane markers with picket poles 10m apart with
engineer tape strung between them. The initial set of poles will form a left
“handrail” through the lane. As time allows the poles will also be placed
on the right side of the lane. At night, green chemlights will be affixed to
the top of the markers. At the exit of the breach, engineers will erect
barber poles with a single red chemlight on top. See below for standard
breach marking.

- Often the lead tank that encounters an obstacle will throw a 5 gallon can
off onto the ground to serve as a marker. This is particularly useful as a
point of reference for follow on forces (such as the breach force) that will
be approaching the obstacle.

84
 OBSTACLE BREACH LANE MARKING
SPECIALY MARKED POLE SHOWS
FAR END OF LANE INITIAL (HASTY)

PICKET POLES AS “LEFT

HANDRAIL” THROUGH LANE

VS-17 PANEL AT LEFT

SIDE OF ENTRANCE

GREEN SMOKE AT ENTRANCE

FAR LIMIT OF LANE

SHOWN BY VS-17 PANELS PICKET POLES

VS-17 PANELS

IMPROVED (STANDARD)

85
 NIGHT BREACH LANE MARKING

LAST POLE SPECIALLY MARKED

TO SHOW END OF LANE

PICKET POLES AS “LEFT

HANDRAIL” THROUGH LANE GREEN FLARE FIRED AS LANE
MARKED WITH CHEMLIGHTS IS COMPLETED

VS-17 PANEL AT LEFT

SIDE OF ENTRANCE
(WITH CHEMLIGHTS)
INITIAL
(HASTY)

FAR LIMIT OF LANE

SHOWN BY DIFFERENT PICKET POLES
COLORED CHEMLIGHTS WITH CHEMLIGHTS
ON VS-17 PANEL

VS-17 PANELS
MARKED WITH
CHEMLIGHTS

IMPROVED
(STANDARD)

86
8. Combat Service Support:
- Recovery: The Company must have a plan for recovering damaged or
stuck vehicles rapidly from the breach lane prior to vehicles moving
through. All vehicles will move into the breach site with tow hooks
attached, and tow cables ready. The M-88 will also have the tow chain
ready. It will move to a covered location as near to the breach lane as
possible prior to the assault, but will not move forward unless called.
Vehicles will be towed out forward or backward based on the tactical
situation. Damaged vehicles may be pushed through in extreme cases, or
pushed to the side to clear the lane.
- Medical: Medics need to be on site, and be prepared to move anywhere in
the breach site to rapidly evacuate casualties. Cases of mine and artillery
fragment injury will normally be predominant. Standard MEDEVAC
markings apply.
- Logistical: If the Company anticipates a breach the load of key CL V and
pyro must be considered. This includes smoke pots, C-4, pop and drops,
colored smoke and flares, and other marking supplies. During the breach
the 1SG will be responsible for working emergency resupply for critical
item, specifically tank ammunition for the Support By Fire force, and
reload MICLIC charges.

9. Command and Control: The OIC of the entire operation is the Commander
(unless a Platoon is conducting a hasty breach by itself) . He is responsible for
synchronizing the efforts of the Support by Fire, Breaching, and Assault forces,
along with the logistic elements present, and for coordinating and controlling
traffic flow through the breach lane once the lane is open . Each subordinate
element is commanded by the specific platoon leader. The actual breach of the
obstacle is the responsibility of the ranking engineer on site. Any breaching or
security asset sent forward to support them will fall under the control of the
engineer. The XO is responsible for keeping the TOC informed, and in assisting in
the coordination for battalion assets. The XO is also responsible for acting as
“Traffic Cop” when other battalion assets begin to follow the Company through the
lane. He will continue this task until relieved by the BN S-3 or other designated
battalion representative. The CDR must ensure that a tactical update is given over
the company net just prior to the assault force being launched through the breach.

87
APPENDIX 4. DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

1. GENERAL: The two basic forms of defense that the company will
undertake are Hasty and Deliberate. The major difference is the time
involved in planning and preparing the defense. There are also
numerous defensive type missions that the Company may execute.
These include Counter Recon, Company Trap operations, and basic
Company Security operations. The OPORD/FRAGO will establish the
purpose / goal of the defense. The defense will normally be enemy
oriented, but can focus on critical terrain. The defense should normally
be visualized as an ambush, rather than a fortress, positioning weapons
to fire on the enemy flanks or rear. The Company once notified of the
mission will issue a WARNO, then conduct a hasty or deliberate
occupation of the battle positions.
2. If possible the preferred method for occupation of a BP is deliberate.
Leaders will conduct a ground reconnaissance of their Battle position or
sector, as well as routes in and out, prior to occupation. Recon the place
you plan to fight. Combat vehicles are the primary reconnaissance
vehicles but may be substituted by M113s, situation permitting. Make
sure that it allows you to dominate the enemy avenue of approach, and
allows you to mass fires. Hopefully it will allow opportunities to
counterattack into the flank of the enemy. Force the enemy to fight in
two directions. TCs will observe the EA from the enemy’s perspective
(from inside the EA) . Platoon leaders will assign sectors of fire for each
tank. PL must ensure that at least two tanks are covering all portions if
the platoons sector, and that TCs understand their main effort of
engagement. If sufficient time is not available, a map reconnaissance
must be completed. Ideally a combat vehicle should maneuver in the
proposed EA to check engagement possibilities from the BPs. During
the recon a basic scheme of maneuver is checked against the terrain, the
mission of each platoon in the company is determined, the BPs are
checked out, an obstacle plan is begun, and leaders are familiarized
with the layout of the terrain
3. At the completion of the reconnaissance, a tentative fire plan showing
the primary position of each vehicle, sectors of fire, TRPs, designated
engagement areas, direct fire dead space, obstacles, trigger lines hide
positions, and interior routes will be briefed to the company

88
 commander. TRPs will be thermalized. Engineer work such as digging
and obstacle construction will begin immediately.
4. Once the plan has been completed the OPORD will be issued. The
OPORD will assign platoon sectors or BPs, determine and designate
fire distribution, engagement and disengagement criteria, and outline
the general scheme of maneuver for the conduct of the defense. The
company will be assigned fighting positions, hide positions, and
limited visibility positions as follows: Occupy, Prepare, Recon,
a. OCCUPY: The company will prepare and occupy this battle
position. This includes the development of a complete defensive
plan that covers the following aspects:
-Develop Primary, Alternate, Supplementary fighting positions.
-Fire plans for each vehicle and platoon.
-Emplacement of LP/OPs, obstacles, M8 Chemical alarms.
-Rehearsed routes between fighting positions.
-Rehearsed displacement routes to subsequent Battle Positions.
-Developed engagement area, with obstacles and TRPs emplaced.
Emplaced TRPs will be marked by an engineer stake with a
chem light taped into the U. Below the chemlight, wired to
the picket, will be a black painted coffee can heated by
charcoal or mogas and sand. Or use GAA cans with a lighted
roll of TP stuffed into it. Each platoon will proof their EA by
sending a vehicle to identify dead space.
-Developed indirect fire plan in support of the company team's
mission and covering the identified dead space.
-All tanks boresighted (the proofing tank is a good target).
-Platoon level IPB, at a minimum, to identify possible enemy
courses of action in each sector.
-Face to face coordination made with adjacent units (to include
within the company).
-Hot Loops established and buried.
-Camouflaged vehicles and equipment.

b. PREPARE: The company and all platoons will prepare

secondary and subsequent battle position. All tasks required to
occupy a position must be accomplished with the exception of
actually placing combat vehicles into position and waiting for the
enemy in order to prepare a position. All platoons will conduct
displacement rehearsals between the two battle positions; this is

89
 an essential part of a defensive mission.

c. RECON: In this aspect of defensive operations, only leaders

will conduct rehearsals to and from the battle positions. They
will ensure that they are able to complete the following:
-Identify tentative vehicle positions
-Define a tentative Engagement Areas
-Sketch a platoon fire plan
-Conduct an IPB of the position.
5. The platoons will occupy their sectors and EA development will begin.
Platoon fire plans are due to the commander 30 minutes after occupation.
The Company secures itself during BP construction by utilizing a small
portion of the Company as an overwatch/security force. Platoons will
normally occupy hide positions when not involved in preparing the actual
battle positions. Sometimes in lieu of hide positions the tanks will be
moved forward towards the FLOT to deceive the enemy as to the actual
location of our positions. When in hide positions platoons will secure
their own areas, and will minimize all unnecessary movement.
Often the company will stay in the hide positions while the crews
move up one by one to prepare and recon the BPs. This is done when
enemy recon is active in the area.

Digging in: The company will focus engineer effort on a few key positions
(such as BPs dug in open, flat terrain) but will avoid digging in
completely. It is better to retain flexibiltyrather than being comitted to a
fixed BP orientation. Fighting above ground on the move from well
reconned and rehearsed positions is often better than moving to a BP that
the enemy knows about and is fighting to neutralize or bypass.
If the company is digging in positions a number of scrapes will
also be built. These are dummy BPs and fighting positions and should be
out in the open to attract the enemy attention, as well as his artillery
prep. These should complement, not compromise the company BP/EA
plan.

- SEE BELOW -

90
 3

1 2

EA BATTLECAT

55

SECURITY OF THE BATTLE POSITION

1 TANKS OVERWATCH AVENUES OF APPROACH INTO BP

AND OVERWATCH PLATOONS WORKING IN POSITIONS

COMBAT VEHICLE OVERWATCHES ENGINEERS EMPLACING

2 OBSTACLES

OPs PLACED FAR FORWARD AND TO FLANKS TO PROVIDE

3 EARLY WARNING. ALSO OVERWATCH COMPLETED OBSTACLES

PERIODIC DISMOUNTED PATROLS OF POSITION AND

4 SURROUNDINGS

55 REMAINDER OF COMPANY WORKS ON POSITIONS

6. All vehicles and platoons will rehearse their individual movement on the

91
 battlefield. This will include rehearsing their planned occupation of
positions, displacement, fire distribution, ammo resupply, route to
casualty collection point. Prior to the defend time a rehearsal will be
conducted at the company level. The purpose of this is to proof the plan,
make improvements as necessary.
- ensure direct and indirect plans are synchronized with obstacle plan
- practice traversing the routes used during the battle
- PL will write down and rehearse fire commands and distribution
rehearse the commitment of the reserve
- rehearse the closing of obstacles and the passing of the counter
recon force
- practice the displacement to subsequent BPs
- practice emergency ammo resupply, casualty evac, and recovery of
damaged vehicles.
Medics and maintenance will rehearse movement within the battle
positions, practicing movement over covered routes to all vehicle
positions, as well as to the AXP/UMCP. Medics and maintenance TCs
will be required to have a sketch of the Company positions. This
movement will also be rehearsed in limited visibility if the position is to
be defended at night.
7. Once the engineers complete work they will defend from a battle
position oriented on a dismounted avenue of approach. The purpose is to
utilize them to secure one of the company’s flanks to free up tanks and
infantry for the main effort.
8. Occupation of positions will usually be on order, but may be
situationally directed. This will normally depend on the proximity of the
enemy and whether or not the artillery prep has moved through the
company position. Location of, and actions in hide position are
determined by the plan to survive the artillery prep.
9. Initiation of fires will be controlled at the Company or platoon level
through Fire Commands, or the matching of the specified trigger
criteria. Individual vehicles will only fire prior to this to prevent
destruction by close assault. During the direct fire fight each weapon
must destroy as many enemy vehicles as possible as quickly as it can.
Mass fires against his main effort.
10. Vehicles will normally shift to alternate firing positions after firing
several rounds. If a tank is receiving effective anti-tank fire, the tank
commander may order shifts on a greater frequency.
11. Shifts to the subsequent battle position will only be initiated by an

92
 order from the Company Commander, or at the designated
disengagement point, as described in the OPORD.
12. No obstacles will be emplaced in the company sector without the
permission of the company commander. Tactical obstacles are sited by
the commander and are normally resourced and emplaced by the
engineers. All tanks will normally carry trip flares, 4 AT mines, 3 rolls
of wire, and 15 pickets. The purpose of this material is for local
protective obstacles and point obstacles on the flanks. This material is
sometimes pooled and utilized to create small obstacles to secure the
flanks, while the engineers concentrate on larger tactical obstacles. If
the CL IV is pooled and there is no engineer support available an NCO
(usually the Master Gunner or a TC) will be designated as CINC
Obstacle. He will have the responsibility of emplacing the obstacle
based on the Commanders Intent.
13. Positions will be marked with one colored chemlite on a picket in each
corner of the friendly side of the position and one in the U of a picket
at the "Driver Stop" position of the hull down position.

14. Weapons siting considerations

Tanks
Site to provide fires at approximately 2000-3000 meters
Avoid firing SABOT over heads of friendly infantry. Danger zone
30 degrees to L/R of main gun, and 600m to the front.
A distinguished tank crew will hit 35% at 3500m
A qualified tank crew will hit 45% at 2500m
Can kill quickly (5-7 rounds per minute)

Dismounted Infantry
- Occupies positions on flanks to cover dismounted Avenues
- Prevents enemy from running woodlines and forces vehicles
into EA
- Sets AT ambushes for vehicles moving through woods and
defiles
-Overwatches obstacles
-Must be dug in to survive artillery

Bradleys
-25mm effective to 1500m against point targets
-25mm effective to 2500m against area targets

93
 -25mm can penetrate side armor of tanks
-BFV has no LRF but thermal is better than M1 thermal
-Assign TOWs in depth, and with at least two launchers covering
each sector to allow displacement of firing vehicles, reloading,
and losses to enemy fire.
-Volley firing is most effective
-Rate of fire is much lower than tank guns (2 rounds per minute)
-TOW 75% effective at 3500m, best long range AT system
-Avoid firing TOW over wires or water
-Most effective when used for flank shots. Launcher may need
some dismounts for local security.
Dragons
-Best used for AT ambushes along secondary avenues of
approach.
-Reinforce the AT ambush with obstacles
-Launcher must displace after firing
-Use mobility to fire from positions where tanks and Bradleys
cannot go. Place unexpected AT fire on enemy along otherwise
concealed approaches.
-Weapon must be used against enemy flank or rear
-Volley fire on targets with multiple launchers
Machine Guns
- Focused fire of several MGs can blind tank optics
Reverse Slope Positions
-Position reverse slope weapons where you do not have a standoff
advantage so that the enemy encounters the weapon at short
range.
-Weapons need to fire across the reverse slope to get better fields
of fire and flank shots. Avoid firing directly up the slope.
Location of FIST
- FISTV is located where it can survive and maintain comms
- FSO may separate from FISTV and dig in

94
Defense Preparation Checklist:
-Local security/counter recon plan
-OPORD time (1/3-2/3 rule)
-Graphics done to standard
-CO/TM IPB done
-Vehicle positions prepped and rehearsed
-Routes reconed and timed
-Occupation, displacement, etc rehearsed
-Employment of reserve rehearsed
-Displacement rehearsed
Limited vis plan rehearsed
-Hide position established, checked
-CSS Medevac plan rehearsed
-PCI complete
-Boresight/zero
-Arty targets set, registered does it support defensive plan and obstacles
-Obstacles, sited, marked, checked do they support defensive scheme
-Use of TRPs, EA’s, sector sketches, PLT fire plans, CO fire plan
-Adjacent unit coord. (location of BP’s OP’s patrols, RTEs around BP, obstacle and
fires plan, overlap of direct fire, SOI and signal info, ensure BPs support each
other)

A. The Defensive Sequence

These are the steps of the defensive preparation, including reference to where they
are located in the TACSOP

1. Issue a detailed WARNO

2. Begin movement into the area (TAA/ BP, or hide psn)
3. Establish local security/counter recon
4. Begin PCI (hints on PG
5. Recon Area with TF CDR
6. Do Direct Fire IPB (Steps on PG
7. Update Company WARNO
8. Conduct Leaders Recon with PLs, PSGs, Locate and site BPs,
obstacles
9. Develop an initial fire/battle plan based on Direct fire IPB. Ensure all
direct fire questions on PG XXXXXX can be answered

95
 10. Continue EA Development using steps on PG XXXXX
11. Finalize positions and BPs, obstacles, targets, TRPs, adjust BPs to
support direct fire plan, ensure obstacles and targets also support DF
plan
12. Mark positions
13. Issue CO OPORD (PG XXXXX) on terrain
14. Occupy the BP (PG XXXXX) Begin BP prep
15. Attend TF Rehearsal Debrief company on results of TF rehearsal
16. Conduct CO Rehearsal (PG XXXXXX)
17. Continue prep of positions, prioritize digging
18. Recon, prepare, and rehearse alternate and subsequent positions.
19. Continue to prep position. Make sure you can answer all defensive
prep questions on pg XXXXXXXX

Remember: As leaders we are responsible for results, NOT

methods

Unit Leader Responsibilities

Company Commander
1. Plan and supervise EA development
2. Devise/coordinate local security and CTR Recon plan
3. Conduct Commander’s estimate and IPB
4. Explain enemy COAs to subordinates
5. Decide where and how to kill enemy, Develop Company Fire plan
6. devise obstacle and indirect fire plan/intent
7. Position forces
8. Issue WARNOs, OPORDs, and FRAGOs
9. Clarify CDRs intent, priorities, and timeline
10. Conduct rehearsals, backbriefs

XO
1. Coordinate linkup with slice elements
2. Supervise EA development as 2IC
3. Coord with CTCP for resupply and pre-stocking
4. Run Company CP and track EA development
5. Keep TF informed of EA prep and status
6. Debrief company on results of TF rehearsal
7. Direct medical and maintenance rehearsal
8. Conduct flank/reserve coordination

96
First Sergeant
1. Supervise necessary movement
2. Devise CSS plan (with XO)
3. Run CSS rehearsal
4. Supervise and execute CSS plan (pre-stock, resupply, medevac)
5. Maintain logistical staus and submit necessary LOGREPs

FSO
1. Walks terrain with Co CDR
2. Advises CDR of enemy artillery capabilities
3. Advises CDR of FS assets, TF and BDE scheme of fires
4. Devise Fire Support Plan to support commander’s intent
5. Coordinates observation plan to support fire support scheme
6. Ensures all targets support the maneuver plan, obstacles
7. Ensures all targets have primary and alternate lookers/shooters
8. Conducts the FS phase of the rehearsal
9. Copnducts all necessary FS coordination (adjacent FISTs, Mortar
PLTt)

Platoon Leaders
1. Recon EA and BP with Co CDR
2. Advise CDR with personal estimate
3. Issue PLT WARNO and OPORDs
4. Enforce timeline
5. Emplace TRPs
6. Position tanks and assign fighting positions to support CDR’s intent
7. Verifies sectors and sector sketches
8. Creates PLT fire plan
9. Supervises tactical and protective obstacle emplacement
10. Runs PLT rehearsal (Occupation, displacement, fire control)
11. Maintains/reports BP-EA prep status

Platoon Sergeants
1. Establishes security in the BP and hide position
2. Conducts PCI
3. Advises PL with tactical plan
4. Enforces timeline
5. QC of BP development (including fighting positions)
6. Implements rest plan (including PL)
7. Supervises maintenance, boresighting, resupply
8. Supervises logistical planning and execution at PLT level
9. Commands PLT in PLs absence

97
 B. Engagement Area Development

The following are the steps of EA development. This is task 9 of the

Defensive Sequence, pg 96. This is done for every EA that is prepared for the
company. When time is short some of the steps must be abbreviated or deleted. .EA
development and occupation of a BP constitutes Phase I and II of any defensive
operation. (Phase III is fight the battle, Phase IV is consolidate and reorganize)

1. SECURITY
Establish OPs and security patrols Prevent enemy from getting eyes on
your EA
Conduct a security sweep of the area for enemy remnants
Position tank security for thermal scan
2. ANALYZE ENEMY AVENUES OF APPROACH
Drive EA from enemy direction
Maneuver space
Key terrain
Choke points
Decisive terrain
Dead space, covered or dismounted avenues
Visualize enemy attack to subordinates
Use Direct Fire Planning IPB Checklist (PG XXXXX) during EA/BP recon
3. DETERMINE WHERE TO KILL ENEMY
Establish and mark TRPs
Analyze possible positions
Recon positions from enemy avenues of approach
Avoid obvious positions
Analyze positions for day, night, and limited visibility defense in terms of
-Observation
-Cover and concealment
-Ability to maneuver within the BP
-Routes (covered, concealed, reconned)
-Ability to maneuver within the BP
-Mutual support of other positions
-How neighboring companies plan to fight
Select positions (ensuring 2 or more weapons cover each area)
Begin digging immediately, appoint CINC ACE (usually Master Gunner)

98
 Plan and site obstacles Mark them prior to emplacement, secure them

Refine EA
-Determine direct fire control measures
-Designate trigger lines
-Establish engagement criteria for each weapon
-Determine disengagement criteria
-Establish limited visibility plan (see ANNEX J , NIGHT OPS)
Create the Combined Arms effect
- Artillery covers dead space
- Obstacles sited to block, disrupt, turn, or fix
- Infantry covers woodlines and dismounted AA’s to drive enemy
armor out into open
4. TASK ORGANIZE
Position weapons systems
-Don’t forget keyhole shot positions
-ENSURE KILLER TANKS GET BEST POSITIONS
Assign platoon sectors, BPs
Identify maneuver tasks(CATK, CATK by fire, disengage)
Assign levels of preparation for each position (occupy, prepare, recon)
5. ALLOCATE SPACE
Dispersion
Prevent detection, suppression
Flanking fire, security
Maneuver to concentrate fires
Limited visibility transition plan
Assign sectors of fire
Graphic control measures
Deception positions
Hide positions
Place TRPs
6. INTEGRATE ASSETS
Identify location and purpose of obstacles (turn, block, disrupt, or fix)
Develop fire support plan (target intents includes suppress, block, turn,
kill)
Security plan for obstacles
Overwatch obstacles with direct fire
Determine priority of work for engineers

99
 Establish security plan for BP during night
Ensure M-8 alarms are set
Integrate ADA
Prestock ammo
7. FINISH PREPARATIONS
All weapons boresighted
EA marked (Triggers, Break Points, TRPs)
Artillery targets fired in (registered)
Weapons sector sketches
- Primary and Alternate sectors of fire
- Location, description, range to TRPs
- Location of dead space
- FPF
- Limited visibility plan
- Could another vehicle pick up the sketch and fight the position
Platoon Fire Plans (See TAB C)
- Consolidate sector sketches
- All sectors, EA
- Key terrain
- Coordination Measures.
- Could another platoon pick up the sketch and fight the position
Execution matrix
Perform PCI
Rehearse the plan day, night See Defensive Rehearsals, pg XXXXXXX
- EA Fire Plan See BP Checklist PG XXXXXXX
- Target Handover
- Shifting Platoons to Alternate BPs
- Synchronize fires with obstacles and direct fire
- Time all routes
- Practice passing counter recon to rear, closing obstacles
- Employment of the reserve
- Action on NBC attack
- Emergency ammo resupply
- Casualty evacuation, vehicle recovery
8. MOVE TO HIDE POSITIONS
Ensure vehicles are well inside woodlines
Secure the BP with patrols
Minimize unnecessary movement
Work on decoy, deception plan

100
9. COMPLETION CHECKLIST
Upon completion ensure that you can answer the following questions
- Who is on my L/R, with what weapons, where are the O-Ps and patrol
RTEs
- What other BPs support this position, reserves, counterattack routes?
- What am I supposed to accomplish by being here?
- Where will the enemy probably come?
- What obstacles support my EA?
- What is their purpose?
- Who emplaces them?
- Who overwatches them?
- Who closes lanes in them?
- Is obstacle covered with arty? Who shoots it?
- How will indirect fires be used?, triggered?, adjusted?
- How will we execute the direct fire fight?
- What do I shoot at?
- When do I open fire (wait on fire command or event)
- Where do I shoot (orientation)?
- What are my target priorities?
- How are TRPs marked?
- What is my displacement criteria, method, route?
- When do I occupy the BP?
- What is my plan for limited visibility?
- What are my actions on ARTY?, CAS?, NBC?, dismounts?, ATGMs?
- What is the security/ hide plan day? night?
- Where are the Leaders, O-Ps, FIST
- Where are my alternate and subsequent PSNS, how do I get there
- What is the resupply, and medevac plan

Defensive WARNO

The defensive WARNO sets conditions for building the EA and is usually given via

101
FM by the commander as soon as he has the company mission
1. Friendly/ enemy situation big picture
2. Probable Company Mission
3. Movement details (where to, when)
4. PCI/prep guidance
5. Priority of work (security. dozers, obstacles, CL IV drop, slice linkup)
6. Time/location of leaders recon and OPORD

Information needed from TF prior to beginning EA

development
Prior to beginning the Company Defensive preparation the Company must
have as much of the following information as possible.

What TF CDR wants Company to accomplish (clearly defined mission

statement)
Adjacent unit missions
Where TF CDR wants to kill enemy
TF CDR intent for fires and obstacles
Tentative Company sector/BP
Task Organization Changes
Specific tasks to the Company
Good visualization of how enemy will attack (where, when , how, use of
enemy combat multipliers)
Specific coordination requirements
Timeline

EA/BP Preparation Hints

While leaders are out on Recon ensure that NCOs handle the following
movement of the company to the BP
PCI’s
check supplies (pickets, gloves, tools, TRP material)
conduct boresight
maintenance
resupply
night equipment checks

102
 C. Occupation of a Battle Position

1. Hasty occupation of a BP (also used for occupying SBF or ABF positions)

a. Stop at rear of position, establish security
b. Once all tanks set, move into BP, remain turret down.
c. Commander and PLs quickly discuss the following:
-Engagement area
-Sectors of fire/observation
-TRPs,
-Fire distribution guidance
-Engagement criteria
-Disengagement criteria
d. Vehicles move to hull down, TCs brief gunners on sectors
e. Individual vehicles back down when complete
f. PL notifies CO when PLT is set
g. Improvement continue as in deliberate BP occupation

2. Deliberate Occupation of a BP
a. Stop prior to BP
b. Leaders go forward to recon BP, bring security force along who will be
left behind as OPs - local security.
c. Leaders brief unit on contingencies prior to departing on recon
- Where party is going
- Who is going
- How long party will be gone
- What to do if main body attacked while leaders are away
- What to do if recon party is attacked
- What to do if recon party does not return on time
- What to do while the recon party is away
d. Leaders discuss plans:
- How position will be fought
- Where the enemy will be killed
- Which element will cover what sector
- Engagement/disengagement criteria
- Trigger lines, Break points
- Obstacle and indirect plan

103
 - Location of BPs.

e. EA walked and marked

f. Leaders return to tanks leaving security behind in BP
g. Platoon Leaders create battle plan. Brief TCs
-Occupation of BP
-Security in the BP during EA development
-Engagement/Disengagement Criteria
-Trigger Lines
-Displacement plan/route
-Emplacement of local protective obstacles
-Marking of positions, routes
h. Platoon occupies BP, TCs orient crews on EA/BP
i. Tanks prepare sector sketches, back down, go to hide positions
j. Platoon continues defensive prep
-Maintain security
-Coordinate with adjacent units
-Supervise engineer work
-Emplace thermal TRPs
-Conduct Recon/Preparation of subsequent BPs
-Conduct rehearsal covering: Occupation of BP from hide PSN, Fighting
the BP, engagement and disengagement drill, fire distribution,
displacement.
-Vehicles continue maintenance and preparations

3. Battle Position Checklist

a. Is the area secured
b. Location of TRPs, EA (Can tank hit what it is supposed to shoot at, Can
fires be massed, are TRPs thermalized)
c. Vehicle locations
-Hide Position
-Route to BP (covered?, marked?)
-Position not on hilltop or obvious terrain
-Does Position have backdrop or is vehicle silhouetted
-Can the vehicle displace if necessary
-Is the position dug to standard.
-No berm visible to the front
-Are Positions dispersed

104
 TANK PLATOON FIRE PLAN

CHECKLIST SECTORS OF FIRE

1. LABEL GRID LINES TANK FROM: TO:
_______________________________________________
2. SKETCH KEY TERRAIN _______________________________________________
3. TANK PSNS (PRIM, ALT) _______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
4. PLOT INDIR. FIRE TRPS ALTERNATE POSITION
5. SHOW DIR FIRE TRPS _______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
6. ENGAGEMENT AREA _______________________________________________
7. SECTORS OF FIRE (PRIM, _______________________________________________

ALTERNATE, ON ORDER) FIRE CONTROL / LEGEND

8. TRIGGER LINE ENGAGEMENT CRITERIA PLT TRP:
9. OBSTACLES CO TRP:
10. LP/OP LOCATION IND FIRE TGT :
11. ADJACENT UNITS BP:
OBSTACLE:

105
 -Camouflage emplaced
-Fireplan/Range card to standard
d. Ammo prestocked, covered
e. Alternate positions, routes, times to travel checked
f. Leaders positioned to control fires
g. At least 2 vehicles covering all assigned sectors (to account for battle
losses)
h. M-8 alarms out
i. Hot loop installed
j. Coordination complete with adjacent units
k. Minefields emplaced, local protective, tactical obstacles covered by fire
and observed 24 hours a day, lanes and markings, closure plan.
l. Boresighting and rehearsals complete

106
 D. Company Fire Plans
(See also APPENDIX 10 - DIRECT FIRE PLANNING). The Company will create a
Company Fire Plan in both Battle Positions, and in Assembly Areas. This will
usually be incorporated into the Company security plan in the case of the TAA
fireplan. The Company fireplan is simply a sketch of the immediate area, as well as
information as to how the Company will defend (or secure) itself. It is generally
created by compiling Platoon Fire Plans, and consolidating them into a Company
plan. The Company plan is forwarded to the Battalion TOC as soon as possible,
and copies are distributed down to the Platoon Leaders, FIST, and other
attachments.
Individual tanks will draw up sector sketches for each position that they
occupy. These sketches can become critical to fighting the tank during heavy fog or
when equipment such as the LRF fail. The major purpose of the sketch is to give
the entire crew a better understanding of it’s assigned sector, reduces confusion,
reminds the crew of actions to take on contact. It also is important to assist the
incoming or relieving force during a relief in place. These sketches are given to the
platoon leader, who uses them to create his platoon fire plan.
The Platoon leader compiles the tank sector sketches and creates a tank
platoon fire plan. The platoon leader needs to make 5 copies of this plan, 1 for each
tank, and 1 for the commander. The following information should be shown on the
fire plan:
- Tank Positions
- Alternate Positions
- Platoon Sector
- Engagement Area
- Trigger Line
- TRPs (direct and indirect fire TRPs)
- FPF
- Obstacles
- Deadspace
- OPs
- Adjacent Units

107
 COMPANY FIREPLAN

LEGEND
CHECKLIST
PLT TRP:
1. LABEL GRID LINES
CO TRP:
2. SKETCH KEY TERRAIN
IND FIRE TGT :
3. PLT PSNS (PRIM, ALT)
BP:
4. PLOT INDIR. FIRE TRPS
(MORTAR, ARTY), LIST OBSTACLE:
LOOKER, SHOOTER
RESPONSIBILITY FIRE CONTROL /
ENGAGEMENT CRITERIA
5. SHOW DIR FIRE TRPS
6. ENGAGEMENT AREA
7. PLT SECTORS OF FIRE
8. TRIGGER LINE
9. OBSTACLES, WHO
OVERWATCHES

108
 E. Security of the Company Area
(See also ANNEX A, APPENDIX 8 - ASSEMBLY AREA ACTIVITIES, and
ANNEX F - OPERATIONAL SECURITY):
A. The Company secures itself at all times during tactical operations. The
purpose is to protect against surprise attack from land or air attack, to gain time to
get to REDCON 1, and to make it difficult for the enemy to gain reconnaissance
information. There are numerous situations in which the Company will execute a
deliberate security plan; these include when the Company is occupying a TAA or
Hide position, occupying a battle position, or overwatching a tactical obstacle.
When in TAAs or hide positions the Company will generally occupy covered
positions in closed terrain. Often the choice of TAA or Hide positions will be a
compromise between security and cover. In open terrain, when the chance of
detection is low, the Company will normally circle the wagons into a company coil.
This increases the chance of the Company being detected or located, but is very
secure because all round observation is good and it is very difficult to infiltrate the
position.
If preventing detection is the major concern the Company will normally
hide itself in a covered location. The basic nature of covered positions encourages
dismounted infiltration approaches, as the tank optics and sensors are of limited
use. The purpose of most infiltration attacks will be to harass, and force the tanks
into open areas where they can be killed by long range weapons.
When securing a BP the main purpose is to prevent the enemy from getting
Intel and recon reports of the area, and act as a backup to the counter recon force
that will normally be operating farther forward.
The mission to secure an obstacle will be intended to prevent covert
breaching, as well as close a lane once a force deployed forward withdraws through
a lane. Obstacle construction teams, especially the VOLCANO, must be secured
while they work.

B. The Company employs both passive and active security measures to protect
itself; these measures include:
-LP/OPs
-Mounted OPs (Tanks)
-Patrols
-Turret guards (radio watch)
-Obstacles, booby traps
-Reaction Force

109
 -REDCON levels
-Close Coordination with adjacent units
-Patrols
-Camouflage
-Short counts
-No movement times
-Noise and Light Discipline
-PEWS
-Early warning flares

C. The Security missions are similar to counter-recon missions, and are

normally executed in three Phases: Decide, Detect, Destroy.

Decide: Decide which avenues of approach are to be covered and with

which assets will cover each. Come up with a sensible plan. Tanks will normally
cover open avenues of approach to utilize their optics. LP/OPs are used on
dismounted avenues of approach, or from locations where it is impractical to use a
tank, and are executed as per APPENDIX 8 (ASSEMBLY AREA ACTIVITIES -
OBSERVATION POSTS). The center of the position is generally secured by the
vehicles inside the perimeter that are pulling radio watch. Patrols will generally
secure the intervals between platoons and companies. Mines, trip flares, and other
booby traps will be utilized on approaches that are not going to be actively covered.
Detect: Detect the enemy from as far from the Company positions as
possible. Ensure that they are detected before they enter or determine the location
of the company position. The detection mission is usually executed in two phases:
Early Warning, and precise location. The early warning is generally accomplished
with OPs, or early warning devices, the other security assets will then be focused
on the threat once it is detected to determine exact location and composition. Once
contact is gained is vital that it be maintained. All personnel, including civilians,
need to be challenged and kept out of the Company area. At night there will often
be ‘No Move’ times to help the security forces secure the area.
Destroy: The final phase of the security fight is the destruction of the
threat. Once the enemy has been precisely located he will be destroyed. This will
happen by direct fire from a tank, an ambush executed by a patrol or rapid reaction
team, or destruction by artillery. All OPs and patrols will have engagement criteria,
but these are usually for self protection and not for destruction of enemy recon
elements. If the enemy force is small the OP or patrol may ambush and destroy it,
but must then immediately move to an alternate position.
The following graphics illustrate the concepts of Company security

110
operations in various situations.

111
 COMPANY SECURITY IN THE TAA

1
3

2
1

2
2

55

4 4

1 Platoons put OPs forward (in vehicles if possible). Mans alert

positions as necessary covering avenues of approach into TAA
2 1 Tank per PLT keeps turret manned

3 Dismounted LP/OP watches specific location.

4 Patrols secure local deadspace

55 HQ Platoon secures it’s own AO

112
3

1 2

EA BATTLECAT

55

SECURITY OF THE BATTLE POSITION

1 TANKS OVERWATCH AVENUES OF APPROACH INTO BP

AND OVERWATCH PLATOONS WORKING IN POSITIONS

COMBAT VEHICLE OVERWATCHES ENGINEERS EMPLACING

2 OBSTACLES

OPs PLACED FAR FORWARD AND TO FLANKS TO PROVIDE

3 EARLY WARNING. ALSO OVERWATCH COMPLETED OBSTACLES

PERIODIC DISMOUNTED PATROLS OF POSITION AND

4 SURROUNDINGS

55 REMAINDER OF COMPANY WORKS ON POSITIONS

113
 CP

SECURITY OF THE COMPANY IN OPEN AREAS

• PROVIDES STAND-OFF DISTANCE TO DISMOUNTED
AVENUES OF APPROACH, GOOD OBSERVATION
• ENEMY DISMOUNTS EASILY DETECTED TRYING TO
INFILTRATE INTO COMPANY AREA
• USUALLY THIS TECHNIQUE IS USED WHEN SECURITY
FROM DISMOUNTS IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN
AVOIDING DETECTION
• USUALLY SECURITY PROVIDED BY 1 TANK OP PER
PLATOON

114
 F. Counterreconnaissance

1. Purpose: The purpose of C/R is usually to strip the enemy of his

reconnaissance gathering assets. This mission is generally executed forward of
the battalion main battle area. The TF Scouts and other assets will normally
become OPCON to the company upon receipt of this mission. Sometimes the
Company will be assigned to cover a series of NAIs for the Battalion. This is a
different mission and removes much of the freedom of action that the Company
needs to carry out a true counter-recon mission.
2. Conduct: The company will conduct this mission in concert with the prep for
another mission (usually Task Force reserve). The Counter-Recon mission is
usually fought similar to the security fight described above in TAB D ( Decide,
Detect, Destroy). The Company will use the hunter killer technique during
counter recon missions. Scouts, OPs, and dismounted patrols will locate the
enemy. Contact will then be passed to the tank that will be responsible for
killing them. To accomplish this the Commander will normally break down the
Company sector into a series of smaller sectors, each the responsibility of one
of the Hunter-Killer Teams. This will be backed up by the Company reserve,
which will observe critical NAI/TAIs in depth, and move throughout the sector
as necessary to intercept and destroy any enemy elements that have gotten
through. This operation is not fought as a static operation. The enemy is
followed until he is killed. It is imperative to rehearse C/R attack routes during
daylight hours, strictly enforce noise and light discipline, and ensure that once
contact is gained it is maintained until the target is destroyed. The risk of
fratricide in this operation is high, but is acceptable compared to that of letting
the enemy recon through. The company will be prepared to change positions to
engage different types of recon elements. As the Counter Recon mission is
completed the Company will collapse the Counter Recon screen, conduct a
rearward passage of lines, and return to a TAA to consolidate, reorganize, and
prepare for follow on missions.
a) Organization: For the Counter Recon mission the Company will
normally be task organized with a platoon of Bradleys, and will have
the Scout Platoon attached for this mission. There will also be
additional slice elements attached such as the Mortar Platoon (or
section), COLTS, GSR, ADA, ADA scouts, additional medics, etc..
The Company will form a series of Hunter-Killer Teams (H/K
Teams). These will be composed of a scout section (hunters), a tank

115
 section (killers), and a dismounted infantry team. This will be backed
up by the Company reserve (usually the mech platoon Bradleys), and
a HQ section (B-66, B-65, B-77).

b) Hunter Killer Teams: The focus of the Counter Recon effort is on the
Hunter-Killer Teams, as they have the most critical missions. Hunter-
Killer teams will be FRAGO'ed into position, sometimes with
specific targeted areas of interest (TAIs) to cover. The TAIs are where
the company will kill the recon as these forces are usually identified
by the Scouts. In the H-K Teams the scouts act as the Hunters,
positioning in OPs forward to locate the enemy scouts and call
forward and direct the engagements by the killer section. The tanks
act as the Killers, staying to the rear of the scout hunter section,
moving as necessary throughout the sector to kill the enemy recon.
The dismounts serve as a backup observation and mobile ambush
team that moves throughout the Team’s sector to locate and kill or
flush out enemy recon elements as necessary. They also conduct local
patrols to find and kill enemy that has stopped to establish OPs in
their Team’s sector. The H-K Team relationship will normally be
habitual, and will take effect upon the Scout Platoon being attached
to the Company for the Counter Recon mission. The individual hunter
killer teams will be responsible for planning and coordinating the
fight in their respective sectors. This specifically involves the target
hand-off and engagement of detected enemy units, operations of the
dismounted element, obstacle emplacement, as well as movement and
movement control throughout the team’s sector. Special attention
should also be placed on MEDEVAC, including plans for use of tanks
as evac vehicles in emergencies, and establishment of a casualty
collection point, and assigned escorts for the medics. Coordination
must also be made with neighboring units to synchronize the counter
recon fight going on in adjacent sectors.
c) Counter Recon Reserve: The Counter Recon reserve will normally be
located at a point with good lateral access to the other hunter-killer
team sectors. If the sector is extremely wide, or has poor trafficability
the reserve may be split into two. Often the reserve may be split up
and assigned to cover key NAI/TAIs in depth behind the main
Counter Recon Screen line. The purpose of the reserve is to pick up
any recon elements that may have leaked through the forward screen,
replace combat or maintenance losses in the hunter killer teams,

116
 escort medical and other CSS elements throughout the sector, and act
as a rear guard to cover the withdrawal of the Company as the
Counter Recon Screen line is collapsed. The vehicles designated as
reserve must recon all routes that they may be expected to move on,
paying special attention to where obstacles are located in sector.
d) Company CP: The Company CP will be located to the rear of the
security zone. It will normally be composed of the CO, XO, HQ tank
section, B-77, the Scout Platoon Leader, and sometimes the FISTV.
The mission of the CP is to track the Counter Recon battle taking
place forward in the H-K Team sectors, coordinate and synchronize
the activities of adjacent teams and with adjacent units, control the
employment of the reserve, and keep the Task Force HQ informed.
Additionally the CP controls the logistical and MEDEVAC operations
that take place in the Company sector and any movement occurring
between H-K Team sectors. The HQ section also acts as a secondary
reserve, available to move throughout the sector to intercept enemy
elements that may have leaked through the forward sectors.
e) Occupation of the Counter Recon Sector: The Company sector needs
to be occupied as soon as possible upon receiving the mission. This
will allow the individual H-K Teams the maximum amount of time
possible to recon, set up, and rehearse their sectors. It is normally
preferable to send H-K Teams forward into their sectors as soon as
scout/tank section linkup has occurred rather than waiting for all of
the slice elements to arrive and then occupying the sector as a
Company. Some slice elements will be slow in arriving, and will be
linked up with their Teams as soon as possible. The plan for the
execution of this mission will normally be determined at the executor
level (that of the individual H-K Teams) rather than top down as
directed by the Company Commander. H-K Teams will normally
receive their mission, the Commanders intent for their team, and the
sector in which they will operate. They will be responsible for coming
up with a plan for execution in their own sector. To make this
effective H-K Teams must ensure that they conduct a comprehensive
Briefback to the Commander to ensure the synchronization of the
various teams, the reserve, and other elements and activities that will
occur at a Company level.
f) Rehearsals: One of the keys to success in this mission is effective
rehearsals. Several different types of rehearsals will be conducted.
The most important rehearsal is that conducted at the H-K Team

117
 level. These will be conducted independently by each team, and will
focus on coordination between the various elements, target hand-off,
movement in the team sector, and employment of the dismount
element. These should be conducted mounted and on the actual
terrain to allow the crews to actually recon and practice driving on the
terrain they will be fighting over.
The reserve will also rehearse to become familiar with the
sector, to practice the routes it will have to move over, and establish
the Time-Distance factors for various movement options. It will also
practice the target hand-off with the various H-K Teams, and
establish several EAs where it will kill the enemy recon that passes
the H-K sectors. The Medics will normally accompany the reserve
during its rehearsals so as to also become familiar with the Company
sector, and to locate and mark the LOGPOINT in each team’s sector
that it will use for MEDEVAC.
The Company CP will execute an FM rehearsal on the Company
net, usually in conjunction with reserve rehearsal. The focus of this is
to exercise the Company net, work the coordination and
synchronization of movement in the sector, and practice target hand-
off between H-K Teams and the reserve.
g) Collapsing the Screen: On order the Company will collapse the recon
screen, conduct Rearward Passage of Lines, and move into a
Company TAA. This will normally occur when the Task Force S-2 has
determined that the enemy attack is imminent, the recon forces have
all slipped through the screen, or that the screen is no longer
necessary. The scouts will often have a follow on mission of screening
forward, and will possibly require assistance from their Hunter-Killer
team tanks to get into their new positions. The dismount teams also
need to link back up with their vehicles. While the tanks are escorting
the Scouts forward the dismounts normally move to link up with their
Bradleys. The reserve force establishes itself in overwatch positions
at this time to cover the rearward passage of the Killer tanks. The
Counter Recon screen is collapsed under the control of the Company
CP, with the Killer tanks pulling back first, followed by the
overwatching vehicles of the reserve, and finally by the Commander
and XO in the HQ tanks. The slice elements and Company trains
elements operating in the security zone begin to pull back as soon as
the order is given to collapse the screen by the Task Force
Commander, and they should be well out of the way by the time the

118
 Company actually executes the collapse. The screen may be collapsed
through one passage point, or sections will be withdrawn on multiple
routes if possible. Prior coordination for these multiple Rearward
Passage of Lines will be made (see ANNEX A, APPENDIX 9, TAB C
- PASSAGE OF LINES), but often by the CO or XO, because the
element conducting the RPOL is already forward on the screen line.
Because of this the coordination must focus on simplicity of
execution, and the proper signaling and radio coordination to make
RPOL possible on the fly. It is critical to have 100% personnel
accountability prior to collapsing the screen. Special focus must be
put on slice elements and ensuring that all dismounts have linked up
with their Bradleys. If possible the vehicles will be brought back to
the Company TAA along the potential counterattack routes that the
Company may have to use as the Task Force Reserve later on to
provide crews a look at them before they have to use them in combat.
The 1SG is responsible for quartering the TAA. Upon closing into the
Company TAA the Company conducts LOGPAC, consolidates,
reorganizes, prepares for follow on missions, and rests.
h) Stay Behind Forces: Specific Platoons (or even the entire Company)
may receive stay behind missions that will leave them forward of the
Task Force defensive area. If this occurs these elements will move to
and occupy hide positions and prepare for their upcoming missions.
These hide positions should be well chosen, and security should be
paramount, as the Platoon will be operating essentially behind enemy
lines. Sometimes the Company, or specific elements of it, are not able
to conduct a rearward passage of lines and movement to the TAA
prior to the enemy main attack. If this occurs the element will find a
hide position, report its situation, and prepare to conduct a RPOL at a
later time, or pick up the mission of a stay behind force.

3. Combat Support: The Company will employ various CS assets during the
counter recon mission. The most important of these are artillery/fire support,
engineer, ADA, and GSR.
a. Artillery/Fire Support: Indirect fires are key in the counter recon
battle as they allow the Company to kill recon assets without
disclosing friendly positions. The FIST will be responsible for
creating a fire support plan that supports the Commanders Intent for
the counter recon battle. The FIST co-locates with the CP and
manages calls for fire from the scouts and tankers. He must ensure

119
 that all targets are registered during daylight, and that he has an
effective illumination plan. The Company will usually have a Mortar
section (or the entire platoon). If the entire platoon is attached it will
normally operate split section. The mortars are the ideal weapons for
counter recon as they are very responsive (quick to fire), and their
shells are fully capable of destroying lightly armored recon vehicles.
The Company may also have COLTs attached to handle precision
munitions engagements. The Company FIST is also capable of this.
Often the Fire Support officer will dismount his vehicle and set up in
hide positions to cover a key NAI/TAI. If the FISTV is not used it will
be kept with the HQ element. The fire support assets assigned to the
Company must be able to secure themselves against small threats, but
must be provided protection from other elements for larger threats.
b. Engineer: The Company may have engineer assets assigned during
the counter recon battle, but most of these will normally be engaged
in preparing the Task Force engagement areas. The engineer focus
will be on counter mobility. Large tactical obstacles are not suited to
counter recon operations, so the majority of obstacles will be point
minefields. If no engineer assets are available the Company will
accomplish the emplacement of obstacles by itself. Scout/Tank
section hunter killer teams will emplace their own point minefields
on trails, and the dismounted teams will do the same. Point
minefields on roads will normally be buried tilt rod mines, while AP
minefields will be standard AP mines. Extreme care must be taken
in emplacing mines, and the area in the vicinity must be marked off
at least 200 meters away on the friendly side by white engineer tape.
This is especially important for the medics and other logistical
elements, as well as the reserve, which may be operating throughout
the Company sector. All minefields emplaced will be reported to the
Company CP with precise location, layout information , and
marking description. If digging assets are available they will be used
to dig holes for the dismounted elements (SEEs), or push up berms
to close off small trails (ACEs, dozers). To ensure the timely
delivery of engineer barrier material the Company will have a
request ready to submit as soon as it appears likely that the Counter
Recon mission will be executed. If possible this material will be
loaded onto the H-K Team vehicles prior to their occupying their
respective sectors. If this is not possible then this material must be
moved up into the security zone and dropped at several points, the

120
 H-K Team vehicles coming back to pick it up as soon as possible.
c. Air Defense: Air defense elements will sometimes be included in
the counter recon force. If so they will focus on the destruction of
reconnaissance aircraft. Their secondary mission will be that of
lookers (or hunters) to locate enemy ground recon moving in the
sector. Their only weapon in this role will be indirect fire. These
teams will not be placed in remote locations that would preclude
their being supported by other Company assets during an emergency.

d. GSR: Ground Surveillance Radar is often attached to the Company

for the Counter Recon mission. They will be emplaced where they
can best utilize their equipment, usually overwatching large open
areas. It will normally be assigned to the Scout Platoon Leader who
will supervise its employment.

4. Combat Service Support: The Company handles the evacuation and logistical
needs of the scouts. Each H-K Team is responsible for establishing a LOGPOINT
in their sector. This will be the point that casualties will be collected, and the
LOGPAC will occur. Normally this is to the rear of the Team’s sector, in the
vicinity of the tank’s hide positions. Normal means of resupply will be by modified
tailgate method (see ANNEX C - COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT, APPENDIX 1 -
LOGPAC). Usually a reduced LOGPAC is used, consisting mainly of 1-2 fuel
HEMMTs. The 1SG will pick up the LOGPAC at the LRP and bring it forward
under escort of a portion of the Counter Recon reserve force. They will move from
LOGPOINT to LOGPOINT, setting up to refuel and resupply as necessary at each
point. H-K Team vehicles then pull back to the LOGPOINT for LOGPAC. Often
two separate LOGPAC runs will be conducted simultaneously in sector whenever
two fuel HEMMTs are available. They will work from opposite ends of the sector,
in towards the middle. The exact execution of this will be specified by the 1SG.
Medics will normally be forward in sector to handle evacuation, and will also move
under escort from the reserve if possible. They will be responsible for being able to
move quickly to any of the LOGPOINTS in their sector to pick up casualties, and
also know the location of the Battalion AXP. They must also locate 1-2 potential
LZs for use by helicopters for air MEDEVAC. If the H-K Team is unable to get the
casualty to the LOGPOINT it will have someone meet the medics there and escort
them forward as necessary. The Bradleys of the reserve will act as emergency
evacuation vehicles if necessary (medics unavailable). As such they must be
familiar with the route to the Battalion casualty collection point. The medics must

121
be aware of the markings on friendly sides of point minefields (white engineer tape
across the trail 200 meters on the friendly side). Any other support assets moving
in the counter recon sector (forward of the main Task Force/Battalion defensive
positions) must have a very clear understanding of the obstacles emplaced. Counter
Recon forces will send guides back to escort CSS assets forward whenever the
possibility of running onto a hidden obstacle exists. Mechanics, recovery, and other
logistical assets will remain behind. The 1SG is responsible for controlling all CSS
operations in the Company sector. he will also be responsible for establishing the
LOGPAC in the TAA that the Company returns to following the rearward passage
of lines and completion of the Counter Recon Mission.

5. Command and Control. The Counter Recon fight is mainly run at the Hunter-
Killer team level. The Company CP serves to synchronize the fight between
Hunter-Killer sectors, the employment and use of the reserve, CSS and MEDEVAC
of casualties, and the collapse of the screen and rearward passage of lines. The OIC
of the Counter Recon fight will be either the Commander or XO, with one on duty,
and the other resting, preparing for follow on missions (recon of battle positions,
coordinating passage of lines, recon of counterattack routes), or handling CSS
operations. The Scout Platoon Leader is subordinate to the Company Counter
Recon OIC (CO or XO), and is responsible for running the Hunter portion of the
Hunter-Killer teams. He will also be responsible for planning for follow on
missions for the Scout Platoon. C2 at the individual Hunter-Killer team level will
be worked out among the individual teams, but will normally be controlled by the
senior scout present in the team regardless of the ranks involved.
Communications during the counter recon battle are critical in ensuring
mission success. This requires a modified net, both for simplicity, and to ensure
that no critical information is missed. Once set in the counterreconnaissance
screen, the company will configure nets as follows:
UNIT PRIMARY SECONDARY
COMMANDER CO COMMAND TF
COMMAND
XO TF COMMAND CO
COMMAND
1SG CO COMMAND TF A+L
SCOUT PL CO COMMAND TF
COMMAND
SCOUT PSG CO COMMAND TF A+L
H+K TEAM 1 PLATOON NET 1 CO
COMMAND

122
 H+K TEAM 2 PLATOON NET 2 CO
COMMAND
H+K TEAM 3 PLATOON NET 3 CO
COMMAND
H+K TEAM 4 PLATOON NET 4 CO
COMMAND
RESERVE PLT CO COMMAND PLT NET 1, 2,
3, 4
MEDICS CO COMMAND TF A+L

Signals are also critical in fighting the Counter Recon Battle. Markings of
mines and obstacles are as described above, and the recognition signals used for
Passage of Lines will be as coordinated. Casualty marking of vehicles will be the
standard VS-17 panel, colored flag combination. Routes may also be marked by the
medics and reserve to facilitate their movement throughout the Company Counter
Recon sector.

- SEE BELOW -

123
- SEE NEXT PAGE -

124
 THE COUNTER RECON BATTLE

1
APPROACHING ENEMY
HUNTER-KILLER
TEAM SECTORS
2

ENEMY SPOTTED
SECURITY ZONE

BY THIS ECHELON

3 4 ENEMY DESTROYED
BY THIS ECHELON

LOGPOINTS

RESERVE

5
6
HQ

TASK FORCEMAIN BATTLE AREA

PASSAGE LANE PASSAGE LANE

7
ASSEMBLY AREA
LOGPAC
CONSOLIDATE-REORGANIZE
PREP FOR FOLLOW ON MSN
MAINTENANCE
REST

125
G. Company Trap Operation
APPROACHING ENEMY ATTRITTED
1 WITH ARTILLERY

2 SCOUTS AND COLTS SCREEN FORWARD

TO OBSERVE AND CALL FIRE

TANK, SCOUT, AND DISMOUNTED INFANTRY

3 SECTIONS FORM HUNTER-KILLER TEAMS

OP SCREEN LINE BACKED UP BY ARMOR

4 SECTIONS MOVING TO DESTROY
DETECTED ENEMY. DISMOUNTS RUN
PATROLS AND AMBUSHES

MECH PLATOON BRADLEYS ACT AS RESERVE

5 MOVE TO DESTROY ENEMY THAT LEAKS
THROUGH H-K TEAMS. OVERWATCHES
THE WITHDRAWAL OF H-K TEAMS DURING
COLLAPSE OF SCREEN AND RPOL
HQ SECTION CONTROLS COUNTER
6 RECON BATTLE, ACTS AS BACKUP
RESERVE

COMPANY COLLAPSES SCREEN

WITHDRAWS TO TAA, CONDUCT
7 LOGPAC, PREPARE FOR FOLLOW ON
MISSIONS (RESERVE, OCCUPY BP, CATK)

AVAILABLE ASSETS: TANK PLATOONS, SCOUT

PLATOON, MECH PLATOON BRADLEYS, MECH
PLATOON DISMOUNTS, HQ TANK SECTION, FIST,
COLTS, GSR, ADA, ENGINEERS, AVIATION, MEDICS
•TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
• ONCE SCOUTS PICK UP ENEMY THEY TRAIL HIM UNTIL
DESTROYED (MAINTAIN CONTACT)
• ENSURE THAT COUNT IS KEPT (BY TYPE) OF DESTROYED ENEMY
LOGISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
• PRE-STOCK AMMO
• HAVE LOGPAC WAITING IN TAA
• PLUS UP WITH MEDICS, POSITION THEM FORWARD

126
1. The Company may execute a Company trap during retrograde, delay, and
withdrawal type of operations. This operation is a defensive equivalent of the
‘Company Punch’, with a basic concept is holding by the nose and kicking in
the ass. Key to the success of this operation is rapid execution, an effective
fixing force, and decisive attack by fire from a flank to rapidly destroy the
enemy, followed by a rapid withdrawal.
2. Choose the most likely avenue of approach and establish a blocking position,
supported an obstacle (first priority). Blocking force positions should be able
to hold the enemy at long range as long as possible. Locate counterattack
routes deep into his flank and rear for the trap force (second priority).
3. Stop the enemy advance. Use obstacles and barriers to channelize and slow
him. Confuse and disorient him with smoke and artillery fire once he hits the
obstacle. Open fire from the fixing/blocking force.
4. While he is focused on the obstacle spring the trap. Mass fires on him.
Counterattack with the trap force into his flank. Never give him a chance to
defend himself. Hit him with numerous threats at once: obstacle, artillery,
long range fixing fires, counterattack on flank, etc.. Synchronize all efforts
5. Use all available assets to destroy him quickly. Fire FASCAM to separate
him from reinforcements, and prevent retreat. If CAS is available direct it
against follow on echelons. Reposition elements to complete his destruction.
6. Rapidly ‘recock’ the trap, or withdraw rapidly before his second echelon can
act to prevent the destruction of the first echelon, or decisively engage the
trap force. Maintain freedom of maneuver.
7. Be aggressive in execution. What you lack in numbers, you make up for in
audacity. Timidness will never succeed.

SEE BELOW

127
 FASCAM
ENEMY
TRP 8

WITHDRAWING FORCE
- TRY TO GET ENEMY TO CHASE
THEM, LOOSE CAUTION

COMPANY TRAP OPERATION

- PURPOSE IS TO DESTROY SUPERIOR ENEMY, GO OVER TO OFFENSIVE, GAIN TIME
FOR REINFORCEMENTS TO ARRIVE, OR MAIN BODY WITHDRAWAL
- HOLD HIM BY THE NOSE WITH OBSTACLES AND FIRE, KICK HIM IN THE ASS WITH
MANEUVER FORCE
- PERFORMED SIMILAR TO COMPANY PUNCH, BUT DONE WHILE WITHDRAWING
AND NOT ADVANCING
-FRIENDLY FORCE REMAINS HIDDEN UNTIL ENEMY HITS TRIGGER (USUALLY
OBSTACLE BELT
- ENEMY MUST BE OVERWHELMED RAPIDLY ONCE HE HITS TRIGGER.
-USE SMOKE AND ARTY TO MISORIENT AND CONFUSE HIM ONCE HE HITS
OBSTACLE
- ISOLATE HIM FROM FOLLOW ON FORCES WITH FASCAM, CAS
- MUST CHOOSE FAVORABLE GROUND AND PLAN TRAP BEFOREHAND
- OBSTACLES MUST BE PLACED OR PREPARED BEFOREHAND, FASCAM PREPARED
- ENGAGE TRAPPED FORCES OR FOLLOW ON FORCES FROM FLANK

128
 APPENDIX 5. RECONNAISSANCE

Fundamentals The Company will conduct various types of Reconnaissance during

tactical operations. These include recon in preparation for other tactical operations,
or reconnaissance as a tactical operation in itself. The various types of Recon that
the Company needs to be proficient at include Leaders Reconnaissance,
Dismounted Tactical Reconnaissance, Route Reconnaissance, and the Forward
Reconnaissance Detachment (FRD). Along with rehearsals, reconnaissance is one
of the fundamentals of tactical success. All reconnaissance activities are concerned
primarily with gaining information, and not in fighting the enemy. Sometimes a
specific piece of information is sought by the recon force, and this may have to be
fought for, but this is not generally the case. Often while on a recon the chance to
inflict disproportionate damage on the enemy, or to seize a fleeting opportunity
may be exploited, but the general rule is to avoid contact, as once contact is gained
the recon element is no longer gaining information.
The normal purpose of any reconnaissance operation is to “pull “the main
effort along the route of least resistance instead of merely being pushed out to
locate the enemy. The Recon focus is on locating a weak spot and how to exploit it,
not determining the layout of a strongpoint. Some additional fundamentals and
techniques of reconnaissance include:
- Report accurately and rapidly
- Negative contact is as important to report as enemy contact
- Retain freedom of maneuver
- Don’t hesitate to dismount and walk a little bit
- Listening is as important as looking

A. Dismounted Reconnaissance Patrol

When the Company has a Mechanized infantry slice attached it will generally use a
dismounted patrol as a reconnaissance team. This patrol will normally depart well
prior to the advance of the main body, and will be given the mission of scouting out
the route the Company will advance over, pre- or covertly breaching obstacles,
locating the enemy positions or reserve, finding routes for the Company to advance
without contact, or a combination of these. This patrol will normally try to exploit
the cover of darkness, and will use maximum stealth to infiltrate without being
detected. The patrol may be transported to the vicinity of the LD by Bradley or
truck. The Dismounted Recon Patrol may return to friendly lines prior to LD of the
main body, but may also stay forward and be picked up as the Company advances.

129
In this case special coordination must be made for linkup. The Dismounted Recon
Patrol will normally be led by the Mech Platoon Leader, unless it is a limited
patrol, in which case it will be led by one of his subordinates.

B. Leaders Reconnaissance
Prior to any major tactical operation a Leaders Recon will be conducted. This recon
will at a minimum cover the terrain leading up to the LD. The focus of this recon is
to get a feel for the terrain that the Company will move over or defend from during
the upcoming operation. If possible (usually depending on the enemy situation) the
recon will cross the LD. The Leaders recon is normally composed of the
Commander, Platoon Leaders, FIST, Slice Leaders, and a security element. The
Company XO will normally stay back to handle operations in the absence of the
commander. Prior to departure the Commander will brief the XO on a contingency
plan based on possible events during the recon. The Leaders Recon may be
conducted on foot when moving past the LD, but will usually be done mounted for
security. At a minimum a Tank will accompany the party, which will move in
HMMWVs or M-113. Prior to departing the Commander and platoon leaders will
brief their subordinates with a contingency plan. Each mission will have specific
goals associated with the leaders reconnaissance. The following format will
normally be used during recon missions OPORD, with the specifics of the recon
depending on the mission itself.
1) Situation
a) Enemy situation and it’s impact on the recon
b) Friendly situation
1. Higher mission and Commander’s intent
2. Composition of the force
3. Friendly forces operating in the vicinity, their missions
4. Air, NBC, Civilian situation
2) Mission: The Company has the mission to ..... therefore we will
conduct a reconnaissance to ...... (Purpose, Area, Forces involved)
3) Execution
a) Commanders intent: Purpose of recon, method, what must be
accomplished be end of recon.
b) Concept of the Operation
- Overall concept of how all portions of recon will be
synchronized: Security force, transport, sequence of recon
- Specific missions to subordinates (security force, etc.)

130
 - Area of recon Left and Right limits
- Routes in and out of area
- So that the enemy coming, from the direction of....
can be ..... at the latest by the line .....
c) Offensive Operation: Give specific recon missions to each
leader
- Routes
- Trafficability of terrain
- Defiles, bridges, and choke points
- Establish time-distance information for routes
- Likely bypass or infiltration routes
- Assault positions
- Dismount points
- Support by fire positions, area of effect
- Observation possibilities
- Posting of navigational aids
d) Defensive Operation: Give specific missions to each leader
- Primary positions, what their effect/purpose should be
- Alternate positions, what their effect/purpose should be
- Subsequent positions, what their effect/purpose should be
- Routes between positions
- Hide positions
- Obstacle locations and intent
- Plan for the direct fire fight
- Concept for use of reserve
- Synchronization and coordination of fight with other
elements
- Plan for withdrawal. Synchronize rearward bounding of
elements with neighbors
e) Security operations (counter recon)
- Location of the security zone
- Hunter-Killer team sectors
- Determine hunter OP locations to cover NAIs
- Locate killer hide positions, firing positions, alternates
- Locate backup BPs for reserve to occupy
- Reserve OIC recons routes he will have to use
- Determine location of local obstacles to emplace, priority
- Locate passage points, LOGPOINTS, Company CP
f) Passage plan: forward and backward during recon

131
 g) Contingency plan for stay behind force
- Where recon party is going
- How long recon party will be gone
- What to do if stay behind element is attacked
- What to do if recon party is attacked
- What to do if recon party does not return at designated time
- What work to do/security measures taken while recon party is
away

4) Combat Service Support

a) Supply: what specific supplies are needed
b) Casualties and recovery plan
5) Command and Signal
a) Command
- Command of recon party
- Command of stay behind party
- Any coordination necessary with adjacent units
b) Signal
- Radio net setup
- Recognition signals

C. Forward Recon Detachment

1. Purpose: During offensive operations, especially when the situation is
unclear (movement to contact) the Company will often form a forward detachment
(FRD) for use as a reconnaissance and security force. The purpose of this force is
to clarify the actual situation, attempt to locate enemy elements, obstacles, and
positions to give the Company reaction time, and generally speed up and secure the
movement of the main body. It acts as a type of mobile OP. The typical missions of
the FRD are to gain contact with the enemy, determine his strength and
composition, determine the trafficability of Company routes of advance, to locate
gaps in the enemy defenses that the entire Company can exploit, and most
importantly to recommend possible courses of action to the Commander (who is
moving with the main body.
2. Composition. This will normally be a platoon sized element, but may be
composed of a section. It will usually be composed of Tanks. The leader of this
element is normally the most experienced platoon leader, and he is responsible for
the movement and security of the detachment, reconnaissance as directed by the
commander, and recommending courses of action based on his estimate of the

132
situation as it develops.
3. Execution. The FRD will move 1-2 KM in front of the main body. This
detachment will normally move as sections by bounding overwatch, covered by the
remainder of the FRD Platoon, but may also move on its own. The Forward Recon
Detachment generally attempts to minimize fighting. Its mission is to observe,
report, and recommend. Obvious terrain such as woodlines, skylines, and open
areas are to be avoided or quickly moved through. Obstacles are avoided, but when
encountered they are bypassed. If a secured obstacle is encountered the FRD leader
must decide immediately to attack through it, establish overwatch, bypass, or
withdraw. If the FRD leader makes contact with an enemy force he must rapidly
choose a course of action. If the FRD has superior firepower, or is surprised, it is
generally best to attack. When the FRD encounters a superior force it is usually
best to set and defend, or withdraw and bypass. Once contact is made this
detachment will normally return to its normal organization.
4. OPORD to FRD Leader. The Company Commander is responsible for
assigning the FRD mission. Most of the details of execution are left to the FRD
leader, the Commander providing only the basic concept and necessary
coordinating information. During the OPORD brief the following items are
discussed:
- Mission of the FRD
- Commanders Intent: What is the FRD looking for/trying to accomplish.
- Concept of the Operation. How the FRD fits into the Company Plan.
- The Recon Objective (or with numerous objectives, the priority of the
Objectives)
- Attachments and Detachments
- Overwatch/support of FRD movement
- Route to follow, or boundaries
- Report criteria (specify times, locations, or on specific contact)
- Actions on the Objective (if any)
- Actions on Contact (by exception only)
- Medical support, plan for evacuation of casualties
- When FRD returns to normal organization (when dissolved)
- Signal information
5. FRD Leader Planning. The FRD Leader should use the following
considerations while planning and executing his mission.
- Give OPORD with ALL soldiers present, if possible overlooking the
terrain that will be traveled.
- On enemy free terrain observe while on the move
- On enemy held terrain observe from observation halts.

133
 - Move from halt to halt quickly
- In enemy held terrain move only under overwatch
- In extremely open areas only the FRD leader moves forward to observe
- When dismounting to observe, leave the Tank under cover
- If FRD must go through a town the leader must discuss:
- Who covers who
- Curve and corner drills
- Actions at far side of village
- Once at objective FRD reports, sets security zone or returns to normal
organization

D. Route Reconnaissance
The Company may receive the mission to conduct a Route Recon. This task will
normally be designated to a platoon.
Critical Tasks.
- Determine trafficability of route
- Recon terrain overlooking route that enemy can use
- Recon all built up areas along route, locate bypasses
- Recon lateral routes
- Inspect and classify all bridges along route
- Locate potential crossing and fording sites near bridges
- Inspect and classify all culverts, over and underpasses
- Clear all defiles along route
- Clear all obstacles along route, or locate bypasses

134
 APPENDIX 6. TACTICAL ROAD MARCH

(See also ANNEX J, NIGHT OPERATIONS, for night movement information)

1. General: The tactical road march is the movement formation

utilized for rapid movement between two locations when enemy
contact is unlikely.
2. Order of March: The order of march for the company team will be
dependent on several factors. Published in the company OPORD, the
order will usually be Option 1 or Option 2 based on the tactical
situation. The use of a quartering party will simply remove those

*
TANK
PLT B-65

B-66

CO
TRAINS

MECH PLT FISTV

* TANK
PLT
TACTICAL ROADMARCH
COMPANY STANDARD M-88
ORDER OF MARCH
(OPTION 1)

* IF ENGINEERS ARE
ATTACHED THEY WILL 135
NORMALLY MOVE HERE
vehicles from the march order.

136
 *
TANK
PLT B-65

FISTV

B-66

TANK
PLT
MECH PLT

* CO
TRAINS
TACTICAL ROADMARCH
COMPANY STANDARD
ORDER OF MARCH
(OPTION 2) M-88

* IF ENGINEERS ARE
ATTACHED THEY WILL
NORMALLY MOVE HERE

3. March Column Speeds: For all terrain the team will either move in an

137
 open (100m) or close (50m) column. Speed will be dictated by
METT-T in the OPORD, but usually 25 MPH during the day and 15
MPH at night. Catch-up speed is always 5 MPH over the columns
speed.
4. Lights: Service lights will be used by all vehicles when on roads.
Blackout drive and IR lights will be used on tank trails, or in tactical
situations. All vehicles will ensure that the RAWLS lights are
operational before moving on a road.
5. All personnel will ride at “name tag” defilade. Loaders will be up and
facing to the rear of the vehicle as Air Guard. They will also assist the
Tank Commander, as necessary.
6. OPORD: An OPORD / safety briefing will be given by the convoy
commander prior to any movement. All personnel in the convoy are
required to be briefed. It will include the following information;
a. Destination
b. The route to be followed (show on map, include rally points)
c. Order of march
d. Line up, Movement to the SP, SP time
e. Actions at RP, linkup with quartering party
f. Quartering Party / FRD information
g. Speed and interval, catch up speed
h. Radio frequencies and any other signals
i. Location of medical and maintenance assets
j. Security measures during the march and halts
k. Scheduled halts and maintenance checks to be done
l. Actions on Contact (Air, artillery, ambush, sniper, NBC)
m. Action on a breakdown, break in column
n. Actions on halts
o. Convoy commander and location in column
p. Any relevant additional information

7. Movement: Movement will be conducted generally under radio

listening silence unless otherwise directed. Movement to SP by the lead
element is automatic, and movement does not require approval from the
commander. During timed maintenance halts the time will begin upon
shortcount shutdown. Engine restart will also be by shortcount.
Movement will begin again automatically once the designated time has
passed.

138
8. Maintenance: If a vehicle breaks down during a road march, they will
immediately, if able, pull over to the side of the route. A warning
triangle will be placed 100m in front of and behind the site to warn
oncoming traffic of the vehicle. A yellow flag will indicate mechanical
fault. Attempt repairs if the fault is correctable at the operator level.
Do not endanger any crewman in attempting repairs, if traffic is heavy
remain on the vehicle. Report the location of the breakdown; and, even
if repairs have been completed, await the arrival of recovery assets. Do
NOT rejoin the road march on your own initiative unless fault can be
corrected before trail of column is out of sight. The column will bypass
the broken vehicle, and close the gap. Maintenance will stop to assist
the crew if possible. The last vehicle in the column will report the
vehicle dropping out to the commander.
9. Medical: Casualties of any type will be immediately reported to the
chain of command. The First Sergeant is responsible for reporting it to
the Battalion. The vehicle with casualties will pull to the side of the
route to await medical assistance, if necessary. A warning triangle will
be placed 100m out to warn oncoming traffic. A red flag will signify
medical casualties on board. After the casualty is taken care of, do NOT
rejoin the column. Await the arrival of the Trail Elements and join them
on order.
10. Actions prior to Roadmarch
-PL gives WARNO
-Quartering Party team identified, link up with XO.
-Lead TC recons route to SP, records time
-Crews perform pre-combat checks
-TCs report status to PLT LDR, PLT LDR reports to CO
-20 minutes prior to moveout soldiers move to roadmarch brief
-Soldiers mount up on vehicles and stand by to move 5 minutes prior to
moveout
11. Actions during the March
-Move out automatically at proper time, no radio call necessary
-Hit SP on time, at proper speed and interval
-Keep march speed steady
-Maintain sector of observation and air guard looking to rear
-Stay off radio unless it is an emergency
-Trail reports disabled vehicles

139
 12. Actions at halts
-CLEAR THE ROUTE OF MARCH
-Lead vehicle halts at designated location
-Trail of column closes up
-As soon as trail vehicle has closed and conducted 2 minute cooldown
it initiates shortcount shutdown on company net
-Company shuts down on shortcount. Timing of halt begins on
shortcount
-Maintain weapons and radio watch on each vehicle
-Be prepared to dismount OP
-Perform during operations checks. See Short Halt Checklist
-Crew remounts vehicle and prepares to move prior to moveout time
-Engines started by shortcount prior to moveout
-Lead vehicle moves out on time without radio call
-During unscheduled halts maintain interval, go to herringbone, wait
for movement to resume
-Company will normally stop for 15 minutes after first hour of
movement, then for 10 minutes after every two hours
13. Actions on Break in Column
-Notify column commander
-Lead of the column continues to move, on order slows
-Rear element moves to catch up speed and rejoins front of column
14. Center of column takes wrong turn
-If TC has lost sight of vehicle to front and is unsure of route he will
notify platoon leader.
-PL/PSG moves up and takes over navigation of element and attempts
to catch up.
-PL notifies column commander that column is split
-If no TC knows where the element is, it will stop, go to hasty defense,
and report to the column commander
NOTE: All TCs should be reading their maps, and have graphics
posted. This event should not occur.
15. Actions on ground attack
-Return fire
-Attempt to drive out of kill zone
-If unable to drive out of kill zone turn frontal armor to threat
-Execute Contact or Action Drills as necessary

140
 -Portion of column not in contact acts as reserve to help extricate pinned
down element
16. Actions on artillery attack
-Continue to move, button up
-Maintain proper interval
-Elements will not drive into artillery impacting to the front unless
necessary. Vehicles attempt to flex L-R around artillery.
-Once attack is over column will execute short halt in a covered and
concealed location to check for damage, recover vehicles, evacuate
casualties.
17. Minefield
-Stop column
-Bypass along alternate route
-Breach if necessary
18. Action on enemy air attack
-Disperse immediately
-Reform after attack, continue march
-Recover damaged vehicles, treat casualties
-See Appendix 2 - BATTLE DRILLS for Company Air Attack Drill

SHORT HALT CHECKLIST: These activities take place when the column
makes a stop for some reason. The intent is to rapidly get set for combat, and take
care of tasks that cannot be accomplished during the march.
-MRS update
-Clean optics
-Clean headlights, bumper numbers, reflective tape
-During ops maintenance
-Check Fluids
-Inspect track, roadwheel hubs
-Check track tension
-Clean weapons
-Clear turret, check loadplan

141
 APPENDIX 7. QUARTERING PARTY

(See also ANNEX J, NIGHT OPERATIONS, for night quartering and assembly
area activities.)

1. General: The Quartering Party is the most important part of all movement
operations and occupation of Assembly Areas. All personnel assigned to the
Quartering Party must be fully knowledgeable on all aspects of the operation,
especially NBC operations. The success of the company team relies upon the
success of the quartering party. The purpose of the quartering party is to clear and
prepare areas prior to occupation by the entire Company.

2. Composition: The Quartering Party will be organized in either a normal

“heavy” configuration, or with a light configuration. The quartering personnel will
consist of the following personnel and vehicles:
Normal (Heavy) Configuration
a. Executive Officer and B-65
b. One vehicle from each PLT (PLT NBC vehicles)
Light Configuration
a. Executive officer in B-65
b. 3 soldiers from each PLT in B-77

3. Communications: The quartering party will operate on the company frequency.

Until released by the XO after arrival of the company main body, the quartering
party will remain on the company frequency and under the XO's command.

4. Execution: The Quartering party Commander (usually the XO) will brief the
members of his team, and line them up prior to moveout. The quartering party will
move along the designated route to the new company area, reporting any
difficulties to the main body. The quartering party may make a short halt prior to
the TAA at the XO’s discretion, and send a tank forward to check the area. Once in
the new location the quartering party will establish security, and place necessary
OPs. They will recon the new location, check for enemy in the AO, clear obstacles,
and test for chemical contamination. Uniform for quartering party movement is
MOPP 2. The quartering party MUST be ready to assume MOPP 4 at the first
indication of chemical presence. A complete NBC survey of the area will be

142
conducted under the supervision of the XO (time allowing). Once complete, the
XO will modify MOPP as appropriate. Platoon positions and sectors of
responsibility will be assigned by the XO. The general scheme of occupation will
be the clock method, with platoons taking portions of the outside, and the
headquarters and trains in the center. PLT representatives will select primary
vehicle positions, using their own vehicle to proof the sites. Positions will be
verified by the XO. Security will be maintained at all times. Once the positions
have been approved by the XO, the quartering party will prepare for the Company's
arrival. PLT representatives will assemble at the entrance point of the TAA
(normally at the six o'clock position), ready to guide their platoons into position.
The XO moves to and meets the company at the BN Release Point. He will lead
the company into the new area. Platoon guides will meet the incoming vehicles at
the entrance to the TAA, mount the lead platoon vehicle, and guide them into
platoon positions. The XO will lead the HQ section into its positions. The intent is
to position guides in such a manner as to avoid stopping at either the BN or
Company RPs. Once the Company has arrived the XO will walk the commander
through the position, and the PLT reps will brief their respective platoon leaders.

- SEE BELOW -

143
 12

LEAD
PLT

CO CP
9 3
MIDDLE
TRAIL PLT
PLATOON GUIDES MEET INCOMING
PLT PLATOON VEHICLES AT TAA
ENTRANCE

B-65 LEADS 6
COMPANY IN B-65 COMPANY MOVEMENT
FROM INTO A TACTICAL
BATTALION RP
ASSEMBLY AREA
LEAD PLT

B-66

MIDDLE PLT

FISTV

TRAIL PLT

144
5. Signal: The Quartering party will mark positions as follows: HQ PLT upside
down “T” CHEMLIGHT, Red with a “/\”, White with a “>”, and Blue with a “V”,
other elements with a sideways “T”. The quartering party guides will signal
themselves to incoming vehicles with range flags: 1st PLT=Red flag, 2nd
PLT=Yellow flag, 3rd PLT=Green flag. Lead vehicles of oncoming platoons will
also display the appropriate color flag to aid recognition by the Q-Party guide.

6. Once Company main body arrives the Quartering Party elements return to the
control of their parent unit. Each Platoon Quartering Party representative will brief
the Platoon Leader and Platoon Sergeant upon their arrival on the specifics of their
respective platoon sectors.

145
 APPENDIX 8. ASSEMBLY AREA ACTIVITIES

(See also APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX A- (QUARTERING PARTY ACTIVITIES),

AND ANNEX J, (NIGHT OPERATIONS) for night assembly area activities)

A. Movement to the TAA

The company will link up with the XO at the Battalion RP, and will be guided to
the TAA. The lead tank of each platoon will display the proper range flag (1st
PLT=Red, 2nd PLT=Yellow flag, 3rd=Green flag)

B. Occupation
The company team will occupy an assembly area utilizing the clock method. The
entry point will be six o'clock, with twelve o'clock facing the expected enemy, and
opposite from the direction of entry. The line platoons will occupy based on the
quartering party plan, if not quartered they will habitually occupy the following
areas: Lead PLT - from 10 - 2, Middle PLT from 2 - 6, Trail PLT from 6 - 10. The
remaining team elements will locate themselves in the center, with the two HQ
tanks facing towards the twelve and six o'clock directions. At the entrance to the
Company TAA the platoons will meet their guides and move into the TAA.
Vehicles will tactically park and maximize the use of trees and natural camouflage.
When occupying individual positions vehicles will occupy from the rear. SEE
APPENDIX 7 (QUARTERING PARTY ACTIVITIES) for occupation diagram.

C. Mounted Occupation
If the Company is returning to a previously quartered/occupied TAA it may conduct
a mounted occupation. A small Q-Party will precede the Company main body to
ensure that the area is still clear. Once notified that it is safe to occupy, the main
body will move to the TAA, and occupy while mounted, all vehicles moving to
their previous locations. Once all platoon report set the Company shortcount will
be given. All crewmen will remain mounted until after the shortcount
shutdown. Light wheel, or other vehicles that are new to the TAA will remain
outside the Company coil until after the shortcount. During a night mounted

146
occupation these vehicles will move in under groundguide after the shortcount

MAINTENANCE
AND MEDICS

B-66

B-77 CP FIST-V

B-65

BATTLECAT STANDARD COIL

- PLATOONS TAKE UP POSITIONS ON PERIMETER
- HQ ELEMENT ESTABLISHES COMPANY CP IN CENTER
- TANK PLATOONS ORIENT ON MOST LIKELY MOUNTED
AVENUES OF APPROACH
- MECH PLT COVERS MOST LIKELY DISMOUNTED
AVENUE OF APPROACH
- ATTACHED ENGINEER PLATOON WOULD TAKE
PORTION OF PERIMETER ORIENTING ON DISMOUNTED
AVENUES OF APPROACH, WITH ACES AND AVLBS IN
CENTER OF COIL

shutdown.

147
 D. Position Markings
All positions will be marked by the quartering party prior to the company's arrival.
The vehicles will be guided to these positions by members of the quartering party.
Positions will be marked by flags during daylight hours and lights at night.
Normally the Platoon vehicle positions will be marked with red, white, blue, and
green (alternate yellow) chemlights or filtered flashlights. If different colored
lights are not available the following method will be used: HQ Vehicle positions
will be marked with an upside down “T”, Red with a “/\” of Chemlites, White with
a ">" of Chemlites, and Blue with a "V" of Chemlites.

E. Priorities of Work
a. Local Security(immediate)
b. LP / OPs Emplaced (5 min.)
c. Emplace NBC Alarms (15 min.)
d. Tank Sketch Card (15 min.)
e. PLT Fire Plan (30 min.)
(1-CO, 1 ea. tank in PLT)
f. Coordinate with adjacent units
g. Erase vehicle tracks leading into TAA
h. Camouflage (2 HRS)
i. Install Platoon hot loop, connect to Company CP(on order)
j. Prepare Obstacles and Mine Plans
k. Select Alternate and Supplemental positions
l . Recon exit routes
m. Continue preparations for upcoming missions
n Perform vehicle and weapon maintenance
p. Boresight weapon systems
q Improve positions
r. Plan and coordinate LOGPAC operations
s. Plan and implement Sleep Plan

F. Site Check
Upon arrival into the Assembly Area, Platoon Leaders will check each vehicle

148
position with the senior member of his platoon quartering party. The XO will walk
the commander through the position, and any adjustment instructions will be given
at this time. After ensuring that all vehicles are situated properly, the platoon
leaders will report to the company commander's location and brief him on the
movement and receive any updates or instructions.

G. Company CP
The Commander will establish a CP in the center of the Assembly Area. It will also
be the area where the trains are located, and logistical activities will take place.
The CP is composed of B-66, B-65, and B-77. The CP is responsible for
maintaining comms with the battalion TOC at all times, as well as monitoring the
A&L net.

149
 H. TAA Security
The TAA will be secured by a series of OPs, manned weapons, and local patrols.
(See below). Dismounted patrols will be the responsibility of the infantry platoon
when attached. When no infantry is attached the tank platoons will be responsible
for conducting patrols. Upon initial occupation the company will launch
dismounted patrols to check out the vicinity of the TAA to locate enemy, potential
threats, and to generally become familiar with the area. Patrols will also be
conducted at night, but will generally be confined to the limits of the TAA. (See
ANNEX J, - NIGHT TAA ACTIVITIES). Platoons will maintain at least one tank

COMPANY SECURITY IN THE TAA

1
3

2
1

2
2

55

4 4

1 Platoons put OPs forward (in vehicles if possible). Mans alert

positions as necessary covering avenues of approach into TAA
2 1 Tank per PLT keeps turret manned

3 Dismounted LP/OP watches specific location.

4 Patrols secure local deadspace

55 HQ Platoon secures it’s own AO

150
with weapons manned, and monitoring the company net or hot loop.

I. Observation Post Activities

a. Observation / Listening Posts (LP/OPs) will be established in all
stationary positions, Assembly Areas, and Defensive Positions. These
positions will be manned at all times while the unit is stationary. At a
minimum, all platoons will establish one LP/OP. Each OP will be
manned by a minimum of two soldiers. The purpose of the OP is to
observe and report. The OP will call in with periodic reports as a
matter of habit, even if no contact is found. The absence of activity is
as important as its presence.
b. Equipment: PLT LDRs will ensure that the following equipment is
available for use at the LP/OP:
1. MOPP gear - complete
2. Personal weapon and an M16A2
3. Kevlar and LCE with full canteens
4. Map with operational overlay
5. Compass
6. Field telephone, wired into support vehicle (PL,PSG)
7. Signaling equipment - flags, pyro, flashlight, chem lights, etc.
8. Visual devices - Binos or NVGs, as appropriate
9. Pick, shovel, sandbags, camouflage material, etc.
c. Personnel Briefings: Prior to being assigned as the LP/OP personnel,
the individual will be fully briefed by, at least, his tank commander.
He will know and understand the following information:
1. Company, Platoon, and his position on the map, map
orientation
2. Company Mission and Commander’s intent
3. OP sector of responsibility
4. Friendly and enemy activity in sector (including local patrols)
5. Likely Avenues of Approach (mounted and dismounted)
6. Actions on observing enemy activity
7. Withdrawal criteria
8. Relief information - when and by whom
9. Challenge and Password
10. What is he looking for. What should he expect to see.

151
 J. Standards in the TAA
a. Soldiers will remain in uniform at all times unless sleeping.
b. OPs will be continuously manned unless otherwise specified
c. Platoons will maintain one tank turret manned at all times.
d. Platoons will be monitoring hot loop or company net
e. M-8 alarms are checked every 6 hours
f. Leaders enforce no movement time at night.
g. Field sanitation standards are maintained
h. Vehicles are camouflaged to standard
i. All vehicular movement is done with ground guides
j. Noise and light discipline enforced
k. Platoon Leaders and Platoon Sergeants conduct periodic
checks
l. TAA entrances and exit routes enforced

K. Stand-To Procedures
A. Stand to is accomplished every morning when in TAAs, hide
positions, or battle positions. Stand to is conducted in two phases:
Lean To, and Stand To. Lean to is the wake up, and preparation phase
prior to stand to.
B. 45-60 Minutes Prior to BMNT (Lean To)
1. All personnel will be awaken
2. Gear will be stowed
3. Radios checks will be made,
4. Pre-combat checks will be done
5. Sensitive items checked
6. TIS will be set to standby
7. Obstacles will be checked for covert breaching.
8. Local security patrols will be conducted to ensure that the area
is still clear of enemy activity, and that no obstacles have been
laid that would hinder the Company from moving at stand to.
C. 15 Minutes prior to BMNT
1. Vehicles will go to REDCON 1A
2. OPs will remain posted and hot loops will remain installed (if
the company does not anticipate movement).
3. Local patrols are recalled.
4. Platoons will report GREEN 2 sensitive items status, and the

152
status of local protective and tactical obstacles
3. At the commanders shortcount the company goes to REDCON
1 (This will normally not occur in hide positions).
D. Stand To (BMNT)
1. At “Stand To” all crews (minus OPs if still posted) are at
positions, optics cooled down, weapons manned, gear stowed,
and ready to roll out. TCs report REDCON 1.

2. Prior to reporting “Stand-to complete”, PLs will ensure that

"rollover drills" , NBC, and Commo checks are complete.
3. XO reports “Stand To complete”, and “Green 2 Tubes Up” to
Battalion NCS.
4. If the company must move quickly the OPs will be withdrawn,
and the hot loop wire thrown over the side.
5. Unit will be released to lower REDCON levels at the
commanders discretion PLT LDRs will report to the CO for a
situation update and PLT SGTs will report logistical requirements to
the 1SG.

L. OPSEC in the TAA

See also ANNEX F - (OPERATIONAL SECURITY), and ANNEX A, APPENDIX
4, TAB D: (SECURITY OF THE COMPANY AREA)
a. Maximize Camouflage with natural and artificial materials.
b. Use camouflage netting as necessary
c. Do not cut brush for cammo from within TAA. Get necessary
brush at least 200-300 meters away
d. Replace natural brush cammo every day.
e. Set up Thermal curtain with tank tarp 10-15 meters away from
the tank in the most likely direction of enemy observation.
f. Enforce noise, light, litter discipline.
g. Erase tracks leading into assembly area. make it appear that
vehicles passed through but did not stop.
h. Utilize Hot Loop instead of FM if in place over 12 hours
i. Minimize movement of vehicles in TAA
j. Patrol and clear local areas after occupying TAA.
k. Patrol interior of TAA during hours of darkness.

153
 l. In the event of contact the Company will go to REDCON 1,
and will remain until released to lower REDCON by the
Commander.
m. Have an effective fire distribution plan for the TAA.

M. Occupation of Assembly Area Checklist

a. Select area based on:
-Concealment
-Dispersion
-Routes in and out
-Drainage
-Security

b. Produce OPORD/Sketch
-Designate tentative areas for each unit.
-ID Quartering Party with leader
-Plan security
-Set order of march, signals, marking
- Plan for defense of TAA.
-Designate Priority of work
-Limited visibility plan.
c. Quartering party
-Select sites for subordinate units.
-Secure the Site
- NBC check of the area
-Mark routes and positions, post guides.
d. Occupy position
-XO meets main body at release point, leads to TAA
- Move in without halting (use guides)
-Light discipline maintained
-PLT guides bring in vehicles
-Tracks erased
-Simultaneous shutdown
-Camouflage
e. Begin Assembly area activities

154
 APPENDIX 9. OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS

A. Relief in Place

See ANNEX D, APPENDIX 2, TAB D - ORDERS FORMATS for relief in place

OPORD shell

1. General. The Company will often be given the mission of being

relieved in place or relieving another unit in place. There are two types of relief in
place: Deliberate, and Hasty. There are also several methods. This APPENDIX
covers relief in the position. Relief may also be accomplished by the relieving unit
either attacking through, of establishing defensive positions behind the relieved
force, who then pulls back out of the line. The key to success in this operation is to
ensure that the operation takes place smoothly, and without the enemy noticing.
For this reason a relief in place is often carried out at night. The relief in place is
carried out in the following sequence:
a. Linkup and coordination
b. Reconnaissance
c. Troop Leading Procedures
d. Execution
2. Basic fundamentals
a. Issue FRAGO immediately, (sequential or simultaneous
relief?)
b. Key leaders conduct linkup / coordination
c. CO-locate HQs
d. Maximize security
e. Relieve CSS after Combat units
f. Transfer extra wire, ammo, supplies to incoming unit
3. Linkup / coordination(Composed of XO, FIST, PLs)
a. Enemy situation
b. Discuss the existing defensive and security plan
c. Discuss how responsibility will shift
d. Discuss use of guides, marking of routes
e. Review security plan for relief
f. Review obstacle / fire support plan
g. Establish sequence / method of the relief
h. Determine specific point for the transfer of responsibility (this

155
is normally when the relief is 2/3 completed)
i. Exchange SOI information

4. Recon the Position

a. Recon the area with key leaders, to as low a level as possible
b. Ensure security is posted
c. Check the routes into and out of the position
d. Relieved unit personnel walk relieving unit through positions.
Cover primary, alternate and subsequent BPs, routes in the
position, Limited visibility positions, ammo prestock points
5. Troop Leading Procedures
a. Leaders return to relieving unit
b. Plan for relief finalized, briefed, rehearsed
c. Preparations for relief completed
d. See ANNEX D, Appendix 2, Tab D - Orders Formats for
Relief in Place OPORD
6. Execution:
Sequential Relief
a. Co-locate HQ, trains
b. Incoming company moves to TAA in rear of unit being
relieved.
c. Move in first relieving platoon
d. Relieve each vehicle one at a time
e. Turn over range cards and obstacles
f. Some personnel may stay behind to orient incoming unit
g. Outgoing unit pulls back to TAA
h. Battle handover after relief 2/3 complete
Simultaneous Relief
a. All PLTs move in behind outgoing PLTs
b. All vehicles relieved simultaneously
c. Range cards and obstacles turned over
d. Outgoing PLT moves to TAA.
7. Hasty Relief
a. Accomplished similar to a normal simultaneous relief, but with
less coordination
b. Relieved unit may shift laterally out of position, staying
oriented on the enemy, but vacates positions for the incoming
unit.
c. Fastest Method: Relieving unit moves into existing unit

156
positions, TCs talk and coordinate one on one, relieved unit
pulls out rapidly.

157
 B. River Crossings

1. General. Rivers will be crossed with minimal delay to continued

operations. The Company may execute hasty crossings utilizing the AVLB,
or may participate in deliberate crossings run at Brigade or Battalion level.
2. Preparation for hasty crossing.
a. Unit positions bridging assets forward.
b. Smoke and artillery is prepared.
c. Unit is briefed on conduct of the crossing.
3. Planning for the Hasty crossing
a. Movement to the crossing site
b. Assault crossing phase
c. Buildup on the far shore
d. Breakout from the bridgehead
4. Execution of the Hasty Crossing
a. Hasty crossings will be accomplished similar to obstacle breaching drill.
b. Overwatch element moves into place
c. Dismounted infantry crosses, establishes far side security
d. Bridging, security, and assault assets prepare to move
e. Artillery and smoke prep occurs (if necessary)
f. River is bridged
g. Security element moves to far side, secures site
h. Assault element moves through and continues mission
5. Deliberate River Crossing
a. Company will take part in deliberate river crossing only as part of larger
unit.
b. Company moves to Staging Area on near side of the river where
briefings and final FRAGOs are issued. Life preservers issued if
available
c. Company moves to crossing site and comes under control of crossing
area commander
d. Company crosses as directed by crossing area commander
e. Tank crews drop off crossing equipment on far side, and continue with
mission
6. River crossing on rafts
a. Accomplished much like deliberate crossing
b. Company moves to staging area

158
c. Crews briefed, life preservers handed out
d. Crews move on order to crossing site
f. Crew dismounts (except Driver)
g. Driver remains in tank, hatch open, engine running
h. Driver moves onto raft under direction of raft crew
i. Tank sets parking brake, rest of crew mounts raft
j. Raft crosses to far side
k. Crew runs off of raft, tank follows
l. Crew turn life preservers over to raft crew
m. Raft returns to pick up next tank
n. Crew mounts tank, moves to TAA, awaits remainder of company

159
 C. Passage of Lines

1. General:
a. Unit being passed through is referred to as stationary. Unit conducting
movement is referred to as passing force.
b. Weapons control status is similar to that for ADA:
Weapons FREE=engage targets not identified as friendly
Weapons TIGHT=engage targets positively identified as enemy
Weapons HOLD=do not engage unless attacked
c. Passages of lines are normally conducted in the following phases:
Reconnaissance, Linkup/Coordination, Execution
d. For forward passage the LD is always forward of the stationary unit,
usually at the Battle Hand-off Line (BHL).
e. BHL will generally be the limit of the stationary units direct fire
weapons
f. Passages will take place during hours of limited visibility if possible.
g. The three possibilities for a passage of lines are Forward, Rearward, and
Hasty. All are conducted similarly. This TAB contain specifics
pertaining to each of these operations.

2. Preparation: Upon receiving the command to execute a passage of lines, the

passing unit commander will notify the XO of the coordination time and
location. He will also issue a warning order to the PLTs. The XO will make
the required reconnaissance, and coordination, reporting all information back
to the CO, by radio if necessary. The stationary unit commander will also
give a WARNO to ensure that all personnel know a passage is being planned.

3. General Sequence
a. Higher HQ designates Linkup point for coordination
b. Passing unit conducts reconnaissance
b. Stationary unit monitors passing unit net
c. Liaison parties link up and exchange information.
d. Units ensure primary and alternate passage points are determined
e. ID security forces, and place in overwatch at Passage Point
g. Company CPs and trains co-locate (during forward passage)
f. Passing Unit moves to contact point, meets guide, forms column
h. Guides lead element through

160
 (1) Rearward Passage
- CO Trains
- Support Elements
-CO CP
-Platoons
(2) Forward passage
-Platoons
-CO CP
-Support Elements
-CO Trains
i. Passing unit deploys (or moves to Intermediate Assembly Area (IAA))
j. Battle hand-off criteria:
- Forward Passage - When Platoons have deployed
- Rearward Passage - When Platoons are in direct fire range of
overwatch
4. Reconnaissance. Conducted by passing force
a. Determine covered and concealed route to contact points
b. Select tentative passage lane/route
c. Locate stationary units battle positions, trains, CP.
d. Select redeployment point (RDP) where unit moves into column
formation
e. Select an Intermediate Assembly Area (IAA) for the passing unit (to
move from in a forward passage, or to in a rearward passage). IAA
should be out of direct fire range of the forward unit, and have rapid
access to the passage lane.

5. Linkup/Coordination Unit representatives meet at linkup point established

by the HQ ordering passage. The following information is exchanged.
a. Enemy Situation, known and suspected positions
b. Friendly situation / disposition, exchange graphics, fire plan
c. Friendly barriers, location and lanes, obstacle plan
d Routes through obstacles
e. Number and type of vehicles to be passed
f. Time of passage
g. Order of march of vehicles.
h. Location of friendly Contact Point, Passage Point.
i. Location and number of guides
j. Passage Route, including SP, RP and Contact Points
k. Alternate routes

161
 l. Line of Departure
m. IAA location
n. Attack positions (or TAA for rearward passage)
o. Traffic control points and composition
p. Supporting fires, availability and location
q. Battle Hand-off criteria (where, when, what conditions)
r. Actions on contact with enemy (including responsibility for fire support)
s. Combat Service Support available by friendly unit (including
responsibility for maintenance and medical evac)
t. Passing unit designation, call signs
u. Stationary unit designation, call sign
v. Marking of vehicles passing
w. Recognition signals, first and last vehicle
x. SOI information, who operates on which net

6. Movement through the passage lane. During passage, vehicle commanders

MUST ensure the following:
a. Once entering the passage route, NEVER STOP. Bypass damaged
vehicles quickly, utilizing alternate routes if necessary.
b. Ensure the vehicle is marked as prescribed.
c. Orient gun tube towards the enemy at all times.
d. Unless otherwise directed, if contact with the enemy is made return fire
and continue to move through the passage. Seek temporary fighting
positions, if necessary after clearing the passage route.
e. Forward passing unit will be prepared to deploy prior to the BHL/LD if
in contact unless obstacles restrict movement.

7. Isolated or cut off units or individuals - Re-entry of Friendly Lines. Units

or individuals are sometimes cut off from the main body, or are forced to
conduct a passage of lines at a point other than that previously coordinated. If
this occurs use the following procedure.
a. Attempt to gain radio contact. Stationary units should be aware of the
possibility of cutoff units operating forward conducting unplanned
passage of lines.
b. Attempt preliminary coordination by radio. Stationary unit should be
requested to send representative forward for linkup.
c. If no radio contact is achieved, move to a covered and concealed location
outside of direct fire range of stationary unit.
d. Send an individual or team forward to establish contact with the

162
 stationary unit . Ensure a white flag is available if stationary unit has no
idea that you are to their front. Use standard challenge and password
e. Conduct linkup/coordination, and passage as per standard passage of
lines SOP.
f. Notify higher headquarters once passage has been completed.

8. Passage of Lines C2
1. Battle position always under command of the stationary force
2. Stationary unit has control of area to its front to the limit of its direct
fire capability. This will be designated the battle hand-off line (BHL).
3. Rearward passing unit has control of area forward of battle hand-off line
4. If no emergency arises the passage is controlled from the co-located
command posts.

Forward Passage of Lines

a. Prior to passage CPs (and trains if necessary) co-locate.
b. Passing unit moves to attack position and sends forward representative
to contact point
c. Stationary unit sends guides to Contact Point
d. Units establish contact using recognition signals, report linkup to higher
HQ
e. Passing unit moves to passing lane
f. Stationary unit guides passing unit into passage lane
g. Movement conducted under radio listening silence
h. Unit moves through passage lane
-Standard passage order is combat elements, support elements, trains
-Fire support channels prepared
-Passing unit prepared to maneuver if attacked
-Stationary unit counts vehicles through.
-Passing unit goes from weapons hold to weapons tight
-Stationary unit goes to weapons tight
i. Passing unit deploys at LD
-Most critical phase
-Passing unit may have to deploy early if in contact
j. Passing unit calls smoke/fire as necessary to assist movement
k. Passing unit assumes control of zone forward of the BHL
l. Passing unit goes to weapons free
m. Higher HQ notified when passage is complete

163
Rearward Passage of Lines (see ANNEX D, Appendix 2, TAB D -
ORDERS FORMATS for Rearward Passage of Lines and Battle Handoff OPORD
format)

a. Unit representative link up and co-locate command posts

b. Information is exchanged and coordination is made
c. All stationary crews are informed of the time and location of the passage
d. Passing unit sends vehicle to contact point
e. Stationary unit sends guides to contact point
f. Unit exchange signals, link up
g. Linkup complete reported to higher headquarters
h. Passing vehicles move towards passage point transitions to column,
i. Passing unit goes to weapons tight, keeping weapons oriented in enemy
direction
j. Stationary force goes to weapons tight
k. Stationary unit fire support ready to support passing unit
l. Passing unit conducts passage
-Trains and support elements come through first
-Combat elements will be last through
m. Stationary unit counts vehicles through
n. Passing unit confirms when all vehicles are through, goes to weapons
hold
o. Stationary unit closes passage lane, goes to weapons free
p. Passing unit continues moving to IAA or TAA.
-Maintains local security
-Accounts for vehicles, personnel, sensitive items.
q. Report sent to higher HQ reporting passage complete

Hasty Passage of Lines

The tactical situation often may not allow the for the execution of the procedures as
outlined. Hasty passages will emphasize speed of execution, ease of coordination,
flexibility, and tactical responsiveness.
1. Reconnaissance. Conducted by passing unit if time permits. Usually
done by map.
2. Linkup. Unit commanders or XOs linkup at designated point if time
permits, otherwise coordination is done on the radio

164
 3. Execution.
a. Stationary unit ensures that all personnel understand that a
passage is to be conducted, at approximately what time, and
what recognition signals can be expected.
a. Passing unit displays recognition signals
b. Passing unit sends vehicle to contact point if time permits
c. Stationary unit sends Guide to Contact Point
d. Passing unit moves and makes contact with stationary unit,
reports contact to higher HQ.
e. Passing unit moves to passage lane
-ALL vehicles must have recognition symbols mounted
-Gun tubes remain oriented in enemy direction
-Guided by stationary unit guides
-Additional guides posted at obstacles or critical points
-Movement conducted under listening silence if possible
f. Passing unit moves through passage lane/point
-All weapons go to Weapons Tight (stationary and passing
force)
-Use column formation for rapid rearward passage
-Use battle formation for rapid forward passage
-Stationary unit fire support prepared
-Pre-planned fires executed.
-Passing unit reports to stationary unit and higher HQ when
passage is complete.
g. Passing unit (rearward passage), or stationary unit(forward
passage) goes to weapons tight, supports by fire if necessary.
Ensures all troops know of passage of lines.

165
 D. Consolidation and Reorganization

Upon the completion of a tactical operation, or between phases the company will
conduct consolidation and reorganization. The purpose is to get the company set
quickly for follow up phases of the operation, and to take care of the numerous
logistical/admin tasks that cannot be done otherwise. The consolidation on the
objective is a critical time: control is difficult, the adrenaline of fighting is wearing
off, and enemy action is highly likely. If the company does not have to continue the
attack in pursuit, or towards a follow on objective it will consolidate in the vicinity
of the objective it occupies. CONSOLIDATION AND REORGANIZATION MUST
BE ACCOMPLISHED RAPIDLY.

A. Consolidation: Elimination of resistance, preparation for counterattack

1. Eliminate remaining enemy on the objective, or firing onto it.
2. Maintain pressure on the enemy by firing at his last known location.
3. Establish a hasty defense orienting on the enemy’s most likely avenue
of approach. Conduct occupation of a battle position drill. Avoid enemy
BP as it may be targeted by artillery.
4. Establish security as soon as possible. Post OPs and send out patrols
as soon as possible.
5. Plan fires, verify TRPs, shoot in targets, plan FPF, designate trigger
and target points and responsibilities, target likely enemy avenues of
approach. Get eyes forward to his enemy as he approaches.
6. Coordinate with adjacent units.
7. Be prepared to check enemy position for equipment, prisoners, or
information of value. Radio and COMSEC equipment, maps,
graphics, and logistical and medical supplies are of value. On order
prepare captured military hardware for destruction or recovery.
8. Conduct detailed reconnaissance of area for enemy still hiding or
injured.
9. This is the tactical portion of the task, and is usually handled by the
Platoon Leader.

B. Reorganization. Prepares the company for follow on missions

1. Replace key personnel, Re-establish chain of command.
2. Treat and evacuate casualties, POWs, damaged equipment.
3. Report combat status/SITREP higher immediately.
4. Submit vehicle, personnel, Class III, V reports and requests on A&L
net ASAP.
5. Redistribute ammo as necessary.
6. Arrange for arrival of emergency resupply
7. This is the CSS portion of the task, and is usually handled by the PSG.
C. Break in Action Checklist: This is accomplished during minor pauses in
tactical operations. It serves as an abbreviated form of Consolidation and

166
Reorganization.

1. Crew level
a. MRS update, Turret self test
b. Treat and evacuate casualties
c. Move ammo to ready rack
d. Maintain local security
e. Maintain air guard
f. Check sensitive items
g. Report Class III, V status
h. Stay on radio
i. Restore load plan
j. Do quick vehicle walkaround to check for damage

2. Platoon level
a. Establish hasty defensive plan
b. Evacuate casualties and damaged vehicles
c. Check sensitive items
d. Cross level Class V and personnel as necessary
e. Report Class III, V status to 1SG.
f. Update Platoon on situation .

D. Ammo Redistribution Under Fire

1. To prevent ready racks from becoming empty for the entire unit at
approximately the same time.
2. Occurs as soon as one tank in the section has expended 8 rounds from the
ready rack
3. Tank reports it is going to redistribute ammo
4. Wingman tank covers assigned sector
5. Tank keeps round in tube, backs to turret down
6. Refills ready rack from semi ready
7. Re-occupies position and takes sector responsibility back from wingman
8. See also ANNEX C, Appendix 1 - Supply, for Ammo Redistribution Under
Fire
details

167
 E. Battalion/Company Reserve

1. Typical missions: Often the Company or one of the platoons will receive the
mission of reserve. This is a critical mission, and usually determines the fate of the
operation as the reserve is normally committed at the critical place and time. The
typical missions assigned the reserve force may be offensive or defensive based o
the situation. Prior to this mission the reserve force will be assigned several Be
Prepared missions that it may execute during the upcoming operation. Normal
offensive missions include follow on and support, exploit, establish hasty defense
to defeat enemy reserve, and conduct forward passage of lines and take mission of
lead company. Defensive missions include blocking of penetrations,
counterattacking to defeat penetrations, counterattacking follow on enemy
echelons, reinforcement of forward defending units, counterattacking to reoccupy
positions seized by the enemy, and counterattacking through forward defensive
positions to defeat withdrawing enemy.

2. Fundamentals: There are a few fundamentals in the use and constitution of the
reserve.
- Always have a reserve, from Company level up.
- The critical phase of the battle is the commitment of reserve.
- The Strength of reserve is it’s mobility and striking power. Don’t
sacrifice either by giving it a stationary role or splitting it up. Don’t
fritter away reserve with multiple small missions. Keep it together and
strike with it as a unit.
- Reserve used to reinforce or ensure success, not to forestall failure.
- The fundamental to success for the reserve force is the same as any
other tactical operation: Recon, Recon, and Rehearse.
- Once committed the reserve becomes the main effort. Fully support it
with all CAS, Artillery, and other combat multipliers available.
- Once reserve has been committed immediately begin constitution of
new one using elements currently in contact. Withdraw them from
contact as possible, allow time for consolidation, reorganization, and
preparation.

3. Preparations: The preparations for a reserve mission are broken down into
several categories: Planning, Recon / Coordination, and rehearsal.

a) Planning. Upon receiving the mission of reserve planning should

begin immediately. When doing mission analysis differentiate
between On Order (we will execute, just a matter of when), and Be
Prepared (we may execute). Plan for the various contingencies based
on their likelihood of execution. Ensure plans are simple in their
concept, and that all soldiers know the commanders intent of what
they have to accomplish. Finish plan quickly, then focus effort on

168
 recon and rehearsal.

b) Recon / Coordination. Recon for the mission of reserve is conducted

much the same as is recon for other missions. Prioritize the recon
effort on the critical pieces of information that you need to know
about. Recon routes, and establish time-distance relationships,
prepare and recon potential BPs. Ensure that ALL TCs ( at a
minimum) make the reconnaissance. Along with the recon
coordination will be taking place with whichever unit in whose sector
you may be operating in. This coordination should cover the
following:
- Exchange information on enemy situation
- Discuss probable enemy COAs in the area in question
- Review the specifics of the terrain
- Discuss friendly situation - strengths, weapons, etc.
- Discuss missions, respective commanders intents for each unit
- Discuss concepts of the operation, plan for the battle
- Review the criteria for battle hand-off
- Discuss methods to combine the effects of the two units
- Discuss / walk positions and routes in the BPs
- Ensure both sides know locations and movement routes of all
forces involved
- Exchange obstacle, artillery information. Review obstacle free
areas, lanes through obstacles, closing criteria for lanes.
Exchange fire plans.
- Discuss signal issues: who operates on whose net, recognition
signals, pyro
- Coordinate for joint rehearsal time.

c) Rehearsal: This is critical in the eventual success or failure of

mission. The best rehearsal that can be done is mounted. This can
usually done in conjunction with the recon. Drive the routes and
establish time - distance relationships. Determine how long it will
take you to get to where you need to go. Ensure drivers are familiar
with the route. Rehearse movement and battle drill techniques, and
review fire control and distribution. Occupy BPs that you plan to use.
Ensure that all crews know the locations of obstacles and friendly
positions. Review the casualty evacuation plan. Prepare to fight the
battle without radio communications, or in limited visibility. See
ANNEX D, Appendix 3 - Rehearsals.

4. Execution: Execution of the reserve mission will be either On Order, or a Be

Prepared mission. The reserve will usually know the conditions and purpose that
will dictate it’s commitment, and will hopefully receive a bit of warning time prior
to moveout. The leader of the reserve must not depend on this for his plan however,

169
and must keep abreast of the tactical situation and issue the necessary WARNOs
and FRAGOs to keep his element ready to move when needed. The reserve will
normally occupy hide or back-up battle positions in depth of the unit supported,
but may move throughout the sector based on potential employment as the situation
develops. Once committed the reserve force carries out it’s tactical mission just as
it would any other offensive or defensive mission. The reserve must remember that
it will be committed to the main effort of the battle, and that the unit’s success or
failure hinges on the reserves ability to accomplish it’s assigned mission.
Commanders intent must be the overriding consideration during the execution, and
if the reserve must deviate from the plan to achieve the desired results on the
enemy then this is done. Execution must be violent and sudden. Everything must
be done to maximize the effect on the enemy. Concentrate your combat power, do
not split your force. Accept risk, mass your forces, and synchronize in other combat
multipliers such as artillery and CAS. Move quickly and decisively. Destroy or
defeat him before he has time to respond. Shock and decisiveness will bring far
greater success than caution and deliberate movement. Sacrifice synchronization
for speed as long as your attack is massed.

5. Constitution of new reserve: Once the reserve has been committed a new one
must be formed immediately. This is accomplished by withdrawing units currently
in contact. They are then given the opportunity to consolidate, reorganize, and
prepare for their employment as reserve. This preparation time may be short, but
must be maximized to increase their effectiveness once committed. By pulling
them out immediately this can be accomplished. Often only a small portion of the
new reserve may be pulled out at first due to the tactical situation This will form
the core around which the reserve will be built as other elements are later pulled
out of combat. By its nature this will usually be an ad-hoc organization that will be
composed of parts and remnants of various units.

170
 APPENDIX 10. DIRECT FIRE PLANNING

1. Purpose. This appendix summarizes the principles and techniques employed

in Company direct fire planning and control. The goal of fire planning is to ensure
that all sectors of responsibility are being scanned as necessary, and that fires are
focused to maximize their effect on the enemy. This appendix covers Company fire
control, and the distribution of the fire of platoons. The techniques here are control
techniques that are “above and beyond” normal fire control and distribution
measures used at Platoon level, but must be understood by all TCs and gunners for
them to be effective.
2. Principles and planning
a. Mass Fires. Place accurate fires on multiple enemy threats
simultaneously. Massing fires is is 10 rounds hitting 10 targets, not 10 rounds
hitting 1 target.
b. Leaders control fires. Ensure simultaneous engagement of different
targets, ensure most dangerous targets are killed first.
c. Open Fire early. Volley fire to create shock.
d. Focus. The leaders must be able to orient and focus their fires at
recognizable TRPs.
e. Distribute. Engage critical targets first. Avoid overkill. Expose only the
vehicles needed to kill the targets that can be engaged. Vehicles engage
targets they were designed to kill: tanks vs tanks, Bradley vs BMP.
f. Shift. Refocus fires as necessary.
g. Rehearse the fire plan. Rehearse actions on the objective, in the EA..
h. Fire plans must be understood by the soldiers who execute them.
i. Keep unit scanning and sensing.
j. Keep crews calm during the fight, keep cross talking, enjoy the fight
k. Kill most dangerous first. Vehicles that cannot range you can wait.
BMPs with ATGMs at 3000-4000 meters may be more dangerous than tanks.
l. Understand that Sabot kills are tough to sense as a kill whereas HEAT
almost always results in catastrophic destruction of the target.
m. Plan for up to 50% friendly casualties, be redundant in planning and
assigning sectors.
n. Plan for different effective ranges of weapons, i.e. TOW at 3500 meters,
Tanks at 2500 meters, 25mm at 1500 meters, and Dragon at 800 meters

171
 3. Direct fire METT-T Analysis.
a. Mission:
1)What is the purpose of the fires?
- Kill them before they reach ..............
- Prevent them from moving to ..., Prevent them from firing
on....

b. Enemy:
1) Offensive situation:
- How long has enemy been in position?
- Possible location of enemy kill sacks.
- Key terrain, possible BPs.
- Expected range of engagement.
- Possible obstacles, avenues of approach of reserves.
2) Defensive situation:
- Most likely avenue of approach (not necessarily the one you
want him to take).
- Time for enemy to cross EA.
- Actions he will take once you open fire.
- Formations he will probably use, probable dismount points.
- Expected range of engagement, where will he start shooting.
- Expected actions at obstacles.
c. Troops:
1) What weapons will destroy the enemy at what ranges.
2) Where should weapons be positioned.
3) What are weapon strengths, weaknesses?
- Rate of fire
- Accuracy
- Signature
- Number of rounds that can be fired before reload
- Reload time
- TIS capability
4) What is the skill of troops
d. Terrain and weather:
1)What terrain enhances or hinders direct fire.
2)Where will we get line of sight on the enemy.
3) How will weather/darkness affect plan
e. Time.
1) How long to occupy BPs.

172
 2) How much warning time do I need.
3) How long will enemy be in EA.
4) How many can I kill in this time.
5) How long can we sustain fire before reloading. Reload time.
6) When will we be in range of enemy direct or indirect fires.
7) How much time to move to alternate or subsequent positions.
4. Fire control
a. TRP: Target Reference Point used to focus fires on a specific point, to
define the EA. Usually set on an identifiable object or piece of terrain.
TRPs are used to focus fires, not just to delineate sectors. They are either
named (TRP “Antenna”) or are numbered. TRPs are normally marked on
identifiable points (crossroads, tower), but may be placed in open
engagement areas by using picket poles wrapped in engineer tape, with a
.50 CAL thermalizing box.
b. Engagement Area. Terrain Oriented control measure based on enemy
locations and formations. Defines where the commander wants to focus
the Company’s fires.
c. Fire Patterns: Enemy oriented fire control measure based on the enemy
formation. Defined by left/right, near/far. Patterns will include the
following:
Frontal
Cross
Depth
Heavy Left/Right
d. Fire Techniques. Used to control the rate, volume, and observation of
fires, as well as the number of vehicles firing. Techniques include:
-Observed Fire. Fire for which point of impact is observed. Fires
will be adjusted and controlled based on observations.
-Volley Fire. Simultaneous, creates great shock effect
-Alternating Fire. One vehicle fires, while wingman observes
-Massed Fire. Simultaneous sustained fires on multiple enemy
threats
e. Fire Commands. Company fire commands focus on effective distribution
and control of platoon fires. Platoon fire commands will be similar but
will add appropriate weapons and ammo. Fire commands will generally
consist of the following elements:
-Alert (call signs)
-Weapon/Ammo to be used
-Target description

173
 -Location of TGT, method of focusing fires
-Control/ Pattern of fires
-How fires will be initiated (immediate, at command, specific
event)
f. Engagement Priorities. Assigns specific friendly systems to target enemy
systems. Use each weapon in best role.

g. Overall: The Commander and Platoon Leaders should ensure that each
TC clearly understands the following:
- The tank’s sector of responsibility
- The TRPs in its sector and those in adjacent sectors if they may have to
be fired into.
- The main effort of scan. The most likely point of enemy movement

5. Fighting the Direct Fire Engagement: The goal is a planned and

rehearsed engagement, coupled with good battle drills and effective use of TRPs to
distribute fires. This is the critical phase of all actions. The Commander controls
the fires of the Platoons, the Platoon Leaders Control the fires of the tanks, and the
TCs control the engaging of designated targets by their crews. It is key to have the
wingmen talking to each other, and the Platoon Leader controlling and distributing
fires. The Platoon Leader or Platoon Sergeant also work the indirect fires brought
into the engagement through the Commander or FIST. The Platoon Sergeant reports
all contacts to the Company Commander. It is essential to have calm and
disciplined radio nets. All transmissions should be calm, brief, and to the point.

6. Checklists for direct fire: You should be able to answer the following
questions after you have completed your direct fire plan.
a. What is the mission and desired effect of our fires
b. Where do we want to kill the enemy
c. Where will we engage him from
d. Where is the enemy, how will he enter and cross the EA
e. Which enemy systems do we want to kill first
f. How will we initiate fires with each weapon
g. Which weapon will fire first, which will sense
h. What is the plan for fighting with casualties (redundancy)
i. What will platoons focus fires on (How will platoons know
where to engage, can they see and understand control
measures)

174
j. How will we shift fires if necessary
k. How will the enemy react to our fires
l. What will we do to enemy once he reacts to our fire.
m. Where will I position leaders to control fires
o. Where can I position sniper tanks with keyhole shots
p. Does the plan avoid overkill
q. How do direct fires integrate with obstacles and indirect fires

175
 7. Common Gunnery Problems
a. No PLT or CO fire commands
b. No sensing between vehicles
c. Ranges not passed to Bradley crews
d. Bradleys engage with 25mm outside of effective range
e. All vehicles fire at easy targets, no fire distribution
f. Too much useless chatter on Company net
g. Platoon leaders not cross talking
h. Commander too busy with direct fire fight to use artillery

8. Defensive Fire Planning: Distributing and focusing fires is the most

critical, as well as difficult portion of any defensive plan. Without a good plan fires
cannot be shifted or massed. Some targets will have many weapons firing on them,
while others are not engaged. Our fire control is static, the enemy is moving. We
need to maximize the effect on him as he moves through a stationary engagement
area. This is intended as a guide to familiarize Battlecat soldiers with the various
methods we may employ. The actual technique used will depend on METT-T. The
following are some techniques used by the Company during direct fire planning
and combat.
Defensive fire distribution techniques :

- Divided EA (Tic Tac Toe)

- Sector Method
- Closest TRP Method
- Target Array Method
- Quadrant Method
- Fire Patterns Method

- SEE BELOW -

176
 FAR FAR FAR
LEFT TRP 4 CENTER RIGHT
EA BATTLECAT

CENTER CENTER
LEFT CENTER
RIGHT
TRP 1

TRP 2
NEAR NEAR NEAR
LEFT CENTER RIGHT

RED

BLUE
WHITE

DIVIDED ENGAGEMENT AREA (TIC TAC TOE)

- SPLIT EA INTO SEVERAL BOXES, USUALLY TIC TAC TOE
- EACH BOX MAY ALSO HAVE A TRP
- FAR BOXES FOR TOW, MIDDLE BOXES TANK GUNS NEAR
BOXES 25MM, DRAGON
- PLATOONS NEED TO BE ABLE TO SHIFT FIRES INTO OTHER
SECTORS
- PROBLEM: ENEMY MAY NOT DISTRIBUTE FORCES EQUALLY
THROUGH EA. PREPARE TO SHIFT FIRES AS NECESSARY
“RED, THIS IS BATTLE 6, ORIENT TOWS FAR LEFT
THROUGH FAR RIGHT, MAIN EFFORT TRP 4, ORIENT 25MM
NEAR LEFT AND CENTER, WHITE ORIENT CENTER LEFT-
CENTER, MAIN EFFORT TRP 1, BLUE ORIENT CENTER-
CENTER RIGHT, MAIN EFFORT TRP 2”

177
 EA BATTLECAT
TRP 4
TRP 1

TRP 2

TRP 3

TRP 5

RED BLUE
WHITE

SECTOR TECHNIQUE
- TERRAIN BASED METHOD TO ALLOW COMMANDER TO
ASSIGN RESPONSIBILITY FOR DIFFERENT AREAS ON
GROUND BETWEEN TWO TRPS
- CAN BE USED TO DESIGNATE L/R LIMITS
- GOOD FOR ASSIGNING SECTORS FOR SCANNING AND
SECURITY, BUT INSUFFICIENT FOR REAL FIRE CONTROL
- VERY SIMPLE SYSTEM, DOES NOT PROVIDE FLEXIBILITY
OR CONTROL NEEDED TO FOCUS, MASS, SHIFT AND
DISTRIBUTE FIRES
“RED 1, THIS IS BATTLE 6, ORIENT TRP 1-3, MAIN
EFFORT TRP 2, WHITE ORIENT TRP 2-4, MAIN EFFORT
TRP 3, BE PREPARED TO SHIFT ORIENTATION TO TRPS
1-3, BLUE ORIENT TRP 2-4, MAIN EFFORT TRP 5”

178
 TRP 4
TRP 1
TRP 4
TRP 1
TRP 3

TRP 3
TRP 2

TRP 2

WHITE

RED
BLUE RED
WHITE

CLOSEST TRP
TARGET METHOD
ARRAY METHOD
- COMMANDER -ASSIGNS
TERRAIN TRPBASED
FIRES METHOD or,
ON ENEMY FORMATION
- GOOD TO INITIATE, FOCUS,
- ASSIGN AND DISTRIBUTE
TARGETS FIRES BASED ON NEAREST TRP
TO PLATOONS
- LETS PLATOONS DO INTERNAL FIRE DISTRIBUTION ON THEIR OWN
- DISADVANTAGE: ONCE ENEMY BREAKS UP INTO CHAOS, THE FORMATIONS WILL MIX AND FIRE
“RED 1, THIS
CONTROL FRAMEWORK IS BATTLE
WILL BREAK DOWN6. “WHITE 1, THIS IS BATTLE 6
TANK PLT, TRP 1 TANK PLT, TRP 3
SIMULTANEOUS
“RED , THIS IS BATTLE 6 “WHITE 1, THIS IS BATTLE 6
SIMULTANEOUS “BLUE 1, THIS IS BATTLE 6
LEFT TANK COMPANY RIGHT TANK COMPANY
AT MY COMMAND CENTER TANK COMPANY
AT MY COMMAND
SIMULTANEOUS
STAND BY” SIMULTANEOUS SIMULTANEOUS
STAND BY”
AT MY COMMAND” AT MY COMMAND” AT MY COMMAND”
“FIRE!”
“FIRE”

179
 FAR LEFT FAR RIGHT

NEAR NEAR
LEFT RIGHT

QUADRANT METHOD
-TERRAIN OR ENEMY ORIENTED. SIMILAR TO FIRE
PATTERNS AND DIVIDED EA METHODS
-MENTALLY SUPERIMPOSE A QUADRANT OVER AN ENEMY
FORMATION OR TERRAIN FEATURE
-VERY PRECISE WAY TO ADJUST FIRES
-ALLOWS COMMANDER TO SUBDIVIDE EXISTING
EAWITHOUT MORE CONTROL MEASURES
-CAN BE USED WITH OTHER CONTROL MEASURES, BUT
LABELING SYSTEM MUST BE DIFFERENT FROM OTHERS
USED IN ENGAGEMENT AREA
-BE CAREFUL, THIS CAN BE CONFUSING . TAKE INTO
ACCOUNT DIFFERING POINTS OF VIEW OF PLATOONS
LOOKING AT QUADRANT. ENSURE THAT QUADRANT
QUARTER DESIGNATIONS REMAIN STANDARD AND
CONSTANT
“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6
SET QUADRANT MIDDLE ENEMY TANK CO
RED ENGAGE FAR LEFT, AT MY COMMAND,
WHITE ENGAGE NEAR LEFT - NEAR RIGHT,
AT MY COMMAND
BLUE ENGAGE FAR RIGHT, AT MY
COMMAND”
“FIRE”

180
 TRP 3
TRP 1

TRP 2

BLUE
WHITE
RED

FIRE PATTERNS METHOD

- VERY SIMILAR TO QUADRANT METHOD
- USED WHENEVER ENEMY IS IN A TIGHT FORMATION
- ASSIGNS RESPONSIBILITIES BASED ON ENEMY CENTER OF MASS
- INSTEAD OF COMMANDS BASED ON FRIENDLY ORIENTATION
(FRONTAL, CROSS) IT IS FOCUSSED BASED ON THE ENEMY
FORMATION (NEAR, FAR, LEFT, RIGHT)
-PLATOON DETERMINES HOW IT WILL DISTRIBUTE ITS OWN FIRES
IN IT’S ASSIGNED SECTOR
- EFFECTIVE ONLY WHEN ENEMY IS IN TIGHT AREA. IF ENEMY IS
SPREAD OUT USE CLOSEST TRP, OR DIVIDED EA METHOD
- ORIENTATION BASED ON ENEMY DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT.
REMEMBER THAT PLATOONS WILL SEE THE FORMATION FROM
DIFFERENT PERSPECTIVES
“BLUE, FAR LEFT, SIMULTANEOUS, STAND BY”
“WHITE, FAR RIGHT, SIMULTANEOUS, STAND BY”
“RED, NEAR, SIMULTANEOUS, STAND BY”
“FIRE!”

9. Offensive Fire Planning: The offensive planning of fires utilizes the

181
same techniques as defensive fire planning. The goal is for the Company to cross
the LD with a definite plan of how we intend to fight. This plan may not always
work out so hasty fire control may be used to focus and control fires during
unexpected encounters. TRPs, Fire patterns, and Fire commands are all used
similarly to defensive fire planning. TRPs will be planned or hasty. Marking may
include ground burst illum, smoke rounds, spotting rounds or tracer fire, or clearly
identifiable objects such as a burning tank. The critical task is to ensure that crews
understand and can identify the TRPs. These TRPs and fire control measures will
normally be set prior to LD, but must be confirmed by platoon leaders and all TCs
as the Company moves onto the terrain. Much of this will be done over the radio.
Fire Control Patterns used during offensive operations include:

- Sector (TIC TAC TOE) Method

- Divided Area (Tic Tac Toe)
- Closest TRP method
- Quadrant Method
- Fire Pattern Method
- Target Array Method
- Clock Method

These techniques are demonstrated below.

182
 ORADO FAR
EA COL T
R FA RIGH
FAR R
C ENTE
LEFT
ER
CENT
IG H T
ER R
CENT ER
CENT
LEFT

NEAR
NEAR T
RIGH
NEAR ER
CENT
LEFT
ITY LINE
E RVISIBIL
INT
FAR FAR FAR
LEFT CENTER RIGHT

CENTER CENTER
CENTER RIGHT
SECTOR METHOD
LEFT

EA
- USEFUL FOR SECURITY MISSIONS
TEXAS
- GOOD DURINGNEAR NEAR
RAPIDLY MOVINGNEAR
MISSIONS
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
- SIMPLE
- DIFFICULT TO FOCUS FIRES ONCEOVERWATCH
IN CONTACT
FORCE
BOUNDING FORCE

“BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, RED ORIENT CENTER

TO LEFT,DIVIDED AREACENTER
WHITE ORIENT (TIC TACTOTOE)
RIGHT, BLUE
ORIENT
- USED REAR”.
IN DEFILE DRILLS, OR DURING BOUNDING
OVERWATCH MOVEMENT THROUGH CLEARINGS BY THE
OVERWACHING FORCE
- EA CHANGES EACH TIME THE BOUNDING FORCE
CROSSES AN INTERVISIBILITY LINE AND OVERWATCH
FORCE ESTABLISHES NEW OVERWATCH POSITIONS
- SET A NEW TIC TAC TOE BOARD FOR EACH EA
- EA USUALLY 1000-2000M LONG AND AS WIDE AS THE 183
DEFILE
- BOUNDING FORCE WILL DISTRIBUTE IT’S FIRES USING
ANOTHER METHOD (USUALLY SECTOR OR CLOCK)
 TRP29
TRP22 FAR FAR
LEFT RIGHT

NEAR
NEAR
LEFT RIGHT

CLOSEST TRP METHOD

- COMMAND ISSUED USING DIRECTION AND DISTANCE FROM TRP
- MUCH LIKE ARTY SHIFT MISSION
- MOST EFFECTIVE WHEN IN CONTACT WITH SMALL FORCES
- TRPs MUST BE DESIGNATED BEFOREHAND, AND CONFIRMED BY TCs
AS COMPANY MOVES INTO AREA
QUADRANT METHOD
- COMMANDER
“ RED, THIS IS DESIGNATES IDENTIFYABLE
BATTLE 6, ORIENT ON ENEMYOBJECT ASMETERS
TANK 200
QUADRANT CENTER,
EAST OF TRP THEN
22. WHITE DIVIDES
THIS UP THE
IS BATTLE QUADRANT
6, ORIENT ON TANK 300
METERS SW OF TRP 29”
- SIMILAR TO DIVIDED AREA AND FIRE PATTERNS METHOD,
BUT FOCUSES ON IDENTIFIED TARGET GROUPS (ENEMY BPs FOR
EXAMPLE)
- ALLOWS COMMANDER TO USE SINGLE TRP TO FOCUS THE
FIRES IN UP TO 4 DIFFERENT AREAS, VERY PRECISE, GOOD FOR
CONTROLLING FIRES ON AN ENEMY POSITION OR STRONGPOINT
- CAN BE CENTERED ON ENEMY POSITION, TERRAIN FEATURE
- MAY BE SOME CONFUSION WITH OBSERVER ANGLES OF VIEW
- SYSTEM MAY BE CONFUSING. ENSURE THAT ALL
UNDERSTAND IT BEFOREHAND. 184
“ BATTLE, THIS IS BATTLE 6. SET QUADRANT ON CENTER
MRP. RED ORIENT NEAR LEFT, WHITE, ORIENT NEAR RIGHT,
BLUE, ORIENT FAR.”
 TRP 2

TRP 1

TRP 3
TRP 4
FAR FAR
LEFT RIGHT

NEAR
NEAR
LEFT RIGHT TRP 5
SUPPORT BY
FIRE FORCE

RED BLUE
ASSAULT
FORCE
WHITE

TARGET ARRAY METHOD

- USED WHEN DETAILED INTEL IS AVAILABLE. MUST BE
CONFIRMED BY TCs ONCE THEY GET EYES ON OBJECTIVE
- PLOTS SPECIFIC TRPS AGAINST ENEMY POSITIONS
- VERY PRECISE METHOD OF DISTRIBUTION, USUALLY USED BY
SUPPORT BY FIRE FORCE DURING ASSAULT OF ENEMY POSITION
QUADRANT METHOD
“ RED, BATTLE 6, SUPPRESS ENEMY TRENCH LINE BETWEEN
- COMMANDER
TRP DESIGNATES
1-3. BLUE SUPPRESS IDENTIFYABLE
TRENCH OBJECT
LINE BETWEEN TRP AS
3-5, BE
QUADRANTTO
PREPARED CENTER, THEN TO
SHIFT FIRES DIVIDES
TANK UP THE QUADRANT
VICINITY TRP 5 IF IT
TRIES TO MOVE
- SIMILAR TO HULL
TO DIVIDED DOWN
AREA TOFIRE
AND ENGAGE. WHITE
PATTERNS ORIENT
METHOD,
ON ENEMY TANK BPs AT TRP 2 AND 5, BE PREPARED TO
BUT FOCUSES ON IDENTIFIED TARGET GROUPS (ENEMY BPs FOR
ENGAGE ENEMY REINFORCEMENTS COMING FROM AROUND
EXAMPLE) FIRE PATTERNS METHOD
TRP 4, NOBODY ENGAGE ANY TROOPS TO THE RIGHT OF TRP 3,
AND- GOOD
SABOT
- ALLOWS WITH
ONLY A VAGUE
COMMANDER INTEL
AGAINST
TO USESITUATUATION,
VEHICLES ONCE
SINGLE TOOR
TRPTHE DURING
ASSAULT
FOCUS THE
CHANCE
FORCE
FIRES IN UPENCOUNTER
MOVESTOONTO WITH
THE LARGE VERY
OBJECTIVE,
4 DIFFERENT AREAS, ENEMY
CONFIRMFORCE
TRPsGOOD
PRECISE, AND FOR
ACKOWLEDGE”
CONTROLLING FIRES ON ANRUNNING
ENEMY POSITION OR STRONGPOINT
- ALSO USED WHEN OVER ENEMY POSITIONS OR
COLUMNS IN A HASTY ATTACK OR ACTION DRILL
- CAN BE CENTERED ON ENEMY POSITION, TERRAIN FEATURE
- OFTEN
- MAY CAN BE
BE SOME EMPLOYEDWITH
CONFUSION DURING MOVEMENT
OBSERVER TO CONTACT
ANGLES OF VIEW
- REFINE ONCE ENEMY POSITIONS BECOME CLEAR
- SYSTEM MAY BE CONFUSING. ENSURE THAT ALL
UNDERSTAND
- SOMETIMESITDIFFICULT
BEFOREHAND.
TO ID L/R, NEAR/FAR 185
“ BATTLE, THIS ISISBATTLE
“ BATTLE,THIS BATTLE6.6,SET QUADRANT
ENEMY ON CENTER
TANK COMPANY DIRECT
MRP. RED RED
FRONT. ORIENT NEAR
ORIENT LEFT,
NEAR, WHITE,
BLUE ORIENT
ORIENT FAR NEAR
RIGHT,RIGHT,
WHITE
BLUE, ORIENT
ORIENT FAR FAR.”
LEFT, FIRE”
 12

9 3

CLOCK METHOD
- ORIENTS SECTORS OF SCAN IN RELATION TO FRIENDLY MOVEMENT
- STANDARD MOVEMENT FIRE CONTROL TECHNIQUE WHEN THE
SITUATION IS VAGUE (MOVEMENT TO CONTACT)
- CAN BE USED WITH ANY FORMATION WHILE ON THE MOVE
-MUST BE CONTINUALLY REFINED WHILE MOVING TO TAKE TERRAIN
AND FORMATION CHANGES INTO ACCOUNT
- COMMANDERS VEHICLE WILL BE CENTER, ORIENTING AT 12 OCLOCK
IN DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
- USED ALSO TO ORIENT ON AIR TARGETS, FRIENDLY UNITS, ARTY
IMPACTS AND OTHER EVENTS IN THE SECTOR

“BLUE, THIS IS BATTLE 6, ORIENT 10 - 2, MAIN EFFORT 12 OCLOCK”

“WHITE, ORIENT 6 - 10, MAIN EFFORT - TOWN AT 9 OCLOCK”
“RED, ORIENT 2 - 6, MAIN EFFORT- WOODLINE FROM 3-5 OCLOCK”

186
ANNEX B --COMBAT SUPPORT

APPENDIX 1. FIRE SUPPORT OPERATIONS

1. General: Fire support operations will be used to supplement and
enhance the company direct fire plan and support the scheme of
maneuver for the company. The company fire support officer (FIST)
will be attached from the Field Artillery battalion supporting the Task
Force. The FIST team will be the point of contact for all indirect fire
planning.
2. Responsibilities:
-CO CDR: Approves/directs indirect fire support planning, sets
engagement criteria and priority by weapon and ammunition,
requests CAS. Manages fire support when the FIST has been
killed.
-FIST: Based on commanders guidance, concept of the operation
and fire support available, the FIST prepares the company fire
support plan, obtains approval from the commander and
forwards the plan to the TF FSO. Based on the OPORD and
commander's guidance, the FIST passes requests for fires to the
most appropriate agency. His section maintains an accurate
situation map, showing the location of all the company's
platoons, as well as the company and TF graphics. FIST will
also be responsible for controlling CAS and registering fires
3. FIST Location: The FIST will position himself where he can best
observe the battle and control the type of indirect fires being used as
well as STAY ALIVE! The FISTs location will change based on the
mission. During counter recon or defensive missions the FSO will often
fight dismounted from his vehicle. During offensive operations the FSO
will generally travel separate from the FIST track to ensure redundancy.
In the event that his vehicle becomes disabled, the FIST will jump to the
XO's vehicle to continue his duties. The FIST is responsible for
registration of all fires
4. Communications:
a. Calls for fire, requests for pre-planned fires will be
transmitted on the company net. The FIST will relay the
request through the proper channels. The Mortar Platoon
frequency (FD-2) will be preset for use in emergency

187
 situations, or on order. In the event that the FIST cannot be
reached, all calls for fire will be sent through the XO on the
CO net.

b. FIST: The FIST monitors the company command net and

operates on the FD1 net, passing calls for fire. He switches to
company net to respond only. Additional nets should be set to
the Mortar Platoon and TF CMD, in order.

5. BATTLECAT Team's assigned target Numbers are AN 3300-3399

6. Calls for fire: Calls for fire will be conducted on the company net
according to the standard Army format.
ALERT ‘BATTLE 19 this is Red one’
WARNING “Adjust fire” (Adjust fire, immediate suppression
etc)
TGT LOCATION “Grid HG223456” (or shift from TRP)
DIRECTION “Direction 3200 mils” (from Observer to TGT)
TGT DESCRIPTION “25 BMPs moving through defile”
METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT (Specify ammo, fuse)”HE-PD”
FIRE CONTROL “At my command” (or Time on TGT, ASAP)
Adjustments will be made using standard techniques. Remember
to give direction in mils when correcting

Fire Support Considerations

1. Planning
- Use fires to support obsatcles
- Target on dead space to force enemy out into open
- Plan looker and shooter, each with target criteria
- Each target should have a PLOT-CR [P-Purpose, L-Location of TGT,
O-Observer, T-Trigger, C-Comms, (who talks to who), R-Rehearse]
- Get priority of fire to speed call for fire times (especially with Mortar
Platoon)

2. Defensive use of Fires

- Use an obstacle or a defile to stack them up and restrict movement,

188
 then kill with arty
- Avoid shooting at moving targets in the open, you won’t hit anything
- Use fires to strip dismounts away from vehicles
- With ‘At My Command’ missions give “Do Not Load” instructions
unless sure of target
- Use of smoke at night can seriously degrade night driving capability
of enemy
3. Offensive use of fires
- On a fast attack use “Rolling TOT’ (time on targets) on defiles and
towns long enough for company roll through with enemy supressed
- The main purpose of artillery in the offense is to supress. This will
allow company to move
- Set CFZ over friendly breaching operations
- Specify visual signals to lift/shift fires (star flare) in assault of
objectives
- Artillery effective in liner targets along woodlines to suppress ATGM
teams
- Calculate Smoke available for breaching operations, only plan on
using it to get forces down to breach site, then use smoke pots.

4. Use of FASCAM
- Can be used to close defiles as he rolls through them
- Good for re-seeding breached obsatcles
- Must have 15 minute shoot in time
- Remember that there will be a low density minefield around the
desired target area. Establish a safety box twice the size of the fired in
minefield to account for ‘scatter’ of mines. Safety box can be much
smaller when FASCAM is fired in ‘observed’
- FASCAM is not good for closing roads because mines will
roll/bounce off of pavement before arming.

5. Mortars
- Range 6400 meters
- 12 Round/minute ROF 88 rounds on board carriers
- Rounds: HE, Illum, Smoke, WP Fuzes: PD, VT
- Very effective against dismounts
- Calls for fire can go straight to Mortar Platoon Leader (often they will
not be shooting for the TF commander)

189
 6. General Considerations (Strengths)
- Standoff fires and point smoke
- Primarily supresses
- Can kill massed targets
- Great to prep objectives
- Best weapon against dismounts

7. Artillery Weaknesses
- Artillery cannot kill dispersed armored targets
- It is extremely difficult to hit moving targets
- It cannot emplace massive FASCAM minefields
- It cannot be relied on for long term smoke
- Guns are often unavailable when displacing (don’t rely on them)

APPENDIX 2. ARTILLERY TRIGGERS FOR

MOVING TARGETS
(how far to lead target)
Type of Average time Target speed Target speed Target speed
mission to get fires 5kmh 10kmh 15kmh
Priority 1minute 100 meters 150 meters 250 meters
Preplanned 3minute 250 meters 500 meters 1 km
Shift from 7minute 650 meters 1.3 km 2 km
Preplanned
Target of 10 minute 750 meters 1.5 km 2.5 km
Opportunity

FASCAM Issues: Remember that FASCAM is a BN/BDE level asset. It takes about
15 minutes to shoot in a medium density 400x400 minefield. Friendly troops
should not go within 500M of any FASCAM minefield as many mines will scatter
outside the box.

Ensure that key targets have redundant eyes.

Get specifics on engagement criteria: 1 BMP with dismounts breaching an obstacle

190
is more important than 4 BMPs in a woodline.

B/P to talk straight to Mortars or ARTY guns on key missions to ensure that time of
fire mission is minimal

FIRES PLANNING: Each target should be addressed by PLOT-CR

P: Purpose –what will this target accomplish
L: Location of Target – Where is it, will fires be effective there?
O: Observer – who looks at the target, who is the backup
T: Trigger – what conditions do we need to shoot, who triggers it
C :Comms –who will talk to whom, backup plan?
R: Rehearse, how will we practice this mission

191
 APPENDIX 3. COMBAT AIR SUPPORT

CAS will normally be handled at battalion level,

with coordination at company level done by the
Commander or FIST. CAS will be called in by the
following method (to the pilots directly, or to the
BN ALO):
a. ID and get eyes on target (must be high value target)
b. ID and alert friendlies in AO (100%), Friendlies mark with
VS-17
c. Suppress enemy ADA in area with artillery, direct fire
d. Mark target (smoke, ground burst illum, orient off friendly
psns)
e. Call in aircraft with standard request
1. Initial Point (IP)(easy to ID point 7-12 km out)
2. Heading (IP to TGT, in degrees)
3. Distance to target (in miles)
4. Grid of target
5. Target description
6. How Target is marked
7. Likely enemy ADA in area
f. Lift Artillery fires into area
g. Talk pilot onto target. Once he IDs target he takes over
h. Estimate BDA

NO PLAN SHOULD EVER BE BASED ON CAS. IT IS

VERY UNRELIABLE AND OFTEN INEFFECTIVE

192
 APPENDIX 4. ENGINEER

The Company will often have engineer elements attached for various missions.
Engineer missions are broken down into three basic categories: Mobility, Counter
Mobility, and Survivability. Additionally engineers may pick up other tactical
missions based on the situation. These may include defensive missions,
establishing OPs, conducting local patrols, and assisting in the clearing of defiles.
Engineers will normally not be employed as dismounted infantry, but must be able
to perform this mission if necessary. Upon attachment to the Company the ranking
engineer officer or NCO will report to the Commander with his element’s status as
per ANNEX D, Appendix 6 (Attachment / Detachment Procedures).

1. MOBILITY: OBSTACLE DRILL (See ANNEX A, Appendix 3, TAB

B (Breaching drill))
a. Obstacle Reporting: Immediately report all encounters with
obstacles to the commander and seek a bypass. Additionally, the
lead platoon will recon for a position that can overwatch the obstacle
and place direct fire beyond it, in support of a breach, if necessary.
b. Breaching Operations: Generally, the breach element for the
company will be attached engineer assets. In their absence, attached
infantry become the breach element. The steps to conducting an
In-Stride breach are as follows:
-The lead platoon recognizes an obstacle and reports its location
to the company commander.
-Placing a section into overwatch, the lead platoon recons for a
bypass. If one is found, the lead platoon reports the location to
the company and passes through, continuing with the mission.
-The second platoon in march order prepares to breach the
obstacle. If engineers are available, they will move forward with
the breaching platoon. If an infantry platoon is available they
prepare to breach the obstacle.
-The lead platoon calls for suppressive fire on the far side of the
obstacle and smoke to obscure the breach site.
-The commander selects the breach site based on
recommendations from the engineers or the unit overwatching
the obstacle.
-Once sufficient obscuration exists, the breach element breaches

193
 the obstacle and marks a lane through it.
-The trail platoon moves into a position to assault through the
lane, once it has been cleared. The assault will seize terrain
1,000 - 2,000 meters beyond the obstacle to overwatch the rest
of the company as it passes through the lane.
-The XO reports the status of the breach to the TF on a continual
basis. The 1SG is the last vehicle through the breach, policing
up the breach elements as he passes through.
c. Lane Marking:
= Initial breach lane markings may be non-standard as they are
emplaced during the breech itself. Markings for the breach
will be set forth in the operations order. Usually Green smoke
will signify that the breach is open at the location of the
smoke, the entrance and exit will be marked (at a minimum),
and a left handrail will be marked through the lane (mark the
left side of the cleared area).
= After the Initial breach, lanes will be improved for the
following forces. The first markers set a driver will see is VS-
17 panels in a V shape pointing to the breach. The initial set
will be 500m from the obstacle set 250 m apart. The next set,
closer together than the first, will be 250m from the obstacle.
At the entrance to the breach will be the last set of these kind
of markers placed at each side of the lane entrance In the
breach, engineers will erect lane markers four to six feet high
and 10m apart with engineer tape strung between them. In a
breach under fire the engineers may erect only the VS-17
panel marking the left hand side of the lane beginning, as well
as picket poles on the left hand side of the lane (a “left side
handrail”), and a marker signifying the far end of the lane.
At night, green chemlights will be affixed to the top of the
markers. At the exit of the breach, engineers will erect barber
poles with a single red chemlight on top.

194
 COMPANY BREACH DRILL

5
2

3
4

LEAD PLT

LEFT PLT
B-66 RIGHT PLT

B-65 FISTV
1 - CDR DESIGNATES PLATOON TO OVERWATCH
2 - FIST CALLS IN SMOKE TO OBSCURE BREACHING SITE
3 - ASSAULT FORCE MOVES TO COVERED LOCATION
4 - BREACH FORCE MOVE FORWARD ONCE OVERWATCH IS
SET, BREACH SITE OBSCURRED. BREACHES AND MARKS
OBSTACLE, SETS SECURITY ON FAR SIDE.
5 - ASSAULT FORCE ASSAULTS THROUGH FOLLOWED BY
OVERWATCH ELEMENT

195
 OBSTACLE BREACH LANE MARKING

VS-17 PANEL SHOWS FAR END OF INITIAL (HASTY)

LANE

PICKET POLES AS “LEFT

HANDRAIL” THROUGH LANE

VS-17 PANEL AT LEFT

SIDE OF ENTRANCE

GREEN SMOKE AT ENTRANCE

IMPROVED

FAR LIMIT OF LANE (STANDARD)

SHOWN BY VS-17 PANELS PICKET POLES

VS-17 PANELS

2. COUNTERMOBILITY: Countermobility is the effort expended to limit the

enemy maneuver options. This is usually done through obstacles that are designed

196
to get specific results or enemy action. Obstacle “missions” include blocking,
fixing, disrupting, and turning. Obstacles are key elements in any EA development
or ambush plan. Their purpose is not to keep the enemy out of the EA, it merely to
force him to do something that we can exploit to destroy him with direct and
indirect fire. They accomplish this by funneling, slowing or holding him where we
can kill him. Obstacles emplaced in support of an ambush are similar in nature, but
generally more localized.
a. Obstacle Emplacement: The company emplaces hasty protective
minefields, limited wire entanglements and sets charges for abatis
without assistance. The tactical obstacles are planned by the
commander to fit in with the scheme of maneuver. A PSG or PL will be
given responsibility to actually site the obstacles based on the
Commanders guidance. Obstacle emplacement teams, especially the
Volcano system, will be secured by other combat forces. All obstacles
should be covered by fire, as well as being secured to prevent covert
breaching by the enemy. As part of Stand To all obstacles will be
checked for breaching. All obstacles will be overwatched by fires of
some kind, disrupting obstacles with at least artillery, and blocking and
fixing obstacles with direct fire. No obstacle is emplaced without the
permission of the company commander. Priority of work will be
dictated based on the situation. The Company CP tracks the status of
obstacles as they are prepared, and reports to the TF TOC on a periodic
basis with the overall Company status. Usually minefields will be
surface laid for speed. The only exception to this is that mines will be
buried in places where we expect the enemy to go: at ends of surface
obstacles, along forest tracks and at anti armor ambushes, and in
defilade positions where he will probably go to seek cover from our
fires. Tank and mech platoons will normally emplace local protective
obstacles to help secure their flanks, and may be employed to assist the
engineers in the construction of tactical obstacles.
b. Obstacle reporting: All minefields will be reported through the chain
of command, and recorded IAW GTA 5-10-27. Other obstacles will be
reported through the chain of command and recorded on a 1:50,00 scale
overlay giving the grid coordinates for the obstacles limits, specific
instructions for closing the lane. Battlecat Team's assigned obstacle
numbers are 11340-11339. Normally, on an overlay, the last three digits
will be used.

197
 c. Obstacle Emplacement Planning Data not including travel time:

Row of AT Mines (100m) 1/2 PLT hour

Standard Pattern Minefield, AT/AP (per 100m) 1 PLT hour
Hasty Road Crater 1 SQD hour
Hasty Bridge Demo 1 SQD hour
AT Ditch (2 M9 ACES)
Clay 80m 1 hour
Sand 100m 1 hour
Wire Obstacle Roadblock 1 SQD hour
Abatis 2 SQD hours
Triple Strand Concertina fence (300m) 1 PLT hour

MOPMS: Ensure someone knows how to operate the control box and batteries are
present. These devices are excellent for closing trails, passage lanes. Often
MOPMS can be used to allow enemy recon to pass, then fired in front of (and
possibly behind) main enemy element. Then he is immobilized and can be defeated
with artillery or further immobilized with FASCAM.
When using MOPMS ensure that the following issues are addressed:
Who sets it up? Where? Mark location
Who overwatches it
Who triggers it
When/under what conditions is it triggered
NET call when triggered to alert friendly troops
Command detonate or renew if needed

Volcano: Vehicle needs a trigger time, followed by emplacement time. Volcano

drivers must recon and rehearse route before using mines. If a smoke track is
available it should work as a team with the Volcano

FASCAM: Try to shoot in observed, Minefield will be much more accurate and
dense. Ideal to reseed breached obstacles, close gaps, close defiles, fire on
unoccupied enemy BPs (to deny use to enemy), or to fire directly onto enemy
armor concentrations to immobilize them

198
3. SURVIVABILITY: Use the engineer ACEs to dig tank fighting positions, when
time allows. Focus digging effort on a few key positions. Usually it is better to
fight on the move from a series of reconned/rehearsed BPs that are supported by a
few well constructed dug in positions. The enemy recon will almost always
discover the location of large series of dug in BPs and will suppress them or bypass
them.

During ACE employment a CINC ACE will normally be appointed to oversee the
employment of the ACEs. This will normally be the Company Master Gunner.
Pre-stock ammunition sites should be dug at all Battle positions. Tank
commanders are responsible for the quality of their own fighting positions. All
vehicle fighting positions must be checked by the Tank itself before the dozer
moves on. This must be accomplished using the GAS sight as the GPS sight can
depress below the level of the main gun and make it appear that targets can be hit,
when in reality the gun cannot depress far enough. All battle positions will be
marked IAW this SOP and the BN SOP (see ANNEX A, Appendix 4 - Defensive
operations)
a. Fighting Position Emplacement Data in Blade Team Hours
Vehicle Type Turret Down Hull Down
M113 1 .5
FISTV 1.5 .7
M2 4 1
M1 3 2.5

199
 APPENDIX 5. AIR DEFENSE

1. Organization for Combat:

a. Organic Weapons: Each combat vehicle will maintain its machine guns
as an Air Guard. On tanks the loader's M240 will be elevated and
pointed to the rear. SABOT or MPAT is used against helicopters.
b. Attached weapons: STINGER Teams may be attached to the company
for specific operations. They will move under armor whenever possible.
They receive weapon control information and air defense posture from
their ADA channel and the TF OPORD. ADA will be employed at the
Company level using mission type orders, with the main emphasis on
the Commanders Intent for ADA. Movement around or location on the
battlefield will not normally be rigidly controlled, as the nature of their
mission requires that they have relatively free movement. ADA elements
must ensure that they report where they will be moving to accomplish
the mission. This prevents fratricide and their interfering with other
maneuver elements.
c. Attachment of ADA elements. Upon attachment ADA elements will fall
under the control of the Company XO. He will ensure that their
logistical needs are met, will be responsible for briefing them, knowing
of their whereabouts, and will exercise overall supervision of them.
2. Air Defense Posture: Unless otherwise stated, the Company ADA posture will
be Yellow/Tight
a. WHITE - Attack not expected. Use passive air defense measures
(camouflage, dispersal). Maintain air guards.
b. YELLOW - Attack expected. Maintain air guard, man weapons.
c. RED - Attack imminent or in progress.
3. Weapons Control Status:
a. FREE - Fire at any aircraft NOT positively identified as friendly.
b. TIGHT - Fire at any aircraft POSITIVELY identified as hostile.
c. HOLD - Fire in self-defense, ONLY.
4. Engagement Criteria:
a. Self-Defense - Fire at any attacking aircraft, at any time.
b. On Order - Fire at non-attacking aircraft ONLY on order..
c. Soldiers or vehicles may be designated to watch for enemy
aircraft. To alert the company, sentries use flags, hand and arm
signals and/or audible warnings to alert the company. (see below)

200
Visual Signal - RED Flag
Audible Signal - "AIR ATTACK"

201
 d. All clear signals are as follows:
Visual Signal - remove the RED Flag
Audible Signal - "ALL CLEAR"
5. Additional ADA Missions: The ADA slice may be assigned other additional
missions based on the tactical scenario. This will often occur when weather or
visibility limits the effectiveness of their role as air defense. Likely missions in
these cases include:
a. Establish LP/OP.
b. Assist in the emplacement / security of obstacles.
c. Conduct local security patrol.

See ANNEX A, Appendix 2 for Company Air Attack Drills

202
 APPENDIX 6. TANK/INFANTRY OPERATIONS

The following is a guide for operating in conjunction with Light Infantry.

The Company may be tasked to operate with dismounted infantry during certain
operations. Usually these troops will move on foot but on an exceptional basis the
infantry may ride with the tanks. This is for transportation purposes only.
Infantrymen must dismount and fight on foot upon contact or expected contact. Be
aware that it will be the first time operating with tanks for many of the
Infantrymen. They will be unfamiliar with how we operate, and will normally
underestimate the capabilities and limitations of a tanks. Nothing can be taken for
granted.

The most useful capability of infantry is the security that it gives the
tank. The details of the mission will determine which force is the main effort.
When tanks are attached to support infantry they will be subordinated to the
infantry leader in charge. They will help the infantry by moving to and destroying
targets that the infantry cannot handle. This type of relationship will be common
during fighting in built up areas, jungles, and heavily wooded areas, as well as
when fighting a mainly infantry based enemy. When the infantry is fights in
support of the tanks, it’s main mission is security. It protects the tank from
dismounted infantry tank killing teams, and also provides reconnaissance to the
flanks. This type of relationship will normally occur during fighting in fairly open
areas (Europe) or in deserts.

When tanks are attached to the infantry the senior tank commander must
ensure that the infantry leader is aware of the tanks limitations and capabilities.
Special attention must be given to logistical issues as the infantry has a much lower
level of support capabilities. During offensive operations the infantry will lead,
supported by the tanks. The tanks will be responsible for destroying hard targets
such as bunkers and enemy armored vehicles that the infantry cannot defeat. In the
defense the infantry covers the main EA, while tanks support with long range fires
against hard targets.

When infantry is attached to a tank unit the infantry leader must link up
with the senior armor leader, and coordinate for the employment of his unit.
Tankers need to remember that the infantry is much less survivable, especially
against small arms and indirect fires. Tankers must also take into account the
mobility difference of light infantry as it can only travel 2-3 KMH while
dismounted. During offensive operations the tanks lead, with the infantry following
to provide local security against dismounted threats, destroy bypassed strongpoints,
clear defiles, and to conduct limited reconaissance. The infantry will move either
dismounted, or mounted (on trucks or tanks) depending on the situation. In the
defense the tanks form the main effort and the infantry secure dismounted avenues

203
of approach, secure obstacles, or form mobile tank hunter killer teams to destroy
tanks infiltrating through the woods.

The following is a guide to briefing the dismounted infantry that you will
be working with, or that will be riding mounted on your tanks. Keep in mind that
they will usually underestimate the capabilities and limitations of the tank, and
that it will be the first time operating with tanks for many of the soldiers.

1. Always follow the command of the TC.

2. Always alert TC before mounting/dismounting tank.
3. Infantry practice mount/ dismount procedures and actions on contact
prior to LD.
4. 1 squad per tank, INF Platoon Leader on Tank Platoon Leader tank.
5. Leaders ride behind TC hatch and use TA-1 to talk to crew.
6. Tanks cannot return main gun fire with infantry on or in front of the
tank.
7. Infantry should mount/dismount at RR sprocket, alert TC before
mounting.
8. Never pass in front of the .50 CAL.
9. Stay clear of smoke grenade launchers.
10. Always maintain 3 points of contact, Do Not stand. HANG ON
TIGHT WHEN TANK IS MOVING CROSS COUNTRY!
11. Watch out for low branches.
12. Infantry only brings LBE. Tank is not a gypsy wagon.
13. ACTIONS ON CONTACT
-Wait for tank to stop before dismounting
-Dismount at TC command, 1 fire team per side.
-Move at least 5 meters to each side of the tank. Never move
forward of turret unless directed.
14. Avoid passengers on lead tank.
15. Do Not move in front of tank unless ordered by TC.
16. Do Not dismount unless ordered.
17. Do Not dangle arms/legs over the sides.
18. Do Not overload vehicle with passengers.
19. Do Not fall asleep.
20. Do Not smoke.
21. Do not stand near tank during turning or refueling.
22. Ensure infantry is aware of danger of main gun concussion.
23. Brief Infantry on how they can assist (clearing defiles, etc.)

204
 ANNEX C --COMBAT SERVICE AND
SUPPORT
The Company is responsible for conducting it’s own Combat Support, as
well as that of various other units as necessary. This will be assisted by the
battalion Combat and Field trains. Any attached or supported elements (ADA,
Engineers, Mortars, Scouts, GSR, etc.) will receive support to the same standards
as the remainder of the Company. Upon attachment, the ranking NCO of the
supported unit is responsible for coordinating directly with the 1SG to coordinate
the specifics of his requirements.

The Company 1SG is responsible for the movement of the trains on the battlefield.
They will habitually move as a unit behind the company. They normally travel as
close to the company as possible without exposing themselves to direct fire. The
wheeled elements of the Company Trains will normall go to the BN Combat
Trains during tactical operations.and return after the battle.

APPENDIX 1. SUPPLY

A. LOGPAC: The company LOGPAC (Logistics Package) is the primary means

by which the company is resupplied during tactical situations. It is vital that all
personnel become familiar with all aspects of LOGPAC operations. The company
LOGPAC will consist of the following vehicles and supplies:
Vehicle Type of Supply/Mission
B7/B77 1SG - LOGPAC Commander
B4 w/T Supply carries personnel replacements,
CL I, CL VI, CL IX, additional supplies
Fueler (2) From SPT PLT carries CL III, packaged
CL III products
Cargo (2) From SPT PLT caries CL V, large supplies
Maint PC Checks Maint status of vehicles, issues parts
performs repair as necessary
B65 Acts as LOGPAC security and TCP

205
B. LOGPAC OPERATIONS: The preferred method of resupply is the Service
Station Method. During counter-recon missions the Company will use a modified
tailgate method. See ANNEX A, Appendix 4, Tab E - Counter Reconaissance.
Service Station resupply is conducted from one location with the combat vehicles
moving to the resupply point. The 1SG will bring forward enough fuel to
completely refuel the company. The remainder of the LOGPAC supplies (all
classes) will be requested by the PLT SGTs, to the 1SG, NLT 1000 HRS daily. The
LOGPAC will be established in a covered and concealed location close to the
company locations . From the release time until return time, the 1SG has two
hours to perform resupply, This translates to approximately one hour of actual
LOGPAC time in the Company area. The resupply operations will be conducted as
follows:
1. Prior to the LOGPAC the 1SG and XO, along with Master Gunner, and
Maint NCOIC will meet to determine the layout and conduct of the
logpac. Platoons are responsible for having their vehicles boresighted,
and PMCS sheets filled out prior to LOGPAC.
2. 30 minutes prior to LOGPAC time, 1SG reports to the LRP to
coordinate with the S-1 and S-4. Hard copy reports will be turned in at
this time. The XO will begin forming up the LOGPAC, mark positions
for incoming supply vehicles, and set up a Traffic Control Point (TCP)
from his tank at a point able to provide local security for the LOGPAC
site.
3. Once the 1SG radios that he is inbound with the LOGPAC vehicles the
XO will notify the platoons to begin sending vehicles to the traffic
control point. One section will cover the platoons' sectors at all times.
Rotation through the LOGPAC site will be determined by the situation.
4. When the 1SG arrives with the supply vehicles the XO will meet him
at the TCP and brief him on the layout of the LOGPAC. The 1SG and
XO will then position incoming vehicles and begin resupply operations
as soon as possible.
5. During the actual resupply the XO is responsible for running the traffic
control point, controlling traffic flow into the LOGPAC to ensure that
there are always vehicles prepared to resupply. The 1SG controls the
operations inside the LOGPAC site, and ensures that resupply
operations flow smoothly.
6. Crews will be responsible for having their vehicles ready for LOGPAC.
This includes gloves, goggles, fire extinguisher, Kevlar, and ration box
ready. Any 2404 -5988 that has not been turned in will be ready at this
time, and vehicles approaching the LOGPAC that need fuel in the

206
 front cells will have the gun tube elevated, and traversed over the cell
they want to fill.
7. The Company provides logistical support to all elements attached to the
Battlecats. This may also include units operating in our sector such as
Scouts or Mortars. Attached elements will be provided for with same
standards applied to all normal Battlecat elements. Upon attachment to
the Company the ranking NCO of the attached element will coordinate
with the 1SG for special logistic requirements.
8. For night linkup all B-Cat logpac vehicles arriving at LRP will be
marked with subdued white light (per BN TACSOP). The !SG or NCO
at the LRP will also display a like signall and will confirm linkup and
move directly to the company area . Day linkup is similar except that
each vehicle in the Battlecat logpac will display a Battlecat recognition
symbol in the drivers windows.
LOGPAC SEQUENCE:
--Complete Boresighting and PMCS Worksheet prior to LOGPAC
--Move to TCP on order, maintaining 1 section in overwatch
--On order move into LOGPAC with groundguide
--Drop loader off with MRE box, water can, to get Class 1
-- Turn-in 5988s, 2404s (that have not been turned in already)
and receive CL IX parts for installation.
--Receive medical care and re-stock first aid supplies
--Fuel and receive CL III package products.
--Re-Arm, as required.
- -Vehicles requiring additional maintenance will be directed
to a maintenance holding area, if necessary.
--Pick-up loader with pre-packaged CLS I, and any other
supplies, drop requests for supplies, receive mail, etc.
--Return to position. (Eat in position, not at LOGPAC)

- SEE BELOW -

207
C. COMBAT AMMO RESUPPLY
7
6

8 6
3

5
9
4
1

10

2
BATTLECAT LOGPAC
1. XO sets up traffic control point, provides security at
entrance
2. Vehicles move to TCP, sent into LOGPACK as soon as
space is available
3. 1SG sets LOGPACK CP in center of coil (B-77)
4. Maint PC: 5988’s dropped off, parts issued, loader
dismounts with empty MRE box, moves to station 9 to get
crew’s meals
5. Medic PC: Medical issues and supplies
6 - 7. Fuel and Ammo HEMMTs
8. Maint M-88: Vehicles pull off for maintenance (if
necessary)
9. Company supply truck. Recieve mail, supplies, pick up
loader with Class I., drop off trash, next days supply requests.
10. Exit LOGPACK, return to positions

208
AMMO REDISTRIBUTION UNDER FIRE:
a. To prevent ready racks from becoming empty for the entire unit
at approximately the same time.
b. Occurs as soon as one tank in the section has expended 8
rounds from the ready rack
c. Tank reports it is going to redistribute ammo
d. Wingman tank covers assigned sector
e. Tank keeps round in tube, backs to turret down
f. Refills ready rack from semi ready
g. Re-occupies position and takes sector responsibility back from
wingman

AMMO CROSS LEVELING: This occurs when a tank gets critically low on
ammo, or one of the tanks has had a fire control problem and wants to transfer
ammo to another tank. This may also occur when 2 tanks want to replenish the
ammo in their ready racks quickly by swapping rounds from the other tank’s semi
ready rack.
a. Tank(s) requiring cross leveling come up on PLT net, report status.
b. Platoon Leader ensures that Platoon sector can be covered.
c. Platoon Leader orders sending and receiving tanks to back down.
d. Tanks back down, park side by side, maintain security.
e. One tank opens Semi-Ready rack, fills ready rack of other tank.
f. Process repeated for other tank as necessary.
g. Tanks pull back into positions, report set.

EMERGENCY AMMO RESUPPLY: When the Company or a platoon gets

critically low on ammunition (25% or less) and cross leveling is not possible the
Commander may order an emergency resupply. This may also be a planned part of
the operation to plus up ammunition after anticipated high use (such as in a
Support By Fire Mission, or after an assault). This ammunition will come from the
Battalion Emergency resupply stockage, must be coordinated for, and is not always
available.
a. Commander / 1SG coordinates with Battalion for Emergency Ammo.
b. 1SG moves to linkup point and meet truck(s).
c. 1SG escorts ammo to designated upload point.
d. Uploading tanks prepare to receive ammo.
e. 1SG calls in vehicles to upload
f. Vehicles move to upload point and rapidly upload as in LOGPAC.
g. Once upload is complete vehicles return to their assigned sectors.
h. Vehicles rotate through as situation permits.
i. Once upload is complete 1SG escorts trucks to release point.

209
 APPENDIX 2. TACTICAL HOT REFUEL
A hot refuel or ROM is often conducted during tactical roadmarches to get fuel to
the Company quickly. The refueling time is often set, and sometimes vehicles will
not top off, they will take only as much as is planned. The key to a ROM or Hot
Refuel is rapid execution. The site will be set up by logistics and support personnel
beforehand, the only thing crews need to do is to follow the ground guides and
have refueling supplies ready (goggles, gloves, wet weather top, fire extinguisher).

TACTICAL HOT REFUEL

1 Vehicles arrive at to RP/holding area, wait turn to move
into refuel site, crews prepare to refuel (fire ext., gas caps,
goggles, etc.)

2 Vehicles move forward as necessary into refuel site, go to

farthest fueler and then stop. Site personnell ground guide

3 All vehicles stop and begin fuelling (timed in Hot Refuel).

Tanks are not shut down

4 Vehicles that have completed refuelling move to far site

holding area, wait for remainder of company
210
 APPENDIX 3. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND
RECOVERY

1. General: The repair and recovery of vehicles is essential for the

completion of the company's continuation of its mission. TF policy is to
repair all equipment as far forward as possible. The company
maintenance team has the responsibility to evaluate required repairs and
determine evacuation priorities.
2. Routine Maintenance: Routine maintenance PMCS is the
responsibility of the crew. Maintenance worksheets (5988s, 2404s) will
be turned in to the maintenance team on a DAILY basis. This should
occur as soon in the day as possible to allow mechanics to verify faults
and prepare the 5988s - 2404s for parts ordering. 5988s and 2404s that
have not already been turned in will be turned in at LOGPAC. New
5988s will be picked up from the mechanics at this time. Non-Mission
Capable deficiencies will be reported to the XO and maintenance team
chief IMMEDIATELY. Vehicles requiring organizational repairs will be
moved to a holding area with the combat trains. Higher level repairs
will be conducted at the UMCP. General planning guidelines are as
follows for vehicle evacuation: Work completed in 6 hours or less-
repair in place, Work requiring more than 6 hours, or not ready prior to
LD/Defend times - evacuate to UMCP.
3. Combat Losses: Vehicles damaged during tactical operations will be
reported to 1SG on the company net. The maintenance chief will
allocate the necessary personnel to evaluate the repairs required.
Repairs that will take less than 6 hours will be completed on site. Any
other repairs will be completed at the UMCP. Priority of evacuation
will be determined by the team chief. The company's team is
responsible for transporting the vehicle to the UMCP, or designated
assembly point. Crews will remain with their vehicles at all times.
Upon arrival at the UMCP, they fall under the command of the BMO,
but their primary responsibility is still to their vehicle. The XO is
responsible for reporting combat power to the TF; the 1SG is
responsible for reporting vehicle strength to the CTCP.
4. After Operations Recovery: After Operations Recovery will be carried
out following field training upon return to the motor pool, and will focus
on cleanliness, accountability, vehicle repair, and weapons maintenance.

211
The recovery plan is devised by the XO and 1SG based on guidance
from the commander. The basic outline for recovery is in the recovery
checklist (See ANNEX E, APPENDIX 8, -RECOVERY CHECKLIST).

212
 APPENDIX 4. PERSONNEL

A. General
1. Rosters: PLT SGTs will maintain a current roster of all personnel and
the platoon's status. The CO, XO and 1SG will maintain a current copy
of the entire units roster and status.
2. Sick call: Medics will be located with the combat trains. Sick Call will
be held daily during LOGPAC.
3. Mail Call: As available by Supply at LOGPAC.
4. Pay Call: as required/available
5. Church Call: As available by TF Chaplain.
6. Personal Items: Carry ID Card, ID Tags and military license at all
times.
7. Radiation doses: PLT LDRs will report daily doses as required.
8. Valor: All leaders are responsible for reporting heroic deeds for
appropriate awards. Citations and written statements in support of such
awards will be submitted with daily reports.
9. Replacements: 1SG is responsible for bringing replacements forward
and assigning them to a platoon. If possible, he will brief them, inspect
their equipment and insure that they are processed into the TF and
company. It is the PLT SGTs responsibility to ensure that all
replacements are briefed on the company's policies, SOPs and tactical
situation, inspected for accountability and serviceability of all
equipment and immediate integration into the platoon. Replacements
will be reported to the 1SG on the next personnel report submitted.

B. Medical Evacuation and Reporting

1. GENERAL: Medical evacuation is the responsibility of every
individual in the company. It is a priority to get all wounded soldiers of
the battlefield and to a medical care facility as soon as possible.
2. PRIORITY OF EVACUATION AND MARKING OF CASUALTIES: A
priority has to be set up for the evacuation of casualties due to the
nature of the injury. This is to ensure that the most serious injuries are
treated first. COMBAT LIFESAVER AND BUDDY AID

213
 SIGNIFICANTLY INCREASES THE LIKELIHOOD THAT A SOLDIER
WILL SURVIVE!
Casualty on Board VS-17 Panel on turret/ Night Red Star
Cluster
Litter Urgent (RED Flag) / Night Red chemlight -2 hrs
Priority/Litter (YELLOW Flag) / Night White chemlight 4
hrs
Walking Wounded (GREEN Flag) / Night Green chemlight 6
hrs
Routine not marked - treated at LOGPAC
3. EVACUATION PROCEDURE: Wounded will be given first aid by the
combat lifesaver on his vehicle and prepared for transportation. All casualties will
be reported to the 1SG over the Company net, ASAP (see ANNEX K, Appendix 1
(Reports) for format). The vehicle will move to a covered and concealed location,
if possible, place a VS-17 panel on the slope of the vehicle, and fly the appropriate
signal. Casualties will be transported with their NBC equipment ONLY. All other
equipment will remain on the vehicle. At LOGPAC, the Supply Sergeant will
secure all of the casualties equipment. The senior medical personnel will prioritize
evacuations using the reports given to the 1SG. The ambulance will transport
casualties to the ambulance exchange point and return to the company. This route
will be part of the medics rehearsals. Evacuation will be accomplished utilizing the
attached Medical ambulance, or other tactical vehicles as the situation allows. In
the event that the ambulance is unavailable for evacuation, the following vehicles
will act as such, in the following order:
Maintenance M113A3
B-77 (1SG's M113A3)
B-7
B-6
Combat Vehicles (M2 then M1A1)
It is imperative that all personnel know the location of the TF's Ambulance
Exchange Points. This information is vital for timely transportation of casualties to
medical personnel. Casualties will be reported ASAP to establish priority of
evacuation.

4. AIR MEDEVAC: - Air evacuation will be initiated when:

a. It would be detrimental to the casualty's medical condition to
travel by road.
b. Transfer by ambulance would take to long due to the seriousness
of the illness/injury (Life, Limb, or Eyesight).
c. Information for a 9 line AIR MEDEVAC request is listed below:

214
 1 - Location of LZ
2 - Radio Frequency
3 - Unit requesting
4 - Destination of patient(s)
5 - Number of patients by precedence
6 - Number of patients by type
7 - Method of marking LZ
8 - Security of LZ
9 - Patient personal information: (Name, Rank, Unit, and
injury)

C. KIA Evacuation/Reporting
1. General: It is important to evacuate all KIA's from the battlefield as
quickly as possible to minimize the impact of the deaths on the units'
morale.
2. Platoon Responsibility: Platoons will place the remains into body bags,
or wrap them in a poncho, blankets, sleeping bag, etc as soon as
possible. Personal effects remain with the body. All equipment will
remain with the vehicle and be recovered by the Supply Sergeant at
LOGPAC.
3. KIAs will be evacuated after all other casualties have been transported.
DO NOT transport KIAs with wounded, or prisoners. Available
transport is as follows: destroyed vehicles being towed to the rear,
LOGPAC vehicles returning to the LRP, specifically designated
vehicles.
4. Hasty Burials: Hasty burials are not authorized. All KIAs will be
transported to the rear.
5. Mark/label KIA with the following information: (include copy with
body)
a. Name
b. Unit
c. SSN# (if known)
d. 8 digit grid of death
e. short description of action that resulted in casualty.

D. HANDLING ENEMY POWs

1. POWs will be taken and treated IAW the rules of war.

215
 a. Disarm immediately
b. Search for weapons
c. Give medical aid as necessary
d. Don’t give prisoners food or water before they get to the POW
collection point
e. Rapidly process POWs to free up soldiers for combat missions.
f. The 1SG is responsible for establishing a company collection
point when it becomes necessary, as well as for coordinating
for the evacuation of the prisoners to the battalion or brigade cage.
g. High priority prisoners will be moved out by air if available.
2. Handling of prisoners:. Prisoners will be handled based on the five S’s
Search: Look for weapons and documents, maps, SOIs. Prisoner
keeps helmet, gas mask, and seasonal clothing, as well as
personal effects such as watches, family photos etc. once these
items have been checked.
Segregate: Split up by rank, nationality, sex. Also segregate
political agents, armed civilians, and political prisoners.
Silence: Keep the prisoners quiet and prevent them from talking
amongst themselves.
Secure: Guard the prisoners to prevent them from escaping, as
well as preventing friendly troops from harming or stealing from
them. Guards should operate in a team, one of which always
stays clear of the prisoner and covers them with weapons.
Speed to the rear. Get the prisoners to the battalion collection
point for quick interrogation. Do not drive them past CPs,
TOCs, or troop concentrations. Avoid moving through areas with
civilians.
3. Prisoners will be tagged with AE Form 1301. If these are not available
record the following information on an expedient tag:
a. Date, time, location of capture
b. Unit that captured POW
c. How POW was captured(gave himself up, resisted)
d. Any other info that may be of use to interrogator
4. Processing captured equipment and documents.
a. If a key, and time critical piece of Intel is recovered (maps,
graphics, OPORDs, radio - SOI information) immediately
treat this as a priority, and notify the chain of command.
a. Report any new or unusual equipment or documents.
b. Captured material will be tagged similar to that of POWs.

216
 c. Do not mark or deface documents
d. Destroy captured equipment only if recapture by the enemy is
imminent. Never destroy captured medical supplies.
e. Be careful for booby trapped equipment that has been left
behind or found lying about.

217
 APPENDIX 5. RAILHEAD OPERATIONS

1. Rail movement is the primary means of transporting the company for in

theater deployments. Rail loading operations entail special risks due to
high voltage wires, high density of moving people and equipment, and
the precise nature of train loading requirements. The following will be
used as a guideline for conducting rail loading and movement, and is
standardized with the 1AD rail movement SOP.
2. Rail loading operations will have a distinct chain of command:
Railhead Commander: CPT or above with prior rail experience.
Train Commander: 1LT or above with prior rail experience.
Safety Officer: E-7 or above with prior rail experience.
When multiple elements of the same unit utilize a common railhead, the
Railhead Commander and Railhead Safety Officer will remain in charge
until the railhead is complete.
3. Responsibilities:
a. Railhead Commander
(1) Responsible for all operations at the Railhead until
operations are completed
(2) Uses Railhead inspection Checklist as guide when
conducting rail loading / unloading operations.
(3) Will wear distinctive armband on left arm reading “Railhead
Commander”.
(4) Conducts recon of railhead site prior to beginning of
operation. Identify dangerous areas such as overhead
powerlines, intersections, and civilians.
(5) Conducts route recon to and from railhead.
(6) Establish liaison with local Branch Movement Control Team
(BMCT) representatives.
(7) Coordinates with Train Commander to ensure that all vehicle
movements, loading procedures, and safety briefing sites and
times are coordinated and planned.
(8) Monitors safety briefing given by the Safety Officer.
(9) Organizes the railhead site.
(10) Supervises medical support at the railhead.
(11) Ensures route in and out for medic vehicle remains clear.
(12) Checks medic vehicle for strip map to nearest medical

218
facility.
(13) Supervises security operations at the railhead.
(14) Ensure Railhead is policed prior to unit departing.
b. Train Commander
(1) Be familiar with rail loading procedures.
(2) Command and control railhead operations.
(3) Supervise safety on the railhead.
(4) Ensure vehicles have proper chock blocks, laterals, and tie
down equipment.
(5) Ensure all vehicles have gun tubes tied down over the tow
pintle, elevation and travel locks engaged.
(6) Ensure no items are left outside the vehicles.
(7) Ensure guards are identified to secure train if necessary.
(8) Conduct recon of railhead site.
(9) Establish contact with Railhead Commander and Branch
Movement Control Team (BMCT).
(10) Inspect lighting available for limited visibility operations.
(11) Ensure overhead power lines are turned off.
(12) Ensure medics are present.
(13) Inspect railcars for serviceability prior to loading. Ensure
cars are safe to load (i.e. old railloading residue, snow, ice,
mud).
(14) Inspect passenger car for cleanliness, and serviceability
prior to allowing troops to load.
(15) Ensure sensitive items are checked both prior to and after
loading / unloading operations are complete.
(16) Conduct railhead briefing prior to beginning loading or
unloading procedures. (See below)
(17) Enforce loading instructions of BMCT representatives.
(18) Ensure all personnel not involved in rail loading are kept at
least 50 meters from the railcars.
(19) Ensure soap and water, MREs, and trash bags are available
on the railhead site and on the passenger car.
(20) Complete appropriate portion of troop movement report
(AE form 2251), and Equipment Report (AE Form 2251-1).
Record discrepancies or unsatisfactory
conditions on this form. Furnish two copies of each form to
the BMCT representative, retain one copy.
(21) Report damage to equipment to the Railhead Commander

219
 prior to leaving the railhead site.
(22) Ensure passenger car is cleared of personal belongings after
trip is complete.
(23) Ensure cars and railhead site is policed prior to leaving.
c. Railhead Safety Officer
(1) Wear armband identifying self as safety officer.
(2) Is subordinate to the Railhead and Train Commanders and
provides safety guidance and supervision during the railhead
operation.
(3) Inspects railhead with train commander prior to loading / off
loading operations to identify potential safety hazards.
(4) Will not be involved in any other operations other than
supervising safety standards.
(5) Responsible for halting railhead operations due to unsafe acts
or conditions. Will advise Railhead Commander and Train
Commander of violation, and will ensure that corrective measures
have been taken prior to operation beginning again.
4. Rail loading /off loading procedures.
a. Vehicles are prepared prior to arriving on railhead.
(1) Antennas and external stowage removed.
(2) Gun tubes centered over tow pintle, elevation and travel lock
engaged, gun tube tie down cables installed.
(3) Metal chock blocks and laterals present along with tie down
chains for inop vehicles.
(4) Vehicles line up in the order that they are to be loaded, with
towed vehicles at the end, and the last vehicle being the company
M-88.
(5) Soldiers are in proper uniform: coveralls, Kevlar, Pistol belt
with canteen and first aid pouch, gloves, Chemlight or flashlight
(Night railhead ops).
b. Railhead commander and safety officer recon site and movement
route prior to unit movement. Checks for overhead wiring, lighting,
broken or unserviceable equipment, or unsafe conditions.
c. Upon arrival at railhead area, all personnel will dismount and move
to a holding area. Train commander and safety officer link up with
Railhead OIC and BMCT representative.
d. Railcars will be inspected when they arrive for serviceability,
cleanliness, unpulled nails, and ice, snow or mud. Cars will be
prepared for loading prior to any soldier moving a vehicle onto

220
 them.
e. A railhead safety briefing will be given to all personnel by the Train
Commander on conduct of rail loading operations, and safety.
f. The Train Commander will supervise the car preparation team. This
team will remove and replace metal stakes, lower gates and
stabilizers,
g. If side loading is to be conducted, the Train Commander will
coordinate with the Railhead Commander and Train Meister first.
h. Loading will begin only upon order of the Railhead Commander
after an OK by the Train Meister.
i. Upon direction of the Railhead Commander the Train Commander
will begin to call forward vehicles to be loaded. Vehicles will be
ground guided at all times at the railhead site. Drivers will receive
instructions only from a designated ground guide, no other
individuals will give instructions except to prevent safety violations.
Drivers must exercise extreme caution when approaching, traveling
over, and unloading vehicles from railcars. If at any time the driver
loses sight of the ground guide he must stop. At no time will
personnel occupy the same railcar as a moving vehicle, except when
removing chock blocks. Ground guides will not run and will not
walk backwards.
j. Once the vehicle is in position the Rail Meister will take over
responsibility for guiding the vehicle during chock block and lateral
positioning.
k. Once the vehicle is in position and the chock blocks are in place the
driver will put the vehicle in park, engage the parking brake, and
shut the vehicle down. Drivers will exit the vehicle by the top hatch,
ensuring that they remain low to avoid overhead power lines. Prior
to dismounting the vehicle the .50 CAL mount will be max
depressed, the 240 mount moved to the TC hatch side, and the
vehicle locked.
l. All disabled vehicles will be towed on with final drives engaged if
possible. Once on the train the inoperative vehicles will be chocked,
the parking brake engaged, and the tow bar disconnected and
secured under the vehicle. Those vehicles that cannot have final
drives engaged will be tied down with tiedown chains and chock
blocks.
m. Once complete with rail loading, crews will move to a holding area
until permission is given to get on the passenger car.

221
 n. Once all vehicles are loaded the Train Commander will inspect the
Train with the Railhead Commander, and Train Meister. Prior to
loading the passenger car the Train OIC will ensure that all
personnel and sensitive items are present. Soldiers will bring
sleeping gear and personal hygiene items with them on the train.
o. Personnel will be clear of the railcars prior to train being split.
p. Passengers will remain on the passenger car during the movement,
and will not dismount at the destination until told to do so by the
Train Commander.
q. Prior to unloading the vehicles all personnel will be gathered for a
briefing by the Train Commander and sensitive item check.
s. All trash and personal equipment will be removed from the train by
the passengers. The Train Commander will be responsible for
organizing a cleanup party to check the police of the cars.
t. Once vehicles have been off loaded they will move to a holding area
and begin restoring the vehicle load plan, beginning with
installation of antennas, and removal of gun tie down equipment.
Once a vehicle is set to move it will place its gun tube over the front
slope at max elevation.
u. Once all vehicles have been off loaded the Train Commander will
ensure that the railcars have been returned to travel configuration,
that the area is policed, that all sensitive items are accounted for,
and that all necessary paperwork has been completed by the Rail
Meister prior to departing the railhead site.

5. Railhead Checklist
Are key personnel identified with armband
Did Train Commander recon site and coordinate with Railhead
Commander
Have hazards been identified, evaluated, and minimized
Are soldiers in proper uniform
Is proper blocking and bracing equipment present
Are gun tubes tied down properly
Do towed vehicles have final drives engaged
Have antennas and externally stored items been removed
Are vehicles lined up in order of loading
Has railhead safety briefing been conducted
Do soldiers understand hazards at the railhead
Is medical support and ambulance available at railhead

222
 Are ground guides knowledgeable of railhead procedures
Are overhead power lines turned off
Is there lighting at the railhead sight
Do ground guides have lights
Are the cars free of nails, mud, ice, snow
Are the cars serviceable, ready to load
Are all sensitive items accounted for
Do soldiers have sleeping gear, water

6. Railhead Safety Brief

Identify key personnel at railhead site (Railhead, Train, and Safety OIC)
Show location of medics
All personnel not involved in rail loading stay in personnel holding area
All personnel will stay in uniform (Kevlar, Gloves)
Warn against complacency
Rail switches
Ensure vehicles are in turret and elevation lock
Antennas down
MG mounts properly stowed
Take all instructions from ground guides
Ground guides will not be on the same car as a running vehicle
Ground guides will not walk backwards when guiding a vehicle onto the
train
Do not stand on vehicles
Do not walk between running vehicles or vehicle an a stationary object
When two vehicles are loaded on one car, chock first before second moves
on
Ensure vehicles are parked and braked properly prior to shut down
Ensure all vehicles are locked prior to going to passenger car
Accountability of all sensitive items must be maintained
No objects are to be thrown from the railcar
Clean up after yourself
Do not stick head or arms out of railcar window
Do not get off of passenger car during stops, unless directed by NCOIC
No alcohol, smoking in designated areas only

223
 Offload Instructions: (in addition)
Pull Forward
Restore loadplan
Get comms operational, Radio Checks on frequency
__________________
Gun tube over front (max elevate to signify ‘Ready to Roll)
Help other crews on trail vehicles

224
 ANNEX D --COMMAND AND CONTROL
A. COMPANY ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT The Company can fight
either “pure”, or as a Company-Team. The company will most likely fight as a
company team, formed by the loss of one tank platoon and the gain of one
mechanized infantry platoon from a Mechanized Inf. BN. The exact composition of
the team will be governed by the tactical situation and the TF's OPORD.
Platoons are not normally broken down or sub-divided.
Tank Pure Company Team
B CO, 2/67 AR B CO(-), 2/67 AR
FIST, 2/3 FA --- PLT, - CO, --- IN
HQ 92, 2/67 AR (Medics) FIST, 2/3 FA
B Maintenance TM (HHC) HQ 92, 2/67 AR (Medics)
B Maintenance TM (HHC)
(--PLT / 23rd ENG)

Unless otherwise stated, the gained Infantry platoon will replace the lost Tank
Platoon in the Company formation. Cross attachment will be accomplished as early
as possible prior to an operation, but may be accomplished on the fly during a
battle. See APPENDIX 6, (ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENT DRILL) to ANNEX D

NOTE: If several small units have been attritted to combat ineffectiveness,

or stragglers are found along the way on the battlefield (any element of an
American organization that is not fighting as part of a unit towards some
objective) then that unit or vehicle will be incorporated into the Battlecats
until such a time that its parent unit can reclaim it. The only exception to
this is vehicles/troops whose presence would be a hindrance to the unit in
accomplishing its mission such as bridging, logistic, medical units.

B. SUCCESSION OF COMMAND: During tactical operations the commander

will be positioned with the main effort, the XO and FIST wherever they may best
support the operations, and the 1SG with the company trains to provide rapid
combat service support as the situation dictates.
Command will shift in the event of the death or injury of the commander
(or acting commander) or if the commander cannot be contacted for 10 minutes or
more during tactical operations. The Battalion TOC will be notified immediately
upon a change of command due to succession. Changes to this succession and the

225
specific platoon leader order will be addressed in the company OPORD. The radio
codeword for succession of command is "Batter up." Next in succession takes
command. His successor comes up on TF Net, and alerts the TOC of the
succession. The 1SG and XO will also have designated replacements during
tactical operations.

The succession of command is as follows:

Commander
Executive Officer
B Co. Platoon Leaders, by date of rank
Attached Platoon Leaders, by date of rank
Company FIST
First Sergeant
Platoon Sergeants, by date of rank

C. PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES:

Company Commander:
-Issues intent and guidance for tactical missions, designates main effort.
-Designates platoon consolidation positions and orientations in the
OPORD.
-Moves with the main attack, controls the immediate battle
-On the objective, repositions platoons and shifts orientations as necessary.
-Coordinates and synchronizes effects of weapons and assets assigned to
and supporting the company.
-Supervises the preparation of the defense.
-Plans to continue the attack, prepares FRAGOs as necessary.
-Combines platoon fire plans into a company team fire plan, ensuring that
changes to the indirect fire plan are included..

Executive Officer:
-Acts as second in command of the company
-Acts as Platoon Leader of Slice elements
-Assumes command in event of the company commanders incapacitation.
-Establishes communications with the BN/TF and reports as necessary.
-Selects the site for combat trains and resupply sites (with 1SG).
-OIC of quartering party
-Responsible for coordinating passages of lines
-Assumes control of CSS planning, freeing commander to control the

226
battle.
-Receives logistical reports from PLT SGTs until First Sergeant arrives.
-Establish Maintenance/Recovery priority.
-Assist 1SG in positioning CSS vehicles.
-Keeps the commander informed on CSS status.

First Sergeant:
-NCOIC of the combat trains
-Moves combat trains forward to a position selected by the XO.
-Directs Maintenance and Medical support forward as needed.
-Collects logistical reports from PLT SGTs.
-Request Emergency Re-supply as necessary.
-Arranges LOGPAC vehicles for resupply.
-Controls and runs LOGPAC operations.
-Organizes evacuation of KIA, WIA, EPW, recovery of damaged equipment.
-Cross-Levels soldiers and NCOs between platoons to fill key positions.
Platoon Leaders
-Responsible for tactical employment of PLT IAW commanders intent.
-Coordinate with adjacent platoons during tactical ops.
-Specified Platoon Leader replaces XO in XO’s absence.
Platoon Sergeant
-Assume control of PLT in absence of Platoon Leader
-Supervise evacuation of casualties and POWs.
-Submit all admin/logistical reports to 1SG.
-Cross-level personnel and ammunition within the platoon.
-Supervise refueling, rearming, and maintenance of the platoon
Master Gunner:
-Assist 1SG / XO as necessary, assume 1SG duties in his absence
-Assist with evacuation of wounded
-On order act as bulldozer CINC.
-Perform additional missions as dictated by the commander
NBC NCO
-Move with company Trains as Driver of B6
-Assists the 1SG as necessary
-Supervise all NBC related activities (Reporting, Decon, Coordination)
-Assists in evacuation of wounded
Maintenance Section Sergeant
-NCOIC of company maintenance team
-Supervises maintenance, repair, and evacuation of equipment

227
-Assists 1SG as necessary during LOGPAC operations
Supply Sergeant
-NCOIC of field trains personnel
-Prepares and coordinates troop LOGPAC
-Leads LOGPAC to LRP linkup with 1SG

228
D. COMMUNICATION: (See also ANNEX K: SIGNAL)
1. Operations: The FM voice radio is the primary means of controlling the
company team's operations. Radios are normally operated in FH mode,
with the lowest power setting that can be used. Tie down all antennas
IAW -10 standards. Leaders will maintain dual net capability and
"jump" vehicles as necessary in order to maintain communication. In
Battle Positions and Assembly Areas, wire will be laid to create
company and platoon hot loops if the Company will be in position for
more than 12 hours. Hot Loops will be used INSTEAD of the radio;
speakers will NOT be used after the hours of darkness. The
headquarters section is responsible for maintaining communications
with battalion . Only green communications are permitted on the
Company Command Net. The ANCD will be signed for by the XO, and
will be used to fill the other ANCDs.

2. Radio Nets: The Company will operate with either of two basic radio
configurations based on the tactical situation: Company net or Platoon
nets. Radio configuration will be determined prior to an operation and
will change as the situation requires. Generally the company net will be
used during simple operations (tactical roadmarches), when reaction
time is critical (movement to contact), or after the unit becomes
attritted. Platoon nets will be used when the operation is complex, or
when additional command and control would jam the company net with
traffic. The individuals listed below will operate on those nets as shown.

COMPANY NET
Individual Operates On Monitors
Commander CO CMD BN CMD
Executive Officer BN CMD CO CMD
Platoon Leaders CO CMD BN CMD (ON ORDER)*
Platoon Sergeants CO CMD BN A&L (ON ORDER)
Tank Commanders CO CMD
Fwd Rec Det PLT NET CO CMD
First Sergeant CO CMD BN A&L
FIST FIRE SPT CO CMD
Attachments CO CMD INTERNAL
* Infantry PLT Leader will monitor / talk on PLT Net as necessary
Dismounts will use PLT or SQD internal as directed by PLT FSOP
unless directed to operate on other net

229
 COMPANY AND PLATOON NETS

Individual Operates On Monitors

Commander CO CMD BN CMD
Executive Officer BN CMD CO CMD
Platoon Leaders PLT NET CO CMD
Platoon Sergeants CO CMD PLT NET
Tank Commanders PLT NET -
Fwd Rec Det PLT NET CO CMD
First Sergeant CO CMD BN A/L
FSO FIRE CNTRL CO CMD
Attachments CO CMD Internal

If any platoon strength drops to 2 vehicles, both vehicles come up on

the company net.

3. Jamming and Interference: If you suspect that you are being jammed, or
are experiencing radio interference, take the following actions:
a. Check for a malfunctioning radio. Disconnect the antenna
leads. If the interference is still heard, then the radio is bad. At the
earliest opportunity, have it checked by the team's Commo
NCO.
b. Shift the radio to HIGH power.
c. Work through the jamming by -
1) Shortening transmissions
2) Sending messages twice
3) Utilize "Acknowledge"
4) Moving the vehicle to mask the jamming signal
5) Switch to the Anti-Jamming Net, on order (Codeword is
"BINGO"):
TIGER 1 - switch to 1st PLT net
TIGER 2 - switch to 2nd PLT net
TIGER 3 - switch to 3rd PLT net
4. If you believe that someone is monitoring your push and you have an
important message, use the code word “SHOTGUN.” This is for one-
on-one communications. Shotgun frequency is SC 30.300, secure mode.
Ex: “Blue 4, BATTLE 7 -- SHOTGUN over.”
“BATTLE 7, Blue 4 -- SHOTGUN out.”
This is for one-on-one communications!

230
 5. Radio Net Presets and Loadset arrangement: The loadset for each
ANCD will be the Battalion standard, and all ANCDs will be filled with
this. Following ICOM fills, crews will modify the actual configuration
of their radios as necessary to reflect the communication net
configuration in use. ANCD time will be used as the standard Company
time for tactical purposes. The Commander’s vehicle, or a designated
alternate are the only stations authorized to operate in FH-M mode.

6. All vehicles will carry spare antennas taped to the upper edge of the
bustle rack to replace those lost to artillery.

7. Frequency Synchronization: The signal for frequency synchronization is a

waving yellow flag by the TC of the vehicle that needs the Freq. Synch.
When this is seen by another crew they should immediately key the
necessary net to bring the other radio into synchronization.

8. Signals: See ANNEX K - SIGNAL

a. Hand and Arm Signals: GTA 17-2-14A describes the hand and
arm signals to be used within the platoons and between
vehicles. These signals will be used when appropriate to
minimize radio traffic.
b. Pyrotechnics: The current SOI edition and/or TF OPORD will
define and govern the use of pyrotechnic signals. Red pyro
will always mean a "real-life" emergency in a training situation
c. The following list and type of signals must be known by all
company team members:
1) Challenge
2) Password
3) Attack is anticipated (Air, Ground, NBC)
4) Commence firing / Begin attack
5) Cease ALL firing
6) Request / Initiate supporting fires
7) Lift supporting fires
8) Break contact / Move to subsequent positions
9) Objective secure / Mission accomplished
10) Breach Open, Assault Force move

231
9. Wire will normally be run during all static situations longer than 12
hours in duration. When practical, run two leads between each station
and use two different routes. Wire should be run high enough so as not
to snag antennas or buried at least six inches deep. Platoons will
check hot loop routes for compromise every 6 hours and their line to
the company CP every 6 hours by patrol. If necessary, the company
will leave commo wire in place when leaving an area.

232
 APPENDIX 1. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURES
1. Receive and Analyze the Mission
2. Issue a Warning Order
3. Make a Tentative Plan
4. Start Necessary Movement
5. Conduct Reconnaissance (Map and Terrain)
6. Make Decisions and Complete the Plan
7. Issue Operations Order
8. Supervise and Refine the Plan, Rehearse

ESTIMATE OF THE SITUATION:

1. Analyze METT-T:
a. Mission
b. Enemy (composition, location, strengths, weaknesses and
capabilities)
c. Terrain and Weather:
1) Weather forecast and Light data
2) Analyze Terrain using OACOK
Observation and Fields of Fire
Avenues of Approach (Mounted and Dismounted)
Cover and Concealment
Obstacles
Key Terrain
d. Troops available:
1) Number of operational systems
2) Personnel Shortages
e. Time Available
1) Planning vs. Preparation (1/3 vs. 2/3)
2) Backwards planning for timeline
2. Develop several courses of action
3. Wargame the courses of action
4. Consider the advantages and disadvantages of each course of action
5. Make a decision, choose the best course of action

233
 APPENDIX 2. THE ORDERS PROCESS

TAB A: ORDERS GROUP: Complete Operations Orders (OPORDs)

will be given when time is available for one. Fragmentary orders (FRAGOs) will
be used when there is not sufficient time for a complete order, usually less than 3
hours. Orders groups will be determined based on time available prior to LD,
Orders Group A being used if time is short. When time is critical FRAGOs will be
issued verbally or on the company net and will consist of Unit Mission,
Commanders intent, and missions of subordinate units, along with whatever other
information that can be put out in the time available.

Orders Group A Orders Group B Orders Group C

Commander Group A plus: Group B plus:
Executive Officer Platoon Sergeants Vehicle Cmdrs
Platoon Leaders Maintenance Tm Chief NBC NCO
Attachment Leaders Master Gunner
Fire Support Officer
First Sergeant

234
 A. OPORD Reproduction
The Company will normally utilize the standard Matrix OPORD format for written
orders. Verbal OPORDs will be given using the mission specific formats.
1. CO returns with BN order and graphics.
2. Immediately upon completion of adding company graphics the
headquarters section begins reproducing copies. (Distribution is the
same as OPORD distribution. Company graphics are added and reproduced in
blue ink, Battalion graphics will remain in black ink to prevent
confusion in the reporting of graphic control measures on the Task
Force net.
3. CO writes paragraph 1,2,3. XO/1SG write paragraph 4 & 5. CO/Fist
write fires paragraph and Engineer Platoon Leader writes engineer
paragraph.
4. Once the order is complete, the HQ’s section begins reproduction.
5. Distribution is as follows: (approx. 10 copies necessary)
a. Original + 1 to CO (for use by OC / spare)
b. XO
c. 1SG
d. 1/PLT Leader
e. FIST
f. 1/ea. attachment leader (Total = 9)
All vehicle commanders will have a copy of the graphics prior to LD. It is
the platoon responsibility to reproduce graphics at platoon level.

235
 B. Orders Issue

A. Issuing the OPORD

1. Ensure visual aids, sketches, terrain boards ready
2. Identify Orders Group, take attendance
3. Issue overlay prior, subordinates post,
4. Issue from overlooking terrain (when possible)
5. Orient the map to the ground, terrain orientation
6. Present order in chronological sequence
7. Use briefing aids:
a. Sand Table
b. Sketch
c. Air Recon photos
d. Execution Checklist
8. XO/1SG issue CSS portion of company OPORD
9. Avoid repetition
10. Give OPORD whenever time permits
11. Be as complete as time permits
12. When issuing contingency missions wait until basic OPORD is issued
before briefing other plans
13. Issue WARNOs whenever you get updated information
14. Use FRAGOs to make modifications on a basic OPORD that otherwise
remains intact.
15. Questions?
16. Time hack
17. Leaders Backbriefs

B. OPORD CHECKLIST. Ensure the following are covered in OPORD brief.

This is a basic format. More detailed formats for specific missions are in TAB
D.

1. SITUATION
a. Task Organization, Attachments and detachments
b. Weather (Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
c. Terrain (OAKOC) , Effect on operation
1) Obstacles (rivers, bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)

236
 2) Avenues of approach (mounted, dismounted)
3) Key terrain (towns, defensive terrain, engagement areas)
4) Observation
5) Cover and concealment
d. Enemy.
1) ID
2) Location, current activity
3) Composition, strength
4) Likely COAs
5) Artillery, CAS, Chemical capability
e. Friendly.
1) TF Mission, Commanders Intent
2) Left unit mission
3) Right unit mission
4) Forward unit mission
5) Unit to rear mission
6) Artillery and CAS available

2. MISSION: Who, What, When, Where, Why

3. EXECUTION
a. Commanders Intent
1) Purpose
2) Method
3) End state
b. Concept of the Operation
1) Scheme of Maneuver: Paint mental picture of how Company
will fight. Tie all strings together, including subordinate and slice
elements
2) Maneuver. Mission for each subordinate unit
3) Fires: Concept, priority, allocation, FPF, smoke, illum
4) Engineer: Priority, Purpose, obstacles, breaching
5) ADA
6) Recon Plan
c. Tasks to Maneuver Units
1) Mission statement to each Platoon
2) Specific tasks to each Platoon
d. Tasks to Combat Support Units
1) Specific instructions to Engineers, FIST, ADA

237
e. Coordinating Instructions
1) Movement instructions:
a) SP location, time,
b) Route,
c) Order march
d) Formation , interval
e) RP locations
f) Action at the RP
2) Reconnaissance instructions
a) Dismounted recon patrols
b) Leaders recon
c) Forward Patrols
3) Passage of Lines
a) Contact Points
b) Passage Points
c) Lanes and identification
4) Actions on the Objective, security
5) Actions on Contact: Direct Fire, Indirect, Obstacles
6) Actions at danger areas
a) Treelines
b) Open areas
c) Hilltops
d) Defiles
e) Towns
7) PIRs
8) Rally Points
9) MOPP level, time
10) ROE
11) Priority Targets
12) ADA posture
13) Reporting
14) Priorities of work
15) Timeline
a) Effective time of attachment
b) PCI
c) LOGPAC
d) Rehearsal, Type and time
e) Times of movement
f) Briefbacks

238
239
4. COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT
a. Trains
1. Organization of trains
2. Location
3. Movement of trains
b. Supply
1. LOGPAC time, location, method
2. Class I, III, IV, V, IX instructions
3. Special supply drops or requirements
4. Prestocking and emergency resupply
c. Medical
1. Casualty evac plan
2. Location of Ambulance transfer points
3. Location of aid station
4. NBC casualty evac
5. KIA evac plan
d. Personnel
1. EPW handling
2. Cross leveling
3. personnel replacements
e. Maintenance
1. Maintenance priority
2. Cross leveling
3. UMCP location
4. Recovery plan
f. Miscellaneous
1. NBC Decon plan
2. Decon sites
3. NBC dirty routes
4. Uniform
5. Contact teams
6. Logistical reporting

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL

a. Command
1. Location of Commander, XO
2. Location of CP
3. Location of next higher CP
4. Succession of Command

240
 b. Signal
1. Key Frequencies, call signs (MEDEVAC, ARTY)
2. Time of Frequency shift
3. Pyro signals (approved 1 echelon higher)
4. Challenge and password
5. Radio listening silence
6. Actions on jamming
7. Company or platoon net

C. Leader Backbriefs: Following the issuing of an OPORD the commander

will normally have the key leaders present conduct a backbrief to ensure that the
OPORD has been understood. The following items are covered in the backbrief:
- Intel overview
- Battalion Mission
- Battalion Commander’s Intent
- Company mission
- Company Commander’s Intent
- Company scheme of maneuver
- Platoon mission
- Concept of Fire Support and Engineers
- Specified and Implied Tasks
- Restrictions
- Command and Control of operation
- Medical Evacuation Plan
- Communications and Signal plan
- Timeline

D. Leader Briefbacks: Once the Platoon leader has completed his OPORD he
will conduct a Briefback for the Company commander. This is a quick synopsis of
his platoon scheme of maneuver, and serves to ensure that his plan fits the
Commanders Intent. This is not to be confused with a Backbrief, which occurs
immediately after the issue of the Company OPORD.

241
 C. Order Formats

The Company will use various OPORD and WARNO based on the situation or
mission. Time allowing the Commander will issue an OPORD with a written copy
for the participants. Often the OPORD or WARNO will be given verbally. In this
case one of the mission specific formats will normally be used. The following
OPORD and WARNO formats are covered here:
Attack
Defense
Withdrawal/Delay
Relief in Place
Rearward Passage of Lines / Battle Hand-off
Security / Counter recon
Tactical Roadmarch
Forward Recon Detachment
Briefing for Observation Post Personnel

WARNO
1. A WARNO is given immediately after the commander does a quick assessment
of his mission. The purpose is to begin concurrent activity as soon as possible.
a. WARNO should give subordinate enough information to begin
preparations for the operation
b. WARNOs should be given face to face by a brief orders group if
possible, otherwise over the radio
2. As a minimum the WARNO should include:
a. Addressees: Who it pertains to
b. Enemy situation
c. Company Mission
d. Time and place of earliest movement, REDCON change
e. Critical events
f. Changes in task organization, when effective, linkup info
g. Time and place of OPORD, Who attends, maps required
h. Priority of work: Patrols, rehearsals, recon, coordination
i. Acknowledge

OPORDs

242
 1. The Matrix OPORD format will normally be used for written OPORDs, while
the mission specific OPORD formats will be used for verbal OPORDs.
ATTACK OPORD

1. Situation
a. Enemy
ATTACK OPORD (CONTINUED)
-Where is he In what strength
2. Mission: We have the mission to .....
-WhatWho
is his
.....
disposition, purpose of his defense
Purpose of attack: Defeat
- What is the
What ..... layout of his defenses
enemy forces, Secure
terrain,Open a penetration,
When
- Likely .....
obstacles and kill sacksProvide
..... overwatch or support
Where .... by fire, Gain information, Fix
- Likely employment of Reserves
or decieve enemy
Why .....
- Forward security elements posted .....
- Most likely courses of action is .....
3. Execution
a. Commanders
- Weather Intent:
(Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
The purpose of our attack is ......
- Terrain (OAKOC) , Effect on operation
To accomplish this we will ......
1) Obstacles (rivers, bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)
The end state should be .....
b. Concept of2)theAvenues
Operationof approach (mounted, dismounted)
Plan for mission
3) Key byterrain
phase, by(towns,
BOS defensive terrain, engagement areas)
The main effort will be .....
4) Observation
c. Scheme of Maneuver
5) Cover and concealment
1st platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is ....
b. Friendly2nd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is ....
3rd platoon
-The mission has the mission
of Battalion of .....
is ..... The purpose is ....
d. The approach to the objective
- The purpose of the battalion attack is .....
- LD time is ...., REDCON 1 to move from TAA at .....
-The Battalion Commanders intent is ...... Purpose.... method.... end state....
- Route to the LD is .....
- The mission
- Order ofofmarch
the unit to ourmoving
/ Formation left is to..... Right
the LD is ........... Front ..... Rear .....
- The following
- Movementunits will be
formations willsupporting
be ..... Untilus
..........Then
(attachments and
will change to ..... detachments)
- Weapons and fire control measures
- The air situation is ..... NBC .... Civilians .....
- If we encounter ---- we will .....
e. Conduct of the arttack
- The overwatch force wil be ..... Assault Force ..... Assault Reserve .....
- Attack of intermediate objectives wiil be accomplished by .....
243
- Movement to the Support by Fire position
- Movement to the attack position
ATTACK OPORD (CONTINUED)
- The SBF force will prep the objective by .....
- Fire will be opened when .....
- Fire control and distribution on the objective will be accomplished by .....
- The Assault force will attack when .....
- The assault force will initiate the assault by .....
- The assault reserve will stand by vicinity ..... and will prepare to .....
- Consolidation and reorganization will be accomplished by .....
- Attack of subsequent objectives will be accomplished by .....
f. Combat Support
- Other units in the Battalion will support our attack by .....
- Artillery will support our attack by ..... Mortars ....
- Fires will be controlled by .....
- Fires will be initiated when ..... Lifted when ..... Shifted to .....
- The engineers will support the attack by .....
- The engineers will move .........
- CAS or Army air will support us by .....
- ADA will support the attack by ..... ADA status is ..... ADA will move with .....
g. Reconaissance
- The Battalion recon plan that supports our attack is .....
- The Company will compose a recon force composed of .....
- This forces mission will be to .....
4. Combat Service Support
a. Medics
- The medics will be located at..... They will travel .....
- The plan to evacute casualties is .....
- The AXP is located at .....
b. Logistic
- The LOGPAC will be conducted at ..... Time .....
- Emergency ammo and fuel will be handled by .....
- Special supply categories / instructions

244
 ATTACK OPORD (CONTINUED)
c. Maintenance / Recovery
DEFENSE OPORD
- The maintenance team will travel .....
- Recovery will be accomplished by .....
1.5.Situation
Command and Signal
a.a.Enemy
Command
- The enemy
-The Commander will be located with
is located..... His.....strength
The XOis..... The 1SG .....
......
- The succession of command is .....
-The purpose of his attack is .....
- The collection / rally points will be ....
- His most likely avenue of approach is ......
b.DEFENSE
Signal OPORD (CONTINUED)
- His secondary willavenues of approach are .....
2.- Mission:
The Company We have usemission
the -----radio net configuration.
to ..... Purpose of aDefense: Defeat
-- His
The most
..... likely
Whosignals we willattack
use willformation
be ..... will beenemy, Gain time, Retain
terrain, Destroy enemy
-- Most
The
WhatChallenge and Passwords
likely Course
..... of Actionare .....
.....They will change .....
- The code words we will use will be ..... Defense types: in sector, from
When
- Likely .....
employment of Recon will be ..... BPs, of a strongpoint
c. The timeline
Where .... for this mission is .....
- Most likely use of artillery..... CAS ..... NBC .....
- The
Whytime
..... right now is .....
3.-- Execution
Weather (Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
Any questions?
- a.Terrain (OAKOC)
Commanders Intent: , Effect on operation
We are defending to ......
1) Obstacles (rivers, bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)
To accomplish this we will ......
2) Avenues of approach (mounted, dismounted)
The main effort will be ......
3) Key terrain (towns, defensive terrain, engagement areas)
The end state should be .....
b. Concept of the4) Observation
Operation
5) by
Plan for mission Cover
phase,and concealment
by BOS
The main effort will be ....
b. Friendly
c. Scheme of Maneuver
-The mission of Battalion is .....
1st platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose of your defense is .....
- The
2ndpurpose of the
platoon has themission
battalion defense
of ..... is .....of your defense is .....
The purpose
-The
3rdBattalion
platoon hasCommanders intent
the mission of ..... Theispurpose
...... ofPurpose, Method,
your defense is ..... End state

- d.
TheSetup of the Defense
mission of the unit to our Left is ..... Right ....... Front ..... Rear .....
- Platoon main battle positions will be ..... Purpose of the positions will be .....
- The following units will be supporting us ..... (attachments and detachments)
- So that the enemy will be destroyed / defeated / turned / blocked by ......
- Our task organization will be ......
- L/R limits will be ......
- The aircontrol
- Fire situation is .....willNBC
and TRPs be .........Set Civilians
up by ..... .....
- Alternate Positions .... Purpose of alternate positions will be .....
- Routes between the positions will be .....
- Hide positions will be located .....
- We will occupy hide positions when ..... We will occupy BPs when .....
- How we will occupy the defensive position....
245
e. Engineer and Artillery and Combat Support
- The enginers will be used to .....
- Dig assets are ..... Dig priorities are .....The CINC dozer will be.....
DEFENSE OPORD (CONTINUED)
- Obstacles will be placed ..... By ..... Their purpose will be ....
- They will be overwatched by .....
- Obstacles will be closed when .....
- The engineers will defend ---- during the defense
- Obstacle material will be dropped at .....
- Key artillery targets are .... The purpose of these fires will be .....
- Targets will be triggered by .....(who, what conditions) Observed by .....
- CAS or Army air will support us by .....
- ADA will support the defense by ..... ADA status is ..... ADA will be located.....
f . Conduct of the Defense
- Fire will be opened when .....
- The priority targets will be .....
- Fire control and distribution in the EA will be accomplished by .....
- We will begin displacing when ....
- Rally points will be .....
g. Reconaissance
- The Battalion recon plan that supports our defense is .....
- The Company will compose a recon force composed of .....
- This forces mission will be to .....
h. Reserve
- The Company reserve will be .....
- Its mission will be ..... It will be committed when ..... CATK, Reinforce, Block
i. Security of the BP
- The plan for securing the BP during EA prep is .....
- OPs will be set .....
- Patrols will be conducted by ..... When .....
- No move time will be
j. Coordinating instructions
- Withdrawal of forward security will be accomplished by .....
- Displacement and rearward passage routes will be .....
- The work priorities are .....
- Preparation needs to be done by .....

246
DEFENSE OPORD (CONTINUED)
4. Combat Service Support
a. Medics
- The medics will be located at..... They will travel .....
- The plan to evacute casualties is .....
- The AXP is located at .....
b. Logistic
- The LOGPAC will be conducted at ..... Time .....
- Ammo prestock will be .....
- Special supply categories / instructions
c. Maintenance / Recovery
- The maintenance team will travel .....
- Recovery will be accomplished by .....
d. Other
- The NBC decon plan is .....
5. Command and Signal
a. Command
- The Commander will be located with ..... The XO ..... The 1SG .....
- The succession of command is .....
- The collection / rally points will be ....
- ..... will establish contact with our neighbors to ..... Coordinate for .....
b. Signal
- The Company will use -----radio net configuration.
- The signals we will use will be .....
- The Challenge and Passwords are ..... They will change .....
- The code words we will use will be .....
c. The timeline for this mission is .....
- The time right now is .....
- Any questions?

247
DELAY OPORD

1. Situation
a. Enemy
- Where is he In what strength
- The purpose of his attack is .....
- His most likely avenue of approach is ......
- His secondary avenues of approach are .....
- His most likely attack formation will be .....
- Most likely Course of Action is .....
- Likely employment of Recon will be .....
- Most likely use of artillery..... CAS ..... NBC .....
- Weather (Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
- Terrain (OAKOC) , Effect on operation
1) Obstacles (rivers, bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)
2) Avenues of approach (mounted, dismounted)
3) Key terrain (towns, defensive terrain, engagement areas)
4) Observation
5) Cover and concealment
b. Friendly
-The mission of Battalion is .....
- The purpose of the battalion defense is .....
-The Battalion Commanders intent is ......
- The Battalion main effort is .....
- The mission of the unit to our Left is ..... Right ....... Front ..... Rear .....
- The following units will be supporting us ..... (attachments and detachments)
- Our task organization will be ......
- The air situation is ..... NBC .... Civilians .....

248
DELAY OPORD (CONTINUED)
2. Mission: We have the mission to ..... Purpose of aDelay: Attrit
Who ..... enemy, gain time for setup of
defense, cover withdrawal
What .....
Delay types: in sector, from
When ..... Until ..... successive lines
Where ....
Why .....
3. Execution
a. Commanders Intent:
We are delaying in order to ...... We will support the Battalion main effort by .....
To accomplish this we will ......
The main effort will be ......
The end state should be .....
b. Concept of the Operation
Delay by successive lines ..... Times .....
Delay by successive BPs .....
c. Scheme of Maneuver
1st platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
2nd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
3rd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
d. Setup and conduct of the Delay
- Platoon main battle positions will be ..... Purpose of the positions will be .....
- So that the enemy will be destroyed / defeated / turned / blocked by ......
- L/R limits will be ......
- Fire control and TRPs will be ..... Set up by .....
- Alternate Positions .... Purpose of alternate positions will be .....
- Routes between the positions will be .....
e. Conduct of the Delay
- Fire will be opened when .....
- The priority targets will be .....
- Fire control and distribution will be accomplished by .....
- Withdrawal of forward security will be accomplished by .....
- We will begin displacing when .....

249
DELAY OPORD (CONTINUED)
- The routes we will use to withdraw are .....
- Rally points will be .....
- We will complete the delay by .....
- Battle handoff will be complete when .....
f. Engineer and Artillery and Combat Support
- The enginers will be used to .....
- Dig assets are ..... Dig priorities are .....The CINC dozer will be.....
- Obstacles will be placed ..... By ..... Their purpose will be ....
- They will be overwatched by .....
- Obstacles will be closed when .....
- Obstacle turnover will be accomplished by .....
- Obstacle material will be dropped at .....
- Key artillery targets are .... The purpose of these fires will be .....
- Targets will be triggered by .....(who, what conditions) Observed by .....
- CAS or Army air will support us by .....
- ADA will support the defense by ..... ADA status is ..... ADA will be located.....
g. Reconaissance
- The Battalion recon plan that supports our delay is .....
- The Company will compose a recon force composed of .....
- This force’s mission will be to .....
h. Reserve
- The Company reserve will be .....
- Its mission will be ..... It will be committed when ..... CATK, Reinforce, Block
i. Security of the sector
- The plan for security is .....
j. Coordinating instructions
- The work priorities are .....
- Preparation needs to be done by .....
- The deception plan will be .....

250
DELAY OPORD (CONTINUED)
4. Combat Service Support
a. Medics
- The medics will be located at..... They will travel .....
- The plan to evacute casualties is .....
- The AXP is located at .....
b. Logistic
- The Company trains will be located at .....
- The LOGPAC will be conducted at ..... Time .....
- Ammo prestock will be .....
BATTLE HANDOFF
- Special supply / REARWARD PASSAGE OF
categories / instructions
LINES OPORD
c. Maintenance / Recovery
- The maintenance team will travel .....
1. Situation
- Recovery will be accomplished by .....
a. Enemy
d. Other
-Where is he In what strength
- The NBC decon plan is .....
- His most
5. Command and likely
Signal avenue of approach is ......
- His secondary avenues of approach are .....
a. Command
- -The
Most likely Course
Commander will beof Action
located is .....
with ..... The XO ..... The 1SG .....
- -The succession
Most of command
likely use is ..... CAS ..... NBC .....
of artillery.....
- The collection / rally points will be ....
- Weather (Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
- ..... will establish contact with our neighbors to ..... Coordinate for .....
- Terrain (OAKOC) , Effect on operation
b. Signal
1) Obstacles (rivers, bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)
- The Company will use -----radio net configuration.
2) Avenues
- The signals we will use will beof
.....approach (mounted, dismounted)
3) Passwords
- The Challenge and Key terrain
are(towns, defensive
..... They terrain,
will change ..... engagement areas)
- The code words we will use will be .....
4) Observation
c. The timeline for this
5) mission is .....concealment
Cover and
- The time right now is .....
b. Friendly
- Any questions?
-The mission of Battalion is .....
- The purpose of the battalion defense is .....
-The Battalion Commanders intent is ......
- The Battalion main effort is .....
- The mission of the unit to our Left is ..... Right ....... Front ..... Rear .....
- The following units will be supporting us ..... (attachments and detachments)251
- Our task organization will be ......
- The air situation is ..... NBC .... Civilians .....
BATTLE HANDOFF / REARWARD PASSAGE OF LINES OPORD
(CONTINUED)
2. Mission: We have the mission to .....
Who .....
What .....
When ..... Until .....
Where ....
Why .....
3. Execution
a. Commanders Intent:
We are withdrawing in order to ...... We will support the Battalion main effort by .....
To accomplish this we will ......
The main effort will be ......
The end state should be .....
b. Concept of the Operation
Preparations will be .....
Overall scheme of withdrawal will be .....
Deception plan is .....
c. Scheme of Maneuver
1st platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
2nd platoon has the mission of ..... The Purpose is .....
3rd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
d. Preparations for and conduct of the withdrawal
- Coordination for the withdrawal will be accomplished by .....
- Recon will be accomplished by .....
- Battle Handoff line will be ..... By .....
- Withdrawal route will be ...... Recognition signals .....
- Order of withdrawal will be .....
- Security will be provided by .....
- Battle handoff will be complete when .....
- Upon withdrawal units will go to .....

252
BATTLE HANDOFF / REARWARD PASSAGE OF LINES
OPORD (CONTINUED)
e. Engineer and Artillery and Combat Support
- The enginers will be used to .....
- Obstacles will be placed ..... By ..... Their purpose will be ....
- They will be overwatched by .....
- Obstacles will be closed when .....
- Obstacle turnover will be accomplished by .....
- Obstacle material will be dropped at .....
- Key artillery targets are .... The purpose of these fires will be .....
- Targets will be triggered by .....(who, what conditions) Observed by .....
- CAS or Army air will support us by .....
- ADA will support the defense by ..... ADA status is ..... ADA will be located.....
f. Coordinating instructions
- Stay behind forces will .....
- The work priorities are .....
- Preparation needs to be done by .....
- The deception plan will be .....

253
BATTLE HANDOFF / REARWARD PASSAGE OF LINES OPORD
(CONTINUED)
4. Combat Service Support
a. Medics
- The medics will be located at..... They will travel .....
- The plan to evacute casualties is .....
- The AXP is located at .....
b. Logistic
- The Company trains will be located at ..... They will move ....
- The LOGPAC will be conducted at ..... Time .....
- Ammo prestock will be .....
- Special supply categories / instructions
c. Maintenance / Recovery
- The maintenance team will travel .....
- Recovery will be accomplished by .....
d. Other
- The NBC decon plan is .....
5. Command and Signal
a. Command
- The Commander will be located with ..... The XO ..... The 1SG .....
- The succession of command is .....
- The collection / rally points will be ....
- ..... will establish contact with our neighbors to ..... Coordinate for .....
b. Signal
- The Company will use -----radio net configuration.
- The signals we will use will be .....
- The Challenge and Passwords are ..... They will change .....
- The code words we will use will be .....
c. The timeline for this mission is .....
- The time right now is .....
- Any questions?

254
RELIEF IN PLACE OPORD

1. Situation
a. Enemy
-Where is he In what strength
-What is his disposition
- What is thislayout
- Recon forces in area include ..... Their mission is .....
- Most likely courses of action is .....
- Weather (Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
RELIEF IN PLACE
- Terrain OPORD
(OAKOC) , Effect(CONTINUED)
on operation
2. Mission: We have the mission to (rivers,
1) Obstacles ..... bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)
Who ..... 2) Avenues of approach (mounted, dismounted)
Methods of Relief in Place: Relief in
What ..... the(towns,
3) Key terrain Battle Positions,
defensiveEstablish
terrain,own
engagement areas)
positions to rear of relieved troops
When .....
4) Observation
(who then do rearward passage of
Where .... lines), Attack through troops in
5) Cover anddefensive
concealment
positions and establish own
Why .....
b. Friendly positions forward (relieved troops then
3. Execution pull out)
-The mission of Battalion is .....
a. Commanders Intent:
- The purpose is .....
The purpose of our relief is is ...... We support tne BN main effort by ....
-The
To Battalionthis
accomplish Commanders
we will ...... intentThe
is ......
MethodPurpose, Method,
of relief will be .....End state
- The
The endmission of thebeunit
state should ..... to our left is ..... Right ....... Front ..... Rear .....
- The following
b. Concept units will be supporting us ..... (attachments and detachments)
of the Operation
Plan
- Theforairmission by phase,
situation is ..... byNBC
BOS.... Civilians .....
The main effort will be .....
c. Scheme of Maneuver
1st platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
2nd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
3rd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose is .....
d. Preparations for the relief
- The Recon/Coordination team will be composed of ......
- It will move out at .......
- It will link up with the forward unit at .... Recognition Signals are .....
- The following key things will be coordinated .......
- It will return at ...... (or stay in the positions) 255
- Rehearsal will occur at....
RELIEF IN PLACE OPORD (CONTINUED)
e. Conduct of the Relief
- Order of relief will be .....
- LD time is ...., REDCON 1 to move from TAA at .....
- Route is .....
- Order of march / Formation is .......
- Weapons and fire control measures
- Assembly Area/Rally point will be ......
- Guides will be posted at .....
- Security during the relief will be provided by .....
- Movement into the positions will be accomplished by ....
- Battle handoff is completed when ......
- Withdrawal of the other unit will be ......
- Following the relief we will.....
f. Combat Support
- Other units in the Battalion will support us by .....
- Artillery will support by ..... Mortars ....
- Fires will be controlled by .....
- Fires will be initiated when ..... Lifted when ..... Shifted to .....
- The engineers will support us by .....
- The engineers will move .........
- CAS or Army air will support us by .....
- ADA will support the attack by ..... ADA status is ..... ADA will move with .....
- The deception plan is .....
4. Combat Service Support
a. Medics
- The medics will be located at..... They will travel .....
- The relieved unit can support us by .....
- The plan to evacute casualties is .....
- The AXP is located at .....

256
RELIEF IN PLACE OPORD (CONTINUED)
b. Logistic
- The LOGPAC will be conducted at ..... Time .....
- Emergency ammo and fuel will be handled by .....
- Special supply categories / instructions
c. Maintenance / Recovery
- The maintenance team will travel .....
- Recovery will be accomplished by .....
5. Command and Signal
a. Command
- The Commander will be located with ..... The XO ..... The 1SG .....
- The succession of command is .....
- The collection / rally points will be ....
b. Signal
- The Company will use -----radio net configuration.
- Who will operate on whose net .....
- Recognition signals are
- The signals we will use will be .....
- The Challenge and Passwords are ..... They will change .....
- The code words we will use will be .....
c. The timeline for this mission is .....
- The time right now is .....
- Any questions?

257
SECURITY / COUNTER RECON OPORD
1. Situation
a. Enemy
- Where is he In what strength
- What type of recon can we expect .... When .....
- His most likely avenue of approach is ......
- His secondary avenues of approach are .....
- His probable recon focus is .....
- Most likely use of artillery..... CAS ..... NBC .....
- Weather (Forecast, effect on operations, light data)
- Terrain (OAKOC) , Effect on operation
1) Obstacles (rivers, bridges, defiles, road trafficability, woods)
2) Avenues of approach (mounted, dismounted)
3) Key terrain (towns, defensive terrain, engagement areas)
4) Observation
5) Cover and concealment
- TRPs or other key terrain that wil be used to orient on
b. Friendly
-The mission of Battalion is .....
- The purpose of the battalion defense is ..... The location of the defense is .....
-The Battalion Commanders intent is ......
- The mission of the unit to our Left is ..... Right ....... Front ..... Rear .....
- The following units will be supporting us ..... (attachments and detachments)
- Our task organization will be ......
- The air situation is ..... NBC .... Civilians .....
2. Mission: We have the mission to .....
Who .....
What .....
When ..... Until ......
Where ....
Why .....
Our follow on mission will be .....

258
SECURITY / COUNTER RECON OPORD (CONTINUED)
3. Execution
a. Commanders Intent:
- We are conducting this counter recon / security screen to ......
- To accomplish this we will ......
- The end state should be ..... Aproximate end time is ...
b. Concept of the Operation
Purpose of Counter Recon /
- Plan for mission by phase, by BOS Security force: observe NAIs,
- The main effort will be .... kill enemy recon
- We will stop the enemy by .....
c. Scheme of Maneuver
1st platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose of your screen is .....
2nd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose of your screen is .....
3rd platoon has the mission of ..... The purpose of your screen is .....
d. Setup of the Screen
- OPs will be placed ...... By ..... OPs breifed as per OP OPORD
- They will have the mission of .....
- Upon enemy contact they will .....
- Dismounted OP/ ambushes will be set up at ..... by .....
- The tank killer sections will be located .....
- The routes in the Company sector are .....
- Fire will be opened when .....
- The priority targets will be .....
- Fire control and distribution will be accomplished by .....
- We will begin displacing when ....
e. Patrols
- Composed of .....
- Will patrol to ...... Time .....
- Routes / areas of responsibility will be .....
- Action on contact will be .....

259
SECURITY / COUNTER RECON OPORD (CONTINUED)
f. Employment of reserve
- The Reserve will be composed of .....
- It will be positioned .......
- It will have the mission of .....
- It will have secondary misions of .....
g. Engineer and Artillery and Combat Support
- The enginers will be used to
- Obstacles will be placed ..... By ..... Their purpose will be ....
- They will be overwatched by .....
- Obstacles will be closed when .....
- They will be marked by .....
- Obstacle material will be dropped at .....
- Dig assets are ..... Dig priorities are .....The CINC dozer will be.....
- Key artillery targets are .... The purpose of these fires will be .....
- Targets will be triggered by .....(who, what conditions) Observed by .....
- Mortars will support us by .....
- CAS or Army air will support us by .....
- ADA will support us by ..... ADA status is ..... ADA will be located .....
- ADA alarm will be given by .....
h. Conduct of the Displacement
- We will displace on the following route(s) ....
- The method of displacement will be .....
- Once displaced we will move to .....
- Coordination for the displacement will be conducted by .....
- Rally points will be .....
j. Coordinating instructions
- We will prepare for the folow on mission by .....
- The work priorities are .....

260
SECURITY / COUNTER RECON OPORD (CONTINUED)
4. Combat Service Support
a. Medics
- The medics will be located at..... They will travel .....
- The plan to evacute casualties is ..... Local collection points will be set at .....
- The AXP is located at .....
- Escort for the medics will be by .....
b. Logistic
- The LOGPAC will be conducted at ..... Time .....
- Escort for the LOGPAC will be .....
- Ammo prestock will be .....
- Special supply categories / instructions
c. Maintenance / Recovery
- The maintenance team will be located.....
- Recovery will be accomplished by .....
d. Other
- The NBC decon plan is .....
5. Command and Signal
a. Command
- The Commander will be located with ..... The XO ..... The 1SG .....
- The succession of command is .....
- The
- The collection / rally points will be ....
b. Signal
- The Company will use -----radio net configuration.
- The signals we will use will be .....
- The Challenge and Passwords are ..... They will change .....
- The code words we will use will be .....
- Markings for obstacles will be .....
- Recognition signals for the displacement will be .....
c. The timeline for this mission is .....
- The time right now is .....
- Any questions?

TACTICAL ROADMARCH OPORD: An OPORD / safety briefing will be given

by the convoy commander prior to any movement. All personnel in the convoy are

261
required to be briefed. It will include the following information;
a. Destination
b. The route to be followed (show on map, include rally points)
c. Order of march
d. Line up, Movement to the SP, SP time
e. Actions at RP, linkup with quartering party
f. Quartering Party / FRD information
g. Speed and interval, catch up speed
h. Radio frequencies and any other signals
i. Location of medical and maintenance assets
j. Security measures during the march and halts
k. Scheduled halts and maintenance checks to be done
l. Actions on Contact(Air, artillery, ambush, sniper, NBC)
m. Action on a breakdown, break in column
n. Actions on halts
o. Convoy commander and location in column
p. Any relevant additional information

FORWARD RECON DETACHMENT OPORD: OPORD to FRD Leader. The

Company Commander is responsible for assigning the FRD mission. Most of the
details of execution are left to the FRD leader, the Commander providing only the
basic concept and necessary coordinating information. During the OPORD brief the
following items are discussed:
- Mission of the FRD
- Commanders Intent: What is the FRD looking for/trying to accomplish.
- Concept of the Operation. How the FRD fits into the Company Plan.
- The Recon Objective (or with numerous objectives, the priority of the
Objectives)
- Attachments and Detachments
- Overwatch/support of FRD movement
- Route to follow, or boundaries
- Report criteria (specify times, locations, or on specific contact)
- Actions on the Objective (if any)
- Actions on Contact (by exception only)
- When FRD returns to normal organization (when dissolved)
- Signal information
OP BRIEFING: Prior to being assigned as the LP/OP personnel, the individual
will be fully briefed by, at least, his tank commander. He will know and
understand the following information:

262
a. Company, Platoon and his position on the map, orientation of map
b. Company Mission and Commander’s intent
c. OP sector of responsibility
d. Friendly and enemy activity in sector (including local patrols)
e. Likely Avenues of Approach (mounted and dismounted)
f. Actions on observing enemy activity
g. Withdrawal criteria
h. Relief information - when and by whom
i. Challenge and Password
j. What is he looking for. What should he expect to see.

263
 OPORD FORMAT (MATRIX ORDER) Normally used for written OPORDs
TF ORDER: LIGHT DATA
MANEUVER SKETCH
CO ORDER: TODAY
DTG:
BMNT:
TIME ZONE:
SR:
MAP SERIES: SS:
EENT:
TASK ORG MR
MS
% ILLUM:
MOONRISE:
TOMORROW
BMNT:
SR:
SS:
EENT:
MR
MS
% ILLUM:
MISSION:
AFFECTS OF WEATHER AND TERRAIN

FORECAST:

TRAFFICABILITY: ENEMY SITUATION FRIENDLY SITUATION

GENERAL:
VISIBILITY: TF MISSION:

OBSTACLES:
LOCATION:
HIGHER INTENT:
AVE OF APP:
ACTIVITY:
OBS & FLDS OF FIRE:

KEY TERRAIN:
EQUIPMENT:

CAPABILITIES:
ADJ UNITS

FRONT:
MOST PROBABLE ENEMY COA:
LEFT:

RIGHT:

REAR:
ARTY:
ADA:
ENG:

COMMANDERS INTENT CONCEPT:

PURPOSE:

METHOD:

ENDSTATE:

UNIT
TASK

1ST

2ND

3RD

ENG

FIRES ENGINEER
CMDRS INTENT:_________________________________________________________________ PRIORITY OF MISSION:____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________ PRIORITY OF EFFORT:____________________________________________________________
PRIORITY OF FIRES:_____________________________________________________________ CINC ACE:________________________________________________________________________
PRIORITY TARGETS:_____________________________________________________________ CDR INTENT:______________________________________________________________________
RESPONSIBILITY:________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________
ENGAGEMENT CRITERIA:________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________
MORTARS:_______________________________________________________________________ OBST # ENG EQUIPMENT AVAIL FROM TO RESPONSIBILITY
CAS:_____________________________________________________________________________
FIRE SUPPORT NET: PRIM.________ ALT.________ FDC NET.________
LOCATION OF FIST:______________________________________________________________
KEY CALL SIGNS:________________________________________________________________
264
 SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS
SP:____________________________________ FORM/TECH:_____________________________
PIR:________________________________________________________________________________ 1ST
ORD MARCH:__________________________ __________________________________________
RTE:__________________________________ __________________________________________
ALT RTE:_____________________________ REHEARSAL:_____________________________
2ND
MOPP LEVEL/TIME:____________________ __________________________________________
OEG:__________________________________ STAND TO:________ REDCON 1:____________
ENG CRIT:_____________________________ BYPASS CRIT:____________________________
TRIGGER/BREAK:__________________________________________________________________
3RD
SECURITY PLAN:___________________________________________________________________
ADA:_______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT
_____________________________________________________
LRP’S:__________ / __________ / __________ / __________ BAS: __________ / __________ / __________ / __________
_____________________________________________________
CTCP:__________ / __________ / __________ / __________ JAS:: __________ / __________ / __________ / __________
_____________________________________________________
AXP:__________ / __________ / __________ / __________ UMCP: _________ / __________ / __________ / __________
_____________________________________________________
RATION CYCLE:_______ LOG PAC TIMES:__________ / __________ MSR:_______________________ ALT:___________________
_____________________________________________________
DECON:__________ / __________ / __________ EPW’S:__________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
WOUNDED:____________________________________________ KIA’S : _____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
CIVILIANS:_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________

TIME LINE / PRIORITY OF WORK

COMMAND AND SIGNAL
LOCATION OF: TF CDR.:__________ TF S-3:__________ CO CDR:_____________ XO.: ___________________
SUCCESSION OF COMMAND:_____________________________________________________________________
PYRO / RECOGNITION:___________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
FREQ’S________________________________________________CHALLENGE:_______________PASS:______________

FRAGO
The FRAGO is simply a change to the basic OPORD that changes certain aspects
of the plan, but leaves the remainder of the OPORD valid. The FRAGO will
normally be issued verbally, but may be written if it is a detailed addition to a
current OPORD. Unless changed specifically by the FRAGO, the information
contained in the current OPORD remains valid.

265
APPENDIX 3. REHEARSALS
a. Rehearsals will be conducted at all levels prior to LD. These can be
radio, terrain boadr, walk-through, or mounted rehearsals. Rehearsals
will be conducted down to the individual crew member levels to allow
all of the company team members to understand the mission and their
role in it. The rehearsal should cover the following: unit missions,
commanders intent, higher units mission and commanders intent,
scheme of maneuver, subordinate unit missions, and should be walked
through by phase by BOS. The XO will normally play the OPFOR. The
purpose is to identify and work on weak areas, and ensure an
understanding of the scheme of maneuver and how all the maneuver
elements fit into it. The goal is to allow vehicle commanders to fight the
battle with a minimum of referral to maps, graphics or written orders.
b. A rehearsal kit will be kept in the HQ section, and will be used for the
construction of terrain boards. Terrain boards will show key terrain,
TAAs, boundaries, Phase Lines, Objectives, Targets, TRPs, Axes and
Limits of Advance, Support by Fire positions, battle positions, hide
positions, trigger lines, obstacle locations, and any other pertinent
information to help the participants.
c. The company rehearsal is normally run by the commander. He will
develop a list of action/reaction/counteraction events based on the
understanding of the enemy situation. This will form the basis of the
script for the rehearsal. During the rehearsal each critical operational
event will be practiced, along with contingencies, and branch plans.
When the entire mission and scheme of maneuver is known (after the
OPORD has been issued) the rehearsal will focus on the actual
execution of a mission. If only basic information is known (the CO has
issued a WARNO, then gone to receive the TF OPORD) the rehearsal
may be run to focus on expected contingencies and battle drills that may
have to be executed during the mission.
d. Terrain board rehearsal:
-Ensure key leaders are present
-Orient participants to terrain
-Conduct defense rehearsal from point where enemy comes into view
-Give BN mission, Commanders intent
-Give CO mission and Commanders intent

266
 -Walk through by phase/BOS
-Answer questions, adjust plan as necessary

e. Mounted Rehearsals
-Alert unit to be ready at specified time and place
-Establish what terrain will be used in the rehearsal, and what it will be
representing in relation to actual terrain. If possible use actual terrain.
-Create an OPFOR
-Ensure participants understand plan before beginning
-Have someone maintain security
-Begin operation slowly
-Focus rehearsal on the key events of the upcoming operation
-Talk through stages on the radio
-Use actual signals that will be used in Combat
-Ensure leaders submit necessary SPOTREPs
-Run iterations to practice basic plan, then change the situation
-Conduct brief AARs between iterations. This may be done on the
ground, but will usually be done on the radio to save time and allow more
iterations.
-Conduct as many iterations as necessary until complete
-Increase difficulty by practicing buttoned up, changing scenario,
changing sub unit missions, killing off key leaders, using radio
listening silence.

f. Offensive Rehearsals
-Conduct from vantage point if possible
-Plan for casualties
-Rehearse for NBC, limited visibility execution
-Review Critical Actions
+movement to the LD: uncoiling method, time, order march
+crossing LD: formation, movement technique, time
+actions on contact: most likely location, obstacles
+actions on the objective: orient, occupy, threat
-Intel
+possible enemy locations: obstacles, BPs, kill sacks
+types, capabilities, weapons
+reporting requirements, priority intel
-Maneuver
+scheme of maneuver
+routes to attack positions, passage points, LD
+recon activities
+actions of dismounts, engineers
+formations, movement techniques, orientation
+actions at specific points: PLs, checkpoints, defiles

267
 +actions on contact: direct, indirect
+fire control and distribution measures
+ continuing to fight with casualties
+actions in the absence of orders
-Fire Support
+review Commander’s intent
+priority of fires, priority targets, FPFs
+who calls fires: primary, backup
+location and execution of triggers
+location, movement of FIST
+actions of alternate FIST, frequencies, callsigns
-Engineer
+integration and movement of engineer assets
+actions at known or suspected obstacles
+drills for unknown obstacles
-ADA
+integration, location, movement of slice elements
+active and passive measures
-NBC
+initial MOPP level
+reaction to NBC attack, DECON drill, location of DECON sites
-Command and Control
+Commander’s intent
+loss of communications actions
+use of pyro, codewords, flags, hand and arm signals
+chain of command locations, fallout drills
+fire commands, distribution, controls, limitations
+radio net and reporting review
-Combat Service Support
+casualty marking and reporting, casualty evacuation (redundancy)
+maintenance collection and evacuation
+emergency resupply

g. Defensive Rehearsals
-Plan for casualties during operation
-Conduct Rehearsal over actual terrain
-Review critical actions
+actions when enemy enters sector
+actions on enemy contact, initiation of fires
+commitment of reserve
+disengagement, displacement
-Intell
+likely enemy formations
+types and capabilities of enemy weapons
+reporting, priority intelligence requirements
-Maneuver

268
 +recon/counter recon plan
+movement from hide positions into BPs
+routes within the BP
+routes to subsequent BPs
+organization of the BP: EA, trigger lines, FPFs, breakpoints
+counterattack plan
+fire distribution and control
+actions at direct/indirect fire triggers, initiation of fires
+ fighting with casualties (redundancy plan)
+displacement criteria
+actions in the absence of orders
-Fire Support
+Commander’s intent
+who calls for fire: primary and backup
+what triggers fires: location and execution
+priorities of fires, FPFs
+location, movement of FIST
+FIST backup plan, radio nets and frequencies
-Engineer
+location, purpose of obstacles, tactical and protective
+responsibility for obstacle emplacement, overwatch, lane closure
+actions when enemy encounters obstacles
+locations and orientation of BPs
+location, activity of engineers during battle
-ADA
+integration, location of ADA, active and passive measures
+actions on air attack: fixed wing, rotary
-NBC
+initial MOPP posture and time
+reaction to NBC attack, NBC teams actions
+location of, and movement to DECON sites
-Command and Control
+Commander’s intent
+fire commands, control, initiation, distribution
+use of pyro, signals, codewords, hand and arm signals
+chain of command locations, fallout actions
+loss of communications actions
-Combat Service Support
+casualty marking, reporting, and evacuation
+maintenance collection and evacuation
+emergency resupply, location and use of prestocks
+medic/maintenance recon of routes to all positions

269
 APPENDIX 4. ACTIONS AT CONTACT POINT
-COORDINATION WITH ADJACENT UNITS

a. Establish radio comms with unit

b. Coordinate for linkup
c. Move to link up point. Go to hide if necessary to wait for other party.
d. Exchange recognition signals
d. Discuss the following:
- Location of Primary, Subsequent, Alternate, and Hide positions.
- Scheme of Maneuver
- Plan to synchonize activities and actions so they complement each
other
- Fire Plan
- Local security plan
- Means to cover seam between units
- Routes into and out of positions
- Plan for use of and attack axes of reserve
- Actions on event of crossing boundary
- Actions on withdrawal, or being forced out of BPs
- Artillery Targets, Observation plan
- Obstacle plan, lanes and lane closure plan
- Location of OP, and patrols
- Location of dead space, plan to cover it
- SOI information, How to get in touch with each other
- Pyrotechnic signals that will be used
- Visual recognition signals to be used in combat

270
 APPENDIX 5. ATTACHMENT/DETACHMENTS/C
ROSS ATTACHMENT

Cross attachment usually occurs in the planning stages of a mission, but may occur
on the fly during combat operations. Unit leaders need to rapidly get this
information to the gaining unit commander.

1. If time allows, Platoons will be refueled and rearmed prior to cross-attachment.

2. Platoon Leaders are responsible for notifying the gaining unit of the following
information. Face-to-face coordination is preferred, but immediate information can
be passed over the radio
a. Immediate Information
1) Weapon Systems
2) Personnel
3) Class III and V status
4) Attachment effective time
5) Link up time and location
b. Additional Information
1) Operations Order
2) Maps and Overlays
3) SOI information
4) Logistical/Personnel requirements
5) Tactical SOP

3. This coordination should be done at the earliest opportunity. Attachments /

Detachments should be managed on a habitual working relationship, as much as
possible. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED IN THE CURRENT OPORD, THE
GAINED INFANTRY PLATOON WILL REPLACE THE LOST TANK PLATOON
IN THE COMPANY FORMATION

271
 APPENDIX 6. AFTER ACTION REVIEWS

1. After Action Reviews (AARs) are conducted after each training event. The AAR
will be attended by the leaders at a minimum, but will include all soldiers if
possible. The discussion is as frank and honest as possible, and the focus is to
determine what was done right, wrong, and how it can be corrected in the future.

2. Sequence:
-Assemble participants, account for sensitive items
-State training objective
-Ask soldiers if they understood mission and Commanders intent
-Discuss OPFOR mission and plan
-Discuss BLUEFOR mission and plan
-Walk the dog: OPORD-recon-rehearse-LD-Objective
-Review actions before first contact
-Review first contact, and actions taken
-Review reactions to contact
-Review FRAGOs/guidance issued
-Review subsequent events of engagement
-Review good and bad points
-Summarize lessons learned
-Have participants suggest ways to improve in the future
-Issue FRAGO/guidance for follow on training operation

272
 ANNEX E --TACTICAL CHECKLISTS

APPENDIX 1. PACKING LIST (FOR

DEPLOYMENT)
This is a sample packing list that serves as an example of what could be expected
for an actual deployment. It is more accurate as a guide of WHAT to bring, rather
than HOW to pack it. For tactical operations the Company will normally use a
reduced packing list that will result in total baggage of 1 duffel bag (TA-50), one
rucksack (NBC gear and TA-50), and a CVC bag (personal gear). This operational
packing list will normally be mission / seasonal specific, and will be put out by the
chain of command prior to the mission. All bags and equipment not carried on the
tanks will be secured under the supervision of the Supply Sergeant.

1. Uniform and Equipment to be worn:

a. NOMEX Coveralls: with name tag, U S ARMY, rank insignia and unit
patch. Commander may prescribe uniform as BDUs.
b. KEVLAR Helmet: with camouflage cover, rank insignia and helmet
band with the soldier's last name printed in block letters in the center of the
band. Chin strap will be fastened at all times and loose ends will be
taped with OD Green tape.
c. Protective Mask: with inserts, if required, in the carrier along with:
1) Waterproof Bag
2) M8 Detection Paper
3) M258A1 Decon Kit attached
4) TM
d. MOPP Gear (O/O Only)
1) Present and serviceable, to include boots and gloves
2) Rank on platoon colored tab (Red, White, Blue, and Black)
e. Individual Weapon. Shoulder/Hip holster w/ ammo pouch.
f. Gortex Jacket (if not worn, in A bag)
g. LBE complete
h. Identification:
1) Valid ID Tags
2) Valid ID Card
3) Current military driver's license

273
 i. CVC NOMEX will include:
1) Gloves
2) Balaclava
3) Jacket
4) SPAL Vest under NOMEX.
j. Flak Vest, camouflage in Turret Box.
k. ALL Leather Boots (no jungle or synthetic boots)

2. Alert, "A", Bag - Duffel bag:

- 1 Canteen with cover
- Sleeping Mat
- Wool blanket or poncho liner
- Sleeping Bag -- in Wet Weather Bag
- Shelter half
*Note: Complete NOMEX uniform will be packed in A Bag if uniform is
designated BDUs.
- WET WEATHER BAG CONTAINING:
- 1 set NOMEX
- NOMEX jacket (if not worn)
- 2 Towel and Washcloth
- 2 set BDUs
- Wool Socks (3 pair minimum)
- Briefs and T-shirts (3 pair minimum)

3. Rucksack:
- MOPP Suit (serviceable w/gloves, green or black boots, with rank,
name, and platoon colors.)
- Wet Weather Gear (w/ overboots and suspenders)
- Poncho
- GORETEX pants (and jacket, if not worn)
- Underwear (2 pair minimum)
- T-shirts (2 pair minimum)
- Wool Socks (2 pair minimum)
- 1 set BDUs
- Laundry Bag
- Shaving Gear / Toilet Articles and one towel.
- 1 pair Long Underwear (during winter ONLY)
- Wool Sweater (during winter ONLY)
-Work gloves

274
 -Shoeshine kit
-Sewing kit (1 per crew)
-Shower shoes (optional)

4. Alert "B" Bag - Duffel Bag

- Entrenching Tool
- Laundry Bag
- Pile Cap
- Scarf
- Cold Weather Parka w/ Liner and Hood
- Cold Weather Mittens w/ Inserts
- 1 pair Boots
- Coveralls (seasonal) (Both if not worn)
- Mess Kit (complete)
- 2ea Long Underwear (during summer ONLY)
- Wool Sweater (during summer ONLY)
- Shelter half, tent
- Poncho
- Black gloves with inserts (if not worn)
-2 ea M16 pouches (if not worn)
- Sleeping Bag
- Tent Pins (5)
- Tent Poles (3)
- Tent Rope

GRAPHIC TRAINING AIDS / LEADERS KITS: THE FOLLOWING

TRAINING AIDS MUST BE PRESENT ON ALL VEHICLES (KEPT IN TCs ARM
REST ON TANKS)

GTA 3-6-3 NBC Warning and Reporting System

GTA 5-2-12 Coordinate Scale and Protractor
GTA 5-7-7 Bridge Classification Wheel
GTA 5-10-27 Mine Card
GTA 8-11-9 Artificial Respiration / Basic Cardiac Life Support
GTA 17-2-14A Visual Signals Armor
GTA 17-2-15 The Call for Fire
GTA 17-3-12 M1 Before/During/After Operation Checks
GTA 9-11-8 Rigging Card

275
GTA 11-1-4 Radiotelephone Procedures
Alcohol Pens, Precut Acetate for Overlays
Company TACSOP, BN TACSOP (PLs, PSGs, CO, XO, 1SG, Master Gunner)
Boresight procedures (MILES and Main Gun)
Tank and Platoon sector sketch cards
VEHICLE LOAD PLANS: The load plans for each vehicle will be posted at a
known point somewhere on the vehicle. For tanks this will be under the loaders
sponson box lid. Additional mission essential items may be carried on the vehicles,
as well as personal gear. The location of and loading of these items will not
normally be specified. As long as it does not hamper the overall effectiveness of
the vehicle or present a safety hazard this will be left to the TCs discretion.

BREACHING KITS: If the Company does not have an engineer platoon or

infantry platoon attached one tank per platoon will assemble a Breaching Kit.
Quantity Equipment
2 Grappling hook with 30 feet of rope
1 Wire cutter
2 Rolls of engineer tape for lane and obstacle marking
(mines marked with tape “X”)
4 VS-17 panels to mark entrance
2 Green smoke grenades to show “Breach Lane Complete Here”
2 Yellow smoke grenades
4 White smoke grenades (local obscuration)
1 Flag Set (RED = DANGER, STOP)
(Green = OK)
1 D handle shovel
2 Smoke Pots
1 DEMO kit (20 C-4 pop and drops, consists of block C-4, 1
minute
time fuse, igniters, blasting caps (not inserted))
4 Wooden or plastic mine probes
8 Engineers pickets for lane marking
2 Boxes Chemlights for marking
4 Road flares for lane marking
2 AT-4s

276
 APPENDIX 2. PRE-COMBAT INSPECTIONS
The precombat inspection is routinely conducted at TC level, with spot checking
done by the Platoon Leader and Platoon Sergeant. When time permits the Platoon
Leader and Platoon Sergeant will conduct the inspection, with the Commander and
1SG conducting spot checks. These inspections will be conducted prior to the start
of all tactical operations and will be reported as part of REDCON status prior to
LD. For night- limited visibility operations PCI checklist see ANNEX J.

CONDUCT (for full up inspection)

a. Platoon will form up in front of the vehicles
b. The Platoon leader will perform inspection arms and then report to the
inspecting officer.
c. The platoon leader will designate a recorder to note deficiencies or
strengths.
d. The inspecting officer will designate a time for a re-inspection or report
of deficiencies corrected.

STANDARDS
1. PERSONNEL
a. CVC uniform with body armor worn. Balaclava and gloves may be
worn or laid on the front slope in a uniform manner.
b. ID card and drivers license will be carried.
c. Briefed on OPORD. Understand mission, CDRs intent, and his part in
it.
d. Canteens will be full. One field dressing in case on LBE
e. Protective mask w/hood, M258A1/58A1 Decon/training kit, antifogging
kit, TM, inserts if required and M8 paper. Mask and hood clean,
serviceable and with current DA Form 2404.
f. Individual weapon clean and serviceable.
g. ID tags worn around the neck, hanging outside the uniform.
h. MOPP gear serviceable w/rank, platoon colored tab, and name tape on
the front slope.
i. Knowledgeable of mission, commanders intent, scheme of maneuver,
first aid, NBC skills, MOS related subjects basic map reading and vehicle
ID.
j. One notepad and pen.
m. Vehicle evacuation plan and crew evacuation procedure known.

277
 n. Roll-over drills complete.

2. LEADERS PACKET, LAID OUT IN A UNIFORM MANNER IN FRONT OF

VEHICLE INCLUDES:
a. Current map (laminated or in a case) and a overlay.
b. ANCD.
c. TACSOP and appropriate doctrinal manuals
d. Grease/alcohol markers (black and red minimum) and alcohol.
e. Notebook, pen and pencil.
f. Casualty feeder cards (DA Form 1156).
g. Direct fire planning cards, 2 per vehicle plus 2 per platoon.
h. Binoculars and night vision devices, NVG batteries are
installed, lens paper present, spare batteries on hand
i. Wristwatch on leaders wrist.
j. Risk assessment data complete.
k. Graphic Training Aids and Items Listed in ANNEX D.

3. TA-50
a. Bags uploaded by load plan and packed IAW appropriate packing list.
b. B bags will be uploaded only in case of real world situation or during
extended training deployments.

4. VEHICLES (General): XO will arrange a maintenance/NBC inspection team to

check vehicles at -10/20 standards during the PCI.
a. Current 5988 with all parts on valid status.
b. PMCS done on hull, turret, and commo, other equipment.
c. Operators manual with current changes, TMs, LOs on the front slope.
d. Plates and access covers removed an opened.
e. All periscopes clean and clear, driver's night sight operational, w/battery
installed, IR lenses serviceable.
f. V-pac wand serviceable.
g. DR-8 full of serviceable wire and RL-39 on one spool.
h. TA-312/TA-1 complete and serviceable, batteries installed.
i. Two 5 gallon cans of water and one box of MREs stowed.
j. VS-17 panel serviceable.
k. Flashlights operational w/spare batteries and colored lens.
l. First aid kits serviceable, CLS bag complete.

278
 m. All fluids, POL topped off.
n. Vehicle dispatch present, dispatched to license driver on front slope.
o. Fire extinguisher serviceable, wire seals installed.
p. Vehicle markings, lights, bumper numbers cleaned.

5. VEHICLES (LOADPLAN)
a. Load plan laminated and taped to the inside lid of the loader sponson
box.
b. BII clean and serviceable.
c. Flag sets complete and stowed.
d. Camouflage nets and supports loaded by load plan.
e. Tow cables / recovery gear mounted as directed
f. Package POL products present.
g. Basic load of maps as appropriate.
h. First aid kits and combat lifesaver bags complete
i. Ammo wells and boxes free from obstruction.
j. Water cans full. (2 five gallon cans minimum)
k. MRE rations stowed. (3 day supply minimum)
l. Thermal TRP kits loaded (if being used).
m. Spare parts (minimum) stowed:
Two Track Blocks
Five Track Pads
One Road Wheel
One field dressing in case on LBE Three Center Guides
Five end connectors with wedge bolts
n. Tents, cots, cammo nets, chemlights loaded.
o. Obstacle material loaded (as directed)
10 long pickets loaded.
5 rolls wire loaded.
4 Anti Tank mines

6. VEHICLES (COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT):

a. Radios operational, properly mounted, filled.
b. Radio checks made.
c. TCs remote set up.
d. Proper frequencies and fills set.
e. ANCDs punched up.
f. Antennas tied down, tip and tiedown kits complete, antennas
serviceable.

279
 g. Connections clean and serviceable.
h. CVC helmets hooked up, clean and operational; intercom operational.
i. TA-312 with extra batteries and/or TA-1 serviceable.
k. Other marking materials loaded (thermal TRP, obstacle, chemlights,
etc.)

280
7. VEHICLES (NBC EQUIPMENT):
a. M11/M113 Decon equipment is serviceable and mounted.
b. ICE pack present, one per crew member.
c. M256 and M258 kits, M-9 paper, all charts, forms, TM’s and FM's
serviceable.
d. Nerve agent antidote or training kits are available.
e. M8A1 alarms are serviceable w/extra batteries and maintenance kits.
f. IM-93 dosimeter distributed in accordance w/sop.
g. NBC tanks have been briefed on enemy's chem assets.
h. NBC team personnel knowledgeable of their duties.

8. VEHICLES (ARMAMENT AND CREW SERVED WEAPONS):

a. Weapons clean and functional.
b. Spare clean barrels, cleaning tools, bolts and cartridge extractors are
present.
c. Headspace and timing set on M2 machine gun.
d. Gauge set present with each M2 machine gun.
e. Machine guns properly mounted.
f. Optics clean and clear, TIS operational.
g. All prep-to-fire checks completed, boresight and/or zero of all systems
confirmed. CCFs set for ammo to be fired.
h. Firing data in CCP is current.
i. Basic load of ammo stowed and serviceable.
j. Grenade launcher covers and muzzle covers removed and stored IAW
load plan.
k. MBD present, clean, and calibrated to assigned fire control system.
l. Weapons cleaning kits present.

281
 APPENDIX 3. LEADER CHECKS

1. General: The following checks are conducted daily by Platoon Leaders,

Platoon Sergeants, the CO, and other leaders to ensure that the unit is
combat ready.

2. Stand To: (See ANNEX A, APPENDIX 8: STAND TO PROCEDURE)

a. Soldiers awake, sleeping gear stowed.
b. Platoon PCI complete.
c. Perimeter patrolled, all weapons manned, obstacles checked.
d. Vehicles started on short count.
e. 100% sensitive items and soldiers accounted for.
f. All reports submitted as necessary

3. Morning Checks (prior to 0900)

a. Vehicle PMCS conducted by -10 standard, 5988s turned in.
b. Vehicle fluid levels checked.
c. Weapons boresighted, zeroed.
d. Soldiers briefed on priority of work for day.
e. Commo checks complete.
f. Ensure soldiers have understanding of company and platoon missions.
g. Ensure soldiers understand Commanders intent for that day.
h. Vehicles load plan squared away.
i. All soldiers cleaned and shaved.
j. M-8 alarms checked.
k. Camouflage and noise discipline checked.
l. Local security patrol launched in company AO.
m. OPs properly functioning, equipped, briefed, and camouflaged.

4. Afternoon checks (Prior to darkness)

a. All NODs checked, extra batteries on hand.
b. PCI conducted for local security patrol.
c. TRPs thermalized.
d. Night/hide positions occupied.
e. Soldiers briefed on night security plan.
f. Trip flares, booby traps emplaced (don’t forget obstacles).
g. Illumination plan checked (FIST).

282
 h. Sensitive items checked.
i. Night markings in place.
j. Resupply requests submitted.
k. Sleep plan briefed, implemented.
l. Soldiers understand evening security plan.
m. Soldiers prepared for next days frequency, challenge, password.
n. Obstacles checked, trip flared, booby trapped.
o. M-8 Alarms checked.
p. OPs checked for night equipment, moved as necessary for limited vis
plan.
q. All soldiers briefed on night security plan.

5. Night Checks (After Darkness)

a. All positions checked for light discipline. Leaders scan perimeter for
light with PVS-7.
b. Noise discipline checked.
c. All unnecessary movement prohibited.
d. Security and patrol plan being implemented.
e. Vehicles started periodically on short count.
f. OPs checked for alertness, camouflage.
g. Radio watch and platoon security checked.
h. See also ANNEX J - NIGHT - LIMITED VISIBILITY OPERATIONS

283
 APPENDIX 4. BREAK IN ACTION CHECKLIST
This is accomplished during minor pauses in tactical operations. It serves as an
abbreviated form of Consolidation and Reorganization.

1. Crew level
a. MRS update, Turret self test
b. Treat and evacuate casualties
c. Move ammo to ready rack
d. Maintain local security
e. Maintain air guard
f. Check sensitive items
g. Report Class III, V status
h. Stay on radio
i. Restore load plan
j. Do quick vehicle walkaround to check for damage

2. Platoon level
a. Establish hasty defensive plan
b. Evacuate casualties and damaged vehicles
c. Check sensitive items
d. Cross level Class V and personnel as necessary
e. Report Class III, V status to 1SG.
f. Update Platoon on situation .

SHORT HALT CHECKLIST

-MRS update
-Clean optics
-Clean headlights, bumper numbers, reflective tape
-During operations maintenance
-Check Fluids
-Inspect track, roadwheel hubs
-Check track tension
-Clean weapons (wipedown)
-Clear turret, check loadplan

284
 APPENDIX 5. COMBAT AMMO RESUPPLY
AMMO REDISTRIBUTION UNDER FIRE:
a. To prevent ready racks from becoming empty for the entire unit at
approximately the same time.
b. Occurs as soon as one tank in the section has expended 8 rounds
from the ready rack
c. Tank reports it is going to redistribute ammo
d. Wingman tank covers assigned sector
e. Tank keeps round in tube, backs to turret down
f. Refills ready rack from semi ready
g. Re-occupies position and takes sector responsibility back from
wingman

AMMO CROSS LEVELING: This occurs when a tank gets critically low on
ammo, or one of the tanks has had a fire control problem and wants to transfer
ammo to another tank. This may also occur when 2 tanks want to replenish the
ammo in their ready racks quickly by swapping rounds from the other tank’s semi
ready rack.
a. Tank(s) requiring cross leveling come up on PLT net, report status.
b. Platoon Leader ensures that Platoon sector can be covered.
c. Platoon Leader orders sending and receiving tanks to back down.
d. Tanks back down, park side by side, maintain security.
e. One tank opens Semi-Ready rack, fills ready rack of other tank.
f. Process repeated for other tank as necessary.
g. Tanks pull back into positions, report set.

EMERGENCY AMMO RESUPPLY: When the Company or a platoon gets

critically low on ammunition (25% or less) and cross leveling is not possible the
Commander may order an emergency resupply. This may also be a planned part of
the operation to plus up ammunition after anticipated high use (such as in a
Support By Fire Mission, or after an assault). This ammunition will come from the
Battalion Emergency resupply stockage, must be coordinated for, and is not always
available.
a. Commander / 1SG coordinates with Battalion for Emergency Ammo.
b. 1SG moves to linkup point and meet truck(s).
c. 1SG escorts ammo to designated upload point.
d. Uploading tanks prepare to receive ammo.
e. 1SG calls in vehicles to upload
f. Vehicles move to upload point and rapidly upload as in LOGPAC.
g. Once upload is complete vehicles return to their assigned sectors.
h. Vehicles rotate through as situation permits.
i. Once upload is complete 1SG escorts trucks to release point.

285
 APPENDIX 6. ABANDONING/DESTRUCTION OF
EQUIPMENT
1. Abandoning a tank is a decision made based on the overall situation,
and condition of the tank and crew. If your tank sustains a hit, or
cannot move, and remaining with it will jeopardize the safety of the
crew, you should consider abandoning. Equipment will only be
abandoned in an emergency, to prevent capture of the crew by the
enemy, or when it is too dangerous to remain with the vehicle.
Equipment will only be destroyed at the orders of the commander, or in
the event of imminent capture to prevent the equipment from falling
into enemy hands.
2. If equipment is to be abandoned and there is a hope of it being
recovered the crew will disable it in a manner to make it reusable by
American forces once recovered. Crew will secure personal weapons,
protective masks, maps and graphics, and first aid supplies. The
COMSEC equipment and radio will be Z’ed out. For tanks the firing
pin will be removed from the main gun, backplates from the .50 CAL
and 240. Other vehicles will be disabled, but not destroyed, by
damaging, wiring, electronics, and other critical components.
3. Equipment that needs to be destroyed will be damaged in such a
manner as to make it completely unserviceable. Equipment will be
destroyed in the following priority:
a. Orders, graphics, maps
b. SOIs, COMSEC equipment
c. Radios
d. Vehicles
e. Weapons and ammunition
4. Vehicles will be destroyed in the following manner
a. Damage fuel systems
b. Damage engine cooling system
c. Wheels, track, suspension
d. Damage hydraulic systems
e. Running engine without oil until it seizes
f. Remove critical parts or destroy with sledgehammer
5. Weapons will be destroyed in the following manner
a. Breach mechanism
b. Recoil system
c. Fire control equipment
6. Tanks will be destroyed as follows
a. Turret will be turned over side, bitch plate removed
b. Ready rack opened and door secured
c. One round put partially in breach, broken open
d. Radios, CEOI, COMSEC equipment placed on turret floor

286
e. 3-4 rounds of ammunition placed on turret floor
f. Crew evacuates, throws thermite grenade in turret and engine

287
 APPENDIX 7. ACTIONS ON BEING HIT
A. Preparations A key factor in crewmen surviving a tank hit is discipline both
before and after the hit. Discipline before the hit means having the turret properly
stowed and arranged for combat, and being in the proper uniform. No nylon or
synthetic items other than NOMEX will be worn at any time in the turret during
tactical operations. This includes gloves, boots, and rain gear. Goggles, gloves, and
NOMEX balaclava, as well as protective vest will serve to protect crew members
from most injuries. Hatch position is also important. The tank is its most
survivable in the buttoned up configuration. When in direct fire engagements the
loaders hatch should be shut, and the TC hatch should be closed or at open-
protective. When the loaders hatch is open it is secured to the blowout panel. If the
turret is hit in the ammo compartment this will cause the blowoff panel to fly off,
and the hatch to slam shut violently. Periscopes should also be secured to prevent
them from coming loose and becoming a secondary projectile.

B. Basic actions in the event of a hit

1. As soon as the tank is hit the TC will check the crew to see if anyone is
injured. The driver should back down, or move to covered position
immediately unless otherwise told. The driver must be prepared to
continue to move even if the intercom is inoperative. The TC must
keep the crew calm.
2. Ranking crew member takes over
3. Assess casualties, damage. Crew members will check their stations for
shock damage
4. TC orders evacuation of tank if necessary. If the tank must be
abandoned accomplish as much of the abandon tank procedures as
possible(APPENDIX 4). The M1A1 is designed to survive hits from
enemy fire. The crew must remain calm and continue to fight the tank.
Abandoning the tank is a command decision made based on the
condition of the tank and crew, and the overall situation. If it is
considered too dangerous to stay with the tank and it is impossible to
move it, abandoning may be an appropriate action. Historically crews
have often abandoned their tanks prematurely, usually because of a
fear of burning. Unnecessary evacuation usually results in a high
degree of casualties due to small arms and artillery (40% of tank crew
casualties in the 1973 Arab-Israeli War).
5. The Halon system may discharge. The Halon system is designed to
suppress crew compartment fires long enough for the crew to bail out.
If the Halon system goes off the TC may have to order the tank
temporarily evacuated, or if the danger of bailing out is too great, may
order NBC masks put on and the NBC main system to be turned on.
Do not use the NBC Backup system because this will not filter out the
Halon or all of the fumes from burning materials.

288
 6. In the event of a ammo compartment hit the blowout panels will come
off. Crews need to traverse over the left side of the tank to prevent
burning material from being ingested into the engine. Crews can
continue to fight their way out of contact using the hull ammo in an
emergency.
7. If the top of the turret catches on fire the crew will button up and
ensure that the turret is not overhanging the engine intake. Molten
plastic from the TA-50 stored in the bustle rack can destroy the engine
and set it on fire. Basic load small arms ammo will eventually cook
off in the bustle rack, but this is more spectacular than dangerous if the
crew remains buttoned up.
8. Ensure that individuals sprayed with FRH are washed down
immediately using the turret water bottle in the gunners station. FRH
can cause blindness or paralysis.

C. Actions if a crew member is wounded: If a turret crewman is injured, shift

positions in the turret and continue to fight the tank until you can get to a turret
down position and begin first aid. If the driver is hit continue to fight the tank until
you have the possibility of traversing the turret to pull him out, replace him, and
move the tank to a turret down position to administer first aid. As soon as possible
move the tank to a covered position and request evacuation for the crewman as per
Company SOP.

D. Loss of Replenisher. If your replenisher is damaged you may fire up to 10

rounds without seriously damaging the recoil mechanism. The more rounds fired,
the greater the chance the gun will recoil out of battery and be hurled into the crew
compartment.

E. Actions on Engine Hit/Shutdown: If the engine is hit or damaged it will

usually got into protective mode. Sometimes the engine will not be damaged but
the shock of the hit has activated the protective mode. If you suspect that this has
happened, shut the engine down, reset the circuit breakers, and attempt to restart.
If the engine does not start, check for and assess engine damage.

F. Loss of intercom. The tank intercom system is especially vulnerable to round

impacts. The driver must be prepared to continue to move even if the intercom is
inoperative. The driver should back down or seek a covered and concealed position
automatically and not stop out in the open. The driver will use the wingman
concept to orient his movement. The Radio will probably still work, but will
probably have to be operated by hand mike.

G. Checks to the fire control system after a hit. A hit by a main gun round will
usually affect the boresight. If in contact the gunner should switch to the GAS
sight, which usually is not affected, and go to Emergency Mode if necessary. As
soon as the gunner has a chance he should perform an MRS check, and check the
GPS and TIS against the GAS sight. He should also perform a turret self test to

289
check for electronics faults. As soon as the situation permits the crew will re-
boresight the tank.

290
 APPENDIX 8. RECOVERY

Recovery will be conducted after every major field deployment. the exact
recovery plan will be determined by the 1SG and XO based on guidance from the
commander. The following is a guide to what needs to be accomplished and a
logical sequence for timely completion. Actual recovery plans may differ in details
and timing.

1. Recovery checklist
a. Day 1
- Sweep vehicles for brass and ammo
- Account for all sensitive items and personnel
- Top off all vehicles
- Conduct after ops maintenance 2404s
- Work off all deadlines
- Zero out COMSEC
- Initial weapons cleaning, PMCS
- Close out dispatches, turn in log books
- Remove all TA-50 and trash from vehicles
b. Day 2
- Wash Vehicles and equipment (washrack)
- Walk track and conduct track maintenance
- Weapons cleaning
- Top off all fluids
- PMCS, remove batteries from PVS-7s
- Update maintenance work sheets, all parts on order, status checked
- Conduct Commo PMCS, clean CVCs
- Clean air filters, oil coolers
- Fire Extinguishers checked, lacing wires
- Punch Gun tubes
- Continue to work off 10-20 level faults
- All vehicle lights clean, serviceable (including RAWLS)
c. Day 3
- POL basic load replenished
- Continue thorough vehicle cleaning inside and out
- Clean, PMCS weapons, NBC gear, Arms room equipment.
- BII cleaned, inventoried, shortages reordered

291
 - TA-50 cleaned and inventoried, shortage annex updated
- Vehicles spot painted
- Reflective tape, delineators replaced if necessary
- Batteries, battery box serviced
- Continue cleaning interior of tank
- Weapons receive final cleaning
- Necessary Reports of Survey initiated
d. Day 4
- Weapons inspected by arms room officer
- Cammo nets cleaned, serviced, repacked
- Tents, cleaned, serviced, repacked
- Unserviceable BII DXed
- 2408-4 turned in if main gun was fired
- Complete working off faults to 10/20 standard
- Platoon Leaders update master hand receipt, shortage annexes
e. Day 5
- Inspection
- Remedy deficiencies, re-inspection

2. Inspection Guide. There will be two types of inspections: working inspections,

and full- up recovery inspections. This does not include pre-inspections that are
conducted by Platoon Leaders and Platoon Sergeants prior to the inspection. Target
is STANDARDS, not TIME

a. Working Inspections
- Crews continue working on vehicles.
- Vehicles are clean and prepared for inspection, but not laid out.
- 5988s available for inspection, deficiencies noted, all parts on valid
status.

b. Full-Up inspections
- Tanks lined up with turrets at 9 o-clock.
- All Access plates and doors open.
- Crew standing by at front slope of tank.
- BII laid out in uniform manner on tarp in front of tank.
- 5988, 2404s, dispatch folder, TMs, available.

c. Inspection Guidelines (Vehicles)

- 5988s complete, all deficiencies noted, parts on order with valid status’s.

292
 - Anything on vehicle subject to inspection. Remove if not part of load
plan.
- Vehicle and equipment are clean (absence of dirt).
- Tank interiors do not need to be repainted.
- BII clean, serviceable, sharpened, wood not painted.
- Air filters cleaned out.
- Batteries water topped off, cables tight, greased.
- First aid kits full, inventoried, sealed.
- All boxes and storage areas cleaned, loose items and trash removed.
- Equipment has 2404s ( TA-1, TA-312, MBD, CVCs, drivers night sight,
etc.).
- Breach blocks and gun tubes cleaned, serviced.
- CVCs, liners cleaned
- All BII shortages annotated on shortage annex.

d. Personnel
- TA-50 clean, laid out in uniform manner (on order)
- Unserviceable TA-50 Dxed
- Awartds submitted

e. Arms Room
- Weapons clean (no dust or carbon).
- 2404 on all weapons and arms room equipment (PVS-7s, etc.).
- Corrective maintenance action initiated.
- Weapons spare parts inventoried
- Calibration / Purging completed

f. NBC Room
- All equipment has current 2404.
- All masks turned in.
- Corrective maintenance actions initiated.
- Equipment clean.
- All calibration complete.
- All supplies checked for expiration.

g. Supply Room
- All Hand Receipts updated.
- All unserviceable BII turned in, shortage annexes updated.
- All shortages identified, corrective action taken (Rpt of Surv, St of

293
Charges).
- All property accountability issues straight.

h. Leaders
- METL assessment updated. Retraining goals set.
- AAR comments completed.
- All areas checked by PL/PSG prior to inspection by CO/XO/1SG - BN

294
 APPENDIX 9. M1A1 MILES BORESIGHT

MILES I
1. CLEAN TRANSMITTER OPTICS!

2. PUT TRANSMITTER IN BREACH, TIGHTEN, ENSURE SIGHT IS CLEAR.

ENSURE TRANSMITTER IS CENTERED IN GUN TUBE.

3. TURN ON TIS TO STANDBY.

4. CCP: ENTER INPUTS

CROSSWIND=00
CANT=00
LEAD=00
RANGE=1200
SUBDES=59
ENSURE INPUTS ARE LIT, CLOSE CCP DOOR.

5. CLOSE-IN BORESIGHT
SEND "MILES UP" TANK W/GREEN KEY 400-600M, PRESENT A FRONTAL
TARGET. LOADER LAYS GUNNER CENTER OF MASS, GUNNER
BORESIGHTS
GAS - CENTER OF MASS, USING 1200M LINE. KILL TARGET TANK,
USING 1200M LINE CENTER OF MASS.

6. INTERMEDIATE BORESIGHT
FRONTAL TGT 1100-1300M. LOADER LAYS GUNNER CENTER OF MASS,
GUNNER BORESIGHTS TIS-CENTER OF MASS, KILL TARGET TANK.

7. LONG RANGE BORESIGHT

FRONTAL TGT 2000M, LOADER LAYS GUNNER CENTER OF MASS,
GUNNER
PUSH BORESIGHT KEY, TOGGLE GPS-CENTER OF MASS, PUSH ENTER.
ATTEMPT TO KILL TARGET TANK, IF ALL PLATOON TANKS CAN KILL,
INCREASE RANGE IN INCREMENTS OF 200M, UNTIL ONE TANK CANNOT
KILL.

295
TARGET TANK MOVES TO LAST TARGET POSITION, AND ALL PLATOON
TANKS
RECONFIRM BORESIGHT BY KILLING TARGET TANK.

8. USE CORRECT SIGHT AND ALWAYS AIM CENTER OF MASS

296
MILES II

Preparation for Boresighting

1. Turret Power on
2. Open CCP, turn on
3. Set fire control mode switch to Emergency, ensure light comes on
4. Set Gun Select Switch to Main, ensure light comes on
5. Set Ammo select switch to SABOT
6. Set thermal switch to STBY
7. Unscrew the small access cover on the CCP
8. Enter 59 into ammo subdes key
9. Press Boresight key
10. Record the number displayed
11. Enter 0.0, 0.0
12. Press the Zero key
13. Enter 0.0, 0.0

Boresighting
1. Set Ammo Select switch to HEAT
2. Press the Zero key
3. Enter 0.0, 0.0
4. Set Ammo Select to SABOT
5. Press the Range key
6. Manually enter the range to the Boresight target (try to Boresight at 1200 m)
7. Press the key again to return system to automatic inputs
8. Press and release the power control handles
9. Manually align the MILES transmitter in the gun tube to the boresight target
10. Press the boresight key
11. Toggle the reticle onto the boresight target
12. Once reticle is aligned press Enter
13. Close the CCP
14. Align the GAS with the Boresight target using the 1200 meter line
15. Set Fire Control Mode switch to Normal. Ensure light comes on
16. Turn TIS on
17. Record existing settings on TIS knobs
18. Align TIS to GPS, lock down knobs
19. Turn TIS off or to standby
20. Check the boresight by relaying on target. Ensure all sights remain lined up
21. Confirm boresight by firing at MILES equipped vehicle

297
 APPENDIX 10. SAFETY/RISK ANALYSIS

There are three types of Risk that need to be

addressed: 1) Operational Risk(safety), Tactical
Risk (enemy) and Fratricide Risk (friendly).
Tactical Risk is what you will gamble on tactically,
and what you will do to minimize the risk of these
choices. Fratricide Risk is understanding the
potential dangers based on the tactical plan.
Examples include units converging, marking
minefields on maps, good intel dissemination, etc..
1. SAFETY: Safety and risk reduction are key to the planning and execution of all
tactical operations. Many of the safety habits that we have are practiced on a day to
day basis. Standard crew drills that need to be understood by and practiced by
soldiers include: Rollover Drill, Flareback Drill, Actions on Tank Being Hit Drill,
Evacuate Tank Drill, Actions on Tank Fire. Special emphasis must also be placed
on the following procedures as they result in a large amount of injuries and
accidents: Proper Loading Procedures, Mounting and Dismounting the Vehicle,
Driving in Dust, Speeding, .50 CAL. Safety, Proper Loading Techniques. Leaders
are responsible for ensuring that all soldiers understand the various safety
standards. All soldiers are responsible for practicing and enforcing safe operating
techniques.

2. RISK ANALYSIS AND REDUCTION: Battlecat Leaders will conduct a risk

analysis based on the format below prior to any training exercise. The focus of this
risk analysis is to identify ways to reduce risk, not to determine how dangerous
something is. Common means of reducing risk include: Reduce Speed, Rehearse,
Increase Light Level, Wait for Better Weather/Conditions

NATURE OF OPERATION
OPERATIONAL LOCAL AUTOBAHN OR KNOWN/SUSPEC
LENGTH TACTICAL TED HAZARD
72 HOURS 3 4 5
48 HOURS 2 3 4
24 HOURS 1 2 3

298
 FIRST LINE SUPERVISION
COMMAND AND SUPPORT/NON- DAY-TACTICAL NIGHT-TACTICAL
CONTROL TACTICAL
AD HOC 3 4 5
ATTACHED 2 3 4
ORGANIC 1 2 3
LEADER REST AND PREP TIME
LEADER REST ADEQUATE NOT ADEQUATE MINIMUM
<4 HOURS 3 4 5
6 HOURS 2 3 4
8 HOURS 1 2 3

SOLDIER SELECTION AND EXPERIENCE

TASK QUALIFIED/EXPE SOMEWHAT OJT
RIENCED FAMILIAR
COMPLEX 3 4 5
ROUTINE 2 3 4
SIMPLE 1 2 3

SOLDIER ALERTNESS AND AMOUNT OF REST

8 HOURS 6 HOURS <4 HOURS
TACTICAL 3 4 5
GARRISON 1 2 3

EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE STATUS

AGE HIGH-C1 C2 C3 LOW C4
OLD 3 4 5 6
AVERAGE 2 3 4 5
NEW 1 2 3 4

WEATHER
TEMPERATURE DAY/DRY/CLEAR HAZY/DRIZZLE DARK/RAIN/DUST
VERY COLD 3 4 5
COLD 2 3 4
MODERATE 1 2 3

299
 RISK ASSESSMENT
1--------LOW-----11 12--------CAUTION---------23 24----------HIGH--------30

LOW - OPERATION REQUIRES NCO APPROVAL

CAUTION - OPERATION REQUIRES COMPANY COMMANDER APPROVAL
HIGH - OPERATION REQUIRES BATTALION COMMANDER APPROVAL

300
 APPENDIX 11. LAW OF WAR
1. Killing or wounding an enemy by treachery is forbidden.

2. A white flag of truce may be used to signal a wish to talk to the enemy.
The side using the white flag must stop fighting. Abuse of the white flag is
treachery.

3. Poison is not to be used a weapon. Weapons and ammunition must not be

altered to increase injury or damage.

4. No more damage or injury may be caused than is necessary to carry out your
operational task. Minimize incidental death or injury.

5. Enemy property is not to be taken, damaged, or destroyed without an

operational need. Looting is prohibited.

6. It is forbidden to force enemy national to take part in military operations against

their own country.

7. It is prohibited to Attack:
a. Undefended towns, villages, or buildings; safety, neutralized, or
demilitarized zones.
b. Civilian buildings or property, especially cultural property provided
they are neither being used for military purposes, nor have military
importance.
c. Civil defense facilities, dikes, dams, and nuclear power stations,
provided they are not being used for military purposes.
d. Civilians not actually engaging in combat.
e. Medical personnel and chaplains hospitals, and medical centers or
medical transports. They will be identified by one of the Geneva
emblems: Red Cross or Red Crescent.
f. Enemy combatants who are no longer fighting due to wounds or
sickness, or those who surrender.

8. Medical Personnel and Chaplains:

a. Medical personnel and chaplains have a special non-combatant status.
They are permitted to carry out only their medical and spiritual duties
and may take no other part in combat, except as specified below.
b. Medical personnel may carry and use only small arms for their
personal self-defense and the defense of their patients. They may not use them
to resist capture, but only when they or their patients are directly
attacked.

301
 c. If captured medical personnel and chaplains are not prisoners of
war. They can only be retained by their captors to perform their
required medical and spiritual duties to their own forces. They have a
special status as "retained personnel."

9. Wounded, Sick, and Dead: All wounded and sick must be duly treated, whether
friendly or hostile; based solely on medical reasons. The dead must not be
plundered or mutilated. All may be checked for items of intelligence value.

10. Prisoners of War

S - Search: disarm and remove all military papers; allow POWs to retain
personnel items and protective clothing.
S - Silence
S - Segregate: Officers, NCOs, and enlisted.
S - Safeguard: provide adequate shelter, food, medical care.
S - Speed to the Rear

11. Civilians: Must be protected so far as possible from the incidental dangers of
war. In particular they can not be used to shield military operations. Coercion,
torture, collective punishments and the taking of hostages are forbidden.

12. Protective Emblems: Soldiers need to be aware of the various protective

emblems used such as those on cultural monuments. Soldiers are naturally
allowed to fire on these if the enemy is using them for military purposes.

302
 ANNEX F --OPERATIONAL SECURITY

APPENDIX 1. OPERATIONAL SECURITY

1. Challenge and Password, and Radio Frequencies will change daily at
2400 HRS. All personnel will be challenged after dark, and unknown
personnel at ALL times.
2. Platoon Sergeants will check all areas, prior to departing, to ensure that
no material of any intelligence value is left for the enemy.
3. SOIs, Maps and Overlays will be in the personal possession of the Tank
commander at all times.
4. Company Team members will not keep diaries. Outgoing mail will be
self-censored with regards to upcoming operations.
5. Authentication will be required for all directives or orders received over
the radio from unknown sources, and ANY change to the unit's MOPP
level.
6. Immediately report to the chain of command:
a. Known, or suspected, compromise of operational material and
loss of maps, overlays, COMSEC, etc.
b. Known or suspected enemy agents.
c. Attempts to subvert unit personnel.
d. Compromise of Company radio net

APPENDIX 2. PRIORITY INTELLIGENCE

REQUIREMENTS
The following items of information are of special importance and should be
reported immediately. Other PIRs pertaining to the specific situation will be
briefed in the OPORD.
-Initial enemy contact
-Withdrawal of enemy forces of PLT size or larger
-Displacement of portion of force in contact
-Any Chemical or Nuclear weapon use
-Appearance of nuclear or chemical capable weapons
-Parachute or heliborne insertions behind friendly lines
-Location of enemy C2, artillery, ADA, or logistics assets

303
 -Massed enemy forces or logistical elements

Indications of collapse. Soldiers should always be aware of signs showing

a breakdown in the enemy resistance due to being surprised, lacking will
to fight, or being on the verge of collapse. These indicators show that we
have gained an advantage over the enemy and that he is not reacting to our
current tactical moves. Recognizing these signs may allow us to push the
enemy far more aggressively than normal to exploit our advantage and
defeat him more rapidly. Indications of collapse or that the enemy is
reacting slowly to our actions include:

-Bad morale
-Artillery falling on position we just left
-Defection of lower ranking soldiers
-Surrender after token resistance
-Abandoned equipment
-Gaps in minefields not closed
-Soldiers obviously unprepared (i.e. still eating)
-Enemy vehicles blundering into our forces
-Abandoned wounded at aid station
-Stacks of ammo/supplies hastily abandoned

APPENDIX 3. READINESS CONDITION

(REDCON)
Readiness conditions will be dictated by the commander in the operations order
and modified as necessary.
1. REDCON 1 - Ready to move or execute ON ORDER. Completely
crewed, fully loaded, LP/OPs withdrawn, wire retrieved and engines
running.
2. REDCON 1A - Ready to move or execute ON ORDER. Completely
crewed, fully loaded, LP/OPs withdrawn and wire retrieved on order, but
engines NOT running.
3. REDCON 2 - Ready to move or execute within 15 minutes of
notification. Fully crewed and loaded.
4. REDCON 3 - Ready to move or execute within 30 minutes of
notification. 50% on stand-down
5. REDCON 4 - Ready to move or execute within one hour of notification.

304
 75% on stand-down

Minimum standards for security are as follows, Higher levels of security will be
dictated by the commander (OPs, etc):
a. One man in the TC's cupola alert and monitoring the radios,
per platoon.
b. Local patrols conducted periodically

APPENDIX 4. ALERT /ROLLOUT PROCEDURES

1. Telephonic Alert: Initiated at battalion level, the alert will utilize the
Company's Telephonic Alert Roster. Upon arrival, ALL personnel will
sign-in in the Company Orderly Room and remain in the area for further
instructions. This roster is to be updated on a monthly basis with
changes penciled in as necessary. New soldiers will receive Alert
Rosters when they reside off-post and be briefed on its use by their
Platoon Sergeant. THE RESPONSIBILITY TO UPDATE
DEPLOYMENT INFORMATION INCLUDING ALERT ROSTERS
RESTS WITH THE INDIVIDUAL!!!
2. Non-Telephonic Alert: Initiated at battalion level, the alert will utilize
two company personnel who reside in the barracks (an NCO and
driver), one of the company's HMMWVs and the company's
Non-Telephonic Alert Map Roster. All soldiers who live off-post will
provide a strip map to their quarters, upon assignment. The company
will establish a route for the NCO and driver to follow. Upon
notification, the NCO will retrieve the maps and route while the driver
utilizes the Alert Dispatch and readies the HMMWV. The two will
follow the assigned route alerting each individual. If they cannot reach
an individual, they will continue along the route alerting the next
individual. Upon returning to post, the NCO will report all individuals
that they were unable to reach to the Orderly Room.

305
 3. Actions in the Event of a Rollout: The company team standard for alert
initiation (B-hour) to lineup is 2:45. These are all the actions necessary
for the Company to roll out the front gate of the motor pool. It is also the
same drill for rolling the Company out for training in Training Area.

a. Sign in to the orderly room and begin platoon tasks for rollout. XO,
1SG, PLs meet CO for OPORD at time specified.
(1) Pickup all weapons, PVS-7s, ANCDs, PLGRs from arms room
including spare barrels, magazines.
(2) NBC Tanks pickup NBC Gear.
(3) XOs gunner draws ANCD from COMMO.
(4) All Bags taken to motorpool and secured in bustle rack. Conex
equipment loaded. TA 50 covered with tarp. All B-Bags
stacked in Orderly Room in the event of actual deployment.
(5) Vehicles.
(a) Pre-Ops PMCS completed
(b) Gun Tubes over front slope and level--muzzle plugs out.
(c) Wind sensor up.
(d) Grenade launcher covers off and stowed.
(e) Weapons mounted and secured. .50 cal headspace and
timing set. Loaders M240 elevated and facing rear.
(f) Prep to fire checks completed, Self test done. Zero Data
checked.
(g) ANCDs will be filled at B-65. Radios will immediately be
filled. B66 becomes company NCS. All vehicles enter
company net, in green, do radio checks with B66, and go to
proper net. B-65 comes up on Battalion net
(h) Antennas tied down.
(i) Water cans filled.
(j) Vehicle started, run to operating temperature then shut down.
Fluids checked. All lights checked.
b. Uniform. Unless specified, the uniform is as in the PCI checklist.
c. FRAGO out to all soldiers.
d. Gun tubes level when ready to roll out
e. At B+2. All crews lineup for abbreviated PCI with specified items laid
out for spot check. TCs have alert dispatch in hand for signature after
report.
f. At B+2:40, vehicles move to lineup positions.
g. At B+2:50, all crews linkup for safety briefing.

306
 APPENDIX 5. OBSERVATION POST ACTIVITIES
See also ANNEX A, APPENDIX 8: ASSEMBLY AREA ACTIVITIES.
1. Observation / Listening Posts (LP/OPs) will be established in all
stationary positions, Assembly Areas, and Defensive Positions. These
positions will be manned at all times while the unit is stationary.
LP/OPs will be emplaced based on the tactical situation. Each OP will
be manned by a minimum of two soldiers. The purpose of the OP is to
observe and report. The OP will call in with periodic reports as a matter
of habit, even if no contact is found. The absence of activity is as
important as its presence.
2. Equipment: PLT LDRs will ensure that the following equipment is
available for use at the LP/OP:
a. MOPP gear - complete
b. Personal weapon and an M16A2
c. Kevlar and LCE with full canteens
d. Map with operational overlay
e. Compass
f. Field telephone, wired into support vehicle (PL,PSG)
g. Signaling equipment - flags, pyro, flashlight, chem lights, etc.
h. Visual devices - Binos or NVGs, as appropriate
i. Pick, shovel, sandbags, camouflage material, etc.
3. Personnel Briefings: Prior to being assigned as the LP/OP personnel, the
individual will be fully briefed by his tank commander. He will know
and understand the following information:
a. Company, Platoon and his position on the map, map
orientation
b. Company Mission and Commander’s intent
c. OP sector of responsibility
d. Friendly and enemy activity in sector (including local patrols)
e. Likely Avenues of Approach (mounted and dismounted)
f. Actions on observing enemy activity
g. Withdrawal criteria
h. Relief information - when and by whom
i. Challenge and Password
j. What is he looking for. What should he expect to see.

307
 4. Mounted Observation Posts:During some tactical operations a mounted
OP may be employed using a tank or Bradley. This will often be with the mission
of observing/securing large open areas and hight speed Aas into the company area.
Mounted Ops may also be used for other tactical operations such as Counter-Recon
and Security . Their employment is dictated by the tactical situation, but is
conceptually no different than that of of dismounted Ops. Tanks/Brads acting as
mounted Ops will be fully alert with weapons manned and thermals operational.
They may also dsmount a single crewman for local security, placing him far enough
away from the vehicle that he can hear and see independently of the tank/Brad

308
 ANNEX G --STABILITY OPERATIONS

Stability Operations Critical Tasks

The promotion of a common set of critical tasks, conditions and standards is

absolutely essential for conducting future peacekeeping operations and training with
allied
forces. The following twelve tasks are essential for conducting STABOPS:

Conduct Patrols
Establish and Operate an Observation Post
Establish and Operate a Checkpoint
Plan for Media
Conduct Liaison/Negotiate
Escort a Convoy
React to Ambush
React to Indirect Fire
Establish a Lodgment Area
Secure a Route
Mine Clearance
Provide Command and Control

309
 APPENDIX 1. LODGMENT AREAS
Purpose: To provide presence in local area and security for peacekeeping force.
While maintaining the ability to conduct a series of operations other than war.

1. Quartering party precedes Company to identify and mark perimeter and OP

locations providing sufficient dispersion, clear and/or mark area obstacles and
hazards, establish local liaison and emplace logistics infrastructure. In hostile
area, life support elements, facilities and local liaisons are developed after area is
occupied.

2. Main body deploys by tactical road march, secures area perimeter, emplaces
OP's and initiates continuous patrolling for force protection.

3. Construction of base provides all personnel with covered protection.

4. Security measures, such as dismounted patrols, are used to deny non-combatant

and belligerent infiltrations.

5. Dispersion is sufficient to avoid catastrophic damage by indirect fire attack.

Concentration does not encourage belligerents to mount a spectacular destruction
attack (truck bomb). Company implements plan(s) for:
a. Enemy indirect fire.
b. Civilians approaching.
c. Combatants approaching (both mounted & dismounted).
d. Enemy sniper fire.

e. MEDIA accredited and non-accredited encounters

f. Mine clearance and marking (See ANNEX I)

6. C2 elements establish battle command facilities inside and outside lodgment
perimeter. Unit develops plans for:
a. Direct & indirect fire plans.
b. Obstacle construction (countermobility).
c. Improved positions for vehicles and aircraft (survivability)
d. Bunker construction (survivability).
e. Detainee holding area.
f. Aviation assembly area security and reaction plan

7. Unit adheres to ROE at all times.

8. Unit reports to higher HQ as required.

310
 APPENDIX 2. PATROLS
1. Purpose:
a. To cover dead space that Observation Posts (OP's) and Temporary
Observation Posts (OPs) can not observe during daylight/night hours.
b. To investigate various incidents.
c. To show a UN presence through out the whole area of operation, and to
give US forces freedom of movement.
d. To collect information.

2. Planning of the Patrol:

a. Considerations
1) What is the present situation in unit’s area of operation?
2) What are the PIRs and IRs
3) What different ethnic groups are in the AO? Will you need a linguist?
4) Routes? Trafficability of Bridges?
5) Routine patrol conducted during day, night or inclement weather?
6) Soldiers load?
7) Are there any possible commo dead spaces along the route? Is a retrans
needed?
8) Resupply? Logistic Concerns?
b. Coordination:
1) Coordinates with adjacent patrols. (See ANNEX D, Appendix 4 -
COORDINATE WITH ADJACENT UNITS)
2) Coordinates with OPs in the AO. They can give you useful
information on the terrain, routes, local population and general
situation in the AO.
c. Size of patrol:
1) Dismounted patrols should be minimum of 4 soldiers/section and
section/platoon size for long range patrols.
2) Mounted patrols will consist of min. 2 vehicles.
d. Equipment:
1) Weapons
2) NVGs
3) PLGRs
4) Maps
5) Radios

3. Patrol Matrix:
a. The Commander plans patrols based on guidance from Battalion. The SP
time and amount of time in hasty OP will be dictated by the patrol matrix.
Other times will be METT-T dependent.
b. Each OP will post the latest patrol matrix and updated graphics in their

311
 operations cell. File the old matrix for further reference.

4. Patrol Inspection: All patrols will be inspected by one of the following prior to
departure: Company Commander, First Sergeant, XO, Platoon Leader, Platoon
Sergeant. If the patrol inspector feels the patrol is not ready, he will request a
delay in the start time. If short comings cannot be corrected within 1-2 hours, he
can cancel the patrol or assigns the mission to another unit. Patrols will not be
conducted over the objection of the inspector. Patrol inspections will generally be
conducted two hours prior to SP.

5. Execution of the Patrol:

a. The platoon leader issues a FRAGO to the Squad leaders and specific Patrol
Leader.
b. The Patrol leader issues an order for each patrol IAW patrol order format.
(see ANNEX C)
c. Briefing of the patrol:
1) Every member of the patrol must be briefed. It is the Patrol Leaders
responsibility to issue the OPORD and ensure every member of the
patrol is prepared to take over as Patrol Leader. The Patrol Leader must
be fully updated on all events before leaving and disseminate all
information to each member of the patrol.
2) Every member of the patrol must know the following:
- The objective of the patrol.
- PIRs/IRs
- General situation in the area (past and present)
- Contingency plan if plan can not be carried out.
- Times of departure, time in OPT and approximate return time.
- Weather forecast.
- Patrol route and all check points
- MEDEVAC procedures (See ANNEX E)
- Mine awareness
- Any code words.
- All unit SOPs
- ROEs
d. Execution:
1) Stick to the patrol plan, unless instructed to do otherwise by higher.
2) Do not rely on memory alone. Record all incidents on paper in
SALUTE format and maintain a log. Draw sketches when necessary.
If possible, take pictures or use a video camera (if available) these
tools are highly effective as a means to not only document belligerent
activity but to deter/breakup such activity. Disseminate information
to all members of the patrol. Call in all pertinent information over
the radio immediately. If an incident should occur, clear the net and
maintain constant communications with higher HQs.
3) Halt when challenged and establish the identity of the patrol. If an
attempt is made to obstruct the patrols progress, report by radio and

312
 wait for instructions.
4) Ensure the security of all maps and documents belonging to the
patrol.
5) Stay alert and maintain security at all times. Even if the threat is
low, a threat can arise from anywhere at any time.
6) The Patrol Leader reports his callsign, battle roster numbers of all
personnel in the patrol prior to SP time.
7) Patrol Leader will make radio checks at SP, CPs and RP. Patrol
leader will give hourly SITREPS.
8) If at any time a patrol fails to maintain commo with its parent OP, it
will
do the following:
a) Try to reach another Company or Battalion station to relay its
current status.
b) Move to higher ground to reestablish commo.
c) If a patrol has lost commo for more than 30 min. the parent OP
will dispatch a vehicle to the vicinity of the last SITREP to raise
the patrol and reestablish commo.

e. Patrol Debriefing:
1) Section Sergeants are responsible for debriefing the patrol IAW
Report format below.
2) All soldiers who go on a patrol will attend the debriefing.
3) Upon the completion of the debriefing, the Patrol Leader will send the
patrol debriefing and the overlay showing the routes of the patrol to
the BN TOC with the next logpac.
4) Conduct maintenance on vehicles, equipment and prepare for the
next mission.

PATROL REPORT:
A. Armed civilians, weapons and supply caches.
B. Uniforms worn by personnel, identifying emblems or badges.
C. Anti-U.S. / U.N. demonstrations, graffiti, speeches, leaflets, signs etc.
D. Attitude of civilians.
E. Location and size of refugee camps.
F. Changes in civilian daily routine.
G. Complaints by civilians of robberies, coercion or intimidation.
H. Sightings of weapons, number and type.
I. Attacks by direct or indirect fire.
J. Location of minefields and boobytraps.
K. Possible war crimes,

6. Contingency procedures to follow when patrol encounters belligerents.

313
 a. While on Patrol, the Platoon/Section is engaged or halted by belligerents.
Accomplish the following:
1) Return fire if necessary. Establish security and seek covered and
concealed positions if possible.
2) Platoon/Section Leader attempts to establish his elements identity as
a US patrol.
3) Patrol immediately establishes radio contact with higher HQ,
maintain continuous contact with proper SITREPs.
4) If patrol is stopped but not engaged Platoon/Section Leader calmly
and tactfully attempts negotiation with belligerent leader. RTO relays
results of negotiations to higher HQ.
5) Platoon/Section maintains security of its weapons, ID papers,
communications equipment, maps and logs. If necessary,
Platoon/Section takes all actions to break contact by accomplishing
the following:
a) The Platoon/Section Leader will maneuver his element out of
danger and into a covered and concealed position. The
Platoon/Section uses bounding overwatch techniques to move
away from the belligerent force.
b) Once all Platoon/Section elements link-up, security is
established and a report is sent to higher HQ. Based on
guidance from higher, the patrol will either continue with the
mission or withdraw to the nearest OP.
6) If the belligerent force is overwhelming, and capture or detention by
belligerents is imminent, patrol members attempt to sterilize maps
and destroy notes, sketches and logs. Maintain radio contact as long
as possible before dumping frequencies and zeroing fills.

b. Platoon/Section manning an OP is faced with a potential opposing force:

1) OP immediately goes to a higher threatcon level.
2) Immediate and constant communication is established with higher.
3) Platoon/Section Leader or OP Commander ensures that the opposing force
understands that he is dealing with a US installation:
a) Ensures US Flag is up and visible.
b) Attempt to communicate with belligerents.
4) Unit leader negotiates with the potential opposing force, and
determines their intent.
5) OP relays intent to higher, awaits further instructions and maintains
security of their perimeter. The OP will either be reinforced or
will defend itself. Reinforcements will be the QRF or an element from an
adjacent OP.

6) Evacuation of equipment in the following order:

- All weapons and weapon systems
- Tactical vehicles
- Ammunition

314
 - Classified documents/disks
- Communications equipment
- Engineer equipment
- Non-tactical vehicles
- Infrastructure stores and equipment
- Class IX parts

7) OP defends itself as necessary. Requests fire support and QRF support as

available.

8) If OP/OPT can not be evacuated or reinforced and the belligerent force is

overwhelming and capture or detention by belligerents is imminent, OP
members sterilize maps and destroy notes, sketches and logs. Maintains
radio contact as long as possible before dumping frequencies and zeroing
fills.

315
 APPENDIX 3. CONVOY ESCORT
Purpose: To provide security for convoy elements traveling to a release point or
delivery destination, ensuring vehicles arrive without incident and unit maintains
integrity throughout the movement.

The escorting of a convoy takes place in several steps:

1. Plan the mission
2. Linkup with the convoy
3. Inspect the convoy
4. Brief the convoy drivers
5. Harden the convoy vehicles
6. Rehearse actions on contact
7. Execute movement
8. Deliver supplies
9. Submit convoy report

1. Planning of the Convoy Escort

a. Receive the mission/ Mission Analysis

1) Number and type of vehicles.
2) Route & known checkpoints
3) Destination and requirements when reached.
4) Fuel requirements
5) Link-Up - Time & place with convoy vehicles.
a) Perimeter security.
b) Ground guides & vehicle search elements.
c) Support element.
d) Command and Liaison element.
6) Attachments
a) Medics
b) Linguist
c) Local guides
d) Engineers
e) ADA
f) UN LNO
g) FIST
b. Do an IPR.
1) What is the present situation in units area of operation?
2) What different ethnic groups are in the AO? Will you need a linguist?
3) Likelihood of encountering an unauthorized checkpoint?
4) Are there any possible commo dead spaces along the route?

5) Identify likely ambush sites

316
 -Tunnels
-Bridges
-Defiles
-Built up areas
c. Plan the movement
1) Task Organize
2) Plan for movement to LD
3) Actions on Contact
4) Actions at the RP
5) Artillery support plan
6) Common visual signals for all vehicles
7) Return plan for escort vehicles
d. Coordinate for:.
1) Linguist.
2) Medical support.
3) Air support (route recon and escort)
4) Coordinate with BN FSO for moving CFZ over convoy

2. Link up with the convoy

a. Move to location of convoy given by chain of command. (If possible, with a

linguist)
b. Report to civilian in charge of convoy: brief him on mission as assigned.
c. Unless otherwise directed, advise him to subordinate himself to your
authority to facilitate unity of command while under escort.

3. Inspection of convoy vehicles

(At a minimum check the following)

a. Ensure drivers have valid license and identify individuals who can't speak
English.
b. Vehicle cargo (free of contraband & properly secured).
c. General mechanical: Tires, Fuel, Oil, Water.
d. Bills of lading, locks, and security seals.
e. Lights, wipers, heaters, and other safety features.
f. Prepare a list of bumper or license plate numbers and personnel on each
vehicle.

4. Brief Drivers:

317
 a. Primary route. Location of hazardous areas, curves, steep grades.
b. Alternate routes.
c. Order of March
d. Speed
e. Interval
f. Rally points.
g. Actions at halts, built-up areas.
h. Actions at check points (friendly & hostile).
i. Actions on sniper attack, ambush
j. Position of Security personnel in convoy
k. Assign positions to soldiers in trucks
l. Areas of poor trafficability.
m. Formation, interval, and rate of march.
n. Political/jurisdictional boundaries.

5. Harden Vehicles against mine threat (dependent on time):

a. Sandbag floors and sides of vehicles.

b. Place rubber matting over sandbags

6. Rehearse:

Every member of the convoy must be briefed. It is the convoy commanders

responsibility to issue the OPORD and ensure every member of the convoy is
prepared and ready for contingencies. The convoy commander must be fully
updated on all events before leaving and disseminate all information to members of
the convoy. Contingencies include:

a. React to sniper/near ambush.

b. React to check point (UN and Belligerent).
c. Movement through built-up area.
d. React to indirect.
e. Rules of Engagement (See TAB A)
f. React to vehicle breakdown.
g. Planned/unplanned halts.
h. Demands for inspection by belligerents.
i. Break in Contact.
j. Casualty treatment and Evac.
k. Mine Awareness
* If air assets are available incorporate into rehearsal if possible

7. Execution:
a. Convoy elements positioned for movement prior to SP.
b. Lead Security/Advance Guard departs 15 minutes ahead of convoy.
c. Armed and armored escort vehicles move in appropriate intervals to provide
protection for the convoy.

318
 ADVANCE
GUARD

CONVOY COMANDER,
CA & LINGUIST

ESCORTED VEHICLES
(NOT TO SCALE)

MAIN
BODY

ESCORTED VEHICLES
(NOT TO SCALE)

RECOVERY

MORT
BATTALION
QRF ON-CALL

8. Deliver Supplies

a. Convoy halts in covered and concealed location short of destination.

b. Convoy commander confirms proper location for delivery.

319
 c. Commander conducts liaison w/authorities for drop off point.
d. Commander moves trucks to delivery point with adequate security to
prevent looting or diversion of trucks off of route. Security may be split to
secure larger site and delivery point.
e. Security elements remain until local authorities assume control or until
distribution is complete.
f. Escort vehicles return to point of origin.

9. Submit Convoy Closing Report

a. Submitted to Battalion TOC by escort force Commander.

b. Include Specifics of mission, any events

10. Contingency Procedures

a. React to a sniper.
1) Un-populated Area:
a. Contact drill, return fire.
b. CONTINUE TO MOVE.
2) Populated areas:
a. Contact drill. Return fire at identified targets.
b. CONTINUE TO MOVE.

b. Attack by Belligerent
1) RETURN FIRE! Seek cover, determine location of crew-served
weapons
2) Establish 360 degree perimeter if not already in place.
3) Report situation to higher headquarters.
4) Convoy prepares to withdraw under cover of security force.
5) Leaders direct engagement of selected targets.
6) Direct fires used to disable and discourage attackers.
7) If attack is defeated peacekeepers administer first aid, report
situation, and evacuate casualties and detailed belligerent.

320
 c. Movement through Built up or Populated areas:
1) Lead element IDs built up area, notifies convoy.
2) Convoy halts executes Herring Bone.
3) Lead element attempts to locate bypass
4) If no bypass is possible lead element moves through built-up area.
a) Alerts convoy prior
b) Proofs route through built-up area.
c) Lead element sets on far side.
5) METT-T allowing a security element will move up and secure
the near side.
6) Convoy initiates movement through built-up area, when clear, lead
element resumes movement forward of convoy.

d. Negotiate a belligerent checkpoint: Belligerent checkpoints are almost always

illegal. They may vary in size from squad to reinforced company. Their intent
may be to :
- Deny freedom of movement to peacekeeping forces.
- Aquire food, fuel, supplies by demanding a toll.
- Prevent the distribution of relief supplies to civilians.
- Prevent peacekeeper intervention in belligerent fighting.
- Prevent peacekeeper observation of agreement violations or war crimes.

1) Lead element locates Check point.

a) IDs as friendly or hostile.
b) Notifies Convoy Commander
c) Convoy Commander notifies TOC
2) Convoy halts,
a) Convoy goes to Herring bone; posts security
b) QRF, USAF alerted
c) Prepare to bypass or fight way through checkpoint
3) If hostile, platoon will order checkpoint removed, or attempt to
implement alternate route; If an alternate route is not feasible, platoon
attempts to negotiates passage.
4) Lead vehicle commander will attempt to negotiate way through, informs
Convoy Commander of situation.
5) If lead TC is unsuccessful, the Civil Affairs / UN representative will be
dispatched forward to continue negotiations with appropriate documents.
6) Negotiations : If checkpoint is illegal notify soldiers manning it that
you intend to destroy it. If you must negotiate use the
following techniques.
a) All passengers can and will ID themselves as UN
employees.
b) Interior of vehicles will not be searched by belligerents.
c) Convoy members will not comply with the orders ofthe belligerent

321
 check point sentries.
d) Doors of the vehicles will remain secured from the inside while
making passage of the check point.
e) Military escort and their convoy have freedom of
movement.
f) Do not give food or supplies as toll for passage
g) Make no promises to the belligerents
7) The Convoy Commander enters negotiating only if the Civil
Affairs/UN
representative is unsuccessful; he has three options:
a) Warn belligerents and issue ultimatum.
b) Prevent loss of life and abort mission.
c) Force way through checkpoint.
8) Convoy Commander demonstrates resolve to continue mission by:
a) Order recon of bypass.
b) Intimidate by the maneuver of combat forces or
weapon systems.
c) Request overflight of attack helicopters, CAS, or

deployment of QRF.
d) Be prepared to hold position for undetermined
time.
e) Force open checkpoint if necessary.

e. Attack by Unarmed Mob

1) Peacekeeping force issues warnings. Warn belligerent to desist and
disperse. Prepare convoy to withdraw. Form security personnel into
crowd control formation. Consider use of CS to disperse mob. Issue
second warning, magazines attached to wpns. Issue third warning and
charge wpns.
2) Use of Force. Consider warning shots as last resort prior to use of
deadly force. Report anticipated use of force to HQ. Fire disabling
shots on order of ranking officer/NCO. Continue attempts to
disengage. Render first aid and evacuate casualties.

322
 APPENDIX 4. CHECKPOINT OPERATIONS
1. Purpose: The company may receive the mission to establish checkpoints. Based
on METT-T the mission may be assigned to one of the platoons. The checkpoint
may be temporary or permanent. A permanent checkpoint requiring engineer and
Class IV support to build. The purpose of the Checkpoint (CP) is multi-fold. It
prevents trafficking of contraband and inhibits the movement of known or
suspected insurgents. It is manned by police, military, and paramilitary forces. At
the Company level CPs are normally manned by platoons. Both host country or
U.S. Army combat forces defend against enemy attacks. Some other missions of the
CP are as follows:
a. To act as an OP/CP and observe and report activities in the area.
b. To count special traffic, such as military vehicles, cargo trucks, fuel
trucks, etc.
c. To check and inspect for contraband such as fuel, weapons, narcotics,
etc.
d. On order, close/or block traffic in either direction.

2. Basic Requirements: CP construction (both mobile and fixed) must

accomplish the following:
a. Provide 360 degree security for platoon.
b. Control movement into the AO or on a specific route.
c. Be able to create an instant roadblock.
d. Provide protection for personnel at checkpoint
e. Be constructed so it can be turned over to non-mechanized personnel.

3. Site Setup: Site setup is the most important aspect of the CP. CP location and
construction should incorporate the following:
a. Easily defendable providing 360 degree security.
b. Positioned not far from established OPs (for reinforcement reasons).
c. In relatively well traveled areas.
d. Where communications with higher headquarters is not hindered.
e. Where bypassing the CP will be difficult and/or impossible without being
observed.
f. Position combat vehicle off road about 100 meters away, in sight of the
checkpoint. This will deter resistance to soldiers manning the checkpoint.
g. Position for security force 100-300 meters away in the direction in which
traffic will approach. Will apprehend traffic attempting to bypass the
checkpoint, and react to drive by attacks on the CP. If traffic comes from both
directions place a force at each end.
h. Establish rest area near where vehicles are being searched. Resting
soldiers can form a reserve in case of trouble.
i. The checkpoint CP should be a bunker 15 meters from the road, and
provide protection from small arms fire. This can also be the location of

323
the covering sentry.
j. Establish a search area, along with a parking/vehicle holding lot.
k. There should be an emergency trench in the entrance holding area and
search area that the sentry or search team can dive into in an emergency,
and allow the covering sentry to fire into the area without fear of hitting
soldiers.

CHECKPOINT FOR HEAVY TRAFFIC

EMERGENCY DIVE
IN TRENCH FOR
PARKING LOT

SEARCHERS (OR
CONCRETE
BARRIERS TO BARRIERS
DIVE OVER IN
EMERGENCY)

SPEED BUMPS
REST AREA

TRAFFIC GUIDE
SEARCH AREA

REST AREA

CP

BUNKER TANK
MOVEABLE BARRIER OVERWATCHES
BUNKER
SENTRIES
SEARCH AREA

GUARD
GUARD
SEARCHER

TRAFFIC GUIDE

SIGN TO WARN
INCOMING
TRAFFIC

324
 CHECKPOINT FOR LIGHT TRAFFIC

SPEED BUMPS
PARKING LOT

BARRIERS

CP VEHICLES REST AREA

SEARCHED
HERE

TANK
MOVEABLE BARRIER OVERWATCHES
EMERGENCY DIVE SENTRIES
IN TRENCH FOR VEHICLES
SEARCHERS (OR SEARCHED GUARD
CONCRETE HERE SEARCHER
BARRIERS TO
DIVE OVER IN
EMERGENCY)

SIGN TO WARN
INCOMING
TRAFFIC

4. Temporary CPs.
a. They allow you to cover a greater area and show a US presence.
b. No one knows in advance where they will be set-up. This makes it
harder for smugglers to develop bypass routes that are effective for their
purpose.
c. They can be set-up and moved quickly.
d. Temporary CPs should be set-up and operated for no more than 24
hours. The CP can always be moved to a new location in the area. This
helps prevent the smuggler from using alternate routes in the area.

325
 TEMPORARY (HASTY) CHECKPOINT

3
4 5

1 SENTRY STOPS APPROACHING VEHICLES

2 TANKS SLOW AND CANALIZE TRAFFIC

RESERVE TANK SECTION
3
OVERWATCHES SENTRIES
4 SEARCH TEAM CHECKS VEHICLES

5 SENTRY OVERWATCHES SEARCH TEAM

5. Planning and establishing a Check Point, Mobile or Fixed.

a. Planning: The planning phase of this type of operation comes from the
intelligence gathered by the S2. The S2 and S3 will usually plan the type,
location, duration and the mission of the CP. Once the necessary information is
available the Commander begins the planning phase. The following should be
considered:
1) Personnel (how many needed)
2) Interpreter
3) Engineer support
4) Vehicle(s) and types (to include air assets)

326
 5) Types of weapons
6) Special ammunition (flares, smoke, grenades, illumination,
demolitions)
7) Communication equipment (radios, antenna, SOI, report
formats, code words, landlines, GPS, etc.)
8) Observation equipment
9) Barrier equipment (concertina, barrels, search mirrors,
flashlights,
dragon teeth, etc.)
10) Manuals/SOPs
11) Lights
12) Medical equipment
13) PZ/LZ equipment
14) Night Vision Goggles
15) Multi-lingual signs
16) Mirrors, inspecting equipment
17) Firepower
18) Digging/hauling assets to create checkpoint

b. Establishing: After planning is completed, warning and OPORD issued,

it is time to establish. The following should be considered:
1) Recon area prior to occupation (like TAA)
2) Communication establishment
3) Site verification (by map and GPS)
4) Occupy like a TAA
5) Priorities of work:
a) Security established 360 degrees. Post OPs. (Two man OP in
covered/concealed position with radio/telephone. Have commo
with CP. Early warning is critical).
b) Post immediate reaction force (IRF). Take into account the ranges
of organic weapon systems.(MAXIMIZE). Overwatch vehicle
covers obstacle and checkpoint. Ensure local security of IRF.
c) Center of CP or search location established
d) Vehicles positioned 15-50 meters off road covering avenues of
approach
e) Initial barriers and crew served fighting positions
established
f) Initial report sent up higher
g) Defense plan and alert procedures established
h) Signs employed (Multi-lingual)
- Warning, prepare to stop (25-50 meters from sentry and
barrier)
- Checkpoint, prepare to stop, have ID Card ready, etc. (At
barrier)
- Contraband warning sign
- Stop, follow orders of sentry. (At

327
barrier)
- Vehicle search area
- Driver and passengers dismount, open
doors and lids
(hoods/trunks). (In vehicle search area.)
- Personnel search area
- Aid post
5) If available, consider air for recons of surrounding area, additional
fire power, and intimidation.

6. Operations of the checkpoint

a. Roles of checkpoint personnel.

1) Sentry: Stops traffic at marked points, Directs vehicles to move
forward on command of the search team.
2) Searcher: Searches vehicles.
3) Covering Sentry: Covers the searcher from a distance. Counters any
aggressive act. CP may need two covering sentries, one to cover
individual being searched, other to cover personnel waiting to be
searched.
4) RTO: Observes the searches from the CP. Is prepared to report and call
for reinforcements according to the situation. Maintains radio comms,
conducts periodic radio checks.
6) QRF: Acts to counter local threats to the CP.
7) Overwatch Vehicle: Provides overwatch of the check point from a
distance to provide security and deterrence.
8) CP Commander: Supervises operation of checkpoint. Synchronizes the
security force, combat vehicle, sentries, searchers, QRF, and fire support
(if used).

b. CP Control: Control of the CP must be maintained at all times. This is due to

the number and types of vehicles/personnel that will be moving through the
CP at all times of the day and night.
1) Personnel Control: If conducting search operations, control of
personnel on the ground or in vehicles is critical. This is established by
having search and security personnel designated in the OPORD. Special
considerations should be made for the following:
a) Individuals acting strange
b) Individuals with bulging clothing, or overdressed
for the weather.
c) Cars containing only one individual
d) Intoxicated individuals.
e) Females
f) Animals in the vehicle
2) Traffic Control: Control of traffic is very important. If this is not
maintained, individuals waiting to come through the CP can become

328
 hostile towards you and the UN, thus making your job more difficult.
The following should be considered:
a) Permit one vehicle at a time into the checkpoint. Other vehicles
wait 50 meters away with engine turned off.
b) On signal from search team, sentry allows next vehicle into
search area.
c) Searchers have all occupants exit vehicle, and move 5 meters
away. Before leaving vehicle driver must open all doors, trunk,
hood.
d) Searcher checks individuals papers and documents. Has them
face away from the vehicle.
e) Covering sentry covers the searcher and searched individuals at
all times.
f) Searcher searches car, logs time, vehicle type, license,
destination of vehicle, number of occupants, results of search.
Vehicles that are being detained are moved to the holding area.
g) If at any time searcher feels he is in danger he will flash a hand
signal to the covering sentry to indicate a threat.
h) If the individuals in the search area attempt to harm the searcher
he must immediately attempt to dive into the nearby safety trench,
while the covering sentry fires up the search area.
i) Individuals get back into car, continue on, searcher signals sentry
for next vehicle.
NOTE: Distinguished persons may be granted permission to pass
checkpoint without inspection. The Commander of the CP will have a list
of the persons allowed through, will verify the identity of the individuals, and
will log their passage once they leave the AO. This will not occur during
curfews.

c. Search Operations: If you are assigned to perform search operations

these rules will be followed:
1) Be polite, friendly, and calm.
2) Maintain high standards of appearance
3) Be especially courteous to old people, children, and women. Be
careful to follow local customs in the treatment of these people.
4) Be professional, firm, but not aggressive.
5) Defend yourself, be cautious, do not take chances.
6) Know and follow ROE, and contingency drills.
7) Be cautious when females are in the vehicle. If the female is a
Muslim, do not touch them. Let the male in the vehicle do this. If only
females exist in the vehicle, direct them out using hand and arm signals,
or through the interpreter.
9) Have the driver open the doors to the vehicle. Stay towards the open
side of the door so you can see the inside of the vehicle when it is first
opened.
10) The driver must back away from the vehicle after he/she opens each

329
 door.
11) You will close all the doors.
12) Do not let the driver come between you and the security
man
13) Vehicle searches must methodically include the following
areas:
a) Vehicle interior:
- Sun visors
- Under seats
- Seat backs
- Beneath floor mats
- Door pockets
- Under dash board
- Glove box
- Potential hiding pockets in ceiling/padded
roof
- Battery box
- Any cargo area
b) Cargo compartments or vehicle trunks:
- False doors or other potential hiding place
areas, e.g., in spare tire well.
- Inspect cargo or suspicious items per special orders from
higher headquarters. Questions pertaining to search within
containers should be brought to the attention of the
OIC/NCOIC
- When searching under the hood, have the driver raise the
hood, being careful for booby traps. Check all areas from the
top to bottom. The air filter is an area which requires special
attention.
c) Vehicle exterior (use the following sequence):
- Left front fender well and behind the
wheel
- Under the front bumper and behind the
grill
- Right fender well and behind the wheel
- Underneath right side of body, back to and
including right rear fender well
and behind wheel
- Under and behind rear bumper
- Left rear fender well and behind wheel
- Underneath the left side of body, back to
left front fender well (use a mirror)
- Top of vehicle, to include luggage carriers
d) For larger vehicle(s) with multiple axles and dual
rear wheel, pay particular attention to areas along
length of the axle and between the dual wheels

330
14) Depending on your orders, vehicles that have contraband may be
detained or turned around and not allowed access in the direction he/she
was traveling.

331
 APPENDIX 5. OBSERVATION POST
OPERATIONS
The Company may be given the mission to establish an observation post
(OP). These OPs provide observation of areas, people, or buildings as specified by
the mission. Soldiers manning the OP must be alert, understand what they are
looking for, and report facts as accurately and timely as possible. During STABOPS
the OP is overt, and serves to show the American Army presence.. During Combat
the OP will be covert. This APPENDIX addresses only STABOPS OPs. The
Company may establish permanent or temporary OPs. The permanent OP is
manned 24 hours a day, the temporary OP as based on the mission.

STANDARD OBSERVATION POST (PERMANENT)

1. Plan the OP: The OP site may be specified or chosen by the unit with the
mission to observe an area. When choosing a site the following considerations must
be followed:
- OP can observe necessary area
- Observation overlaps with neighboring OP
- Covered and concealed routes in and out unless unnecessary due to METT-T
- METT-T may require outlying OPs be deployed from a permanent OP
- OP may be in a building in an urban area
- Surrounding terrain should not dominate the site
- If OP is to be manned for long time consider drainage

2. Construct the OP:

a. Priorities of work
- Emplace 360 degree security, local patrols
- Establish hasty fighting positions
- Establish redundant communications with higher headquarters
- Establish observation of assigned sector
- Emplace technical sensors (GSR, PEWS)
- Establish and rehearse contingency plans
- Dig Command Bunker, run wire to all positions
- Build perimeter fence. Use chain link fence topped with wire.
- Dig in vehicles
- Build facilities: sleeping area, latrine, shower, kitchen, helipad, towers
- Build blast walls to shield barracks
- Continue improvements

- SEE BELOW -

332
 THE OBSERVATION POST
H

PARKING 6

PREDET SCREEN
ENTRANCE 7
8 9 7

13 PROTECTIVE
1 2 3 WALL
7 13 12

10 13

4 5

11 7

PERIMETER
OBSERVATION FENCE
SECTOR (CHAIN LINK WITH
CONCERTINA)

1 - STORE ROOM
2 - KITCHEN
3 - SLEEPING AREA
4, 5 - TOILET, SHOWER
6 - GENERATOR WITH NOISE SUPPRESSION
7 - TANKS ORIENTING ON OUTSIDE AVENUES OF APPROACH
8, 9 - FUEL AND AMMO (DUG IN, AWAY FROM QUARTERS)
10 - COMMAND BUNKER
11 - LOOKOUT TOWER
12 - FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
13 - SLIT TRENCHES

333
 b. Security Measures
- Eliminate Potential hiding places near the facility
- Ensure unobstructed 360 degree field of view
- Wire and fence should be beyond throwing distance from the facilities
- Minimize access points to the OP. Control with speed bumps, barriers.
- Do not allow locals into the site
- Locate parking away from facilities
- Block line of sight to sensitive facilities (barracks, CP)
- Maximize use of below ground facilities
- Sandbag above ground facilities at least to waist height
- Use pre-detonation chain link fencing around key areas
- Establish a relief/evacuation plan

c. Operational considerations.
- Facilities should not block necessary observation.
- Fighting positions and shelters should be numerous and strategically placed
to allow soldiers to take cover rapidly during sniper and mortar attacks.
- Towers should be at least 4 meters high and protected against small arms
and fragments (don’t forget to reinforce floor)
- Ammo and fuel storage should be away from facilities, but secured
- Power sources must be redundant. Dig in generators
- Position Tanks to use optics, Remember exhaust problem with M1A1
- Plan for periodic resupply and maintenance of tanks and vehicles.

3. Operate OP
a. Tasks of soldiers manning OP
- Soldiers scan in assigned sectors
- Look for obvious targets, dust, shiny objects, movement, suspicious
activities
- One observer uses binos, others use naked eyes
- Tanks use thermals to scan for activity
- Report and investigate suspicious activities, Commander may send
patrol
b. Soldiers in OP should KNOW following information
- Task and purpose of OP
- How OP fits into overall plan of higher HQ
- Specifics of where and what to observe
- What, When, and How to report
- Conditions and authority for withdrawal
- ROE/contingency plan for snipers, mortar attack, etc.
- Challenge and Password
- When they will be replaced

TEMPORARY OBSERVATION POSTS

334
1. Purpose: To cover areas not observed from existing hardened OPs

2. Method. These OPs are dispatched, normally with an infantry component. Most
are conducted for a period between 2 and 3 days, with patrols going out both day
and night. These patrols can be conducted both dismounted and mounted, as
specified in the patrol matrix.

3. Security: This is the most critical factor for the OP. It must be understood that
a threat can come from any direction while on the OP.

4. Communication: This is the second most critical factor of the OP. Again the
mission is to observe and report. If you can observe, but not report, then you are
not accomplishing your mission. This can be achieved by:
a. Proper PMCS maintenance
b. Communicating through the nearest OP
c. Additional communications equipment
d. Field expedient equipment

5. Equipment: The following equipment is advised for occupying the OP:

a. Observation equipment:
1) Binoculars or M49 Telescope
2) AN/PVS-7B or AN/PVS-5
3) AN/PVS-4 or AN/TVS-5
4) Any other Thermal Sights available (TOW, tank)
b. Communication Equipment:
1) Vehicle radio
2) SINCGARS with all accessories and man-pack for
dismounted patrols
3) OE-254 antenna group
4) All call signs and frequencies
5) WD-1 wire (for field expedient antennas)
c. Ammunition:
1) Basic load for all weapons
2) Parachute flares
3) Star clusters (color depending on SOP)
4) HC Smoke
5) Colored Smoke for marking PZ/LZ
d. Medical Equipment:
1) Combat Lifesaver Bag
2) Litter
3) Additional field dressings

6. Execution:
a. Occupation: (by Tank or Bradley PLT / SEC)
1) Drive into OP site, orient front of vehicles towards sector to
observe, with both vehicles forming a V.

335
 2) Gunner in the PLT LDR/SEC SGT's vehicle remains
mounted and observes sector. Drivers dismount
and conduct flank security.
3) Wingman TCs and Gunner conduct an R&S patrol around
position.
4) When the R&S patrol is complete, conduct the following
priorities of work:
- String concertina wire in a half moon around
vehicles.
- Designate Positions along perimeter using
rucksacks, kevlars or Engineer tape.
- Erect OE 254 forward of vehicle if commo is at all
shaky.
- Designate latrine area
- Erect shelter
- Execute sleep plan
- During limited visibility operations, ensure the US
Flag is properly displayed and lighted.:

b. Actions once established:

1) A minimum of TWO (2) men will remain on guard status at all times;
one man will observe sector and conduct radio watch, while the other
man provides local security for the OP.
2) Keep accurate log of all reports sent to the TOC as well as all
significant events reported or observed in sector.
3) Maintain hourly radio contact with higher
4) Maintain noise, light and litter discipline
5) Each morning conduct an R&S patrol
6) Conduct Daily Weapons and Vehicle maintenance.
7) Conduct periodic sensitive items inventory.

c. Leaving an OP:
1) Clean and sterilize the area.
2) conduct a sensitive items inventory
3) Ensure all equipment is recovered (OE-254, etc.)

336
 APPENDIX 6. SECURE A BUILT-UP AREA -
PERSONNEL SEARCHES
1. ESTABLISH CONTACT WITH LOCAL GROUPS .
a. Provide no support to belligerent forces.
b. Identify military forces, civil authorities, religious leaders, and ethnic
groups in AO.
c. Coordinate and effect link up with each faction.
d. Establish a "hotline" by wire or FM with the HQ of each belligerent
element.
e. Gain all possible intell on leaders, organization, and operations of
belligerents in AO.

2. ESTABLISH CONTACT WITH LOCAL UN OBSERVER TEAMS

Exchange information on:
a. Military, para-military, and mass civilian movements.
b. Minefields and obstacles.
c. Intentions and missions for belligerents.
d. Locations of key belligerents force leaders.

3. VILLAGE / AREA ASSESSMENT:

a. Name and location of village.
b. Village ethnic origin and size of population.
c. What is the relationship of the village with the surrounding villages?
Friendly or hostile?
d. Is any portion of the village discriminated against?
e. Were the villagers friendly, indifferent or hostile?
f. Are villagers in need of food, water or medical?
g. Road conditions (road blocks, pot holes, collapsed culverts, damaged
bridges, land slides, mines and boobytraps etc.) into the village.
h. Organization and leadership of the village. Who is in charge?
i. Main source of income (farming, industry etc.).
j. Status of medical facilities.
k. Area security, police and fire forces.
l. Location of municipal institutions, schools, churches, market places,
banks
m. Any signs of fighting in or around the village.
n. Are there any road blocks or control points established by ethnic faction
members.

337
 o. What type and quantity of weapons are in the village.
p. Does the population have any knowledge of enemy activity, weapon
caches, planned operations etc.
q. What is the food and water status of the village.
r. What organization / leader does the general population seem
to trust the most.
s. What organization/group seems to be in control of village.
t. What faction is the source of the problem.
u. Who are the faction leaders and where are they located?

4. PREPARE FOR SEARCH

a. Identify /coordinate for assets required:

1)Signs in English and native language for sight orientation (i.e.
male/female search area, parking area).
2) Lighting
3)Communications equipment at the sight.
4)Construction materials: sandbags, C-wire.
5)INTERPRETER
6)Possible augmentation by:
- Fire support
- Mine detection teams
- Military work dogs
- Tunnel recon teams
- Interrogation teams
- Psych/Civil affairs team
7) Mine sweeping equipment
b. Conduct mounted and dismounted recon of the area surrounding the
built-up area (OCOKA).
1) Roads
2) Buildings by size
3) Buildings by use
4) Water sources
5) Electrical sources
6) Food sources
7) Fuel sources
8) Underground access.
c. Recon patrol PIRs
1) Size, location and population.
2) Tunnel systems.
3) Insurgent activity.

338
 4) Warning systems.
5) Fortifications.
6. VILLAGE SEARCH METHODS

Method 1: Assemble inhabitants in central location for search

(disadvantage: looting).
Method 2: Restrict inhabitants to homes (disadvantages: control and
interrogation difficult).
Method 3: Heads of households remain in front of dwellings. All others
assembled in central location. Best method for control of
population.

Remember: Search of village perimeter between security element and

village.
Search of tunnel systems.
Mark all searched buildings

5. VILLAGE SEARCH TECHNIQUES

** NOTE: A platoon can only secure a small built-up area (5-10 buildings), larger
built-areas will require more combat power.

a. Position vehicles to provide 360 degree security outside of built-up area.

b. Post local security inside village.
c. Seal off all routes into the built up area. Establish checkpoints on routes if
applicable.
d. Designate a quick reaction force.
e. 2-3 man roving patrol(s) with FM commo and crew served weapon (M60)
patrol built-up area as a show of force.
f. Establish detainee holding area reinforced with wire.
g. Establish contact with Local Authorities:
1) Provide all medical support as possible.
2) Make attempts to assist civilians with any support requirements such
as food and water.
3) It is critical to develop trust between your unit and the civilians:
- Do not make promises you can't keep.
- Never train weapons on built-up area.
- Provide support within your capabilities to non-belligerents.
- Make it clear you are there to provide security.
4) Attempt to gain intell from civilians on the situation, location,
and activities of belligerents in the area.
h. Conduct village search

339
 i. Report to the S-2 . Turn in all captured/confiscated documents or equipment.
Information to report includes:
1) Changes in the condition, activities in the village
2) Civilian complaints of violence.
3) Civilians needing food, water and medical attention.
4) Unusual terrain features/hazard, caves, rivers etc.
5) Chemical and biological weapons and personnel equipped
with
chemical gear. Dead animals or humans without visible
wounds.
6) Roadblocks and control points by various factions.

7. SEARCH TECHNIQUES FOR INDIVIDUALS

a. FRISK SEARCH is a quick check for weapons, evidence, or

contraband.
1) Conducted in the presence of an assistant & witness.
2) Searcher stand behind suspect.
3) Assistant assumes position to one side to cover suspect with
his weapon.
4) Suspect raises arms overhead.
5) Searcher announces every action he takes in a loud and clear
voice so that witness and suspect can hear.
6)Searcher slides hands over entire body, crushing clothing to
locate concealed objects.
b. WALL SEARCH places suspect in an awkward, strained position,
rendering suspect harmless and providing relative protection to the
searcher. Useful when limited number of searchers must search
several suspects.
1) Suspect positioned for search: arms spread, palms out,
fingers spread to support upper body, legs spread, feet
pointed out and parallel to wall as far from wall as possible
with head down.
2) Searcher's Assistance: Stand on opposite side of suspect
form searcher and to the rear. Covers suspect with weapon.
Moves to other side when searcher moves. Searcher does not
come between suspect and assistant's weapon.
3) Searcher: Approach suspect from right side, own weapon
out of reach. Place right foot in ankle to ankle contact with

340
 suspect's right foot; if suspect resists search sweep foot from
under and allow suspect to land on face. Search suspect's
headgear. Check head, hands, arms, right side of body and
right leg in sequence. Same procedure applies to left side of
body. Clothing is crushed between fingers, not patted.
Return items not considered weapons or contraband.

C. Strip search (suspected insurgent/messenger).

D. Search of females (by females, if not available - by
medics -- Witness Required).

8. APPREHEND / DETAIN INDIVIDUALS

a. NONCOMBATANTS: Must be based on explicit authority and must be

further supported by physical evidence to the extent possible close
cooperation with host nation forces, civil police or other authorities is
essential in any action where the potential for apprehending noncombatants
exists.

1) Determine the status of the detainee. Circumstances which led to the

apprehension or detention is critical.
2) Issue detainee tags prior to every mission.
3) PL/PSG assures that each detainee is properly tagged prior to
evacuation.
4) Once detainees are evacuated they are:
a. Classified by type and segregated by MI personnel
b. Provided humane treatment.
c. Accounted for
d. Prepared for transfer to host nation responsibility
5) Those classified as innocent civilians are given special consideration in
the form of medical care, food, clothing, shelter and other assistance.
6) Detainees whose status cannot be readily determined are referred to a
competent tribunal for determination of their status.

b. CAPTURED INSURGENTS OR BELLIGERENT

1) FIVE S's: Search, Silence, Segregate, Safeguard, Speed to the Rear.
2) Detention and movement to other locations.
a. Detainee tags filled out
b. Try to leave segregation at higher authorities

341
c. Protect detainees in areas of conflict
d. Ensure witness records all actions. Use of video camera is
strongly recommended.

342
 A. Rules of Engagement (ROE) (sample)

This ROE is for training purposes. The Battalion Commander could authorize
use of this ROE in the Absence of a sanctioned ROE.

ROE Card

- NOTHING IN THESE ROE LIMITS YOUR RIGHT TO TAKE ALL

NECESSARY AND APPROPRIATE ACTIONS FOR YOUR PERSONAL AND
UNIT'S SELF DEFENSE.
- OUR MISSION IS TO ENFORCE THE UN PEACE PLAN. WE ARE
NOT AT WAR. IN ALL SITUATIONS YOU ARE TO USE THE MINIMUM FORCE
NECESSARY. FIRE ARMS MUST BE USED AS A LAST RESORT.
- KNOW AND FOLLOW THE TACTICAL CONTROL MEASURES IN
EFFECT
EACH DAY.

RULES FOR LEADERS AND INDIVIDUALS

The primary consideration in any STABOPS situation is force protection. Under no

conditions is any situation faced by American soldiers during STABOPS worth the
loss of life or limb. Soldiers always have the right to defend themselves from injury
or capture. The use of force is always a last resort, but must always be considered
as an option when threat to US forces exist. Rules of engagement serve as a guide
to possible options and courses of action during various situations. Be aware that
the forces that we may encounter may not hold themselves to the same standards of
conduct as American forces.

1. CHALLENGING PROCEDURES:
a. You must give a challenge before opening fire unless:
1. To do so would increase the risk of death or grave injury to you or any
other person.
2. You or others in your immediate vicinity are under armed attack.
b. Chambering a round
1. You may chamber a round when you believe it is necessary
to protect yourself, UN personnel
and other personnel under your control.
2. When ordered to do so by your patrol leader.
c. Use the following challenging procedure except in those cases
described in para 1 above:
1. Warn aggressor to stop by shouting: “Stop or I will fire”.
2. Repeat warnings as many times as possible to ensure that
the aggressor has understood the situation.

343
 3. Charge weapons if not already authorized.
4. Fire aimed warning shots in the ground, if safe to do so,
otherwise in the air.
5. If the warnings are ignored open fire, initially with single aimed shots
until the protection task is complete.

2. WEAPONS RULES: At all times follow the challenge procedures and obey the
arming order in effect:

a. Personal weapons:

ORDER NO. WEAPON AMMO/CHAMBER

1 Sling Pouch/Empty
2 Sling
Weapon/Empty
3 Port
Weapon/Empty
4 Port
Weapon/Chambered

b. Armored Vehicles:

ORDER NO. GUN ORIENTATION SAFETY AMMO

1 Elevated/Back deck Elec./Man.
Chamber Empty
2 Elevated/Front slope Elec./Man.
Chamber Empty
3 Depressed/Front slope Elec./Man.
Chamber Empty
4 Scanning Elec./Man.
Loaded
5 Scanning Elec. *
Loaded

* Tank is on safe until loader receives fire command

3. OPENING FIRE (USE OF DEADLY FORCE): You may only open fire against
a person if he/she is committing or about to commit an act likely to endanger your
life or another's life and there is no other way to stop the hostile act. Always apply
your best judgment in every circumstance.

4. EXAMPLES OF HOSTILE ACTS WHICH AUTHORIZE YOU TO OPEN

FIRE:
a. A person fires or is about to fire a weapon at you, other US personnel or
other personnel under your protection.

344
 b. A person plants, throws, or detonates an explosive device where it will
cause injury or death to you, other US/UN personnel or other personnel
under your protection.
c. A person deliberately drives a vehicle at you and there is no other way of
stopping him/her.
d. You may open fire against a person who attempts to take possession of, or
tries to destroy or damage, property or installations you're
guarding, if you are authorized use of deadly force by your special
guard orders, and there is no other way to prevent this.

5. IF YOU HAVE TO OPEN FIRE YOU SHOULD:

a. Fire warning shots, if possible
b. Fire only aimed shots, and
c. Fire no more rounds than necessary.
d. Take all reasonable precaution not to injure anyone other than your
target.
e. Upon cease firing secure the area and assist any injured.
f. Report your actions to chain of command.

6. OTHER COMMAND GUIDANCE:

a. Treat ALL persons, including civilians and detainees with respect and
dignity.
b. You may not seize private property to accomplish your mission without
Commander’s permission.
c. Looting and the taking of war trophies are prohibited.
d. Prevent and report any crime committed under the law of war.
e. Remember that We Are Not At War. Use of firearm must always be your
Last Resort.

345
 B. Crater Analysis and Shell Reports

1. GENERAL:
a. Crater analysis is an extremely important task that enables our direct
supporting artillery unit or our own mortars to conduct counter fire
operations. It is a task that needs to be performed quickly and accurately by
anyone on the battlefield. Results must be reported to the FSO as soon as
possible.
b. Results of crater analysis should contain, at a minimum, the reporting units
name, time of impact an azimuth to the enemy weapon and location of
impacting rounds. In addition, when time permits, the size and type of the
weapon and the total number of rounds fired.
c. Report results to the FSO or company CP, ASAP. The format for the report
is The SHELLREP is similar to an NBC 1 Report. When possible give all of
the lines listed below.

You this is me shell report follows:

Line A: Reporting unit
Line C: Azimuth to the weapon
Line D: Time of impact
Line F: Location of attack
Line G: Total #/type of rounds impacted
Line I: Caliber of weapon

d. When determining the information for Line C, ensure to indicate whether or

not it is in degrees or mils. When possible convert all degrees to mils by
using the following formula: (Measurement in degrees) X 17.8 =
measurement in Mils.

EXAMPLE: If the azimuth you come up with is 180 degrees using the formula
you end up with the following result: 180 x 17.8 = 3204 MILS

If a compass is not available, a cardinal direction may be given, i.e. north

or northwest. Try to be as specific as possible. Remember, when giving the
direction, you are giving the direction to the weapon system, not the
direction the weapon fired.

2. ANALYSIS METHODS:
a. Ricochet Furrow Method
1. Clean out furrow.
2. Set stakes at each end of the usable straight part of the furrow.
3. Measure the azimuth in mils (if possible) back to the arty piece. Use the
formula listed in section 1d to calculate mils if necessary.

346
 b. Fuse Furrow and Center of Crater Method
1. Find a well defined crater.
2. Place a stake in the center of the crater.
3. Place a second stake in the fuzz furrow.
4. Measure the azimuth between the stakes to the hostile weapon. Use the
formula listed in section 1d to calculate mils if
necessary.
c. Splinter Groove Method: Use for mortar attacks
1. Lay a stake along the end of the splinter grooves which extend from the
crater.
2. Lay a second stake perpendicular to the first stake through the axis of
the fuse tunnel.
3. Measure the azimuth of the second stake to the hostile weapon. Use
the formula listed in section 1d to calculate mils if
necessary.

347
 C. Actions in a Mine Field

1. Mine Discovery:
a. Halt.
b. If available use mine sweepers and mine sweeping teams to mark area and
clear path out of area. Ensure a thorough sweep of the area is conducted.
c. Mark the mine/field with whatever you have on hand.
d. Report the minefield and await further guidance.
e. When possible, stay in the area and point out the place where the mine
was found. If you have to leave, try to mark the area so you prevent others
entering the dangerous area.
f. Walk back the same way as you walked into the minefield. When possible,
use the same tracks. If not possible, use a non-metallic rod to probe a path
out of the minefield.
g. If possible, wait for the engineers/EOD personnel.
h. The minefield should be marked or destroyed (depending on location
and who emplaced them). Qualified personnel will be
dispatched to do any disarming.
NOTE: DO NOT TRY TO MOVE OR DISARM THE MINE/BOMB.

2. Detonation:
a. If detonation occurs, treat casualties if possible, send SITREP to higher,
determine whether you can clear a path to the injured person(s) and
perform first aid, initiate MEDEVAC procedures if necessary.
b. Do not risk further injury.
c. Secure and Observe the area.
d. Wait for guidance from higher.
e. If possible, wait for the engineers and medical personnel.
f. The mine field should be marked (See section 3) or destroyed
(depending on location and who emplaced them).
Qualified personnel will be dispatched to do any disarming.

3. Minefield marking: Minefields need to be marked to prevent others from

entering. Ideally this will be done with engineer tape and signs. Actual mines will
be marked with a cross of white engineer tape.

348
 D. React to Media

Realize that it is the press’ job to be pushy and obnoxious in order to get the story.
Also realize that you are under NO obligation, AT ANY TIME to talk with the
press.

1. Upon encountering a reporter: When encountered by media personnel ask to see

the following:
a. Personal identity papers (ID, passport etc.)
b. Proof of employment in a media capacity.
c. Press card/accreditation certification (verify w/UPAR).

2. Verify Credentials: Attempt to verify the identity of press personnel.

a. Notify higher HQ Unit Public Affairs Representative or Public Affairs
Office.

3. Verify Escort: Ask where the escort is if the reporter appears un-escorted.
Notify the individual(s) on procedures and limitations (as directed from higher).
Have them sign a statement in acknowledgment if applicable.

4. Giving Interviews - Answering Questions: If accreditation and press escort are

correct, then you may respond to interviewers questions:
a. All press representatives are not friendly to American Forces, do not allow
yourself to be "baited" or become agitated by provocative questioning.
b. Answer honestly.
c. Do not divulge any OPSEC information (i.e. names of casualties), or
information concerning future operations.
d. Terminate interview if uncomfortable or provocative. Soldiers are never
required to do interviews.
e. Do not speculate. Talk about things you have seen or done, not of what you
have heard. ONLY RELEASE FACTS AT YOUR LEVEL OF EXPERTISE.
f. Do not validate media comments. Only confirm facts you know about.
g. Once interview is complete report to supervisor concerning how interview
was conducted, what questions were asked, and what answers were given.
h. Be careful in what you say. Remember that a 5 minute interview will be
compressed into a series of sound bites that may give a completely
different message than you intended.

5. Un-escorted Press Personnel:

a. Determine if escort is in the area. Ask for specific name and unit rather
than accepting a general wave "over there."
b. Request person or team to accompany to HQ element location, or call for

349
 superiors to come to own location.
c. Use tact in dealing with press.

6. Press Personnel in Controlled Area:

a. Detain press personnel if in area under direct peacekeeping control
(compound, protected area, buffer zone. etc.).
b. Inform press personnel that they are in a controlled area.
c. Inform press personnel that detention is for security reasons and will
continue until released by higher HQ.
d. Restraint is used in detention if necessary.
e. Confiscate video tape, notes, cameras. Hold and await guidance.
f. Notify higher HQ of all actions taken.

7. Non-accredited Press
a. Advise the press representative to leave the area and provide directions to
the chain of command.
b. If the press representative does not depart, contact HHQ and advise that
the press representative will be removed for his/her safety
c. Keep HHQ informed of all actions taken in dealing with non-accredited or
unescorted media members.

8. Support to the Press:

a. Do not provide transportation unless coordinated and approved from
higher.
b. No escort is required for coverage of convoy escort. Media are not
permitted to become a part of the convoy.
c. Accommodations are not provided with out higher approval.
d. Meals are furnished if paid for and consumed in the course of a
coordinated visit or interview. Escort is required.
e. Use of communications assets is not allowed, without expressed written
approval from higher.
f. Fuel and other provisions are not sold to the media.
g. Honor and satisfy (within capability) queries from media representatives.

350
 ANNEX H --NBC OPERATIONS
1. REFERENCES:

AR 350-42 FM 3-3 FM 3-8 FM 3-100

USURER USAREUR 350-1 FM 3-4 FM 3-15 FM 21-11
USAREUR REG 525-30 FM 3-5 FM 3-21 AE GTA 3-001
USAREUR REG 725-5 FM 3-6 FM 3-50 GTA 3-6-3
NBC ANNEX TO 2/67 Armor Standard Operating Procedures

2. PURPOSE: This SOP standardizes the procedures to be used within B

Company, 2/67 Armor to reduce casualties, damage, and interruption of operations
caused by a Nuclear, Biological or Chemical (NBC) attack; and establishes
policies, procedures and responsibilities for operations in an NBC environment.
Emphasized in these procedures are the principles that surviving an NBC attack is
not enough, we must also win the war.

3. ORGANIZATION FOR NBC DEFENSE:

a. NBC defense and detection of NBC agents are command

responsibilities. The normal chain of command will apply.

b. The company NBC defense control party. The control party will
consist of an NBC Officer, NBC NCO, and an Enlisted Alternate.
This party has the mission of coordinating NBC operations with other
tactical support operations; and serves as the control agency for
receipt, processing and evaluations of contamination data, prediction
of fall out from enemy and friendly nuclear bursts, coordination and
supervision of the conduct of centralized radiological surveys and
dissemination of NBC information.

c. Chemical Detection Teams. The company will organize and train a

minimum of three, two man teams; each will be trained on the M8A1
Chemical Agent Alarm and Chemical Agent Monitor (CAM); as well
as be equipped with the M256 Detection Kit

d. Radiological Monitoring & Survey Teams. A two man team will be

appointed for each AN-VDR-2 authorized. The primary function of
the team is to detect radiological contamination within the unit area.

351
 e. Decontamination Team. The company will organize, train and equip,
as a minimum, one decontamination team consisting of the Alternate
NBC NCO and 14 enlisted personnel to perform limited equipment,
area and personnel decontamination; and assist in support level
decontamination operations. As a minimum there will be two
individuals trained to operate the Radiac set. All will be trained on
the proper use of the M256-A1 Kit.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES:

a. Company Commander:
1) Integration of NBC defense training in unit FTXs and CPXs
IAW USAREUR Reg 350-42.
2) Proficiency of unit in all phases of NBC defense.
3) Designation and control of Mission Oriented Protective
Posture (MOPP) for operations in a chemical environment
consistent with the mission, temperature, and the
anticipated work rate IAW FM 3-4, Chapter 2.
4) Ensure that the appropriate warnings and alarms are
transmitted on the unit command net immediately upon
receipt.
5) Plan and resource training of soldiers on the NBC teams.
6) Execute actions to minimize exposure to radiation, accuracy
of unit radiation exposure records and reports, and evaluation
of individual exposure status for troop safety.
7) Assigning decontamination priority and coordinating for
decontamination.
8) Establishing effective intelligence gathering procedures
covering the reporting of NBC attacks and other NBC
intelligence information to higher and adjacent units.
9) Ensure the timely inspections and calibration of the unit’s
NBC equipment.
10) Establish a workable plan to resupply unit personnel with
overgarments and other NBC equipment.
11) Ensure that the unit SOP is updated with doctrinal changes
as they occur.
12) Ensure that all NBC defense equipment and supplies,
authorized by the TOE/TDA/CTA are on hand or are on
valid requisition and that equipment maintenance is IAW the
appropriate technical manuals, bulletins, etc...

352
 b. The Company NBC Officer:
1) Advising the commander on all NBC related matters and
assisting him in his NBC duties.
2) Establishing and supervising an NBC training program
for individual, leader, and special team soldiers with
guidance from the commander.
3) Ensuring that an effective NBC defense equipment
maintenance program is established to include
administrative areas.
4) Supervise the functions of the NBC related matters and
assisting him in his NBC duties.
5) Stay proficient with NBC technical skills.
6) Ensure company war stock is maintained and that ICE packs
are maintained IAW USAREUR Reg 50-3, 1AD PAM 750-
4.

c. The Company NBC NCO and Alternate:

1) Train and supervise the activities of the NBC survey
Parties.
2) In the event of hostilities, be prepared to:
a) Report the use of NBC in the company sector, in
the proper format.
b) Receive NBC data, prepare the NBC 1 and NBC 4
reports and submit them to higher.
c) Use and evaluate the effective downwind
messages.
d) Receive and plot fallout predictions.
e) Receive and plot NBC contamination reports.
f) Advise commander on all aspects of NBC
operations.
g) Maintain records of the companies radioactive
exposure.
3) Train first line supervisors to provide proper, informed
training to individual soldiers.
4) Train and ensure continued proficiency of operators of
company NBC defense equipment.
5) Assist the Company Supply Sergeant in maintaining status
of shelf-life items and rotate them as required.
6) Ensure the Supply Sergeant and the PLL Clerk requisition
NBC related items. Periodically check the document register to
ensure status is still good on requisitioned supplies.
7) Ensure calibration and wipe testing on NBC equipment is
current.
8) Ensure all contingency NBC equipment is planned for in
unit load plans.

353
 9) Maintain and update NBC related publications.
10) Maintain close coordination with the Battalion Chemical
Officer/NCO. Keep them abreast of NBC related activities.

d. NBC Survey Parties:

1) Recognize nuclear and chemical attacks and fully
understand the procedure for implementing warnings.
2) Perform radiological monitoring, periodic or continuous, to
determine the presence and extent of contamination.
3) Detect and identify, by using chemical detection devices, the
presence of chemical contamination.
4) Monitor personnel, food, water and equipment suspected of
chemical or radiological contamination.

e. Unit Decontamination Team:

1) Perform necessary decontamination of mission essential
weapons, supplies and small areas of terrain.
2) Assist the NBC NCO in the supervision of unit’s MOPP
Gear Exchange.

f. Individual Soldiers:
1) Recognize and react to NBC hazards and understand unit
protective procedures and warning procedures.
2) Maintain individual CTT tasks to proficiency.
3) Maintain individual NBC equipment to standard.
4) Conduct/Continue the mission under NBC conditions.

5. WARNING SYSTEMS FOR NBC ATTACKS:

a. General Alarm - Large Area Warning

1) Radiological fallout warnings and reports of large scale
chemical or biological attacks will be broadcast over organic
nets.
b. Local Alarm
1) Enemy CB attack or radiological fallout hazard warning will
be a rapid continuous beating of any metal object that will
provide a loud noise. This will be followed (after masking) by
a verbal announcement of "GAS", or "FALLOUT". Donning
the protective mask and other protective equipment will be
followed by a visual agitated arm pumping action to warn
personnel within line of sight.
2) The ALL CLEAR for an enemy NBC attack is one long blast

354
 of 10 seconds duration on any vehicle horn followed by the
announcement of "ALL CLEAR". Personnel will remain
masked following a chemical or biological attack until it has
been determined no danger exists and the company
commander gives the "ALL CLEAR". The company
commander will ONLY give "ALL CLEAR" after unmasking
procedures are completed.

6. ACTIONS BEFORE, DURING AND AFTER AN NBC ATTACK:

a. Actions before an attack (Imminent Attack);
1) Make a final check of NBC protective equipment.
2) Disperse and seek maximum cover
3) Once NBC operations have been initiated, mask without order
and give the alarm whenever any of the following are
observed:
a) Artillery concentration
b) Aircraft bombs
c) Aircraft Spray
d) Smoke or mist from an unknown source
4) Go to overpressure if possible.
5) Cover sensitive items with tarp, plastic
b. Actions during an Attack:
1) Continue the mission while taking all protective measures
possible, not in conflict with the accomplishment of the
mission.
2) Mask and utilize protective equipment as much as possible
3) Report location(s) of contaminated areas immediately to
higher headquarters.
c. Actions after an Attack:
1) Continue the mission.
2) Medical evacuation and aid: Soldiers will be administered
first aid and self-aid. The BN Aid Station will provide treatment
of casualties. Before casualties are sent to the BAS they will be
first decontaminated by unit personnel.
3) Begin M-256 kit checks
3) Decontaminate as necessary.
4) Accomplish resupply of protective material.
5) Submit status of personnel and equipment to higher.
6) Insure contaminated areas are marked and reported.

355
 7) Collect and evaluate all data on the attack and submit NBC
reports as needed.
7. NBC DEFENSIVE POSTURE:
a. The company will take all measures necessary for protection against
NBC hazards which are consistent with the assigned mission and the
tactical situation. Mission accomplishment will be given first priority.
b. Each soldier will be issued two chemical protective overgarments for
training. Each soldier will also have two war stock suits; one is kept on
the tank and the other in the field trains with the unit supply sergeant.
c. Mission Oriented Protective Posture Levels:

MOPP OVERGARMENT BOOTS MASK GLOVES

LEVEL
1 WORN CARRIED CARRIED CARRIED
2 WORN WORN CARRIED CARRIED
3 WORN WORN WORN CARRIED
4 WORN WORN WORN WORN

8. DECONTAMINATION: Chemical, biological and radiological contamination

causes casualties and restricts the effective use of personnel, equipment, terrain
and structures. Decontamination operations are conducted to reduce or eliminate
these hazards and permit units to continue their mission. Decontamination is a
continuous process that starts with the individual soldier immediately after the
attack and proceeds through complete decontamination conducted by specialized
decontamination units.
a. Emergency decontamination will be performed by soldiers immediately
following the attack in order to survive on the battlefield. Emergency
decontamination procedures include the use of the M258A1 kit, the
M291, water or any other expedient means to remove gross
contaminates from individual clothing, equipment, weapons and combat
vehicles. The M11 Decon apparatus will be used by the company as the
expedient method for equipment. In the event that decontamination
cannot be accomplished, a warning consisting of type and location of
contamination will accompany any evacuated equipment.
b. Requests for supported decontamination will be sent to battalion for
passage to the supporting chemical company.
c. The company NBC NCO and officer will be the primary representatives

356
 to the decontaminating unit. Once coordination has been made, they
will brief the company prior to arriving at the Decon site.
d. A representative of the chemical company will outline preparatory
actions and support requirements for any decontamination operations.
The company will provide its own decontamination team to assist in the
operation. Support personnel may be required to:
- Prepare the vehicle washdown area and MOPP Gear exchange
area
- Wash vehicles
- Apply DS-2 to vehicles and equipment
- Assist in vehicle rinse
- Supervise MOPP Gear exchange
- Load/Transport decontaminated equipment to clear site
- Give assistance as needed during wipedown phase of troop
decon
- Control traffic and provide security at DECON site
- Provide labor for cleanup of site
- Provide logistical support to the chemical company.

e. During decontamination operations the unit will have medical personnel

available at the decon site to treat casualties. Supply personnel will
issue replacement stocks of protective equipment and provide the
company’s basic load of standard decontaminates.

357
 DETAILED TROOP DECON

EQUIPMENT PATH

SUMP
TH
PA
T CONTAMINATION CONTROL LINE
EN
PM SUMP
UI 7
EQ 3 4
OVERBOOTS AND MASK
OVERGARMENT DECON
REMOVAL GOVES REMOVAL POINT
1
INDIVIDUAL 2
GEAR DECON OVERBOOT
AND HOOD
DECON
5 6
MONITOR MASK
LIQUID
RMOVAL 8
CONTAMINATION
WIN CONTROL POINT
REISSUE
DD POINT
IRE
CTI
ON VAPOR
CONTAMINATION
CONTROL LINE

9. LOGISTICS: Emergency requisitions for replacements of NBC supplies and

equipment will be forwarded through normal supply channels by the most
expedient means available.
10. UPLOAD PLAN: The below listed equipment will be carried in the following
locations to best facilitate the identification of an NBC hazard or attack.

Line Platoons: 10 ea. M256-A1 Detection Kits (minimum)

1 ea. AN/VDR-2
1 ea. M8A1 Chemical Alarm
1 ea. PP-1578
1 ea. NBC Marking Kit
8 ea. M-11 Decon Bottles

NBC NCO: 1 ea. Chemical Agent Alarm

1 ea. Chemical Agent Monitor (CAM)
1 ea. AN/VDR-2
1 ea. AN/PDR-75 (backpack)

358
 10 ea. M256 Detection Kits
1 ea. M-13 Decon Apparatus
Emergency resupply of MOPP Gear and filters
Resupply of NAAK injectors

Supply Sergeant: Emergency resupply of MOPP Gear

Filters
M-13 Decon Apparatus

359
 ANNEX I --OPERATIONS UNDER
UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
The Company is required to be able to operate on all types of terrain in all
conditions. This annex will cover some basic considerations used when conducting
tactical operations in the following conditions:
Urban Operations
Operations in Heavy Forests
Mountain and Cold Weather operations
All of these conditions require special techniques for the successful employment of
the Company. The techniques listed are not a replacement for standard Company
SOPs, but a supplement. Although this Annex is more similar to a guide than an
SOP, the basic rules for these operations will form the basis for Company
operations in these conditions.

APPENDIX 1. URBAN OPERATIONS

Much of central Europe is composed of urban or built up areas. The Company must
be prepared to deal with urban area during both offensive and defensive type
operations. By their nature urban areas are not favorable to tank operations due to
their severe restrictions on mobility and fields of fire. Avoiding these areas in the
offense is usually the best policy, and they can only be attacked or defended with
large numbers of infantry.

OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS IN BUILT UP AREAS

1. General: It is usually best to avoid built up areas with mounted forces during
offensive operations. If possible the Company will avoid built up areas, and will
bypass them to a flank. The cover and concealment offered by the buildings allows
even the single dismounted infantryman to be a threat to the tank. Restrictions of
fields of fire, and limited mobility take away two of the tanks great strengths. If the
Company is given the mission to attack and clear a built up area, it must use its
remaining strengths, namely superior firepower, and survivability. Infantry is the
primary attack force, with tanks and engineers supporting in the supporting fire
and mobility roles. If the built up area is lightly built (wooden) and consists of only
a small number of buildings, the best method is to shoot the buildings onto fire,
then machine gun the defenders as they escape. Built up areas of stone or concrete
buildings require more sophisticated methods. These will be covered in this
APPENDIX. The fundamental concept of offensive operations in built up areas is
that the area is never clear. Even after having been seized, the secured area must

360
be constantly patrolled to ensure it remains clear and to prevent the enemy from
infiltrating in behind and cutting you off. Urban warfare is a constant multi-front
battle. It is essential that the flanks are secured by adjacent units, platoons, or
squads. Remember that success in one sector, and failure in another allow the
enemy to cut off the successful force, isolate it, and destroy it in detail.

2. Employment of weapons systems.

A. Tanks: Tanks are most effective for heavy fire against buildings. The
standard round used is the HEAT round. Crews will remember that the minimum
arming range for HEAT is 35 meters. A tank cannon poked through a window and
fired will usually achieve the desired effect through muzzle blast alone regardless
of whether or not the round explodes. Tanks are typically used as overwatch
elements during the initial assault to gain a foothold in a town. Other missions
include reducing strongpoints with fire, smashing or destroying obstacles and
barricades, establishing roadblocks, and destroying enemy armored vehicles. Once
the infantry has gotten into the town tanks move in pairs behind them to provide
overwatch. If possible tanks move inside of buildings or behind walls for additional
concealment. The limited elevation of the main gun (20 degrees) creates significant
problems in engaging targets on the upper stories of buildings. The limited
depression also creates a 35 foot circle of deadspace around the tank. Fire over the
back deck at low targets is not possible due to the back deck clearance switch. Cal
.50 will penetrate most buildings. This weapon is very effective in recon by fire
due to it’s power and precise aiming capability on the M1A1 mount.
B. Bradleys. BFVs are employed as much as possible in support of
dismounted troops. 60 degree max elevation of the chain gun and coax allow firing
into the upper floors of buildings. Primary round used is Sabot, due to HE inability
to penetrate masonry. HE can be fired through windows, and is very effective if it
explodes inside. M-2s move in pairs behind dismounted infantry, and provides
close supporting fire. Additional M-2 missions include destroying enemy positions
with 25mm fire, suppressing with 25 mm, and 7.62, breaching walls with spiral
firing patterns, resupplying ammo and demo to the dismount, acting as armored
ambulance, and establishing roadblocks. Vehicles remain close to sides of street,
oriented on opposite side to provide additional protection to side, and increase field
of fire on opposite street side. M-2s must always move with close dismounted
support, and tank overwatch if possible as they are vulnerable to light AT weapons.
C. Dismounted Infantry. Dismounts are the main combat and maneuver
element in urban combat. They are responsible for clearing routes, and providing
local security for armored vehicles. Dismounts locate targets, and guide tanks and
M-2s into firing positions. Infantry must remain well clear of the tanks while
moving with them, as they draw large amounts of fire. Fragments and ricochets off
of tanks are generally the prime cause of infantry casualties. Dismounts must also
stand clear of the 60 degree frontal arc in front of the main gun. Discarding sabot
petals, vehicle smoke grenades, or close proximity to muzzle blast can be deadly.
Dismounted infantry must maintain constant communications with the tanks to
avoid fratricide and allow firing in support of clearing multi-level buildings.
D. Engineers. Engineers are critical to the success of the Company in

361
MOUT operations. Normally they will be organized into small (3-4 man) breach
and search teams. These will often be teamed up with squads of dismounts.
Engineer missions include clearing obstacles, breaching walls, destroying bunkers,
demolitions, maintaining and clearing routes, and emplacing obstacles and
barriers. Engineers may also have CEVs, which are useful for fighting in towns due
to it’s 165mm demolition gun, crane, and dozer blade.
E. TOW/Dragon/AT-4: The primary anti tank weapon used in built up
areas is the AT-4 due to its small size, weight, and portability. Firing against the
thin roof and side armor of armored vehicles is possible in an urban combat
scenario, and these weapons can be very effective. Their effect as an anti personnel
weapon is more limited. Bigger ATGMs are difficult to employ in built up areas,
mainly due to their arming ranges. Because of this they are normally used on the
outskirts in an overwatch role. If they can be used inside an urban area they are
ideal for destroying bunkers and strongpoints.
F. Artillery: Arty use must be deliberately considered before use in an
urban area. Only high angle fire is possible due to the masking effect of buildings.
Artillery is difficult to adjust in built up areas, and is ineffective against targets on
the middle floors of buildings. The fires will create large amounts of rubble, and
this will impact on mobility. Point detonating shells tend to throw large quantities
of rubble into the streets, and cause many casualties. Mortars are the main indirect
fire weapon due to responsiveness and high angle fire.
G. Smoke: Smoke should be used on the outskirts of urban areas to help
the infantry reach the built up area successfully. Once the infantry is inside the
built up area it’s use needs to be carefully considered. It allows movement in the
face of enemy opposition, but also allows the enemy to reposition unobserved.

3. Vehicle movement techniques. Tanks and Bradleys move cautiously in built

up areas. No movement should even be attempted without infantry support. A small
number of dismounts will always remain with the tanks to provide local security. It
is critical for the infantry to maintain security of the tanks. If the infantry is
suppressed, even for a short time, the tanks become very vulnerable. There are four
basic varieties of movement with armored vehicles in while moving through an
uncleared urban environment:

High Intensity / High Speed: The Infantry mounts on the tanks and the
force moves rapidly forward. Suspected enemy positions are engaged
with fire. This is for moving quickly through areas that possibly have
enemy forces, or through lightly defended areas. It may also be used if
the force is surprised/ ambushed and needs to move quickly.
High Intensity / Low Speed: The dismounts clear forward of the tanks,
and bring them forward as the situation allows. Recon by fire is used on
suspected enemy positions. This technique is used when enemy contact is
likely, or has already been made. It is the most secure method, as well as
the most time consuming.
Low Intensity / Low Speed: In this method the infantry dismounts
recon/clear the route, while the tanks provide support by overwatch.

362
 Recon by fire is normally not used unless necessary. The tanks orient
their weapons on possible enemy hiding places. This method is normally
used when the situation is uncertain.
Low Intensity / High Speed: The infantry moves mounted and weapons
are oriented on possible enemy position, but recon by fire is not usually
done. This method is used when passing through an area that is thought
to be clear of enemy forces. It is the fastest, and least secure method of
movement.

Most movement in urban environments will be of the High/Low Intensity / Low

Speed variety due to the security it offers. During these movements the infantry
moves forward to recon and clear the route the tank is moving along. The infantry
locates enemy positions, as well as finds firing positions for the tanks. The tank is
called forward to support the infantry as necessary, occupying positions and firing
on targets as designated by the dismounts. Crews may install a TA-1, and hang it
off of a taillight for use by dismounts, but the primary means of communication is
by hand and arm signals. The following hand and arm signals need to be
understood by both tank crews and dismounts:
- Attention
- Enemy in Sight
- What kind of target (tank, infantry, bunker, obstacle)
- Move up
- Cover my move
- Open Fire/Cease Fire
Tanks move in pairs along streets, generally by bounds. One tank moves on each
side of the road, orienting main gun across the road in front of their wingman.
When negotiating corners tanks need to use the ‘Blind Corner Drill’. Tanks will
usually move buttoned up, but the loader may be exposed to provide all around
observation. If the loader is up in the hatch he should be wearing full Kevlar
helmet and vest, with sandbags around his hatch, and headphones under the
helmet. Buildings provide excellent firing positions for tanks. Close combat teams
must first recon and clear the building prior to the tank moving in, then provide all
round security to prevent enemy infiltration. When pulling tank into house attempt
to enter from a rear wall to provide a path of escape if necessary. Ensure main gun
does not push through wall (and out of battery), and check to be sure that the floor
will support the tank. The tank can be used to rubble buildings by running into
them, but be careful not to damage the compensating idler wheels or track. The
turret may become covered with rubble from walls and ceilings. The blast and
shock of firing main gun from within buildings may collapse the building on top of
the tank. Be careful of the externally mounted machine guns as they may also be
damaged by falling masonry. The suspension requires particular attention during
maintenance checks after operating in rubble filled streets.

363
 Signals will be used by the dismounts to designate buildings that
need to be cleared, as well as a signal to designate cleared buildings and
areas. This will usually be red and green flares, Red idicating initiate
supporting fires on designated building, green meaning that the building is
clear. The following are examples of vehicular movement tecniques in

SUPPORT INFANTRY
ATTACK IN BUILT UP AREA

1. INFANTRY SQUADS MOVE FORWARD OF TANKS

AND CLEAR BUILDINGS (ALL FLOORS)

2. TANK SECTION MOVES FORWARD UNDER

GUIDANCE FROM DISMOUNTS

3. SECOND SECTION OVERWATCHES FROM

FARTHER BACK

4. DISMOUNT SQUAD SECURES FLANKS, REAR OF

OVERWATCHING TANKS

built up areas.

364
 MOVEMENT THROUGH A BUILT UP AREA
1 - BYPASS IF POSSIBLE, IF AREA MUST BE TRAVELLED EXECUTE LIKE
DEFILE DRILL. ATTEMPT TO MOVE THROUGH WITH INFANTRY.
2 - OBSERVE FROM DISTANCE, RECON IF POSSIBLE
3 - CLOSE HATCHES, TC TO OPEN PROTECTIVE
4 - MOVE TANKS DOWN ROAD IN STAGERRED COLUMN, GUNNERS SCAN
OPPOSITE SIDE OF STREET, TC SCANS ABOVE GROUND FLOOR
4 - AT CROSSROAD ENSURE DISMOUNTED INFANTRYMAN OR TC
CHECKS AROUND CORNER, MOVE TANK ACROSS QUICKLY
5 - IMMEDIATELY BYPASS KNOCKED OUT TANKS
7 - CRASH THROUGH HOUSES IF NECESSARY, REMEMBER ABOUT
BASEMENTS
8 - USE BLIND CORNER, DEFILE, AND RECON BY FIRE DRILLS

365
 BLIND CURVE DRILL

5
4
1
3

6
1 - LEAD TANK REPORTS “BLIND CORNER”
2 - PLATOON LEADER ORDERS ”BLIND CORNER DRILL”
3 - LEAD TANK MOVES TO EDGE OF CORNER WITHOUT EXPOSING TANK,
WINGMAN PULLS UP ALONGSIDE.
3 - TC OF LEAD TANK DISMOUNTS, RECONS ON FOOT AROUND CORNER
5 - IF GROUND APPEARS CLEAR BOTH TANKS ROUND CORNER AT SAME
TIME. INSIDE TANK GOES JUST FAR ENOUGH TO FIRE AROND CORNER AND
COVER OUTSIDE TANK AS IT MOVES TO FIRST SUITABLE FIRING POSITION.
6 - REAR TANKS MOVE INTO POSITIONS VACATED BY FRONT TANKS

4. Weapons engagement techniques. Tanks should move with dog house doors
closed, and use the GAS or open the GPS only to engage. Thermal may optionally
be used to scan, as it can detect people hiding in shadows. Main gun is limited in
elevation and depression, and has to be fired from a standoff distance to have a
good field of fire. The 50 cal can cover targets in the upper floors of buildings. The
machine guns are also used for recon by fire, with the main gun reserved for use
against positively identified targets. The main round used is HEAT. The HEAT will
not arm until 35m past the muzzle. When fired against concrete the spalling effect
is deadly to troops on the far side. Heat rounds can also blow entrance holes in
buildings, but will not cut rebars in reinforced concrete. HEAT is most effective
when it is fired through an opening to explode inside the building. This has a better
chance of causing the building to collapse if that is the desired effect. The main
gun can be used against very close targets by putting the muzzle inside a building
or bunker and firing. The HEAT round will not explode, but the muzzle blast will
have the same effect. Avoid firing the cannon from inside a building firing position
as this will have the same effect, and can bring the building down on top of the
tank. Firing the main gun will create a large amount of obscuration that may last a
long time. Crews should keep small arms handy inside the turret, as well as some
fragmentation grenades for local defense. The tank can use the on board smoke
grenades against nearby infantry as an incendiary weapon, and may be required to
fire up wingmen tanks that have enemy infantry climbing aboard by using the coax.

366
The tanks need to be in close communication with the supporting infantry and
engineers prior to firing on buildings. Ensure that friendly dismounts are clear
prior to firing as the building may collapse.
5. Combat Service Support. Urban combat is resource intensive, especially
regarding ammo. Prepare for unusually high use of machine guns, HEAT, AT-4, and
demo. Resupply is difficult during fighting. Additional small arms and demo must
be carried by accompanying vehicles. Tanks must replace each other and pull back
periodically for resupply of main gun ammo when necessary. The 1SG will handle
the logistic requirements during the tactical operations, and may establish a small
supply center inside a secured portion of the built up area, or somewhere outside of
it. Due to the high casualty rate that accompanies an urban attack, several casualty
collection points will be established in secured areas. Evacuation to these points
will normally be by armored vehicle (M-2, M1A1). A central point will be
designated as the primary collection point. Platoons, if possible, evacuate
casualties internally to these points, or provide security to the medic performing
the evac. Remember that an urban area is never completely secure.
6. Command and Control. The Company will normally be attached to a larger
infantry force as a support element during offensive operations in urban
environments. Regardless, the nature of urban fighting is a series of highly
decentralized actions. During offensive movements the tanks move under the
guidance of the infantry.

Defense of an Urban Area

1. Purpose: Urban areas often form strongpoints in the defense when

conducting retrograde operations against a superior enemy due to the lines of
communication running through them. The built up area acts as a combat
multiplier for the defense, acting as the knots that tie the elastic net of the defense
together.
2. Enemy Attack Techniques: During an attack the enemy will normally
attempt to seize these areas with light recon forces if possible. If this effort fails
they must resort to a deliberate attack. Remember that the enemy will only be able
to concentrate a limited ammount of his combat power along the restricted
frontages of the urban area. He will normally attack along multiple axes as he
fights through the urban area. Soviet style armies conduct deliberate attacks on
built up areas with combined arms assault groups. These consist of an MRC with
an attached tank platoon. This force will normally be committed along a single axis
(Road), but will be supported by similar attacks occurring simultaneously along
neighboring avenues of approach. The end result is a number of MRC sized attacks
(all along a single axis) across a wide frontage. This means that American forces
must protect themselves against the heavy fire support of the enemy tanks, as well
as being prepared to defend against numerous armored targets.
3. Where to Defend: There are two ways that a village or small town can be
defended from: outside of the village, or within the village itself. The village will
be defended to defeat the enemy outside of the built up area when the surrounding
terrain is armor restrictive, reinforced with obstacles, or the village is being used

367
as a strongpoint to defend an open armor avenue of approach. This is possible in
areas such as Germany where the terrain has a large number of small villages
surrounded with open fields and patches of woods. Tanks (with a small infantry
security force) occupy the towns and establishes a series of engagement areas on
the terrain surroundsing the town (out to the woodlines). Dismounted infantry
occupy the woods and establish a series of roadblocks and anti-armor ambushes.
The enemy has the option of moving around the town and being fired on by the
tanks inside, or moving through the woods and dealing with the infantry. This
method is normally suitable for a tank heavy force, and is similar to the defense of
a strongpoint. The village or town is defended from within if the surrounding
terrain is armor favorable, or if the enemy will have to take the town to continue
his advance. In this case the FEBA is planned through the center of the town as the
built up area forms a natural anti-tank barrier. This is the normal method of
defense for an infantry heavy organization. Large built up areas are usually be
defended from within. This is the type of defense that will be covered below.
4. Planning the Defense: The defense of an urban area is simple in concept.
Make the enemy pay for every inch of ground. Draw him in, weaken him, let him
expose his flanks, cut him off , and then destroy him. Often the urban defense can
be executed similar to a Company Trap Drill. Since the enemy will be advancing
on several non supporting axes, block him on some routes, let him come on others.
Once he has gotten one of his attacking forces into an engagement area block its
forward movement, cut it off from behind, and then destroy it after it has been
isolated.
Fighting in the urban areas is best done with infantry armed with AT
weapons. Tanks form a mobile reserve. Tank fighting positions must be sited in
depth in the town, behind the forward positions of the infantry, and on the flanks of
a likely enemy avenue of approach. Be careful not to dissipate the forces too much.
The security troops on the periphery are the shield, the reserve is the sword. All
tactical planning should be based on decentralized execution. This applies for
displacement and counterattacking. Timed displacement must be rehearsed, as well
as planned and practiced routes through the streets for the reserve/reaction force.
Prior to issuing the OPORD the Company leadership will perform a
recon of the village. During the recon, sites for the following will be evaluated:
Company CP location, chokepoints, and sites for AT ambushes, buildings to use as
strongpoints, and assembly areas to use for reserves. This recon forms the basis for
the operational plan. Units are assigned sectors in the village. It is important never
to use roads, dead space, or open areas as a boundary between units. Regardless of
where the main battle is anticipated to take place the defense is planned in two
phases: the fight outside the village, and the fight inside the village. The focus of
the plan will be on the area that offers the greatest prospect of success. NOTE: If
the village is to be occupied at night, restrict the amount defended that night to a
360 degree security zone around the actual area the Company occupies. Wait until
morning to conduct a terrain recon before establishing a defense of the entire
village.

368
 DEFENSE OF A BUILT UP AREA
APPROACHING ENEMY

BLOCKING
FORCE

CUT OFF
PENETRATION

DESTROY ISOLATED
ENEMY

RESERVE RESERVE

• ISOLATION OF THE ATTACKING FORCE IS THE PRIMARY

GOAL OF DEFENSE
• USE COMBAT MULTIPLIERS TO FRAGMENT AND
SEPARATE HIS ATTACKS
•BLOCK SOME ATTACKS,.CUT OFF, ISOLATE, AND
DESTROY OTHERS
• KILL ENEMY LIKE A SNAKE. CUT IT’S HEAD OFF AND IT
WILL DIE

369
 5. Weapons Siting: Ensure that the defense can orient in all directions, but
emphasize the main avenue of approach. Normally infantry will form the backbone
of the defense, executing a series of anti armor ambushes, with tanks forming a
mobile reserve. Ensure that all defensive positions are concealed from view. All
ATGMs must have a clear backblast area, as well as all round sandbag protection
to cover both the inside and the outside fight. All dismounted infantry positions
should be loccated away from windows, doors, holes, etc., but must still have
effective fields of fire. Numerous positions are normally prepared for each weapon
to allow for multiple engagement options, and mobile fighting. If possible the
routes between positions should be covered and concealed. The Company will
maintain this reserve to deal with enemy penetrations. This reserve must be
maintained out of contact, and as soon as it is committed a new reserve must be
formed.
-Tanks: Link with observers in towers. Use for mobile ambushes from
hasty firing positions, or defending strongpoints from prepared
positions. Need to maintain small infantry force for local security. A
small force will be kept as a reserve. Those defending strongpoints will
be positioned to provide keyhole shots, as well as have a path of retreat.
Remember that concrete walls will stop HEAT, but not SABOT. Chain
link fence is usually effective against ATGMs.
- Infantry Hunter Killer Teams: Dismounts with AT-4s, mines, and small
arms. These will do the majority of the fighting.
-Machine guns: Place to cover streets, hills, gardens with flanking fire.
Most will be on FEBA, some in depth.
- ATGMs: use to destroy vehicles blocked and fixed by mines and
barricades.
6. Security: Employ only what is necessary. Good observation posts forward,
and security forces close in are usually enough. Security must be 360 degrees, with
overlapping coverage. There must be vehicle barriers on all roads and trails leading
into the village, and these must be located outside of the perimeter to stop vehicles
before they enter the town. Security forces must be able to rapidly man their
designated positions once the alarm is given. This allows the forces in the village
to maintain a much lower state of alert, and reduces the chances of being surprised.
7. Tank Ambush: A mobile reserve of tanks is kept centrally, with numerous
pre-reconned firing positions with 500-700 meter shots. An observer detects enemy
armor moving into the sector, and calls forward the ambush tank to a specified
firing position. Once the enemy force comes into sight the tank ambushes it, then
displaces.
8. Obstacle Use: Everything possible should be used to build obstacles. This
includes: mines, rubbled buildings, wire obstacles, barricades, and foo gas.
Obstacles are placed both on the approaches to the village, and inside the built up
area. The outlying obstacles are used to aid in the security of the village to stop
enemy recon or mounted troops from rapidly moving into the cover of the built up
area. Obstacles inside the town are of a more tactical nature, and are usually used
to block the movement of enemy heavy weapons, or to hold him in place for an AT
ambush. The obstacles used inside of the town need to be placed in depth to make

370
the area into a meat grinder for the attacking enemy. All use of explosive type
obstacles or booby traps must be precisely recorded to aid in removing the weapons
after the fighting, or in the event of a relief in place.
9. Command and Control: Fighting in urban areas is a highly decentralized
affair, with groups of tanks and infantry in action simultaneously at different
locations. The critical C2 asset is reliable communications, so make plans for
redundant communications. If this fails a coherent defense is no longer possible,
and the fight will degenerate into a series of small, non-supporting individual
battles. A Company CP is sometimes created, especially when there is substantial
infantry support. This is normally located in a central location, has 360 degree
observation, and is mostly or completely underground. Other points that should be
planned include a straggler collection point, and alternate CPs.
10. Combat Service Support: Remember that fighting in built up areas is a
resource intensive activity. Ammunition in particular is used quickly. Plan for
higher than normal use of HEAT, AT-4, Dragon, Grenade, and small arms use.
Other necessary equipment includes ladders, grappling hooks, sandbags, flame
weapons, and extra engineering tools. Supply caches are typically used during an
urban defense as external resupply of a small village or town is normally
impossible due to enemy activities in the area. Remember to plan for a water
source, both for drinking, as well as for fire fighting. If the underground pipes
remain intact the civilian water system may still be operational. Be prepared to
make use of local resources such as civilian gas stations (if a centrifugal pump is
available), construction equipment, and food. Ammunition, medical supplies, and
spare parts must be pre-stocked. This means both on hand, and stored at the
location where they will be needed. Medical evacuation may become impossible
for the same reason as resupply, so a well stocked and protected aid station may be
set up. Evacuation will normally be by armored ambulance or Bradley. Cases of
extreme urgency may require air MEDEVAC.

371
 APPENDIX 2. COMBAT IN FORESTS
A. General: During combat in any European area the need to fight in forests
exists. Fighting in forests is similar to that in cities in that it is characterized by
highly decentralized actions, and it robs the tank of two of it’s strengths: mobility,
and standoff firepower. The tank is generally used as a support weapon in wooded
areas, and the dismounted infantryman forms the main effort. It will not be
uncommon for 1-2 tanks to form the Company main effort as that is the maximum
concentration that can be achieved. Although tanks should not operate in woods
without infantry support, it will often be necessary. To do this successfully a
significant amount of planning and preparation is required.

B. Movement through Forests. Movement through forests is a risky undertaking,

but is often used as an attempt to move along a covered or concealed route around
enemy positions, to infiltrate, or to bypass an obstacle. Due to the Company being
able to advance on a one or two tank front only, several routes may be used to
speed the movement, and prevent the entire force from being bottled up by one
knocked out tank. It is critical to provide continuous all round security during
movements in forests. The TC and loader must be up scanning, and must be ready
with the onboard machine guns. During halts the accompanying infantry must
dismount and move to the flanks to provide local security against enemy
dismounts. Prior to movement extensive planning must be accomplished at all
levels. NAVPLANs similar to those used during night movement are drawn up to
aid in the maneuver and fire distribution during the operation. These should be
done down to the TC level, and force each crew to plan in detail how it intends to
move and stay alive. These plans typically cover the following situations:
- Defiles
Who clears
Battlesight and Battlecarry changes
Orientation of main and secondary weapons, Where it changes
Use of infantry to clear
- Clearings / open areas
Who overwatches, Who moves
Orientation of main and secondary weapons
Fire control and distribution (of stationary AND bounding force)
Battlesight and Battlecarry changes
Recon by fire plan
Plan for far side
- Blind Corners
Plan to go around
Who covers who
Dismount points

372
 SAMPLE PLATOON NAVPLAN
Far side of wooded area: A
Large Clearing: First section section sets, B section
sets, establishes overwatch, bounds. Battlecarry Sabot,
recons by fire (MGs)along reset batlesight ranges
woodline. Second section
bounds along right edge, Far side of Large Clearing: Lead
orients turrets front, left, section sets far side, far section
loaders cover right/rear. Reset boundsand begins defile drill.
Battlesight COAX at 400m. Reset COAX battlesight (200M)

Small Clearing: First section

sets, establishes overwatch,
secondsection bounds along
left edge, orients turrets front,
right, loaders cover left/rear.
Reset Battlesight COAX at
Blind Turn 400m.
Drill Far Side: Lead section sets,
trail section boundsand
begins defile drill. Reset
COAX battlesight (200M)

Enter woods, set battle sights

(HEAT-500m, COAX-200).
Begin defile drills (mounted).
Loaders up orienting left/rear,
TCs orient front/right with MGs

A NAVPLAN would be written up for each vehicle. At the TC level the plan would
be similar to this here, with specific details on how the individual vehicle fits into
the plan. Those for the Platoon leaders are similar to the example here. The plan
for the CO and XO would cover movement on a company scale, and would include
the integration of combat support assets such as engineers, ADA, and artillery.
Tanks can move to a limited extent off of trails, but this is normally not feasible.

373
Movement Drills: Movement drills are similar to those used in urban
environments. Specific movement drills that the crews need to be familiar with
prior to entering the wooded area include: Defile Drills, Defile Breaching Drills,
and Blind Corner Drills.

PLATOON DEFILE DRILL

- USED TO MOVE THROUGH DEFILES OR NARROW AREAS
- LEAD ELEMENTS SET ENTRANCE OF DEFILE AS OVERWATCH
- OVERWATCH ORIENTS OPPOSITE SIDES OF DEFILE
- TRAIL ELEMENT MOVES THROUGH ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF
DEFILE, COVER EACH OTHERS MOVEMENT
- MOVING ELEMENT STOPS WHEN OVERWATCH CAN NO
LONGER COVER, TAKES UP OVERWATCH
-TRAIL ELEMENT BOUNDS FORWARD AND BECOMES MOVING
ELEMENT, OR TAKES UP OVERWATCH FARTHER FORWARD,
MOVEMENT CONTINUES
- LEAD TANKS SET AT FAR SIDE OF DEFILE, ESTABLISHES
OVERWATCH. TRAIL TANKS MOVE, BOUNDS THROUGH
OVERWATCH, CONTINUES MOVEMENT OUT INTO OPEN
GROUND.

374
 BLIND CURVE DRILL

5
4
1
3

6
1 - LEAD TANK REPORTS “BLIND CORNER”
2 - PLATOON LEADER ORDERS ”BLIND CORNER DRILL”
3 - LEAD TANK MOVES TO EDGE OF CORNER WITHOUT EXPOSING TANK,
WINGMAN PULLS UP ALONGSIDE.
3 - TC OF LEAD TANK DISMOUNTS, RECONS ON FOOT AROUND CORNER
5 - IF GROUND APPEARS CLEAR BOTH TANKS ROUND CORNER AT SAME
TIME. INSIDE TANK GOES JUST FAR ENOUGH TO FIRE AROND CORNER AND
COVER OUTSIDE TANK AS IT MOVES TO FIRST SUITABLE FIRING POSITION.
6 - REAR TANKS MOVE INTO POSITIONS VACATED BY FRONT TANKS

C. Attacks in Forests. Infantry is the guiding hand of the tank in the forest. Tanks
and infantry must team up much like in urban combat. The infantry moves forward
and locates enemy positions, obstacles, and ambushes. The tanks are then called
forward to deal with these targets. The infantry also provides local security to
prevent enemy dismounts from attacking the tanks from the flank or rear. During
assaults of enemy positions the tanks may lead the dismounted infantry during the
final assault phase. This allows the tanks to destroy the position, while not having
to worry about running over friendly dismounts, or injuring them by gunfire. When
over running an enemy position the tracks are normally the main weapon. Enemy
bunkers can be demolished by driving (and neutral steering if necessary) over
them. Those that cannot be crushed are destroyed by main gun fire. If the arming

375
range is not sufficient merely stick the main gun inside and fire, this will demolish
the bunker. If enemy attempt to flee they can be run down by the tanks, or fired up
by the accompanying infantry force. If a dismount tries to board a tank the crew
must get him off immediately, or drop down and have another tank ‘scratch his
back’ by hosing the tank down with coax. For this reason most assaults are done
with the tank buttoned up/open protective. Once it is obvious that enemy resistance
has been crushed the infantry can move in and secure the site. The tanks would
normally pull out to resupply or form a mobile reserve. If tanks attack through the
woods without infantry support wingmen must constantly overwatch each other.
Recon by fire, and using artillery to drive away dismounts will result in a
hazardous environment for the crews.

D. Defending in Forests. Defense in the actual forest is not normally attempted

with an armored force as mobility and stand off firepower are sacrificed. Defense
in a forested area, with a patchwork of woods and towns, is characterized by the
tanks holding fortified and mutually supporting towns, covering the open areas
with fires, and the infantry manning a series of obstacles and roadblocks on every
trail in the woods that bypass the towns. The enemy will be forced into the woods
by the overwatching tanks. Then, finding the forests impassable, the enemy is
forced back into the open areas, where they are engaged by the tanks in the towns.
If the tanks are to be used in the woods they are used with infantry support to
create anti armor ambushes along critical routes. This is normally accomplished by
the tank knocking out the lead vehicle of an enemy column, with dismounts
springing a simultaneous trap on the rear vehicle in the enemy column, then
methodically destroying the trapped vehicles. Defense of open areas from
woodlines is not usually done as these positions are obvious, easy to mass fires
against, and usually attract large amounts of firepower prior to the enemy
moving within range.

E. Combat Support: During combat in forests engineers assume a vital role.

During the defense their obstacle emplacement ability can rapidly turn the woods
into an impenetrable labyrinth of obstacles, barriers, and booby traps. Engineer
effort is focused mainly on counter mobility, followed by mobility assistance to
increase the routes and positions available to the tanks. During offensive
operations engineer effort is focused on mobility, and allowing the company to
rapidly move through the area. When moving into the woods mobility assets need
to be kept almost at the front to allow them to rapidly get to the site of a barrier.
Traffic jams may prevent the movement of vehicles up the convoy during
movements in forests so the decision as to where to place them must be decided on
prior to entering the woods. Artillery is more limited in its use in wooded areas. It
is very difficult to adjust fire, and almost all missions will be danger close. The
critical ability of artillery in fighting in forests is to keep enemy dismounts away
from the tanks. If necessary tanks may call fires right in on top of themselves to
keep the enemy away, usually with little effect on the tanks. Because of the precise
nature of fire support missions in the woods mortars are often used, as they can be
adjusted closer. When firing artillery in the woods the main shell-fuse combination

376
is HE-SuperQuick. This allows the shells to burst in the treetops, increasing its
effect on dismounts. VT (proximity) is not suitable as the fuse triggers above the
tree tops and is largely ineffective. DPICM is not suitable either as most bomblets
will detonate before reaching their intended target. ADA is normally not critical in
forests, as it usually will not be able to engage.

F. Combat Service Support: CSS in forests is strictly limited during combat

operations due to the extreme restrictions in mobility. During forward movement
casualties and maintenance problems must be handled by the crews until the trains
can catch up. During rearward movement recovery and medical issues must be also
handled by the crews and their wingmen. It will often be impossible to move
medics or mechanics forward to get to where they are needed. Resupply may
become an issue for certain tanks, especially those operating at the front of the
moving element. If these vehicles run low on ammunition they will have to be
replaced or cross leveled from nearby vehicles. Use of machine gun ammo is
especially high during these operations.

G. Command and Control: C2 during operations in forests is largely

decentralized. It is critical to have a clear commanders intent, and for all crews to
understand what the purpose of the operation is. The key leaders in these types of
operations are the TCs and section leaders. The main function of the CO is traffic
control, and the synchronization of various Combat Support and Combat service
Support assets. Although the execution is largely decentralized all elements must
have synchronized their planning, especially if movement is to occur on more than
axis.
.
H. Fire distribution: During movement in forests fire distribution must be
planned. Tanks must have their main weapons trained on the most likely enemy
position during movement. The loaders 240, and TCs .50 cal are normally used to
secure the flanks. This orientation will of course change during the movement, and
crews should have a plan for where and when the orientation will change. The use
of a well thought out NAVPLAN will help accomplish this. Recon by fire is used
on any suspected enemy location. This is normally done with the COAX.
Battlesight needs to be frequently changed based on the tactical situation. A
battlesight range of 500 for HEAT, and 200 meters for COAX is normal while
moving in the woods. Keep in mind the minimum arming distance of 35 meters for
HEAT ammunition. For overwatch of a bounding element the Divided Area(Tic Tac
Toe Board) method is often used. This happens when an overwatching force sets to
allow a bounding force to cross a danger area such as a clearing.

377
 ORADO FAR
EA COL T
R FA RIGH
FAR ER
CENT
LEFT
ER
CENT
T
ER RIGH
CENT ER
CENT
LEF T

NEAR
NEAR
RIGHT
NEAR ER
CENT
LEFT
INE
IL ITY L
VISIB
INTER
FAR FAR FAR
LEFT CENTER RIGHT

CENTER CENTER

LEFT CENTER RIGHT

EA
TEXAS NEAR NEAR NEAR
LEFT CENTER RIGHT

OVERWATCH FORCE
BOUNDING FORCE

OVERWATCH TECHNIQUE
- USED IN DEFILE DRILLS, OR DURING BOUNDING
OVERWATCH MOVEMENT THROUGH CLEARINGS BY THE
OVERWACHING FORCE
- EA CHANGES EACH TIME THE BOUNDING FORCE
CROSSES AN INTERVISIBILITY LINE AND OVERWATCH
FORCE ESTABLISHES NEW OVERWATCH POSITIONS
- SET A NEW TIC TAC TOE BOARD FOR EACH EA
- EA USUALLY 1000-2000M LONG AND AS WIDE AS THE
DEFILE
- BOUNDING FORCE WILL DISTRIBUTE IT’S FIRES USING
ANOTHER METHOD (USUALLY SECTOR OR CLOCK)

378
 APPENDIX 3. COMBAT IN MOUNTAINS
Tanks are not suited to operations in mountains, but may be employed there due to
military necessity. This is more common during peacekeeping type scenarios. The
Company may also be required to move through a mountainous area to get to
another location for normal operations. Mechanized forces are at a severe mobility
disadvantage in mountains, as they are normally restricted to the valleys, roads,
and low ground. They can hit and protect, but cannot fix or destroy. Typical enemy
tactics in the mountains is to secure the high ground, and allow the mechanized
forces to move into the valley. Once the column is boxed in the dismounts in the
rocks above can fire down into the column and destroy it in detail. Typical
movement in mountains is similar to a combination of urban movement techniques,
and defile drills. Helicopters will normally move forward of the tanks. Gunships
provide all round security, while Blackhawks move dismounts in a bounding
manner along the high ground to cover the movement of the tanks and mechanized
forces. Wheeled scouts patrol ahead of the main column to proof the route, scout
out side routes leading into the main route, and secure them if necessary. Weapons
considerations in the mountains are similar to those in urban environments. Tank
main guns are restricted in elevation, and must be used from a distance to have any
useful elevation. Bradleys, and Commanders M-2 machine guns are not limited by
elevation restrictions.

379
 ANNEX J --LIMITED VISIBILITY/NIGHT
OPERATIONS
The Company will conduct night operations as a matter of practice during tactical
operations. Due to limited visibility several of the standard operating procedures
used during daytime must be modified or supplemented. This Annex consists of
additional information pertaining to the various SOPs that the Company uses,
focusing on the special considerations necessary during night operations. It is
intended as a supplement to, and not a substitute for, the normal SOPs contained
elsewhere in this FSOP. This ANNEX is formatted more like a guideline than a set
standard operating procedure as most night operations will require specific details
prior to the execution of missions.
This annex will be divided into five sections:
-General Night Operations Techniques
-Night Attacks
-Night Defense
-Night Tactical Roadmarches
-Night Occupation of Tactical Assembly Areas

APPENDIX 1. GENERAL NIGHT OPERATIONS

TECHNIQUES
The basic tenets of night operations are simplicity, recon, rehearsal. Night
operations are generally more difficult to execute than the same operation done
during daylight. Because of this the basic tenets are of great importance in
preparing the company to execute missions successfully under limited visibility
conditions.

A Night movement techniques.

1) Ensure the plan is simple
2) Conduct a thorough daylight recon
3) Create a NavPlan to aid movement
a) Similar to sketch card
b) Shows route to be traveled
c) Shows critical points (turns, crossings, defiles)
d) Shows identifiable terrain and features
e) Shows distances between points
f) Shows significant up/down grades

380
 g) Shows significant turns/curves
h) Used to reduce dependency on map
I) Usually done during recon
j) Can be done based on detailed map recon
4) Rehearse the movement
5) Use odometer reading to cover distance
6) Orient on landmarks that wont disappear at night
7) Use main gun as stabilized compass needle
8) Post landmarks on map/NavPlan, along with odometer reading
9) Critical turns marked by advance party
10) Illumination round may be called at known grid to orient on.
11) Appoint a land nav guide to ride in loaders hatch of one of the lead
vehicles. This soldier must be good at night land nav, and have
participated in the recon. His only duty will be to navigate, and
ensure that there is a check of all navigational decisions.

381
 SAMPLE NAVPLAN
DIRT TRAIL INTO
WOODS TAA, MARKED
TAA PANTHER WITH WHITE
ENGINEER TAPE
AT TAA
ENTRANCER
DESTROYED TANK AT RP RP

800 M
STEEP HILL WITH CASTLE
TURN AT BOTTOM 1990 M EAST
OF RP
2.7
KM

CHURCH
RANGE 2700M
FROM CROSSROAD
ROAD TO
KIRCH GONS

AUTOBAHN 3.3 KM
SIGN MUNZENBERG
HAIRPIN TURN 2500 M FRON
INTERSECTION

BRIDGE OVER STREAM

STAND OF PINE TREES

4.8KM

LD
ROAD CRATERS
WOODS

EINHAUSEN TAA BATTLECAT

B. Rehearsals. Night operations require detailed effective rehearsals. These

should be conducted in daylight AND at night to ensure that all personnel are
familiar with what they will expect to see during the night execution of the
mission. Rehearsals should begin with a walk through/talk through, but should also
include a mounted execution phase where all movement and formations are
practiced, routes and positions checked, light and pyro signals are practiced and
night actions on contact are rehearsed. If it is impossible to do a run-through at
night it should be done during the day with vehicles buttoned up.

382
 C. Night Signaling: Night signaling will normally be by radio, but the
following methods may also be employed:
-Visual signals, lights, pyrotechnics, fire, smoke, tracers.
-Audible signals, air horns, sirens, whistles, weapons firing
-Event oriented plans requiring no communication

D. Night Operations PCI. After receiving the attack WARNO the company
will conduct a PCI on weapons, vehicle, and personnel. This is identical to the
standard day PCI with the following additions.

-Vehicles camouflaged to break up silhouette

(remember that most enemy night sights are passive)
-Flashlights filtered. Extra batteries on hand
-Load plan checked (very important for night ops)
-All light sources in turret turned off
-Drivers side vision blocks taped over
-Vehicle checked for light leaks (at night with PVS-7)
-Night pyro stowed
Night Attack/Tactical Roadmarch additional checks
-IR headlight covers installed
-Tail lights turned off at circuit breaker
-All blackout markers checked
-Night vision equipment checked, extra battery carried by operator
-TCs briefed on route and navigation, NAVPLAN sketches distributed
-Night markings prepared (cutout cans)
-Reflective tape put on battle board chevron and on vehicle side
-Chemlight put at top of battleboard chevron
Night Defense additional checks
-Vehicle positions marked for approach to rear
-Tarps put up 10 M in front of vehicles as thermal curtain (in TAA or
hide position)
-TRPs marked and thermalized
-Signal/pyro plan briefed and checked
-All soldiers have reconned and walked positions
-Patrol plan implemented

E. Noise and Light Discipline. Noise and light discipline are critical in the
security of the company at night. Leaders must enforce the standards
ruthlessly.
a) Speakers are not to be connected at night
b) Soldiers will minimize the amount of talking and moving of
equipment
c) Radio watch personnel will be alert in the turret with the CVC
helmet off, but close enough to hear radio traffic. (CVC worn

383
when tanks are running)
d) Lights in turrets will be turned to lowest possible setting
e) Periscopes will be taped over
f) Drivers hatches will be closed or covered to prevent light from
escaping
g) Only filtered light will be used
h) Leaders will conduct checks of the position to ensure that visible
light sources are minimized
i) Vehicles will be started at night periodically on a short count to
recharge batteries. Shutoff will also be by short count.

APPENDIX 2. NIGHT ATTACKS

Attacking at night requires a high degree of training. A well trained unit against a
poorly trained opponent may have an even greater advantage while attacking at
night, especially one that relies heavily on artillery. The company will conduct
night offensive operations when the following conditions exist
Enemy Fortification are strong
A large open area must be crossed
Enemy obstacles require deliberate breaching
Enemy defense outnumbers attacking force
Enemy has poor night vision equipment
Part of an exploitation to follow up a daylight success
As a spoiling attack to throw enemy offensive plan off balance
A difficult or limited objective that would result in excessive casualties if
attacked during daylight hours

A. Planning. The night attack is planned as a day operation with the following
differences:
• SIMPLICITY
• Launched early enough to be complete by first light
• Light Signals Tied to coordinated action
• Event oriented scheme of maneuver
• Adequate time is given for recon/ rehearsal
• More time planned for execution (slower, deliberate pace)
• IFF measures must be employed
• Extensive illum is planned
• Graphic control measures tied to terrain for easy identification
• A re-orientation plan is devised to reorient lost units (illum, rally points)
• Reserve must be held to meet developing situation

384
• Reserve cannot be prematurely committed or mixed with assault element.
• Route: Terrain defined routes are normally more safe than roads. The enemy
will normally have the best approaches (roads) covered by the most effective
surveillance, as well as weapons and obstacles.

B. Night Control Measures

• Objective: Identified at night by overhead or ground burst flares
• Assault Position: Marked by dismounted security force that occupies it prior to
the main body(part of forward recon).
• Rally Points: Marked by tall structures or identifiable terrain.
• TRPs: Marked by buildings, or identifiable terrain
• Check Points: Marked by luminous tape, cut out cans or easily identifiable
terrain such as crossroads
• Marked by identifiable terrain, i.e. crossing a road
• Direction of Attack, Route of March: Marked by cutout cans, luminous
markers

C. Recon. The single most important element in planning the night attack is
reconnaissance. The company may be tasked to launch a recon patrol by the
battalion HQ, if not the Commander will launch a patrol after coordinating with the
battalion S-3 and S-2. Recon patrols at company level will normally be made up of
dismounted infantry from the attached platoon, along with several engineers, and
possibly an experienced tank commander. Recon patrols will recon during daylight
hours if at all possible. It is preferable to get the patrol out early with a basic
mission, then FRAGO later, than use the daylight hours to plan and prepare. Night
patrols will be used when waiting for daylight is not possible, or when infiltration
and movement is better accomplished at night..
1. Recon patrol tasks may include the following
-Location of enemy positions
-Location and bypasses of obstacles
-Covert breaching of night obstacles
-Locate unoccupied sectors of the enemy sector, gaps between units
-Locate terrain that offers concealment
-Recon route of advance to the LD, Assault Position, Objective (clear
of enemy, obstacles)
-Mark routes of advance at critical points such as cross roads, turnoffs,
etc..
-Secure the attack or assault position
- Locate and report navigation aids, TRP

2. Leaders will also conduct reconnaissance but the intent will be to

become familiar with the terrain and landmarks that the company will have to cross
during the night attack. These will also be conducted during daylight hours if

385
possible, but will focus less on the enemy and more on night navigation and
movement. Leaders will create NAVPLANs during this recon, similar to a sector
sketch in concept. These will show the route, critical points, navigation aids that
can be seen at night, distances between points, and any other information that may
be helpful in moving the unit at night.

D. Rehearsal. The rehearsal for the night attack should focus on the following
things:
-Actions on the Objective
-Movement to the Objective
-Actions on Contact
-Obstacle breach
-Uncoiling from the TAA
-Consolidation and Reorganization
The rehearsal should begin with a walk-through/talk-through, progress to a
mounted run-through, then include a nighttime mounted run-through, or if this is
not possible, a buttoned up daylight run-through.

E. Night Movement. Night movement is conducted as is any movement during

daylight hours, but must be slower, more deliberate, and controlled. Intervals are
also reduced from those used during the day. Care must be taken that moving
elements don’t move out of range of the weakest night vision device in the
overwatch element, and that moving elements remain properly oriented. Compact,
flexible, and simple formations with considerable depth and narrow frontages are
normally used. This assists in control and decreases the chance of detection by the
enemy. Depth in the formation permits the quick widening of the formation
frontage, which normally must remain compact at night to retain control. If
illumination permits the “V” formation is usually the best for mutual support,
control, and rapid reaction. More commonly at night the limited visibility will
restrict the overwatch of lead elements, and the use of line formations. In this case
the wedge formation may be suitable, as well as simplifying navigation by having
only one platoon in the lead. The best navigator in each platoon should lead. As
portions of the Company formation platoons should move in staggered column,
keeping each other in sight. From the column formations platoons must be able to
transition to wedge, “V”, or line quickly to provide fires as necessary. Action left or
right, and moving from the column to line oriented formations oriented to the front
are especially important platoon night combat drills.

1. Navigation. Navigation aids are critical to the successful movement of a

unit at night. These aids may be natural or manmade, existing or
specially placed, and may include the following.
-Lights in cutout cans (pattern cut on friendly side) to show turns,
check points, turnoffs, etc
-Flares dropped at a known grid or on the objective (ground burst)
-Marking smoke on objective or heading reference
-Identifiable terrain: Hills, crossroads, towns, towers, rivers.

386
 -Tracers to delineate boundaries, the objective, targets
2. Movement.
a) Movement at night will be similar to daytime movement except
that it will be much slower to allow for precise navigation and
orientation.
b) Each vehicle commander will move with the aid of a NavPlan. This
is simply a sketch of the route to be followed done in a similar
manner to a range card except that it is focused on movement
rather than defense. It should be prepared based an the leaders
recon and show critical points along the route, turns, road
crossings, up and down slopes, key recognition features, and other
navigational aids that will permit the TC to become familiar with
the route and rely less on the map.

F. Breaching
1. Night breaching is among the most difficult tasks that the company
will encounter. If possible the obstacles will be breached covertly, using the cover
of darkness to prevent detection of the breaching team until the breach is open. In
the event of a covert breach the support force may withhold fires to keep from
alerting the enemy. Aside from this night breaching will be conducted similar to
daylight breaching.
The markings for a night breach are as follows: Same as daytime breach, with
chemlights mounted on the VS-17 panels and picket poles, initially on the left side
only, then on both sides of the lane as time permits. There will be different colored
lights on the last pole or VS-17 panel to designate the end of the lane.

- SEE BELOW -

387
 NIGHT BREACH LANE MARKING

LAST POLE SPECIALLY MARKED

TO SHOW END OF LANE

PICKET POLES AS “LEFT

HANDRAIL” THROUGH LANE GREEN FLARE FIRED AS LANE
MARKED WITH CHEMLIGHTS IS COMPLETED

VS-17 PANEL AT LEFT

SIDE OF ENTRANCE
(WITH CHEMLIGHTS)
INITIAL
(HASTY)

FAR LIMIT OF LANE

SHOWN BY DIFFERENT PICKET POLES
COLORED CHEMLIGHTS WITH CHEMLIGHTS
ON VS-17 PANEL

VS-17 PANELS
MARKED WITH
CHEMLIGHTS

IMPROVED
(STANDARD)

388
 G. Night Assaults. The night assault will be conducted similar to daylight
assaults with the following exceptions:
1) Infantry will normally not dismount during mounted assaults until
after passing the enemy FPF to increase their survivability.
2) To avoid interference, Tanks will lead the assault and continue through
the objective, allowing the infantry to sweep through dismounted.
3) If the enemy position is heavily fortified a dismounted infiltration may
be launched with the company infantry slice to open a single breach of
the outlying obstacles into the objective.
4) Fire Control and Distribution is extremely important during night
assaults. IFF is very difficult, and the risk of fratricide is high. The
Commander and Platoon Leaders will use specific control and
distribution techniques during the assault, especially for the Support
By Fire force.(see ANNEX A, APPENDIX 10 - Direct Fire Planning).

H. Infiltration. The Company may move forces into position by an infiltration.

1. The purpose of an infiltration is to get past the first line of enemy
defenses, or to a point where he does not expect us to come. The goal
is not to fight our way to the desired location, it is to arrive unexpected
or unnoticed. An infiltration is difficult to achieve with armored
vehicles, but often the potential benefits outweigh the risks. By
infiltrating the company fights the terrain instead of the enemy.
2. Usually the company will infiltrate platoons along separate routes,
orienting on a common objective in enemy territory.
3. Platoons will move to hide positions until the order to move out is
given (based on the tactical situation or plan).
4. Infiltration will normally be done along routes of marginal
trafficability that preclude the rapid movement of large numbers of
vehicles.
5. The infiltration must be preceded by a reconnaissance of the route and
hide position prior to SP, during daylight hours if possible. The recon
party may remain in enemy territory to be picked up by the infiltrating
element as it moves forward, or may return to remount the vehicles
and act as guides during the movement.
6. An infiltration will normally not include any CSS assets.
7. For crossing open areas smoke will be used. Artillery may be used to
cover the sound of moving vehicles.
8. If an infiltration is discovered the unit in contact will have to fight its
way out of contact, transition to hasty defense, or return to the LD.
Because of this any planned actions on the objective should take into
consideration that only a portion of the forces may arrive. Platoons
should be prepared to assume the mission of other platoons if
necessary.

389
 APPENDIX 3. NIGHT DEFENSE
The night defense is always planned hand in hand with any daylight
defense because the enemy may attempt to attack us at night for many of the same
reasons that we would conduct a night attack. This mission is similar in some ways
to counter-recon. Because of the difficulty in maneuvering at night, movement will
be limited as much as possible.

A. Night Command and Control: The control of the nigh defense is simplified
by using numerous techniques. The main technique that will be used is event
driven plans, where subordinates react quickly and in pre-determined ways to
events on the battlefield. This will minimize radio traffic, and reduce time
consuming decision cycles by requesting permission to act. Night control measures
are also similar, to but not identical to, daylight control measures:
-Phase Lines marked by identifiable terrain features such as roads, hill
crests, rivers.
-Boundaries marked by roads, trails, tree lines, ridges, filtered lights
oriented to friendly side like a range fan marker.
-Contact Points placed at easy to find locations such as crossroads,
buildings. Contact points will be marked with a streamer of white
engineer tape.
-OPs marked on sketch cards, and to the rear with colored flashlights for
IFF.
-Routes to BPs will be marked with strips of engineer tape, chemlights or
light cans. The markings will be visible only to approaching troops.
- Battle Positions will be marked with shielded chemlights at the sides of
the entrance, and a shrouded chemlight in the forward center of the
position on an engineer picket that will mark the proper position of the tank in
a hull down position.
-TRPs will be marked and thermalized during daylight on identifiable
terrain or objects. A large coffee can filled with sand and mogas is typically
suitable.

B. Night signaling: Signal at night is limited to light type signals the primary
means of communication is by radio. Specific events can be signaled with a variety
of pre-arranged visible signals to signify events that have happened or need to
happen; these signals may include:
-Color coded pyro(star clusters, parachute flares)
-Tracer fire to designate targets, Fire distribution
-Series of flashes from filtered flashlights
-Smoke /WP

C. Night occupation of a battle position. Night occupations of a BP are

390
undesirable, but must often be done based on the tactical situation. It is
accomplished similar to a daylight occupation. A recon team checks the position for
the following:(preferably during the day):
-Areas lacking intervisibility
-Areas that will be difficult to observe at night
-Locates and marks OPs
-Locates and marks positions for each vehicle
-Marks routes to, from, and between positions
-Establishes easily identifiable contact points that can be found at night
-Establishes and marks night TRPs, EA boundaries, trigger lines
Once the position recon has been completed the recon effort shifts to an enemy
focus, counter recon, and security.

D. Night Fire Planning. Company fire planning is similar to daylight fire

planning with the following exceptions:
-Each obstacle is located on the Fire Control Plan, has a TRP assigned to
it, and is overwatched to prevent covert breaching.
-Indirect plan with FPF, and illum plan are shown.
-Limited visibility positions are shown(three options)
Move closer to TRPs/EA
Move EA/TRPs in closer
All remains same, mortar illum planned

E. Security of the company at night. The Company will secure itself at night
with mounted and dismounted OPs, patrols, noise and light discipline, and early
warning devices. (See ANNEX A, APPENDIX 4, TAB D - Security of the Company
Area)
1) OPs
a)Dismounted OPs: Same as daylight OPs
b)Mounted OPs
2) Patrols. Patrols are habitually used to secure the company. Sometimes
a recon patrol will be launched when the company is in static positions
or preparing for future action, but generally patrols will be local.. They
are executed in the fashion of a roving guard. Patrol members must be
briefed, and the rest of the company must be alerted to the routes of
the patrol. Patrols are also conducted in the morning as part of the
‘Lean-to’ portion of stand to. They will check the Company area for
enemy OPs, covertly emplaced obstacles, or other enemy activity in the
sector.
a) Patrol members must be given adequate time to prepare
b) Patrol must be briefed on patrol mission, route, and actions on
contact
c) Patrol plan will be disseminated to tank crew level. Platoon
leaders will ensure that all personnel will be alerted to the existence of
patrols.
d) Patrol must check in as it makes its rounds

391
 3)Noise and Light Discipline. See General Night Operating Techniques.

F. Rehearsal for the Night Defense. The rehearsal for the night defense will
normally be conducted similar to the rehearsal for the daylight defense. It should
be conducted at night after the daylight walk through/talk through and mounted
rehearsal, but may also be done during the day by practicing buttoned up. The
following tasks should be rehearsed:
-Movement from hide to BP
-Displacement to subsequent BP
-Engagements in the EA (check thermal TRPs)
-Overwatch of and closing of obstacles
-Counterattacks
-Emergency ammo resupply
-Evac of casualties

G. Fighting the Night Defense

1) The night defense for the company will be fought primarily with the
thermal sights. For those vehicle with inoperative night sights an illum plan will be
implemented. This may not be used depending on the enemy situation, as most
potential enemies rely mainly on passive sights for night fighting and would be
helped by our use of illumination.
2) When smoke, fog, maintenance problems or target obscuration
prevent the use of laser rangefinders crews will engage with battlesight techniques
using sector sketches as a guide. The M1A1 reticle can also be used for basic
rangefinding based on how much of the reticle a target fills

USE OF RETICLE IN RANGE ESTIMATION

TANK AT 1600 METERS TANK AT 600 METERS

3) During the night our defensive advantage exists only as long as we

hold our fire. Once firing begins our positions become known. Because
of this night engagements will normally be initiated by volley fire. This
will also increase the shock and confusion to the enemy and help
ensure that our fires will be effective.

392
 4)When engaging Soviet style units targeting priority must be given to
destroying searchlight equipped vehicles.
5) Smoke will often be used at night when fighting an enemy equipped
mainly with passive sights. This will increase the confusion and
difficulty for him, while having little noticeable impact on our
operations.

H. Disengagement
1) Normally tied to specific event (set # of vehicles crossing break line)
2) Always must be rehearsed, initially in daylight, then at night or
buttoned up to simulate
3) DO NOT become decisively engaged/overrun
4) Ensure plan is event oriented so that vehicles are not waiting on
permission to displace
5) Displacing vehicles must show pyro or signal that they are displacing
6) Use engineer tape or markings to mark route
7) Try to move on routes putting cover between you and advancing enemy
8) Use smoke to withdraw into. Driver must be very familiar with route
to subsequent BP.
9) Occupy new position from rear

393
 APPENDIX 4. NIGHT ROADMARCH
Because of the concealment provided, most major roadmarches will take
place at night. The main purpose of the mission is relocation, not fighting. Night
roadmarch skills are broken down into three basic categories: March Planning,
Conduct of the March, and Night Roadmarch Operating Techniques.

A. Night Roadmarch Planning and Preparation

1. Route selection: Should offer concealment, trafficability, and ease of
navigation at night
2. Night Roadmarch PCI: See PCI Checklist(Annex E), and Night PCI
checklist.(General Night Operations Techniques)
3. Night Roadmarch Route Recon: See Night Movement Techniques
(General Night Operations Techniques).
4. Quartering Party: Should move out and mark route as well as new
assembly area prior to dark. See Night Quartering Party (Night
Assembly Area Techniques).
5. Staging. Vehicles must be lined up and ready prior to moveout in
proper march sequence. Vehicles will display the proper light signal to show
readiness. Column should depart on time automatically without radio
traffic.
6. Infiltration. See Night Attacks

B. Conduct of the Night March

1. Unit stages moveout to uncoil easily
2. TCs give ‘I am ready” signal when vehicle is ready, and personnel and
sensitive items have been checked.
3. Lead vehicle moves out on time without radio transmission. RLS is in
effect unless otherwise specified.
4. Halts may be used on long marches for similar reasons as normal
daylight marches. NVG batteries should be checked/switched during
halts. Individuals will stay on vehicles as much as possible, and the
lead vehicle will move out at the prescribed time without radio
transmissions.
5. Unscheduled halts may be necessary due to traffic backup, obstacles,
mechanical problems, etc. Unit will go to herringbone, and vehicles
will maintain interval. Vehicle commander will ensure that personnel
remain mounted, as well as maintaining observation of vehicle to the
front because movement may resume without notice. As a warning the
commander may give the single word transmission “Moving” to alert
crews. If a vehicle fails to move the next vehicle behind will send a
man forward to alert the crew. If it still does not move it will be
rapidly bypassed to prevent a break in the column.
6. Drivers must periodically tighten night sight bolts to prevent the sight
from falling out during the march.

394
 7. If the column is ambushed radio listening silence will be broken. The
actions on contact are similar to those for a daylight roadmarch. If the
entire column is in contact smoke may be employed to cloud the area.

C. Night Roadmarch Operating Techniques.

1. Night Navigation (See General Night Techniques: Night Movement)
a) Burden rests with key leaders
b) Most important skill is map reading
c) Appoint land nav aid to ride in loaders hatch of one of lead tanks
d) Use a NAVPLAN
2. Vehicle ID
a) Battle Boards marked as follows in preparation for night
movement
Tanks will use reflective tape OR chemlight method.

• PLATOON CHEVRON HAS REFLECTIVE TAPE OR

• CHEMLIGHT IS PLACED ON TOP OF CHEVRON
• CHEMLIGHT OR REFLECTIVE TAPE IS PLACED UNDER
PROPER 20MM BOX FOR TANK BUMPER NUMBER
• #1 BALLISTIC SKIRT CHEVRON WOULD ALSO BE MARKED
WITH REFLECTIVE TAPE TO DESIGNATE PLATOON

22
NIGHT TIME MARKING FOR TANK B-12

22
NIGHT TIME BATTLE BOARD MARKINGS FOR TANK B-24

b) Front blackout markers will be a colored filter in the right hand

395
 blackout marker: Red=1st PLT, White (no filter)=2nd PLT, Blue=3rd
PLT, Green=4th PLT (slice/HQ).
c) Slice mech platoons will take the numbering sequence of the tank
platoon that they have replaced. Any further attachments will be
considered the 4th Platoon, and will use the 4th PLT marking
system.
d) When vehicles are lining up preparing to move, or during short
halts the following light signals will be used by the vehicle
commanders:

-Red Light=“I am not ready”

-Green Light=“I am ready” (blue light may also be used)
-Yellow Light=“I am not ready, mechanical problem”
-Waving Red Light=“STOP”
-Waving Green(or Blue) Light=‘Are you ready?’
The light will be turned off once movement begins

3. Night Roadmarch Command and Control

a) Commander will normally be in tank behind lead platoon
b) A night land navigation specialist will ride on the first or second
tank. Usually this individual will have participated in the daylight
reconnaissance. He will generally ride in the loaders hatch and
have no other responsibility than navigation.
c) The company will conduct the roadmarch on the company net,
generally with radios SET to radio listening silence. Vehicles will
move automatically at pre-designated times without radio traffic.
The exception is during unscheduled halts where the commander
or lead vehicle will announce “Moving” on the company net to
alert other crews, or “STOP” to halt the column. When in enemy
contact, radio listening silence is not observed.
d) Pyrotechnics or light signals may be used instead of radio in the
event of enemy contact, vehicle breakdown, unscheduled halt, or
obstacle.

4. Roadmarch Safety
a) Ground Guides will use filtered flashlights
b) Vehicle driver will stop when he loses sight of the ground guide
c) During halts all crew members stay mounted
d) All crew members and sensitive items are physically checked
before the “I am ready” signal is sent forward
e) Crew will not sleep in the turret while the gunner is scanning.
f) Proper mounting and dismounting procedures will be used. Always
alert the crew before mounting or dismounting.
g) Drivers must be very careful in maintaining their interval with the
vehicle to the front as there are no stop lights.

396
 APPENDIX 5. NIGHT OCCUPATION OF A TAA
A. Night Quartering Party. The quartering party is the key to success in the
night occupation of a TAA.
1. The Quartering party should move out during daylight hours if
possible, mark the route, and quarter the area.
2. If a night quartering must be done it will take about twice as long.
3. The quartering party composition is based on METT-T, but is not
different than either of the daylight heavy or light configurations.
4. The quartering party is responsible for setting up the internal layout of
the TAA and will generally use the clock method as a basis. Platoons
will receive portions of the perimeter, and the HQ section and trains
will be located roughly in the center.
5. The TAA should be set up based on which vehicles will be arriving
first (assigned the farthest sector from the entrance), or those needing
to leave first (closest to the entrance).
6. The Quartering party will mark BOTH individual positions and routes
to the position.
7. Positions will be marked as follows: Red White, and Blue (and Green
if necessary) chemlights will signify each of the platoons. If the
different colored chemlights are not available the following system will
be used with chemlights or cutout candle cans.

OR

1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH/HQ

B. Night Occupation of the TAA. The most critical point in the occupation of the
TAA is the actions at the RP. It is critical that the company vehicles move rapidly
off the route and into the TAA
1. The XO(or QP commander) will meet the company at the Battalion RP
and guide them into the TAA.
2. The QP commander will have determined prior to unit arrival if
vehicles will be ground guided during the occupation, or the guides
will mount up on lead platoon vehicles to speed up occupation. This is
the only time that guides will ride on the turrets.
3. At the entrance to the TAA PLT guides will meet incoming platoon
vehicles.
4. The lead TC of lead platoon will be prepared to signal the guide with
an appropriate light if the guide is not able to recognize the color of the
front left blackout marker. Use platoon color filters.

397
 5. Guides will ground guide or mount the lead vehicle if necessary, and
will move their element into the designated sector without stopping.
6. A single transmission over the company net of “STOP” will tell follow
on platoons to go to short halt/herringbone to prevent a traffic jam at
the entrance of the TAA.
7. A platoon guide will signal the next platoon forward when the entrance
is once again clear.
8. All crews will remain mounted during the occupation until shortcount
shutdown.
9. The only individuals permitted to be dismounted are the QP guides
who will have a light source on at all times.
10. Vehicles will shutdown by shortcount.

C. Mounted Night Occupation of a TAA: If the Company is returning to a

TAA that has been previously occupied it will normally conduct a mounted
occupation. This is much quicker than an occupation using ground guides, and is
usually safer as long as everyone remains mounted until the shortcount shutdown.
1. Security force returns to TAA prior to SP of Company main body.
Ensures TAA is still clear of enemy, checks for covertly emplaced
obstacles, and marks danger areas for incoming tanks. Security force
ensures that it is mounted and out of the way before the main body
arrives (usually in its previous parking position).
2. Company moves into TAA, normally in order of march that will
facilitate a rapid occupation.
3. Vehicles drive directly to their previous positions without dismounting
ground guides at TAA entrance.
4. All crewmen remain mounted until Company shortcount shutdown is
given (2 minutes after last tank has occupied it’s position and called
set).
5. Following shortcount shutdown crews are allowed to dismount and
conduct normal TAA activities.
6. Wheeled vehicles, or incoming vehicles unfamiliar with the TAA
layout will remain outside the TAA (not blocking route) until the
remainder of the Company has moved in and conducted shortcount
shutdown. They will then be led in by a ground guide who knows the
layout of the TAA, and where the vehicle is supposed to be positioned.
7. Following shortcount shutdown all movement will be done inside the
TAA by ground guides.

D. Actions in the TAA. Once the TAA is occupied the actions taken are almost
identical to those for daylight occupation, except that special emphasis must be
placed on noise and light discipline, and security(see General Night Operating
Techniques: Light and Noise Discipline, and Night Defense: Security of the
Company at Night).
1. All lights will be extinguished and removed from the vehicles and
positions as soon as the shortcount has been given.

398
 2. Tanks will erect thermal curtains to the most likely direction of enemy
observation by hanging vehicle tarps 10-15 meters away from the tank.
3. All night movement in the TAA will be by ground guide.
4. There will be a no-movement time implemented once the hot loop is
established to minimize movement in the TAA to the security patrol.
5. Vehicles will be started periodically throughout the night to recharge
batteries. This will be done by shortcount. Engines will be turned off
by shortcount as well

E. Departing the TAA at Night

1. Prior to departing the TAA TCs will walk the route they will follow
(with drivers if possible).
2. Vehicles should leave in reverse order than that in which they
occupied, with vehicles nearest the entrance/exit moving first.
3. The commander will determine whether vehicles will be ground
guided to the exit or the company will move out mounted. Ground
guides will only be used in very restrictive terrain where track is likely
to be thrown.
4. The Company will go to REDCON 1A 15 minutes prior to moveout,
then to REDCON 1 five minutes prior with a Company shortcount.
5. During a mounted moveout all soldiers will be mounted when the
company goes to REDCON 1A. There should be NO soldiers moving
on the ground.
6. If the company ground guides to the exit the ground guides will have
light sources.
7. Departure of the TAA occurs automatically at the specified time.

399
 ANNEX K --SIGNAL
See also ANNEX D - COMMAND AND CONTROL

APPENDIX 1. REPORTS
Note: Reports submitted on the Battalion net are covered in more detail in the
Duke TACSOP. Due to the complexity, limited applicability, and frequency of
modification and change, these reports are not included in the Battlecat TACSOP.
The reports and requests typically used by the Battlecats include:
SPOTREP
GREEN 2 (STATUS REPORT)
PERSONNEL BATTLE LOSS (RED 2)
VEHICLE BATTLE LOSS (YELLOW 2)
SUPPLY REQUESTS (YELLOW 3, 4, or 5)
AIR MEDEVAC REQUEST
CALL FOR FIRE
CAS REQUEST
OBSREP (OBSTACLE REPORT)
SHELLREP (ARTILLERY SHELLING REPORT)
NBC 1, 4, 6
STABOPS CONVOY REPORT
STABOPS ROADBLOCK REPORT
STABOPS PATROL REPORT

SPOT REPORT
1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT LDRs, PLT SGTs
2. SUBMITTED TO: CO COMMANDER
3. FREQUENCY: As Required.
4. FORMAT: utilize SALT+
Size of enemy unit
Activity of the enemy
Location of the enemy
Time
+ WHAT ACTIONS YOU ARE TAKING
+ WHAT ACTIONS YOU RECOMMEND

400
STATUS REPORT (GREEN 2)
1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT LDRs, PLT SGTs
2. SUBMITTED TO: CO, XO
3. FREQUENCY: Stand-To, 1800 HRS, as required.
4. FORMAT:
Line 1-Vehicles On Hand - UP = FMC, BENT = NMC, ZAPPED =
Destroyed
Line 2-Personnel On Hand - same as for vehicles
Line 3-Ammunition Status - avg. per vehicle
GREEN - more than 30 rounds Main Gun (75%)
AMBER - more than 20 rounds Main Gun (50%)
RED - more than 10 rounds Main Gun (25%)
BLACK - 10 or less rounds Main Gun (>25%)
Line 4-Fuel Status - avg. per vehicle
GREEN - more than 75% total fuel capacity
AMBER - more than 50% total fuel capacity
RED - more than 25% total fuel capacity
BLACK - less than 24% total fuel capacity
Line 5-Sensitive Items Status - TUBES UP = all items present
TUBES DOWN = items missing
(MUST report ALL missing items)
Sensitive Items
All Weapons
All Night Vision Devices
Maps and Overlays
ANCDs
PLGRs

PERSONNEL BATTLE LOSS or MEDEVAC REQUEST (RED 2)

1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT SGTs
2. SUBMITTED TO: 1SG/XO
3. FREQUENCY: As required.
4. FORMAT:
Line 1-Tank and Position - Bumper # and T = TC, G = GNR, D = DVR , L
= LDR
Line 2-Type of Casualty - KIA, MIA, or WIA (include Category for WIA)
by Battle Roster Number
Line 3-Time of Loss
Line 4-Current Location of Loss - Evacuated, or Grid

401
VEHICLE BATTLE LOSS (YELLOW 2)
1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT SGTs
2. SUBMITTED TO: 1SG/XO
3. FREQUENCY: As required
4. FORMAT:
Line 1-Bumper Number
Line 2-Loss Description- BENT=Damaged, ZAPPED=Destroyed,
STUCK=Stuck
Line 3-Grid Location
Line 4-Time of Loss

SUPPLY REQUEST {YELLOW 3, (4), (5)

use # of supply class for report
1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT SGTs
2. SUBMITTED TO: 1SG
3. FREQUENCY: As Required Daily, NLT 1300
4. FORMAT:
Routine or Emergency
Nomenclature Unit of Issue Number Requested
NOTE: To be followed up with a HARD copy.

AIR MEDEVAC
Air evacuation will be initiated when:
1. It would be detrimental to the casualty's medical condition to travel by road.
2. Transfer by ambulance would take to long due to the seriousness of the
illness/injury (Life, Limb, or Eyesight).
3. Information for a 9 line AIREVAC request is listed below:
Line 1 - Location of LZ
Line 2 - Radio Frequency
Line 3 - Unit requesting
Line 4 - Destination of patient(s)
Line 5 - Number of patients by precedence
Line 6 - Number of patients by type
Line 7 - Method of marking LZ
Line 8 - Security of LZ
Line 9 - Patient personal information: (Name, Rank, Unit, and injury)

402
CALL FOR FIRE
1. ALERT ‘BATTLE 19 this is Red one’
2. WARNING “Adjust fire” (Adjust fire, immediate suppression etc)
3. TGT LOCATION “Grid HG223456” (or shift from TRP)
4. DIRECTION “Direction 3200 mils” (from Observer to TGT)
5. TGT DESCRIPTION “25 BMPs moving through defile”
6. METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT (Specify ammo, fuse)”HE-PD”
7. FIRE CONTROL “At my command” (or Time on TGT, ASAP)
Adjustments will be made using standard techniques

CAS REQUEST
CAS will be called in by the following method (to the pilots directly, or BN ALO):
1. ID and get eyes on Target (must be high value target)
2. ID and alert friendlies in AO (100%), Friendlies mark with VS-17
3. Suppress enemy ADA in area with artillery, direct fire
4. Mark target (smoke, ground burst illum, orient off friendly psns)
5. Call in aircraft with standard request
a. Initial Point (IP)(easy to ID point 7-12 km out)
b. Heading (IP to TGT, in degrees)
c. Distance to target (in miles)
d. Grid of target
e. Target description
f. How Target is marked
g. Likely enemy ADA in area
6. Lift Artillery fires into area
7. Talk pilot onto target. Once he IDs target he takes over
8. Estimate BDA

OBSTACLE REPORT (OBSREP)

1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT LDRs, PLT SGTs
2. SUBMITTED TO: CO COMMANDER
3. FREQUENCY: As required.
4. FORMAT:
-Location - Left and right limits
-Type of Obstacle - be as specific as possible
-Enemy Presence - Observers? Overwatch Element? Possible locations?
-Bypass - Available/Location or,
-Breach Site - Location

403
ARTILLERY SHELLING REPORT (SHELLREP)
You this is me shell report follows:
Line A: Reporting unit
Line B: Omit
Line C: Azimuth to the weapon
Line D: Time of impact
Line F: Location of attack
Line G: Total #/type of rounds impacted
Line I: Caliber of weapon

NBC REPORT 1, 4, 6
1. SUBMITTED BY: PLT LDRs, PLT SGTs, TCs
2. SUBMITTED TO: CO COMMANDER
3. FREQUENCY: As required
4. FORMAT: IAW GTA 3-6-3

STABOPS CONVOY REPORT

1. PERSONNEL:
A. With weapons, their number and type.
B. Acts of violence such as rock throwing, aiming/tracking
of weapons at vehicles.
C. Hostile intent such as jeering, yelling, jumping onto
vehicles etc.
D. Acts that impede, harass, or halt convoy such as crowds,
roadblocks, demands for payment.
E. Thefts from convoy.
2. ROAD CONDITIONS:
A. Pot holes, craters, damaged or destroyed bridges and
culverts, felled trees, trenches, etc.
B. Choke points, bottle necks, potential ambush sites such
as heavily wooded or isolated areas. Note safe rest and
assembly points.
C. Minefields.

404
STABOPS ROADBLOCK REPORT

1. VEHICLES:
A. Number and type, origin and destination.
B. Vehicle markings, signs, color, license number.
C. Occupants- number, sex, age.
D. Cargo- type and quantity.
E. Passengers- dress, attitude and physical condition.
F. Passengers stated reason for travel.
G. Passengers sightings of weapons, bandits, or indigenous
forces.
H. Passengers armed and types of weapons.
I. Statements made by passengers.
2. PERSONNEL:
A. Indigenous forces traveling near or attempting to cross
on foot.
B. Civilian refugees on foot.

STABOPS PATROL REPORT

1. Armed civilians, weapons and supply caches.
2. Uniforms worn by personnel, identifying emblems or badges.
3. Anti-U.S. / U.N. demonstrations, graffiti, speeches, leaflets, signs etc.
4. Attitude of civilians.
5. Location and size of refugee camps.
6. Changes in civilian daily routine.
7. Complaints by civilians of robberies, coercion or intimidation.
8. Sightings of weapons, number and type.
9. Attacks by direct or indirect fire.
10. Location of minefields and boobytraps.
11. Possible war crimes.

405
 APPENDIX 2. FIXED CALLSIGNS
A. The following is a list of fixed RFCT and 2-67 callsigns
UNIT CALLSIGN UNIT CALLSIGN
1 AD IRON 3-5 CAV BLACK KNIGHT
1ST BDE READY
2ND BDE GATOR HHC HEADHUNTER
3D BDE BULLDOG A CO APACHE
4TH BDE EAGLE B CO BUSHMASTER
DIVARTY STEEL C CO COBRA
DIV ENG SAPPER D CO DESTROYER
DISCOM MULESKINNER
1/1 CAV BLACKHAWK 1ST PLT RED
141 SIGNAL LIGHTNING 2ND PLT WHITE
501 MP DAGGER 3D PLT BLUE
25 CHEM MERLIN 4-67 ARMOR BANDITS
5-3 ADA DRAGON HHC OUTLAWS
2-67 ARMOR DUKE A CO AXEMEN
HHC HAWKS B CO BULLDOG
A CO AGGRESSOR C CO CRUSADER
B CO BATTLECATS D CO DEATHRIDERS
C CO COUGARS 2-3 FA GUNNERS
D CO DAWGS HHB BLACK
1ST PLT RED A BTRY BLUE
2ND PLT WHITE B BTRY WHITE
3D PLT BLUE C BTRY RED
23 ENG RDY SAPPER SVC BTRY GREEN
HHC BLADE RUNNER COLT UNDER-TAKER
A CO GATORS FSE TF STANDARD
B CO BULLDOGS 1ST PLT ONE
C CO DETCORD 2ND PLT TWO
1st PLT BLACK 3rd PLT BLUE
2nd PLT GREEN A CO BLUE
3rd PLT RED B CO RED
501st MP LAWMEN C CO WHITE
501st FSB PILLARS A/ 5-3 ADA ARCHER

406
b. The following is a list of ALL RFCT and Divisional asset fixed suffixes:

POSITION SUFFIX POSITION SUFFIX

CDR 6 HQ CMDT 20
XO 5 CHAP 21
CSM 8 SURG/MED O 22
G/S-1 1 MAINT 23
G/S-2 2 BMO 23B
G/S-3 3 BMT 23T
G/S-4 4 BMS 23S
G/S-5 20 SPT PLT 46
FSO 19 SCOUT 50
BSO 10 MORTAR 60
MP 12 HHC CDR 66
CHEM 13 HHC XO 65
ENG 14 HHC 1SG 68
ADA 15 ALO FALCON
AVN 17 MSTR GNR MIKE GOLF
ADC-M 7M TOC MAIN
ADC-S 7S TAC TAC

c. The following is a list of ALL RFCT and Divisional asset fixed expanders:

POSITION EXPANDER POSITION EXPANDER

Driver D OIC O
Loader L NCOIC N
Gunner G RTO/PILOT A

407
 APPENDIX 3. BREVITY CODES

CODE MEANING
BATTER UP NEXT IN SUCCESSION OF CHAIN OF COMMAND
TAKE OVER. THE NEW COMMANDER
TAKES OVER COMPANY COMMAND NET.
NEXT IN SUCCESSION GOES TO BATTALION NET
AND INFORMS TOC OF SUCCESSION OF
COMMAND.
BATTLENET* SWITCH BACK TO B CO COMMAND NET
BOBCAT SWITCH BACK TO BN CMD FREQ.
TIGER 1* 1ST PLATOON NET IS NOW COMPANY NET
TIGER 2* 2ND PLATOON NET IS NOW COMPANY NET
TIGER 3* 3RD PLATOON NET IS NOW COMPANY NET
BENT BROKEN
BINGO SWITCH TO AJ (ANTI-JAM) FREQ. AT BN LEVEL
DUMP 5 MINUTES SILENCE
FLASH CLEAR THE NET FOR OTHER TRAFFIC
FLEX MOVE YOUR UNIT TO...
FIX SEND 6 DIGIT GRID
GET.... PUT SPECIFIED PERSON ON THE RADIO
GEIGER... RESULTS OF NBC TEST (M256). "SWEET"
OR "SOUR".
GUIDONS NET CALL (AT BN LEVEL, BATTLECAT ANSWERS
FIRST TO GUIDONS CALL. ORDER IN
COMPANY IS RED, WHITE, BLUE, GREEN,
ATTACHMENTS, XO, 1SG, MECHANICS,
MEDICS, ADA
LOWSKY MOVE TO TURRET DOWN
POKER SWITCH TO RETRANS
RACEHORSE EXECUTE TRAVELING OVERWATCH YOUR
MOVE IS COVERED
RAZORBLADE UNIT KILLED/OVERRUN
RED AIR ENEMY AIRCRAFT (GIVE LOCATION).
REDCON READINESS CONDITION
REDCON 1: READY TO MOVE NOW
REDCON 1A: REDCON 1, ENGINES SHUT DOWN

408
 REDCON 2: READY TO MOVE IN 15 MINUTES
REDCON 3: READY TO MOVE IN 30 MINUTES
REDCON 4: READY TO MOVE IN 1 HOUR
SET IN ASSIGNED POSITION/READY TO EXECUTE
SHOTGUN* MEET ME AT A PREDESIGNATED PUSH (30.30)
SIDECAR* EXECUTE BOUNDING OVERWATCH, MOVE IS
NOT COVERED
SITREP PROVIDE A CONCISE REPORT OF YOUR
ELEMENTS SITUATION, WITH SLANT
(M1 / M2 / INFANTRY SQUADS)
SLANT NUMBER OF OPERATIONAL VEHICLES PRESENT
THUNDER RUN* MOVE AS FAST AS POSSIBLE
STAND TO UNIT READY TO FIGHT
TOPHAT* MOVE TO HULL DOWN FIRING POSITIONS
TUBES UP SENSITIVE ITEMS ACCOUNTED FOR

*DENOTES A COMPANY CODEWORD. DO NOT USE ON TF NET OR

HIGHER.

CRITICAL SIGNALS:
The following critical signals need to be understood by all involved in their use.
Several of these events are usually denoted by a flare or smoke signal. Specifics
will be addressed in OPORDs
1) Challenge
2) Password
3) Attack is anticipated (Air, Ground, NBC)
4) Commence firing / Begin attack
5) Cease ALL firing
6) Request / Initiate supporting fires
7) Lift supporting fires
8) Break contact / Move to subsequent positions
9) Objective secure / Mission accomplished
10) Breach Open, Assault Force move.
11) Am being over-run / commit reserve
12) Friendly Forces recognition

409
 APPENDIX 4. FLAGS AND OTHER VISUAL
SIGNALS
a. Assembly Areas
1. Flags will be used to show which platoon is which during assembly area
activities. The guide that meets the Platoon at the Release Point, as well
as the lead vehicle in each platoon, will display the appropriate colored
flag. Red = 1st PLT, Yellow = 2nd PLT, Green = 3rd PLT.
2. During night occupations a similar system will be used. Guides will
meet vehicles at the RP and recognition signals will be a flash of the
appropriate light. Red = 1st PLT, Subdued White = 2nd PLT,
Blue = 3rd PLT. Positions will be marked as follows: Red White, and
Blue (and Green if necessary) chemlights will signify each of the
platoons. If the different colored chemlights are not available the
following system will be used with chemlights or cutout candle cans.

OR

1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH/HQ

3. When a vehicle needs a frequency stnchronization the signal for this will
be a waving yellow flag.
b. Tactical Movement
1. During tactical movement flags will be used to show different vehicle
status. Red = Firepower kill, Yellow = Mobility Kill (or mechanical
problem during tactical roadmarches), Green = Commo Kill. Be careful
of confusion with similar MEDEVAC markings. This signal may be
given by the TC to a passing tank to signal his status.
2. During night movement the following signals will be used:
-Red Light=“I am not ready”
-Green Light=“I am ready” (blue light may also be used)
-Yellow Light=“I am not ready, mechanical problem”
-Waving Red Light=“STOP”
-Waving Green(or Blue) Light=‘Are you ready?’
The light will be turned off once movement begins
3. Vehicles will be marked as follows for night operations:Front blackout
markers will be a colored filter in the right hand blackout marker:
Red=1st PLT, White (no filter)=2nd PLT, Blue=3rd PLT, Green=4th PLT
(slice/HQ).

- SEE BELOW -

410
 • PLATOON CHEVRON HAS REFLECTIVE TAPE OR
• CHEMLIGHT IS PLACED ON TOP OF CHEVRON
• CHEMLIGHT OR REFLECTIVE TAPE IS PLACED UNDER
PROPER 20MM BOX FOR TANK BUMPER NUMBER
• #1 BALLISTIC SKIRT CHEVRON WOULD ALSO BE MARKED
WITH REFLECTIVE TAPE TO DESIGNATE PLATOON

22
NIGHT TIME MARKING FOR TANK B-12

22
NIGHT TIME BATTLE BOARD MARKINGS FOR TANK B-24

c. Obstacles
1. Numerous signals will be used during the breaching of obstacles. These
are covered more specifically in ANNEX A, Appendix 3, Tab B (Obstacle
Breaching). VS-17 panels will show the entrance and exit of lanes, and
HEMs poles or picket poles will define the lane itself. There will often
be a guide posted at the entrance using flags to guide vehicles through
the lane.
2. Smoke grenades will often be used during the breaching process. Yellow
smoke will be seen when the breach is within 5 minutes of completion,
Green smoke signifies that the lane is open and set for the assault
element to bound.

411
d. MEDEVAC marking
Casualty on Board VS-17 Panel on turret/ Night Red Star Cluster
Litter Urgent RED Flag / Night Red chemlight -2 hrs
Priority/Litter YELLOW Flag / Night White chemlight 4 hrs
Walking Wounded GREEN Flag / Night Green chemlight 6 hrs
Routine not marked - treated at LOGPAC

e. Other Visual Signals: Specific events can be signaled with a variety of pre-
arranged visible signals to signify events that have happened or need to happen;
these signals may include:
-Color coded pyro(star clusters, parachute flares)
-Tracer fire to designate targets, Fire distribution
-Series of flashes from filtered flashlights
-Smoke /WP
The following signals are typical of those used during tactical operations. Once
established they must be known by all company team members:
1) Friendly Forces Recognition
2) This is my location (of forward element)
3) Move to this location
4) Commence firing / Begin attack
5) Cease ALL firing
6) Request / Initiate supporting fires
7) Lift / shift supporting fires
8) Break contact / Move to subsequent positions
9) Objective secure / Mission accomplished
10) Breach Open, Assault Force move
11) I am displacing / moving

Dismounted Infantry Signals

I. Red Flag: Enemy in sight/Route is Blocked
II. Yellow flag: Obstacle
III. All clear/breach here

412